Ricoh d129, d130 Service Manual PDF

D129/D130
SERVICE MANUAL
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
2012 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation
LEGEND
COMPANY
PRODUCT
CODE
LANIER
RICOH
SAVIN
D129-17
MP 4002
Aficio MP 4002
MP 4002
D129-57
MP 4002SP
Aficio MP 4002SP
MP 4002SP
D130-17
MP 5002
Aficio MP 5002
MP 5002
D130-57
MP 5002SP
Aficio MP 5002SP
MP 5002SP
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
DATE
01/2012
COMMENTS
Original Printing
D129/D130
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 COPIER ............................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR
PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................... 1-5
1.4 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................................... 1-6
1.4.2 PAPER PATH ................................................................................... 1-8
1.4.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... 1-9
2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 2-1

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ............................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ............................................... 2-3
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 2-3
2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ................................................................. 2-4
2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION .............................................................. 2-5
2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................... 2-5
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................ 2-7
Preliminary Procedures ........................................................................ 2-7
PCDU (Photoconductor and Development Unit) ................................ 2-10
Toner Bottle........................................................................................ 2-13
Paper Trays........................................................................................ 2-13
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer .................................................... 2-14
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays.......................................................... 2-14
Electrical Total Counter ...................................................................... 2-14
Exposure Glass Cleaner .................................................................... 2-15
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract .......................................... 2-15
Data Overwrite Security ..................................................................... 2-16
HDD Encryption.................................................................................. 2-17
SM
D129/D130
App 2 Me Setting (SP model only) ..................................................... 2-18

2.3.3 MOVING THE MACHINE ................................................................ 2-19
2.3.4 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE .................................................. 2-19
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION (D580)........................................... 2-20
2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-20
2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................... 2-20
2.5 2000-SHEET LCT INSTALLATION (D581) .............................................. 2-23
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-23
2.6 1200-SHEET LCT INSTALLATION (D631) .............................................. 2-26
2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-26
2.7 ARDF INSTALLATION (D630) ................................................................. 2-29
2.7.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-29
2.8 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (D632).............................................. 2-33
2.8.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-33
2.9 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (D634).................................................... 2-36
2.9.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-36
2.10 3000/2000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637) .................. 2-41
2.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................ 2-41
2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-42
Support Tray Installation .................................................................... 2-45
2.11 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (D570) ............................................... 2-46
2.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-46
2.12 PLATEN COVER (D593).................................................................... 2-52
2.13 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588)......................................................... 2-53
2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................ 2-53
2.14 SIDE TRAY (D635) ............................................................................ 2-57
2.14.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-57
2.15 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY (D633) ........................................................ 2-62
2.15.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-62
D129/D130
ii
SM
Rev. 04/23/2012
2.16 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION ....................................................... 2-64

2.17 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION ........................ 2-66
2.18 TRAY HEATER .................................................................................. 2-68
2.19 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER FEED UNIT) ............................ 2-70
2.19.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-70
For installing the tray heater in the D580 (Two-tray paper feed unit) . 2-71
For installing the tray heater in the D581 (LCT) ................................. 2-73
2.20 HDD INSTALLATION (D640-11) ........................................................ 2-76
2.20.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-76
After Installing the HDD ...................................................................... 2-78
2.21 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B829) .............................................. 2-79
2.21.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-79
User Tool Setting ............................................................................... 2-81
Check All Connections ....................................................................... 2-82
2.22 BROWSER UNIT TYPE I ................................................................... 2-83
2.22.2 UPDATE PROCEDURE ............................................................. 2-85
2.23 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE C3352 (D593) ............................. 2-87
2.23.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-87
2.34 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE A (D629-31) (REMOTE FAX) ........ 2-94
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................... 3-1

3.1 PM TABLES ............................................................................................... 3-1
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS .............................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 USED TONER .................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ...................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ............................................................................. 4-2
4.2.2 LUBRICANTS ................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................ 4-3
4.3.1 FRONT DOOR, UPPER AND LOWER INNER COVER ................... 4-3
SM
iii
D129/D130
Rev. 09/11/2012
Upper Inner Cover ................................................................................ 4-3

Lower Inner Cover ................................................................................ 4-3
4.3.2 LEFT COVER ................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.3 REAR COVER .................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.4 RIGHT REAR COVER ...................................................................... 4-5
4.3.5 FRONT RIGHT COVER.................................................................... 4-6
4.3.6 OPERATION PANEL & LCD ............................................................ 4-6
4.3.7 PAPER EXIT COVER ..................................................................... 4-10
4.3.8 INNER TRAY .................................................................................. 4-11
4.4 SCANNER ............................................................................................... 4-12
4.4.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ....................................................................... 4-12
4.4.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS AND OPERATION PANEL ......... 4-12
Operation panel .................................................................................. 4-12
Scanner left cover .............................................................................. 4-12
Scanner right cover ............................................................................ 4-13
Scanner front cover ............................................................................ 4-13
Scanner rear cover ............................................................................. 4-13
4.4.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 4-14
When reassembling ........................................................................... 4-15
4.4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR .............................................................. 4-15
4.4.5 EXPOSURE LAMP ......................................................................... 4-17
Chromaticity rank adjustment ............................................................. 4-18
4.4.6 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR.................... 4-20
Scanner HP Sensor ........................................................................... 4-20
Platen Cover Sensor .......................................................................... 4-21
4.4.7 SCANNER MOTOR ........................................................................ 4-22
4.4.8 SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD .............................................. 4-24
4.4.9 FRONT SCANNER WIRE............................................................... 4-24
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire............................................... 4-26
4.4.10 REAR SCANNER WIRE ............................................................. 4-29
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire ............................................... 4-30
4.5 LASER UNIT ............................................................................................ 4-31
4.5.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS ..................................................... 4-31
4.5.2 LASER UNIT ................................................................................... 4-31
4.5.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................ 4-33
4.5.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR .................................... 4-33
4.5.5 LD UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-34
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment ............................................................ 4-34
D129/D130
iv
SM
4.6 PCDU ....................................................................................................... 4-37

4.6.1 PCDU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT) ........ 4-37
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-37
4.6.2 DRUM ............................................................................................. 4-38
Re-installation .................................................................................... 4-39
4.6.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS.......................................................................... 4-40
Pick-off Pawl Position Adjustment ...................................................... 4-40
4.6.4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER .............................. 4-41
4.6.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE ............................................................. 4-42
Re-installation .................................................................................... 4-42
4.6.6 ID SENSOR .................................................................................... 4-43
4.7 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................... 4-44
4.7.1 DEVELOPMENT FILTER ............................................................... 4-44
4.7.2 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER ............................................................. 4-44
Cleaning Procedure............................................................................ 4-45
4.7.3 DEVELOPER .................................................................................. 4-46
4.7.4 TD SENSOR ................................................................................... 4-49
4.8 TRANSFER.............................................................................................. 4-50
4.8.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ................................................................. 4-50
4.8.2 TRANSFER BELT........................................................................... 4-51
4.8.3 TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR ...................................................... 4-53
4.8.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE/TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR
4-53
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade ............................................................. 4-53
Toner Overflow Sensor ...................................................................... 4-54
4.9 PAPER FEED .......................................................................................... 4-55
4.9.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ........................................................................ 4-55
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................... 4-55
4.9.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS............................ 4-56
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................... 4-56
4.9.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR........................................................................ 4-57
4.9.4 RELAY, TRAY LIFT, PAPER END AND PAPER FEED SENSORS 4-58
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................... 4-58
4.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR ............................................................. 4-59
Reinstall the registration sensor ......................................................... 4-60
4.10 FUSING.............................................................................................. 4-61
4.10.1 FUSING UNIT ............................................................................. 4-61
4.10.2 WEB ROLLER UNIT ................................................................... 4-62
SM
D129/D130
4.10.3 BRAKE PAD ............................................................................... 4-62

4.10.4 WEB HOLDER ROLLER AND WEB ROLLERS ......................... 4-63
Installing a new web holder roller ....................................................... 4-65
Installing new web rollers ................................................................... 4-65
4.10.5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER .............................. 4-66
4.10.6 THERMOSTATS ......................................................................... 4-67
4.10.7 THERMISTOR ............................................................................ 4-68
4.10.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS........................................................ 4-69
4.10.9 FUSING LAMPS ......................................................................... 4-70
4.10.10 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER .............................. 4-71
4.11 PAPER EXIT ...................................................................................... 4-72
4.11.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT ..................................................................... 4-72
4.11.2 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, AND PAPER EXIT SENSORS
4-73
4.11.3 JUNCTION JAM SENSOR ......................................................... 4-73
4.11.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR ................................................................ 4-74
4.12 DUPLEX ............................................................................................. 4-75
4.12.1 DUPLEX UNIT ............................................................................ 4-75
4.12.2 RIGHT DOOR COVER ............................................................... 4-77
4.12.3 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR.......................................................... 4-77
4.12.4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR ................................................. 4-78
4.12.5 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR ............................................................ 4-79
4.12.6 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR....................................................... 4-81
4.12.7 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR .................................................... 4-82
4.13 BY-PASS ............................................................................................ 4-84
4.13.1 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH
SENSOR .................................................................................................. 4-84
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor ............................... 4-86
4.13.2 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR .............................................. 4-87
4.13.3 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE
LIMITER ................................................................................................... 4-87
4.13.4 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH .......................................................... 4-88
4.14 DRIVE AREA ..................................................................................... 4-89
4.14.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH.............................................................. 4-89
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................... 4-89
4.14.2 DEVELOPMENT PADDLE MOTOR ........................................... 4-90
4.14.3 TRANSFER/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ...................................... 4-90
4.14.4 DRUM MOTOR ........................................................................... 4-91
D129/D130
vi
SM
4.14.5 FUSING MOTOR ........................................................................ 4-91

4.14.6 WEB MOTOR ............................................................................. 4-92
4.14.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR ............................................................... 4-92
4.14.8 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR ...................................... 4-93
4.14.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR........................................................... 4-93
4.14.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR ........................................................ 4-94
4.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .......................................................... 4-95
4.15.1 CONTROLLER UNIT .................................................................. 4-95
4.15.2 HDD UNIT................................................................................... 4-96
Before Replacing the HDD Unit .......................................................... 4-96
Replacement Procedure..................................................................... 4-96
After installing the new HDD unit ........................................................ 4-97
4.15.3 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................. 4-98
Before Replacing the Controller Board in the Model without HDD ..... 4-98
Replacement Procedure..................................................................... 4-98
When Installing the New Controller Board........................................ 4-100
4.15.4 AFTER INSTALLING THE CONTROLLER BOARD ................. 4-101
4.15.5 MOTHER BOARD .................................................................... 4-101
4.15.6 BCU .......................................................................................... 4-103
When installing the new BCU ........................................................... 4-104
4.15.7 IPU ............................................................................................ 4-104
4.15.8 IOB ........................................................................................... 4-105
When installing a new IOB ............................................................... 4-105
4.15.9 PSU .......................................................................................... 4-105
4.15.10 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ....................................... 4-106
4.15.11 FUSING EXHAUST FAN ........................................................ 4-106
When installing the fusing exhaust fan ............................................. 4-106
4.15.12 CONTROLLER FAN ............................................................... 4-107
When installing the controller fan ..................................................... 4-107
4.15.13 NVRAM ON THE BCU BOARD .............................................. 4-108
Replacement procedure for the NVRAM on the BCU Board ............ 4-108
4.16 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ............................. 4-109
4.16.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. 4-109
4.16.2 PRINTING................................................................................. 4-109
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side ........................................ 4-109
Blank Margin .................................................................................... 4-111
Main Scan Magnification .................................................................. 4-112
Parallelogram Image Adjustment ..................................................... 4-112
SM
vii
D129/D130
4.16.3 SCANNING ............................................................................... 4-114

Registration: Platen Mode ................................................................ 4-114
Magnification .................................................................................... 4-115
4.16.4 ADF .......................................................................................... 4-116
Registration ...................................................................................... 4-116
4.16.5 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ............................................ 4-117
5. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE .................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION ..................................... 5-1
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................ 5-2
Service Table Key ................................................................................ 5-2
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ..................................................... 5-3
5.2.1 SP TABLES ...................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 MAIN SP TABLES-1 .................................................................................. 5-4
5.3.1 SP1-XXX: FEED ............................................................................... 5-4
5.4 MAIN SP TABLES-2 ................................................................................ 5-13
5.4.1 SP2-XXX: DRUM ............................................................................ 5-13
5.5 MAIN SP TABLES-3 ................................................................................ 5-18
5.5.1 SP3-XXX: PROCESS ..................................................................... 5-18
5.6 MAIN SP TABLES-4 ................................................................................ 5-19
5.6.1 SP4-XXX: SCANNER ..................................................................... 5-19
5.7 MAIN SP TABLES-5 ................................................................................ 5-41
5.7.1 SP5-XXX: MODE ............................................................................ 5-41
5.8 MAIN SP TABLES-6 .............................................................................. 5-108
5.8.1 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS............................................................ 5-108
5.9 MAIN SP TABLES-7 .............................................................................. 5-117
5.9.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG................................................................... 5-117
5.10 MAIN SP TABLES-8 ........................................................................ 5-132
5.10.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG 2 ........................................................... 5-132
5.11 MAIN SP TABLES-9 ........................................................................ 5-183
5.11.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE ............................................................. 5-183
Copier............................................................................................... 5-183
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor .......................................................... 5-186
Table 2: Paper Size Switch .............................................................. 5-187
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ............................................... 5-188
APS Original Size Detection............................................................. 5-189
3000/2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) ........................... 5-190
D129/D130
viii
SM
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 5-193

5.11.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ......................................................... 5-194
Copier............................................................................................... 5-194
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 5-199
3000 /2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) .......................... 5-200
5.11.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLES................................................... 5-202
SP1-XXX (Service Mode) ................................................................. 5-202
5.11.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLES ................................................. 5-210
SP1-xxx (System and Others) .......................................................... 5-210
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ................................................. 5-211
5.12 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE .......................................................... 5-212
5.12.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .............................................................. 5-212
5.12.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE ........................................................... 5-213
Preparation....................................................................................... 5-213
Updating Procedure ......................................................................... 5-213
Error Messages ................................................................................ 5-215
Firmware Update Error ..................................................................... 5-215
Recovery after Power Loss .............................................................. 5-215
5.12.3 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS ........................... 5-216
Error Message Table ........................................................................ 5-216
5.13 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA ............................... 5-218
5.13.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824) ................................... 5-218
5.13.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825)............................. 5-219
5.14 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ............................................................. 5-221
5.14.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON ........................... 5-221
5.14.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST FLOW ............................................ 5-222
5.14.3 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ................................... 5-223
5.14.4 EXECUTING DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSIS ........................... 5-223
5.15 USING THE DEBUG LOG ............................................................... 5-224
5.15.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. 5-224
5.15.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ....... 5-224
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10......................................................... 5-226
Key to Acronyms .............................................................................. 5-227
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD .......................................... 5-228
Recording Errors Manually ............................................................... 5-228
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 6-1

6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 SUMMARY ....................................................................................... 6-1
SM
ix
D129/D130
6.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 6-2

SC Tables: SC1xx ................................................................................ 6-3
SC Tables: SC2xx ................................................................................ 6-6
SC Tables: SC3xx ................................................................................ 6-8
SC Tables: SC4xx .............................................................................. 6-11
SC Tables: SC5xx .............................................................................. 6-12
SC Tables: SC6xx .............................................................................. 6-21
SC Tables: SC7xx .............................................................................. 6-30
SC Tables: SC8xx .............................................................................. 6-42
SC Tables: SC9xx .............................................................................. 6-65
6.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................. 6-71
6.2.1 SENSORS ...................................................................................... 6-71
6.2.2 SWITCHES ..................................................................................... 6-75
6.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................. 6-76
6.4 FUSES ..................................................................................................... 6-77
D129/D130
SM
Read This First

Safety Notices
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury
1.
Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the
copier power cord is unplugged.
2.
The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3.
Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4.
If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while
the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven
components.
5.
If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period (the Start key
starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away from the mechanical and the
electrical components as the copier starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is
completed.
6.
The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases,
and aerosols.
Health Safety Conditions

1.
Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it
may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If
unsuccessful, get medical attention.
2.
This machine, which uses a high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High
ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a
well-ventilated room.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

1.
This machine and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative
who has completed the training course on those models.
2.
The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if
replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer
recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used
NVRAM must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
Handling Toner
Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid
spilling toner on clothing or the hands.
If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well
ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are
signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If there
are signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water.
Never use hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.
Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages,
cartridges, and bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges) out of the
reach of children.
Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that is
not exposed to direct sunlight.
Do not use the cleaner to suck spilled toner (including used toner). Sucked toner may
cause firing or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the cleaner. However,
it is possible to use the cleaner designed for dust explosion-proof purpose. If toner is
spilled over the floor, sweep up spilled toner slowly and clean remainder with wet cloth.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

1.
Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when
exposed to an open flame.
2.
Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic
photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3.
Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4.
When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than
100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to
chemical reactions and heat build-up.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based
optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a
location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a
qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer
engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or
service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics
Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
Conventions in this Manual

Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF
Short Edge Feed
LEF
Long Edge Feed
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH.
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
Pag e
Date
Ad d ed / Upd ated / New

None
Specifications
Product
Information
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
See "Appendices" for the following information:
General Specifications
Optional Equipment
SM
1-1
D129/D130
Machine Configuration
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

1.2.1 COPIER
Key: Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products
Item
Copier
D129/D130
Callout
Key
D129/D130
[1]
D129/D130
Platen Cover (See Note 1)
[2]
D593
ARDF (See Note 1)
[3]
D630
2000-sheet LCT
[4]
D581
1200-sheet LCT
[5]
D631
Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit
[6]
D580
1-Bin Tray
[7]
D632
1-2
Machine Code
SM
Callout
Key
Bridge Unit
[8]
D634
Internal Shift Tray
[9]
D633
Side Tray
[10]
D635
1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 2)
[11]
D588
[12]
D637
[13]
D636
-Punch Unit (See Note 3)
Key Counter Bracket
A674
HDD (for basic model only)
D640
Copy Data Security Unit
B829
Fax Option
D629
G3 Interface Unit
D629
SAF Memory
G578
Handset
D645
Fax Communication Unit
D629
Printer/Scanner Unit
D641
Printer Unit
D641
Scanner Scanner Upgrade Unit
D641
D641
2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (See

Note 2)
3000-Sheet Finisher (See Note 2)
Fax
Printer/
PostScript3 Unit
SM
1-3
Machine Code
Product
Information
Item
D570-00 (2/3-hole)
NA
D570-01 (2/4-hole)
EU
D570-02 (4-hole)
Scandinavia
D129/D130
Item
Callout
Key
Machine Code
IPDS Unit
D641
Gigabit Ethernet
G874
IEEE 1284
B679
IEEE 802.11a/g, g
D377
Bluetooth
D566
Memory Unit 512 MB
D594
File Format Converter
D377
Browser Unit
D640
VM Card
D640
Netware
D629
NOTE:
1.
The ARDF and platen cover cannot be installed together.
2.
The finisher requires the bridge unit and two-tray paper feed unit or 2000-sheet LCT. The
1000-sheet finisher and 2000/3000-sheet (Booklet) finisher cannot be installed together.
3.
The punch unit requires the 2000/3000-sheet (Booklet) finisher.
D129/D130
1-4
SM
1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH

PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
The D129/D130 series are successor models to the D091/D092 series. If you have experience
with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this
manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products
D129/D130
D091/D092
Controller Type
GW+ Controller
GW Controller
Operation Panel
Tilt Operation Panel Type
Stationary Operation Panel
Includes USB/SD slot (not all
Type
functions can be used in Basic

models)
Scanner Lamp
LED
Xenon
Safety Shut Down
Available
Not Available
Standard (SP model only)
Option
Function
PDF Direct
Included in Printer/Scanner.
App2Me
Included in Printer/Scanner,
Included in VM SD Card.
Printer SD Card.
Users who bought the VM card
can download App2Me from the
Web Site.
Data Overwrite
Standard
Option
Standard
Option
Security
HDD Encryption
SM
1-5
D129/D130
Product
Information
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
Overview
1.4 OVERVIEW
1.4.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
Exposure Glass
21
By-pass Feed Roller
2nd Mirror
22
By-pass Separation Roller
1st Mirror
23
Duplex/by-pass transport roller
Exposure Lamp
24
Upper Relay Belt
Original Length Sensors
25
Feed Roller
Scanner Motor
26
Separation Roller
D129/D130
1-6
SM
Lens
27
Pick-up Roller
SBU
28
Bottom Plate
Junction Gate 2
29
Development Unit
10
Duplex Inverter Gate
30
Charge Roller
11
Duplex Entrance Sensor
31
12
Duplex Inverter Roller
32
Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)
13
Hot Roller
33
Polygonal Mirror Motor
14
Pressure Roller
34
Laser Unit
15
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
35
Toner Bottle Holder
16
Duplex Transport Roller
36
Junction Gate 1
17
Transfer Belt
37
Exit Roller
18
OPC Drum
38
Paper Exit Sensor
19
Registration Roller
39
3rd Mirror
20
By-pass Pick-up Roller
40
Scanner HP Sensor
SM
1-7
Product
Information
Overview
Mirror
D129/D130
Overview
1.4.2 PAPER PATH
ARDF
Interchange Unit
Duplex Unit
By-pass Tray
Large Capacity Tray (LCT: 1200-sheet)
Paper Tray Unit
Two-Tray Finisher
Bridge Unit
1-Bin Tray
D129/D130
1-8
SM
Overview
Product
Information
1.4.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
Scanner Motor
10
Paper Feed Clutch 1
Fusing Motor
11
Feed Motor
Web Motor
12
By-pass Paper Feed Clutch
Transfer/Development Motor
13
Registration Motor
Drum Motor
14
Duplex/By-pass Motor
Development Paddle Motor
15
Transfer Belt Contact Motor
Tray Lift Motor 1
16
Duplex Inverter Motor
Tray Lift Motor 2
17
Paper Exit Motor
Paper Feed Clutch 2
SM
1-9
D129/D130
INSTALLATION
P a ge
Date
A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
83 ~ 93
04/20/2012
Added Browser Unit Type I
94 ~ 102
04/23/2012
Added Fax Connection Unit Type A (D629-31)
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the
power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
Install the machine in a safe place for keeping security.
Make sure that the operation instructions are kept at a customer's hand.
The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while
the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the
machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
Rating voltage for peripherals: Make sure to plug the cables into the correct
sockets.
SM
2-1
D129/D130
Installation
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Temperature Range:
10C to 32C (50F to 90F)
Humidity Range:
15% to 80% RH
Ambient Illumination:
Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)
Ventilation:
Room air should turn at least 30 m3/hr/person
Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10/6 oz/yd3)
1.
Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:

1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
2.
Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
3.
Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
4.
Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side should
be no more than 5 mm (0.2").
5.
Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
Front to back:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
D129/D130
2-2
SM
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Installation
Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
Front [A]: Over 75 cm (29.6")
Left [B]: 10 cm (4")
Rear [C]: 10 cm (4")
Right [D]: 55 cm (21.7")
The 75 cm (29.6") recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper
tray only. If the operator stands at the front of the main machine, more space is
required.
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make
sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
1.
Avoid multi-wiring.
Be sure to ground the machine.
Input voltage level:

North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12.5 A
Europe/Asia 220 V to 240V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: more than 7 A
2.
Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10% to 15%
3.
Never set anything on the power cord.
SM
2-3
D129/D130
Installation Flow Chart
2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Bridge Unit: Needed for the finishers.

Paper Tray Unit or LCT 2000-sheet: Needed for the LCT 1200-sheet and finishers.
D129/D130
2-4
SM
Main Machine Installation
2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Description
Q'ty
Decal Energy Save (-91, -61, -17, -57, -18, -58, -27, -67,
-29, -69, -19, -59, -28, -68)
Rating plate (-17, -18, -19, -21, -27, -28, -29, -57, -58, -59,
-61, -67, -69, -68)
Decal VERMONT (-91, -17, -57, -18, -58)
Model Name Decal (-91, -92, 17, -57)
Decal WEEE (-27, -67)
Main SW Decal
Decal Eco Label (-21, -61)
Decal Rohs (-21, -61)
Decal Rohs date(-21, -61)
10 Decal Certificates (-21, -61)
11 Decal LASERCLASS1 (-19, -59, -28, -68, -21, -61)
12 Decal Impoter (-19, -59)
13 Decal SDK (-57, -58, -67, -69, -59, -68, -61)
14 Decal Caution - Copy
15 Emblem Cover
16 Emblem
17 Decal Brand
18 Warranty (-21, -61)
SM
Installation
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
2-5
D129/D130
Description
Q'ty
19 Quick Reference Guide Safety (-27, -67)
20
21
Sheet Communication management Blank (-27, -67,

-19, -59)
Decal Paper Tray (-91, -17, -57, -18, -58, -27, -67, -29,
-69, -19, -59, -28, -68, -21, -61)
22 Decal Caution Original (-91, -17, -57, -18, -58)
23 Sheet EMC Traceability (-27, -67)
24 Sheet Name Tel (-21, -61)
25 Stamp (-91, -17, -57, -18, -58, -)
26 Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth
27 Cloth Holder
28 Ferrite Core
29
Sheet Exposure Glass (-91, -17, -18, -19, -21, -27, -28,
-29, -57, -58, -59, -61, -67, -69, -68)
30 Power Supply Cord
31
CD-ROM: Operation Instruction (-91, -92, -17, -18, -21, -27,

-28, -29, -57, -58, -67, -69, -68)
32 CD-ROM: Driver (-57, -58, -67, -69, -68)
33 CD-ROM: Operation Instruction/Driver (-19, -59, -21, -61)
Operation Instruction Read This First

34 (-91, -92, -17, -18, -19, -21, -27, -29, -57, -58, -59, -61, -67,
-69)
Operation Instruction User Guide
35 (-91, -92, -17, -18, -19, -21, -27, -29, -57, -58, -59, -61, -67,
-69)
36 Sheet EULA (-57, -58, -67, -68, -69, -19, -59, -21, -61)
37 Sheet Caution (-57, -58, -67, -68, -69, -68, -61)
D129/D130
2-6
SM
Description
Q'ty
CD-ROM: Operation Instruction - App 2 Me

(-57, -58, -67, -69, -59)
Quick Reference Guide - App 2 Me
39
(-57, -58, -69, -59)
40 Quick Reference Guide Start Up (-27, -67)
41 Sheet Notes Manual CD (-19, -59, -21, -61)
Installation
38
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Preliminary Procedures
Put the machine on the paper feed unit or the LCT first if you will install an optional paper feed
unit or the optional LCT at the same time. Then install the machine and other options.
Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the
future if you transport the machine to another location.
1.
Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine.
2.
Remove all the tapes and retainers in trays 1 and 2, and then take out the power cord from
tray 1 (if applicable).
SM
2-7
D129/D130
3.
Open the right door [A].
4.
Remove the two stoppers [A] from the fusing unit.
5.
Remove the scanner unit stay [A].
D129/D130
2-8
SM
Installation
6.
Open the front door [A], and then remove the jam location sheet [B].
7.
Keep the scanner unit stay [A] inside the front door [B].
8.
Reattach the jam location sheet.
9.
Close the front door.
SM
2-9
D129/D130
10. Attach the correct brand decal to the machine [A].

11. Attach the correct emblem and the cover to the front door [B] of the machine, if the emblem
is not attached.
If you want to change the emblem that has been already attached, remove the
panel with a small screwdriver, and then install the correct emblem.
12. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [C].
13. Pull out the feeler [A] for the output tray full detection mechanism.
PCDU (Photoconductor and Development Unit)
1.
Open the front door.
2.
Open the right door [1].
3.
Release the lock lever [2].
4.
Pull out the PCDU [3] and place it on a clean flat surface.
5.
Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.
D129/D130
2-10
SM
Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to
Installation
the magnetic development roller.
6.
Remove the opening cap [4], and then install it in the opening [5] of the PCDU.
7.
Open the PCDU [6] (
8.
Remove the entrance seal plate [7] (
9.
Remove the development roller unit [8], and set it on the paper.
SM
x 2).
x 2).
2-11
D129/D130
10. Pour the developer [9] into the development unit.
The developer lot number is embossed on the end of the developer package. Do
not discard the package until you have recorded the lot number. (
p.4-46
"Developer")
1) Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer evenly along the length of the development unit.
2) Rotate the drive gear [10] to work the developer into the unit.
3) Repeat until all the developer is in the development unit.
4) Continue to turn the drive gear until the developer is even with the top of the unit.
11. Put the opening cap [4] back in its original place.
12. Reassemble the PCDU.
13. Re-install the PCDU.
D129/D130
2-12
SM
Installation
Toner Bottle
1.
2.
Turn the toner bottle holder lever [1] counterclockwise, push down the lever [2], and then
pull out the toner bottle holder [3].
3.
Hold the toner bottle [5] horizontally, and shake it 5 or 6 times.
4.
Unscrew the bottle cap [4] and set the bottle [5] in the holder.
5.
Push the toner bottle holder into the main machine until it locks in place.
6.
Turn the toner bottle holder lever [1] clockwise to lock it.
7.
Close the front door.
Paper Trays
1.
Open the 1st paper tray, and then press down on the right side of the lock switch to unlock
the side fences.
2.
Press in on the sides of the fence release, and slide the side fences to the appropriate mark
for the paper size.
3.
Pinch the sides of the end fence and move it to the appropriate mark for the paper size,
then load the paper.
4.
Check the position of the stack.
Confirm that there is no gap between the stack and the side fences. If you see a gap,
adjust the position of the side fences.
5.
Press down the lock to lock the side fences.
6.
Repeat this procedure to load paper in the 2nd paper tray.
SM
2-13
D129/D130
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer

1.
Connect the main machine to the power outlet, switch on the main machine, and wait for
the fusing unit to warm up.
2.
Enter Copy SP Mode.
3.
Press SP Direct to highlight "SP Direct", enter 2801, and then press
4.
When the message prompts you to enter the lot number of the developer, enter the 7-digit
lot number, press
on the touch-panel. Press [Yes], and then press [Execute]. This
initializes the TD sensor. It takes 60 to 90 sec.
The lot number is printed on the end of the developer package. Recording the lot
number could help troubleshoot problems later. If the lot number is unavailable,
enter any seven-digit number.
5.
Press SP Direct to highlight "SP Direct" and enter 2805, press
, and then press
"Execute" on the touch-panel. This initializes the developer.

6.
Press "Exit" twice to return to the copy window.
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays

1.
Press User Tools/Counter
2.
On the touch panel, press "System Settings".
3.
Press the "Tray Paper Settings" tab.
4.
Press the button for the tray to change.
5.
Change the setting and press the [OK] button.
6.
Repeat for each tray installed.
7.
Press Exit twice to return to the main display
The 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th paper trays are provided with the paper size switches. The
detected paper size by the paper size switches has priority over the UP settings.
However, if you change the "Auto Detect" with the UP setting, you can select the paper
size.
8.
Check the copy quality and machine operation.
Electrical Total Counter

The electrical total counter no longer requires initialization. The new incrementing counter is set
to "0" at the factory.
D129/D130
2-14
SM
Installation
Exposure Glass Cleaner
1.
Attach the exposure glass cleaner holder [1] to the left side of the machine.
2.
Place the exposure glass cleaner [2] inside the holder.
The exposure glass cleaner is used to clean the ARDF exposure glass, the glass strip
to the left of the large exposure glass.
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service
contract.
Item
A3/11" x 17"
double
counting
SP No.
Function
Default
Specifies whether the counter is

SP5-104-001
doubled for A3/11" x 17" paper.
"No": Single
(SSP)
When you have to change this
counting
setting, contact your supervisor.

5812-002 programs the service
station fax number. The number is
Service Tel.
SP5-812-001
No. Setting
through 004
printed on the counter list when

the meter charge mode is
selected. This lets the user fax the
counter data to the service
station.
SM
2-15
D129/D130
Data Overwrite Security

Do the following procedure if a customer wants to use this function.
1.
Do SP5-878-1(Option Setup - Data Overwrite Security) and touch [EXECUTE].
2.
Go out of the SP mode, turn off the operation switch, then turn off the main power switch.
3.
Turn the machine power on.
4.
Press [User Tools] and select System Setting > Administrator Tools > Auto Erase Memory
Setting > On
5.
Exit from User Tools mode.
6.
Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
7.
Make a Sample Copy.
8.
Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [B] changes to [C] when job data is stored in the hard disk.
The icon goes back to its usual shape [B] after this function has completed a data
overwrite operation to the hard disk.
9.
Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode - Diagnostic Report).
10. Look at the report:
Under "[ROM No./Firmware Version]" check the number and version number listed for
"HDD Format Option".
Under "[Loading Program]" check the option number and version number listed for
"GW_zoffy".
These two version numbers should be identical.
11. Exit SP mode.
D129/D130
2-16
SM
HDD Encryption
1.
Do SP5-878-2 (Option Setup - Encryption Option) and touch [EXECUTE]
2.
Go out of the SP mode, turn off the operation switch, then turn off the main power switch.
3.
Turn the machine power on.
4.
Push [User Tools] and select System Setting > Administrator Tools > Machine Data
Encryption Setting.
5.
Press [Encrypt].
6.
Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not to be reset
To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All data].To carry over only the machine
setting data, select [File System Data Only]. To reset all of the data, select [Format All
Data].
7.
Press the [Start] Key.

The encryption key for backup data is printed.
SM
2-17
D129/D130
Installation
Do the following procedure if a customer wants to use this function.
App 2 Me Setting (SP model only)

SP models have VM and "App 2 Me" built in. Do the following procedure if a customer wants to
use "App 2 Me".
1.
Press "User Tools" key on the operation panel.
2.
Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice.
3.
Touch the "App 2 Me" line in the Startup Setting tab.
4.
Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on the LCD.
5.
Touch the "App 2 Me" line.
6.
Set the setting of "Auto Start" to "On".
7.
Touch the "Exit" button.
8.
Exit the "User Tools" settings.
Update Procedure for App 2 Me Provider

1.
Push the "User/Tools" key.
2.
If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, steps 2 and 3 are required.
Otherwise, skip to step 4.
3.
Push the "Login/Logout" key.
4.
Login with the administrator user name and password.
5.
Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
6.
Touch all the applications. Then, the status will be changed to "Stop".
7.
Turn off the machine. And then remove the VM Card.
8.
Prepare newer App 2 Me Provider zip file from Firmware Download Center. Unzip the zip
file. (The folder name is "337051920".) And then copy the App 2 Me Provider folder in the
specified path of VM card. The path is "SD_Card Drive sdkdsdkdist337051920" as
shown above.
D129/D130
2-18
SM
9.
Turn the SD card label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into Slot 2
(Lower Slot) until you hear a click.
10. Turn on the main power switch.

11. Press the "User Tools" key on the operation panel.
12. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice.
Installation
13. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on LCD.

14. Touch the "App2Me" line.
15. Set the setting of the "Auto Start" to "On".
16. Touch the "Exit" button.
17. Exit the "User Tools/Counter" settings.
2.3.3 MOVING THE MACHINE

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See
the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer
distance.
1.
Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.
2.3.4 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

1.
Do SP 4806-001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position. This prevents dust
from falling into the machine during transportation.
2.
Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a
sheet of paper and tape.
3.
SM
Do one of the following:
Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
2-19
D129/D130
Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580)
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION (D580)

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No.
Description
Q'ty
Screw (M4x10)
Screw with Spring Washer (M4x10)
Securing Bracket
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and
locked unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main
machine.
You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when
lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
D129/D130
2-20
SM
Remove all tape on the paper feed unit.
2.
Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding.
3.
Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine.
4.
Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [C].
Installation
1.
You need two or more persons to lift the copier.
Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
5.
Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine.
6.
Fasten the spring washer screw [A].
7.
Reinstall all trays.
SM
2-21
D129/D130
8.
Attach the securing brackets [B] (
x 1 each; M4x10).
9.
Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C]
on each tray of the paper feed unit.
The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of the main
machine.
10. Lock the caster stoppers for the front two casters under the paper feed unit.
11. Load paper into the paper feed unit.
12. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
13. Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality.
D129/D130
2-22
SM
2000-sheet LCT Installation (D581)
2.5 2000-SHEET LCT INSTALLATION (D581)

No.
Description
Installation
Q'ty
Screw (M4x10)
Screw with Spring washer (M4x10)
Securing bracket
The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and
locked, unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main
machine.
You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when
lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
1.
SM
Remove the strips of tape.
2-23
D129/D130
2.
Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine.
3.
Lift the copier and install it on the LCT [C].
You need two or more persons to lift the copier.
Hold the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine when you lift and move the
machine.
4.
Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine.
5.
Fasten the Spring Washer Screw [A].
6.
Reinstall all trays.
7.
Attach the securing brackets [B] (
D129/D130
x 1 each; M4x10).
2-24
SM
Installation
8.
Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C]
on the tray of the LCT.
The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of the main
machine.
9.
Lock the caster stoppers for the front two casters under the paper feed unit.
10. Load paper into the LCT.

12. Check the LCT operation and copy quality.
SM
2-25
D129/D130
2.6 1200-SHEET LCT INSTALLATION (D631)

2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No.
Description
Q'ty
Front Bracket
Rear Bracket
Stud Screw
Joint Pin
LCT
D129/D130
2-26
SM

Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
The Paper Tray Unit (D580) or LCT 2000-sheet (D581) must be installed before
Installation
installing this 1200-sheet LCT.
1.
Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.
2.
Remove the stand covers [A].
3.
Release the locks [B] of the front and rear caster stands.
4.
Remove the caster stands [C].
5.
Remove the paper path cover [A], connector cover [B] and six hole covers [C].
SM
2-27
D129/D130
6.
Insert the joint pins [A].
7.
Attach the front [B] and rear brackets [C]. (
8.
Pull out the front and rear rails [A], and then hang them on each bracket [B].
9.
Connect the LCT cable [C] to the main machine.
x2 each)
10. Slide the LCT [D] into the main machine.

11. Make sure that the front and rear sides of the LCT are closely attached to the main
machine.
D129/D130
2-28
SM
ARDF Installation (D630)
2.7 ARDF INSTALLATION (D630)

No.
Description
Installation
Q'ty
ARDF
Attention Decal Sheet Top Cover
Stamp
Knob Screw
Stud Screw
Platen Sheet
1.
SM
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
Remove the all tapes and shipping retainers.
2-29
D129/D130
2.
Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine.
3.
Mount the ARDF [A] by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate over the
stud screws.
4.
Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
5.
Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [C].
6.
Connect the I/F cable [D] to the machine.
D129/D130
2-30
SM
Installation
7.
Remove two screws [A] from the bottom of the ARDF.
8.
Remove all tapes on the ARDF.
9.
Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass.
10. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [B] on the exposure glass.
11. Close the ARDF.
12. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.
SM
2-31
D129/D130
13. Open the ARDF cover [A].

14. Open the feed-in guide plate [B] and feed-out guide plate [C].
15. Install the stamp [D] into the ARDF.
16. Close two guide plates [C] [B].
17. Close the ARDF cover [A].
18. Attach the decal [A] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language you want.
19. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF
operation.
20. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and
image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew referring to
the "Copy Adjustments" in the section of the "Replacements and Adjustments".
D129/D130
2-32
SM
1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632)
2.8 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (D632)

No.
SM
Description
Installation
Qty
1 Bin Tray Unit
End-fence
Tray Support Bar
Screws (M3 x 16)
Screws (M3 x 8)
Harness Cover
Tray
2-33
D129/D130
If the bridge unit (D634) or side tray (D635) has already been installed in the machine, remove it
before installing 1-bin tray unit (D632). This will make it easier for you to do the following
procedure.
1.
Remove all tapes.
2.
Open the right door of the machine.
3.
Remove the front right cover (
p.4-6).
4.
Remove the paper exit cover (
p.4-8).
Keep the screw removed in step 4 for step 5.
x 1,
x 1 [This screw was removed in step 4]).
5.
Install the 1 bin tray unit [A] (
6.
Attach the tray support bar [A] to the tray [B] as shown, and then attach the end-fence [C].
D129/D130
2-34
SM
Installation
7.
Install the tray [A] with the tray support bar in the machine (M3 x 16:
8.
Connect the harness to the connector of the 1-bin tray unit (
9.
Attach the harness cover [A] (
x 2).
x 1).
x 1; M3 x 8).
10. Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.
12. Check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
SM
2-35
D129/D130
Bridge Unit Installation (D634)
2.9 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (D634)

No.
Description
Qty
Bridge Unit
Frame Cover
Knob Screw
Long Knob Screw
Holder Bracket Cover
Guide
D129/D130
2-36
SM
If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before
installing the bridge unit (D634). This makes it easy to do the following procedure.
If you will install the finisher unit (D588, D636 or D637) on the machine, install it after
installing the bridge unit (D634).
1.
Remove all tapes.
2.
If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it into the machine.
3.
4.
Remove the upper inner tray [A].
5.
Remove the front right cover [B] (
x 1).
6.
Remove the connector cover [C] (
x 1).
SM
2-37
D129/D130
Installation
7.
Attach the two guides [A] to the cutouts [B] in the inner tray.
1) Place the lower hook of the guide in the cutout of the paper exit.
2) Attach the guide as shown until the two side hooks hold the paper exit.
3) Press the guide.
4) Press down the guide as shown.
D129/D130
2-38
SM
Installation
8.
Install the bridge unit [A] in the machine.
9.
Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [A] and knob screw [B].
10. Attach the frame cover [C].

Open the bridge unit cover [D] when installing the front right cover. Otherwise, you
cannot reinstall it.
12. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
SM
2-39
D129/D130
Holder bracket [E] is used in the installation procedure of the finisher (D588, D636
or D637). Do not install it at this time.
13. Pull out the extension tray [A] only if the 1000-sheet finisher (D588) will be installed on the
main machine.
15. Check the bridge unit operation.
D129/D130
2-40
SM
3000/2000-sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)
2.10 3000/2000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637)

No.
SM
Description
Installation
Q'ty
Rear joint bracket
Front joint bracket
Ground (earth) plate
Tapping screws - M4 x14
Tapping screws - M3 x 8
Tapping screws - M3 x 6
Upper output tray
Support Tray
Lower output tray (D637 only)
10
Cushion (with double-sided tape)
11
Small Ground (earth) plate
2-41
D129/D130
If this finisher is installed on this machine, the following options must be installed before
installing this finisher.
Bridge Unit (D634)
Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCIT (D581)
1.
Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher.
2.
Open the front door, and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the
finisher.
D129/D130
2-42
SM
Installation
3.
Pull out the jogger unit [A], and then remove all tapes and retainers.
4.
Attach the cushion [A] to the finisher.
Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover.
5.
Install the ground plate [B] on the finisher (
6.
Install the small ground plates [C] on the finisher(
SM
x 2; M3 x 6).
2-43
x 2; M3 x 6 each).
D129/D130
x 2; M4 x 14).
7.
Attach the rear joint bracket [A] (
8.
Attach the front joint bracket [B] and the holder bracket [C] (
x 2; M4 x 14).
Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket
is provided with the Bridge Unit (D634).
9.
Pull the lock lever [A] (
x 1).
10. Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until the
brackets [B] [C] go into their slots.
11. Push the lock lever [A], and then secure it (
x 1).
12. Close the front door of the finisher.

13. Connect the finisher connector [D] to the machine.
D129/D130
2-44
SM
Installation
14. Install the upper output tray [A] (
x 1; M3 x 8).
15. Only for D637, install the lower output tray [B].
17. Check the finisher operation.
Support Tray Installation
If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray [A], put the support tray [B]
on the tray as shown.
SM
Keep this tray in the manual pocket if this tray does not need to be installed.
2-45
D129/D130
Punch Unit Installation (D570)
2.11 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (D570)

The Punch Unit D570 can be installed in the 3000/2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher D636/D637.

No.
Description
Q'ty
Punch-out Waste Unit
Slide Drive Unit
Punch Waste Hopper
Wire harness: short-circuit
Screws (M3 x 6)
Side-to-Side Detection Unit
Punching Unit
D129/D130
2-46
SM
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the
2000/3000-sheet booklet finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from
Installation
the machine.
1.
Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2.
If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [A] and separate
the finisher from the copier.
3.
Remove the rear cover [B] (
x 2) and open the front door.
At the base of the back cover, be sure to disconnect the tabs that fasten the cover
to the frame.
4.
SM
Remove the guide plate [C] (
x 2).
2-47
D129/D130
x 2) from the punch unit.
5.
Remove the shipping retainer [A] (
6.
Move the punch unit [A] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages
correctly at the front and rear.
7.
Connect the cables [B] of the finisher to the connectors (CN601 and CN602) on the punch
unit board (
x 2,
x 1).
The cables [B] are coiled and attached to the PCB.
D129/D130
2-48
SM
Installation
8.
Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit (
Push in the slide drive unit at
9.
when you attach the screw
x 2,
x 1).
Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
10. Put the side-to-side detection unit [A] in the machine. Make sure that the two pins are
engaged correctly at the front.
11. Make sure that the side-to-side detection unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not,
make sure that the rails are aligned with their grooves.
12. Attach the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear (
x 2,
x 1,
x 1).
13. Pull the short connector out of the connector [B], then connect the cable of the finisher (
x 1).
SM
2-49
D129/D130
This is the 3-pin connector.
14. Connect "Wire harness: short-circuit" [A] to the CN110 connector.
15. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover.
16. Install the punch-waste transport unit [B] in the finisher.
17. Make sure that the punch-waste transport unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not,
make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
18. Remove the short connector from the connector [C].
D129/D130
2-50
SM
This is the 4-pin connector.
19. Connect the cable to connector [C] and attach the punch-waste transport unit (
x 1).
Installation
1,
x 1,
20. Set the hopper [A] in its holder.

21. Reassemble the finisher, and then install it on the main machine.
22. Connect the power cord to the outlet, and then turn the main power switch on.
23. Check the punch unit operation.
SM
2-51
D129/D130
Platen Cover (D593)
2.12 PLATEN COVER (D593)
1.
Install screws [1] (
2.
Position the platen cover bracket [2] on the heads of the stud screws, and slide the platen
x 2) on the top cover as shown.
cover [3] to the left.
D129/D130
2-52
SM
1000-sheet Finisher (D588)
2.13 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588)

No.
SM
Description
Q'ty
For this model
Grounding Plate
Yes
Rear Joint Bracket
Not used
Front Joint Bracket
Yes
Rear Joint Bracket
Yes
Copy Tray
Yes
Screw - M3 x 8
Yes
Screw - M4 x 13
Yes
Knob Screw - M3 x 8
Yes
Knob Screw - M4 x 10
Yes
10
Screw - M4 x 25
Not used
11
Staple Position Decal
Yes
2-53
Installation
D129/D130
If this finisher is installed, the Bridge Unit (D634) and Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581)
must be installed before installing this finisher.
1.
Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
D129/D130
Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in step 3.
2-54
SM
Installation
2.
Install the rear joint bracket [A] (
x 2; M4 x 13) and front joint bracket [B] ( x 2; M4 x 13).
Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket
is provided with the Bridge Unit (D634).
3.
SM
Install the grounding plate [A] on the finisher (
2-55
x 2; M3 x 8)
D129/D130
Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box.
4.
Open the front door [B]. Then pull the locking lever [C].
5.
Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever.
6.
Secure the locking lever (
7.
Install the copy tray [D] (
8.
Connect the finisher cable [E] to the main machine as shown above.
9.
Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown.
x 1; knob M3 x 8) and close the front door.

x 1; knob M4 x 10).
10. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
D129/D130
2-56
SM
Side Tray (D635)
2.14 SIDE TRAY (D635)

No.
Description
Qty
Side Tray Unit
Sub Output Tray
Main Output Tray
Screw
Knob Screw
Frame Cover
Holder Bracket Cover
Guide
SM
Installation
2-57
D129/D130
Side Tray (D635)
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the
installation procedure.
If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before
installing the side tray (D635). This makes it easier to do the following procedure.
1.
Remove all tapes.
2.
If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it into the machine.
3.
4.
Remove the inner tray [A].
5.
Remove the front right cover [B] (
x 1).
6.
Remove the connector cover [C] (
x 1).
D129/D130
2-58
SM
Installation
Side Tray (D635)
7.
Attach the two guides [A] to the cutouts [B] in the inner tray.
1) Place the lower hook of the guide in the cutout of the paper exit.
2) Attach the guide as shown until the two side hooks hold the paper exit.
3) Press the guide.
4) Press down the guide as shown.
SM
2-59
D129/D130
Side Tray (D635)
8.
Attach the main output tray [A] and sub output tray [B] to the side tray unit.
9.
Install the side tray unit [A] in the machine.
10. Open the side tray cover [A].

11. Secure the side tray unit with the knob screw [B].
12. Attach the frame cover [C].
D129/D130
2-60
SM
Side Tray (D635)
Open the side tray cover [A] when installing the front right cover. Otherwise, you
cannot reinstall it.
14. Install the holder bracket [D] (
x 1).

Installation
16. Check the side tray operation.
SM
2-61
D129/D130
Internal Shift Tray (D633)
2.15 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY (D633)

No.
Description
Qty
Shift Tray Unit
Paper Guide - Small
Connector Cover
1.
Remove all tapes.
2.
Remove the standard tray [A].
D129/D130
2-62
SM
Internal Shift Tray (D633)
Remove the inner cover [B] (
x 1).
4.
Install the small paper guides [A].
5.
Attach the connector cover [A] to the shift tray unit [B].
6.
Install the shift tray unit [B] in the machine.
7.
Push down the left edge [C] of the shift tray.
8.
Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
9.
Check the shift tray unit operation.
Installation
3.
SM
2-63
D129/D130
Key Counter Installation
2.16 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION

1.
Hold the key counter plate nuts [1] on the inside of the key counter bracket [2] and insert
the key counter holder [3].
2.
Secure the key counter holder to the bracket (
3.
Install the key counter cover [4] (
4.
Rear cover [5] (
D129/D130
x 2).
x 2).
x 5)
2-64
SM
Installation
Key Counter Installation
5.
Cut off the part [6] of the rear cover.
6.
Connect the harness to CN211 [7] on the IOB (
7.
Peel off the double-sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the
x 3).
scanner right cover [8].

8.
SM
Reassemble the machine.
2-65
D129/D130
Key Counter Interface Unit Installation
2.17 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION

1.
Rear cover [1] (
2.
Install the key counter interface board in the location [2] (
3.
Connect the harness to CN3 on the key counter interface board.
4.
Connect the other terminal of the harness to CN214 [3] on the IOB (
D129/D130
x 6)
2-66
x 4).
x 3).
SM
Installation
Key Counter Interface Unit Installation
5.
Cut off the part [4] of the rear cover.
6.
Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board
and clamp it with three clamps [5].
7.
SM
2-67
D129/D130
Tray Heater
2.18 TRAY HEATER

1.
Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.
2.
Connect the connector [1] of the heater to the connector [2] of the main machine.
3.
Install the heater [3] inside the machine (
4.
Remove the connector cover [4] (
D129/D130
x 1).
x 1).
2-68
SM
Installation
Tray Heater
5.
Release the heater relay connector [5] (
6.
Connect the heater relay connector to the connector [6] (front side) of the main frame (
x 1).
x
1).
7.
SM
2-69
D129/D130
Tray Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit)
2.19 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER FEED UNIT)

No.
Description
Q'ty
Tray heater
On-standby decal
Harness 2
Harness 1
Screw M4 x 10
Installation procedure
D129/D130
2-70
SM
1.
Pull out the two trays from the optional paper feed unit.
2.
Install the tray heater [1] in the optional paper feed unit (
3.
Remove the two securing brackets [2] (

optional paper feed unit (
SM
Installation
For installing the tray heater in the D580 (Two-tray paper feed unit)
x 1).
x 1 each), and then the rear cover [3] of the
x 2).
2-71
D129/D130
4.
Connect the harness [4] to the connector [5] of the tray heater.
5.
Route the harness [4] as shown and clamp it with four clamps (
6.
Connect the harness [4] to the connector [6] of the mainframe.
7.
Remove the connector cover [7] (
8.
Release the optional heater relay connector [8] (
9.
Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [9] (rear side) of the main
frame (
D129/D130
x 4).
x 1).
x 1).
x 1).
2-72
SM
10. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit.
For installing the tray heater in the D581 (LCT)

Remove the rear cover of the mainframe (
2.
Pull out the LCT drawer.
x 6).
If the right tray comes out with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
3.
Left tray [1] (
4.
Remove the right tray [2] while pressing down the stopper [3].
x 2)
When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully
push the tray in, making sure to keep the tray level.
SM
2-73
D129/D130
Installation
1.
5.
Install the tray heater [4] in the optional LCT (
6.
Remove the two securing brackets [5] (

optional LCT (
x 1).
x 1 each), and then the rear cover [6] of the
x 2).
7.
Connect the harness [7] to the connector [8] of the tray heater.
8.
Route the harness [7] as shown and clamp it with four clamps (
D129/D130
2-74
x 4).
SM
9.
Connect the harness [7] to the connector [9] of the mainframe.
Installation
10. Reassemble the rear cover of the optional LCT.
11. Remove the connector cover [10] (
x 1).
12. Release the optional heater relay connector [11] (
x 1).
13. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [12] (rear side) of the main
frame (
x 1).
14. Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT.
SM
2-75
D129/D130
HDD Installation (D640-11)
2.20 HDD INSTALLATION (D640-11)

No.
Description
Q'ty
HDD Unit
Connecting Board Unit
Screw - M3 x 6
Harness 1
Harness 2
D129/D130
2-76
SM
Installation
1.
Remove the controller board unit [A] (
2.
Connect the two harnesses to the HDD unit [A] (
3.
Install the connecting board unit [A] on the HDD unit [B] (
SM
x 2).
2-77
x 2).
x 2).
D129/D130
4.
Connect the two harnesses from the HDD unit to the connecting board [A] (
5.
Install the HDD unit [A] on the controller board unit (
6.
Reinstall the controller board unit in the machine.
x 2).
x 3).
After Installing the HDD

1.
Do SP5832-001 to format the hard disk.
2.
Do SP5853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk.
3.
Do SP5846-040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller board.
4.
Do SP5846-041 to let the user get access to the address book.
5.
Turn the main power switch off/on.
D129/D130
2-78
SM
Copy Data Security Unit (B829)
2.21 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B829)
No.
SM
Description
Qty
For this model
Bracket 1
Yes
ICIB-3
Yes
Flexible cable: Long
Not used
Flexible cable: Short
Not used
Harness with bands
Not used
Harness
Not used
Small Bracket
Not used
Saddle Clamp
Not used
Screws: M3x6
Yes
10
Screws: M3x4
Yes
11
Bracket 2
Not used
2-79
Installation
D129/D130
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
p.4-4)
1.
Rear cover (
2.
Controller unit (
p.4-95)
3.
Controller box (
p.4-101 "Mother Board")
4.
Attach bracket 1 [A] to the ICIB-3 [B] (
D129/D130
x 2; M3 x 4).
2-80
SM
Installation
5.
Connect the ICIB-3 with bracket 1 [A] to CN 505 on the IPU (
6.
x 2; M3 x 6).
User Tool Setting

1.
Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
2.
Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools > Data
Security for Copying > "On".
3.
Exit the User Tools.
4.
Check the operation.
The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the
ICIB-1 removed and the "Data Security for Copying" feature is set to "ON".
When you remove this option from the machine, first set the setting to "OFF" with
the user tool before removing this board. If you forget to do this, "Data Security for
Copying" feature cannot appear in the user tool settings. And then SC165 will
appear every time the machine is switched on, and the machine cannot be used.
SM
2-81
D129/D130
Check All Connections

Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.
1.
Plug in the power cord.
2.
Turn on the main switch.
3.
Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Features > List Test Print > Configuration Page
4.
All installed options are shown sin the "System Reference" column.
D129/D130
2-82
SM
Browser Unit Type I
Rev. 04/20/2012
2.22 BROWSER UNIT TYPE I

1.
Turn the main switch ON.
2.
Press the User Tools/Counter key.
3.
On the touch panel, press System Settings.
4.
Make sure that the Increase Scanner Memory by Disabling Browser setting in the
General Features tab is OFF.
5.
Turn the main switch OFF.
6.
Remove the control cover [A] (screws x 2).
7.
Insert the Browser Option SD card in the lower slot [A].
8.
9.
Touch the User Tools/Counter key.
SM
2-83
D129/D130
Installation
Use the following procedure to install the Browser Unit Type I.
Browser Unit Type I
Rev. 04/20/2012
10. On the touch panel, touch Extended Feature settings.
11. Touch Extended Feature settings in the Extended Feature Settings Menu.
12. Make sure that Extended JS application was automatically installed in the Startup
Settings tab.
13. Turn the main switch OFF/ON.
14. Move the application to the SD card that is installed to slot 1.
15. Note: See the Service Manual for details on merging SD Applications.
D129/D130
2-84
SM
Browser Unit Type I
Rev. 04/20/2012
Installation
16. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
17. Touch Edit home.
18. Touch Add Icon.
19. Touch Browse.
20. Touch a blank square to set the location for the browser icon.
21. Touch Exit to complete the addition of the FAX browser icon.
SM
2-85
D129/D130
Browser Unit Type I
Rev. 04/20/2012
2.22.2 DO THE FOLLOWING STEPS IF THE CUSTOMER IS USING

THE RICOH JAVASCRIPT CONNECTED TO A WEB
APPLICATION DEVELOPED BY OPERIUS/RIDP.
1.
2.
3.
On the touch panel, touch Browser Features.
4.
Touch JavaScript.
5.
Change the Extended JavaScript setting to Active.
D129/D130
2-86
SM
Browser Unit Type I
Rev. 04/20/2012
2.22.3 EXJS FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

Note:
z The firmware configuration of the Browser Unit Type I has been changed to enhance
browsing.
firmware is equivalent to the existing browser firmware. Therefore, it is possible to update

the EXJS firmware using the same procedure as that of SDK application firmware.
z Both the Browser firmware and EXJS firmware are automatically installed when the
Browser SD card is inserted in the upper slot.
Preparation:
1.
Download the latest EXJS firmware from the RISSN server.
2.
Extract the exe file (XXXX. exe), after which the following two files are generated:
XXXX_machine. exe/ XXXX_stock.exe.
Note: The file (XXXX_machine) is for updating the EXJS firmware in the field.
3.
Extract the file (XXXX_machine), after which the SDK folder is created.
4.
Copy the SDK folder to an SD card.
Note: XXXX = part number.
Main procedure:
1.
SM
Remove the control cover [A] (screws x 2).
2-87
D129/D130
Installation
z The Browser Unit Type I consists of the Browser firmware and EXJS firmware. The EXJS
Browser Unit Type I
Rev. 04/20/2012
2.
Insert the SD card included for firmware update into the lower slot [A].
3.
4.
After the Update screen is displayed, select the Browser.
5.
Touch Update (#).
6.
After the "Update Done" message appears on the screen, turn the main power switch OFF.
7.
Remove the SD card from the lower slot.
Do the following steps if you are updating the Extended JavaScript.

8.
9.

12. Change the status of Extended JS to Ending in the Startup Settings tab.
13. Turn the main switch OFF.
14. Insert the SD card containing the Extended JS firmware into the lower slot.
15. Turn the main switch ON.
D129/D130
2-88
SM
Browser Unit Type I
Rev. 04/20/2012
17. On the touch panel, push Extended Feature settings.
Installation
19. Touch the Install tab.
20. Touch SD card, then select Extended JS from the list of Extended Features.
21. Select Machine HDD as the Install to destination, then touch Next.
22. Check the Extended Features information on the Ready to Install screen, then press
OK.
SM
2-89
D129/D130
Browser Unit Type I
Rev. 04/20/2012
23. After The following extended feature has already been installed. Are you sure you want to
overwrite it? is displayed, press Yes.
24. Change the status of Extended JS to waiting in the Startup Settings tab.
25. Turn the main switch OFF.
26. Remove the SD card from slot 2 (lower slot).
27. Turn the main switch ON.
30. Touch Extended Feature settings in the Extended Feature settings Menu.
31. Make sure that the Extended JS has been updated to the latest version in the Startup
Settings tab.
2.22.4 EXJS FIRMWARE UN-INSTALL PROCEDURE

1.
2.
3.
Login with an administrator user name and password.
4.
On the touch panel, touch Extended Feature settings.
5.
Touch Extended Feature settings in the Extended Feature Settings Menu.
6.
Touch Extended Feature settings in the Extended Feature Settings Menu.
D129/D130
2-90
SM
Browser Unit Type I
Installation
Rev. 04/20/2012
7.
Touch Uninstall.
8.
Touch Browser, and then touch Yes after Are you sure you want to uninstall the
following extended feature? is displayed.
Note: Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait is then displayed on the touch
screen.
9.
After "Completed" is displayed, turn the main power switch OFF
Note: The Browser firmware is un-installed from the machine when the Browser SD card is
removed.
SM
2-91
D129/D130
Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593)
Rev. 04/20/2012
2.23 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE C3352 (D593)

No
Description
Q'ty
For This Model
Screw: M3 x 8
Yes
Screw: M3 x 14
Not used
Screw: M4 x 25
Not used
Tapping Screw: M3 x 10
Yes
Upper Tray
Yes
Lower Tray
Yes
Tray Bracket
Yes
D129/D130
2-92
SM
Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593)
Rev. 04/20/2012
Installation
1.
Attach the tray bracket [A] to the scanner right cover (
[B] x 2: M3x 8
For this model, use the screw holes marked "1" on the table bracket.
2.
Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket (
x 2: M3x8).
3.
Attach the upper tray [B] to the tray bracket (
x 1: M3x8).
4.
Connect the cable to the designated connector (the connector to use depends on the type
of device to be connected).
SM
2-93
D129/D130
Fax Connection Unit Type A (D629-31)
Rev. 04/23/2012
2.24 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE A (D629-31)

(REMOTE FAX)

This unit allows a machine without the FAX unit installed (Client-side Machine) to send and
receive faxes via a machine with the FAX unit installed (Remote Machine).
Requirements:
Both the Client-side Machine and Remote Machine must have this unit, the Printer unit, and
Scanner unit installed.
Up to six machines can be registered as the Client-side Machines.
Machines that have the FAX unit installed cannot be used as the Client-side Machine.
Only machine can be registered as the Remote Machine.
Firmware for this unit: aics software number: D6295750
Remote Fax transmissions are possible on a G3 line.
The remote fax function does not support User Code Authentication. Disable the User
Code Authentication on the Remote machine.
Use this function to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet sent.
Also, use this function to cancel a transmission from the Client-side Machine.
Before installing this option:
Upgrade the machine firmware to the following versions or newer.

Firmware
P/N
Suffix
Ver.
System/Copy
D1295751
2.00.3
Network Support
D1295754
11.77.2
Network DocBox
D1295757
2.01
Fax
D1295753
02.03.00
RemoteFax
D1295752
02.00.00
Websupport
D1295755
1.11
WebUapl
D1295756
1.04
JAVA (Standard)
D1295735
10.03.01
JAVA (Option)
D6405750
10.03.01
Scanner
D1295759
01.11
Printer
D1295763
1.06
PCL
D1295762
1.08
FCU
D6295570
02.00.00
D129/D130
2-94
SM
Rev. 04/23/2012
2.24.2 INSTALLING THE APPLICATION
Installation
On both the Remote Machine and the Client-side Machines:
1.
Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots (Screw x 1)
2.
Insert the SD card (Fax Connection Unit Type A) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B]
towards the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a
click.
3.
Plug in, and then turn on the machine.
4.
Move the Fax Connection Unit Type A application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to
the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.
5.
Turn off the machine.
6.
Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place (see SD Card
Appli Move in the manual for the main frame).
7.
Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine (x 1)
8.
Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see Check All Connections in the
controller option section of the manual for the main frame)
SM
2-95
D129/D130
Rev. 04/23/2012
2.24.3 REGISTERING THE REMOTE MACHINE
Only one machine can be registered as the Remote Machine.
On the Client-side Machine(s):

1.
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the operation panel
2.
Press [System Settings > Administrator Tools] to select.
3.
Press [Program/Delete Remote Machine] to select.
4.
Enter the IP address or host name of the Remote Machine.
5.
Press [Set] to set after connection test.
6.
Press [Exit] to exit from the set-up procedure.
2.24.4 REGISTERING THE CLIENT-SIDE MACHINE(S)
Up to six machines can be registered as the Client-side Machines.
On the Remote Machine:

1.
Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the operation panel
2.
Press [Administrator Tools] to select.
3.
Press [Program/Delete
4.
Enter the IP address or host name of the Client-side Machines.
5.
Press [Set] to set after connection test.
D129/D130
Remote Machine] to select.
2-96
SM
Rev. 04/23/2012
2.24.5 CONFIGURING THE REMOTE RECEPTION SETTINGS

Do the following procedure to enable the Client-side Machine(s) to receive faxes via the
Remote Machine. You can forward or route received documents per line or special sender or
By performing procedures #1-3 above, the Client-side Machines can send faxes via the
Remote Machine. The procedures shown below are necessary to enable the
Client-side Machines to receive faxes.
On the Remote Machine:

1) If you use "Remote Reception Setting per Line"
1.
Press [Facsimile Features] to select.
2.
Press [Remote Reception Setting per Line] in [Reception Settings] to select.
3.
Enter an IP address or a host name of the client-side machine to connect.
4.
Press [Set], and [Exit] to exit from the setting.
2) If you use "Remote Reception per Sender"
SM
1.
2.
Press [Program Special Sender] in [Reception Settings] to select.
3.
Select the Special Sender.
2-97
D129/D130
Installation
box.
Rev. 04/23/2012
4.
Press [Remote Reception Setting per Sender] to select.
5.
Press [On] and [Remote Machine] to select.
6.
7.
Press [OK] to exit from the setting.
D129/D130
2-98
SM
Rev. 04/23/2012
3) If you use "Remote Reception per Box"

2.
Press [Box Setting] in [General Settings] to select.
3.
Select the box.
Installation
1.
SM
2-99
D129/D130
Rev. 04/23/2012
4.
Press [Personal Box] to select.
5.
Enter a dial-in number.
6.
Press [Remote Machine] to select.
7.
8.
Press [OK] to exit from the set-up procedure.
D129/D130
2-100
SM
Rev. 04/23/2012
2.24.6 REMOTE FAX ICON ADDITION FOR REMOTE MACHINE

This procedure allows the remote fax icon to appear on the home screen of the operation panel.
SM
1.
Press [User Tools].
2.
Press [Edit Home].
3.
Press [Add Icon].
Installation
On both the Remote Machine and the Client-side Machines:
2-101
D129/D130
Rev. 04/23/2012
4.
Press [Remote Fax].
5.
Press a [Blank] to set a location for the remote fax icon.
6.
Press [Exit] to exit from the set-up procedure.
D129/D130
2-102
SM
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Pag e
Date

None
PM Tables
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 PM TABLES
PM Tables
Preventive
Maintenance
SM
3-1
D129/D130
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

P a ge
6 13
Date
09/11/2012
Updated Operation Panel including LCD
12/27/2012
NVRAM on the BCU board
108
1/4/2013
NVRAM on the BCU board
116
05/16/2012
108 ~ 117
Touch Screen Calibration
General Cautions
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
To avoid damage to the transfer belt, drum, or development unit when it is removed or
re-installed, never turn off power switch while electrical components are active.
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the
procedures in this section.
4.1.1 LASER UNIT

1.
Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. Doing so
2.
Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the factory.
3.
The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open the optical
housing unit.
4.
Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
5.
After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment.
4.1.2 USED TONER

Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner into an open
flame, for toner dust may ignite.
SM
4-1
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
Special Tools and Lubricants
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

4.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number
Description
Qty
A0069104
Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pc./set)
A2929500
Test Chart S5S (10 pc./set)
A2309003
Adjustment Cam Laser Unit
A2309004
Positioning Pin Laser Unit
B6455010
SD Card
G0219350
Loop Back Connector
4.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part Number
Description
Qty
A2579300
Grease Barrierta S552R
52039502
Silicone Grease G-501
D129/D130
4-2
SM
Exterior Covers
4.3 EXTERIOR COVERS

4.3.1 FRONT DOOR, UPPER AND LOWER INNER COVER
Left Cover (
p.4-4)
2.
Open and remove the front door [A] (pin x 2).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
Upper Inner Cover

1.
Open the front door [A].
2.
Upper inner cover [B] (
x 2)
Lower Inner Cover

1.
Remove the front door [A] (pin x 2)
2.
Shield glass cover [C]
3.
Shield glass [D] (
4.
Lower inner cover [E]
SM
x 2)
4-3
D129/D130
Exterior Covers
4.3.2 LEFT COVER
1.
Left cover [A] (
x 6)
4.3.3 REAR COVER
1.
Rear cover [A] (
D129/D130
x 6)
4-4
SM
Exterior Covers
4.3.4 RIGHT REAR COVER

Rear cover(
2.
3.
Scanner right cover [B] (
4.
Right top cover [C] (
5.
Right rear cover [D] (
SM
p.4-4)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
x 2)
x 1)
x 4)
4-5
D129/D130
Exterior Covers
Rev. 09/11/2012
4.3.5 FRONT RIGHT COVER
1.
2.
Front right cover [A] (
4.3.6
x 1)
OPERATION PANEL
1.
Front right cover ( p.4-6 "Front Right Cover")
2.
Position the operation panel [A] as shown above.
3.
Operation panel connector upper cover [B] ( x 1)
D129/D130
4-6
SM
Exterior Covers
Rev. 09/11/2012
4.
Position the operation panel [A] as shown above.
5.
Remove the operation panel connector lower cover [B].
6.
Remove the Scanner Left Cover ( Scanner Panels 4.4.2).
7.
Remove the Scanner Right Cover ( Scanner Panels 4.4.2).
8.
Remove the Scanner Front Cover ( Scanner Panels 4.4.2).
9.
Remove the Grounding Line [A].
[A]
10. Operation panel [A] ( x 4, x 3)
SM
4-7
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Exterior Covers
Rev. 09/11/2012
LCD
1. Remove the operation panel cover ( 4.3.6.
2. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 6).
[A]
3. Remove the rear cover [B] together with the hinge [C] ( x 7).
[B]
[C]
4. Remove the three cables [D].
[D]
D129/D130
4-8
SM
Exterior Covers
Rev. 09/11/2012
Important
-
There are two types of LCDs that use the same part number (D1291420), labeled Type
A and Type B below. They are completely interchangeable (0.
However, the harnesses are connected in slightly different locations on the board. Make
sure to connect the harnesses in the correct position, depending on the type of LCD.
Harness connectors and screws are circled in red for both types.
Part
Description
Type A
Type B
number
D1291420
LCD:TFT:
WVGA:
Replacement
and
Adjustment
LED:MV
5. Remove the LCDC [E] ( x 6, x 5).

6. Remove the bracket [F] ( x 9).
7. Remove the LCD.
Replacing TYPE A:
[E]
[F]
SM
4-9
D129/D130
Exterior Covers
Rev. 09/11/2012
Replacing TYPE B:
[E]
[F]
4.3.7 PAPER EXIT COVER

1.
Front right cover ( p.4-6)
2.
Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1)
D129/D130
4-10
SM
Exterior Covers
Rev. 09/11/2012
4.3.8 INNER TRAY

Left cover ( p.4-4)
2.
Upper inner cover ( p.4-3 "Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover")
3.
Paper exit cover ( p.4-8)
4.
Connector cover [A]
5.
Inner rear cover [A]
6.
Inner tray [A]
SM
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
4-11
D129/D130
Scanner
Rev. 09/11/2012
4.4 SCANNER
4.4.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
1.
Glass cover [A] ( x 2)
2.
ARDF exposure glass [B]
3.
Rear scale [C] ( x 3)
4.
Exposure glass with left scale [D]
Position the white marker [E] at the rear-left corner and the black or blue marker
at the front-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass.
4.4.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR PANELS AND OPERATION PANEL

Operation panel
1.
Remove the Operation Panel ( 4.3.6)
Scanner left cover
1.
Scanner left cover [A] ( x 3)
D129/D130
4-12
SM
Scanner
Rev. 09/11/2012
Scanner right cover
1.
Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2)
Scanner front cover

Operation panel ( p.4-7)
2.
Scanner front cover [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
Scanner rear cover
1.
SM
Scanner rear cover [A] ( x 1)
4-13
D129/D130
Scanner
4.4.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY

1.
Exposure glass (
2.
Scanner right cover (
3.
SBU cover [A] (
4.
Original size sensor bracket (
5.
Lens block assembly [A] (
p.4-10)
p.4-11 "Scanner Exterior Panels and Operation Panel")
x 4)
p.4-15 "Original Size Sensor")
x 4, Grand screw x 1,
x 2)
Do not remove the other screws on the lens block unit.
D129/D130
4-14
SM
Scanner
When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the lens block assembly:
SP4008 (Sub Scan Mag): (
"Scanning" in "Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning")
SP4010 (Sub Mag Reg.): (
SP4011 (Main Scan Reg): (
SP4688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs
made in the DF and Platen mode is different.
4.4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR

1.
Exposure glass with left scale (
p.4-10 "Exposure Glass")
2.
Scanner right cover (
3.
SBU cover (
4.
Remove the screw [A] on the sensor board bracket.
5.
Circuit chip [A] (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
p.4-14 "Lens Block Assembly")
SM
x 1,
x 1)
4-15
D129/D130
Scanner
6.
Original size sensor bracket [A] (
7.
Original size sensors [A] (hooks)
D129/D130
x 2)
4-16
SM
Scanner
4.4.5 EXPOSURE LAMP

Before replacing the scanner lamp, check and note the first three digits in the bar-code
on the new scanner lamp (
Chromaticity rank adjustment in this section).
1.
Operation panel (
p.4-7)
2.
Exposure glass (
p.4-10)
3.
Scanner front cover (
4.
Move the first scanner carriage [A] to the position shown above.
5.
Remove the two screws on the scanner lamp [A].
SM
4-17
Replacement
and
Adjustment
D129/D130
Scanner
6.
Disconnect the connector [A] on the scanner lamp.
7.
Pull out the scanner lamp [A].
Chromaticity rank adjustment

Each scanner lamp has a specific chromaticity rank. The chromaticity rank is indicated by the
bar-code on the new scanner lamp. After replacing the lamp, adjust the chromaticity rank to
correspond to the new scanner lamp.
1.
Check the first three digits [A] in the bar-code on the new scanner lamp before installing the
new lamp.
D129/D130
4-18
SM
Scanner
2.
After installing the new lamp, go to SP4-954-005 and enter the SP setting number referring
to the table below.
SM
139
166
12
140
167
11
141
168
10
142
169
15
143
170
14
144
171
13
145
172
18
146
173
17
147
174
16
148
12
204
149
11
205
150
10
206
151
15
207
152
14
208
153
13
209
154
18
210
155
17
211
156
16
212
157
213
12
158
214
11
159
215
10
160
216
15
4-19
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1st Three Digits SP Setting (SP4-954-005) 1st Three Digits SP Setting (SP4-954-005)
D129/D130
Scanner
1st Three Digits SP Setting (SP4-954-005) 1st Three Digits SP Setting (SP4-954-005)
161
217
14
162
218
13
163
219
18
164
220
17
165
221
16
4.4.6 SCANNER HP SENSOR/PLATEN COVER SENSOR

Scanner HP Sensor
1.
Scanner rear cover (
2.
Exposure glass (
3.
Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side.
4.
Remove the mylar [A].
D129/D130

p.4-10)
4-20
SM
Scanner
5.
Remove the scanner HP sensor [A] (
x 1, three snaps)
Platen Cover Sensor

2.
Platen cover sensor [A] (

Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
SM
x 1,
x 1)
4-21
D129/D130
Scanner
4.4.7 SCANNER MOTOR

1.
2.
Remove the 8 screws of the scanner rear frame [A].
3.
Disconnect the two connectors.
D129/D130
4-22
SM
Scanner
4.
Pull over the scanner rear stay [A] and remove it (
5.
Scanner motor bracket [A] (
x 1)
6.
Scanner motor [A] (
x 1, spring x 1, belt x 1)
x 3).
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 2,
x 2,
After replacing the scanner motor, do the image adjustments in the following
section of the manual (
SM
"Scanning" in "Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning").
4-23
D129/D130
Scanner
4.4.8 SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD

1.
2.
Scanner rear stay. (
3.
SIO [A] (
x 4,

p.4-22 "Scanner Motor")
x All)
4.4.9 FRONT SCANNER WIRE

1.
2.
Scanner left cover (
3.
Scanner left stay [A] (
x 3)
4.
Scanner left rail frame [B].
D129/D130
4-24
SM
Scanner
x 5,
x 1)
Operation panel stay [A] (
6.
Scanner front stay [A] (
7.
To make reassembly easy, slide the 1st scanner carriage to the right.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5.
SM
x 5)
4-25
D129/D130
Scanner
8.
Front scanner wire clamp [A]
9.
Front scanner wire bracket [B] (
x 1)
10. Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [C] (
x 1)
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire
1.
Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2.
Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the
ring) [C] through the notch.
3.
Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machines front) five times. Wind the
left end clockwise twice.
The two red marks [D] come together when you have done this. Stick the wire to
the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of
installation.
D129/D130
4-26
SM
Scanner
Install the drive pulley on the shaft [E].
5.
Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time.
Insert the left end into the slit [F]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [G]
and the rear track of the movable pulley [H].
6.
Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [I]. The end should go via the front
track of the right pulley [J] and the front track of the movable pulley [K].
SM
Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time.
4-27
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4.
Scanner
7.
Remove the tape from the drive pulley.
8.
Insert a scanner-positioning pin [L] through the 2nd carriage hole [M] and the left holes [N]
in the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [O] through the 1st carriage hole [P]
and the right holes in the front rail [Q].
9.
Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail.
10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [R].

11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [S].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [T].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the
positioning pins. Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.
After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section
of the manual (
D129/D130
4-28
SM
Scanner
4.4.10 REAR SCANNER WIRE

1.
2.
Scanner left cover (
3.
Scanner left stay (
4.
Scanner left rail frame (
5.
6.
Scanner rear stay (
7.
Rear rail frame [A] (
8.
SIO (
9.
To make reassembly easy, slide the first scanner to the center.

p.4-24 "Front Scanner Wire")
p.4-24 "Front Scanner Wire")
Replacement
and
Adjustment
p.4-22 "Scanner Motor")
x 5)
p.4-24 "Scanner Motor Drive Board")
10. Rear scanner wire clamp [B]

11. Rear scanner wire bracket [C] (
12. Scanner motor gear [D] (
x 1)
x 1)
13. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [E] (
SM
4-29
x 1)
D129/D130
Scanner
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire
1.
Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the forked holder.
2.
Pass the end with the ball [A] through the right square hole from the front.
3.
Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the notch, as shown by the arrow.
4.
Pass the ball end [A] through the drive pulley notch.
5.
Wind the end with the ring [C] clockwise (shown from the machines front) three times; wind
the ball end [A] clockwise (shown from the machines front) five times.
6.
The two red marks [D] should meet when you have done this.
Stick the wire to the pulley with tape, so you can easily handle the pulley and wire during
installation.
7.
Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
8.
Do not screw the pulley onto the shaft yet.
Install the wire.
The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be
the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front. This must show as a
mirror image. Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with
the three windings must face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it
must face the rear.
9.
Perform steps 8 through 13 in Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire.
After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section
of the manual (
D129/D130
4-30
SM
Laser Unit
4.5 LASER UNIT
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
4.5.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below. (See the next page for
Replacement
and
Adjustment
removal instructions.)
4.5.2 LASER UNIT
1.
2.
Front door [A] (pins x 2)
SM
4-31
D129/D130
Laser Unit
3.
Upper inner cover [B] (
4.
Glass cap [C]
5.
Shield glass [D]
6.
Lower inner cover [E] (
7.
Laser unit connectors [E] (
x 2)
x 2)
x 3,
x 1)
Do not disconnect the harnesses on the LD board [F] unless the LD unit has to be
replaced. This board is precisely adjusted in the factory.
8.
Laser unit [G] (
D129/D130
x 2)
When sliding out the laser unit, do not hold the LD board. Hold the laser unit.
4-32
SM
Laser Unit
4.5.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR
Laser unit (
2.
Laser unit cover [A] (
3.
Polygon mirror motor [B] (
4.
After replacing the polygon mirror motor, do the image adjustment (
x 4)
x 4,
x 1)
p.4-108 "Copy
Adjustments: Printing/Scanning").
4.5.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR

1.
Laser unit (
2.
Laser synchronization detector [A] (
SM
p.4-31)
x1,
x1)
4-33
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
p.4-31)
1.
Laser Unit
4.5.5 LD UNIT
1.
Laser unit (
2.
Upper spring plate [A] (
x 1)
3.
Lower spring plate [B] (
x 1)
4.
LD unit [C] (
p.4-31)
x 1,
x1, spring x 1)
To avoid damaging the LD board, hold it securely when disconnecting the

connectors. Hold the laser unit casing.
5.
After replacing the LD board, do the "Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment" (described in the
following section). Keep the lower inner cover removed before doing this adjustment
because you need to adjust the adjustor screw [D] on the LD unit with a screwdriver.
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
1.
Install a (new) LD unit [A] with the left side of the LD unit being lower than the right side.
(This makes this adjustment easier.)
D129/D130
4-34
SM
Laser Unit
2.
Print the test pattern "Hounds Tooth Check (2-Dot Horizontal)" (No. 16 in SP2109-001).
3.
Check if the vertical stripes appear on the second pattern (counted from the leading edge)
of the printout.
4.
Correct: No vertical stripes appear (see the sample following this procedure.)
Wrong: Vertical stripes appear (see the sample following this procedure.)
Turn the adjustor screw [B] by 90 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise).
If the image of the printout is getting worse, try reverse rotation (clockwise
counterclockwise)
5.
Print the test pattern and check it out.
6.
Try steps 2 to 4 again until you get an image with no vertical stripes.
7.
Reassemble the machine after completing this adjustment.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Correct: No vertical stripes appear
SM
4-35
D129/D130
Laser Unit
Incorrect: Vertical stripes appear
D129/D130
4-36
SM
PCDU
4.6 PCDU
4.6.1 PCDU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT)
2.
3.
Release the lock lever [B].
4.
Pull out the PCDU [C] and place it on a clean flat surface.
5.
Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to
the magnetic development roller.
Reinstallation
Open the right cover before you install the PCDU in the machine.
SM
4-37
D129/D130
PCDU
4.6.2 DRUM
1.
Remove the PCDU (
2.
Toner cap [A]
3.
Insert cap [A] into the opening of the PCDU [B].
4.
Make sure that the cap is inserted completely into the opening.
Open the PCDU [C] (
D129/D130
p.4-37)
x 2).
4-38
SM
PCDU
5.
Bracket [D] (
x 1)
6.
Pull the drum [E] towards the front
(the left side in the illustration) while releasing the
charge roller [F] using the release levers
Never touch the drum surface with bare hands.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[G], and then remove the drum
Re-installation
1.
Replace the drum and close the PCDU (
2.
Put the opening cap [A in the previous procedure] back in its original place.
3.
After replacing the drum, do these SPs:
SM
x 2).
SP 2001: Charge Bias Setting make sure that this is at the default setting
SP 3001-2: P Sensor Initial Setting (P sensor = ID Sensor)
SP 2805: Process Setting
SP 2810-1: Grayscale Setting
4-39
D129/D130
PCDU
4.6.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS

1.
Drum (
p.4-38)
2.
Pawl assembly [A]
3.
Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x 1, spur x 1)
Pick-off Pawl Position Adjustment

If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be adjusted
using either method:
Changing the spur position
Changing the pick-off pawl assembly position
D129/D130
4-40
SM
PCDU
4.6.4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER

1.
Drum (
p.4-38)
2.
Push the charge roller holder [A] toward the front of the drum (
x 2) and remove the
3.
Charge roller [C].
Disengage the charge roller on the right side to remove it. Try to avoid touching the
charge roller.
4.
Cleaning roller [D]
5.
Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove it.
After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller, check the value of SP2001-001. If it is
not at the standard value (1500), set SP2001-001 to "1500".
If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller
voltage will be too high.
SM
4-41
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
spring [B].
PCDU
4.6.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE

1.
Drum (
p.4-38)
2.
Charge roller and cleaning roller (
3.
Remove drum cleaning blade [A] (
p.4-41)
x 2)
Re-installation
Put toner on the edge of cleaning blade and the mylar at the back side of cleaning blade before
re-installing this blade.
D129/D130
4-42
SM
PCDU
4.6.6 ID SENSOR
1.
PCDU (
2.
Fusing unit (
3.
ID sensor bracket [A] (
4.
ID sensor [B] (
SM
p.4-37)
x 2,
Replacement
and
Adjustment
p.4-61)
x 1)
x 1)
Do SP3-001-002 to initialize the ID sensor after replacing.
4-43
D129/D130
Development
4.7 DEVELOPMENT
4.7.1 DEVELOPMENT FILTER
1.
PCDU (
p.4-37)
2.
Open the PCDU. (
3.
Upper development cover [A] (
4.
Development filter [B]
p.4-38 "Drum")
x2)
4.7.2 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER

1.
PCDU (
2.
Open the PCDU. (
3.
Upper development cover (
4.
Development roller [A]
D129/D130
p.4-37)
p.4-38 "Drum")
p.4-44 "Development Filter")
Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
4-44
SM
Development
Cleaning Procedure
PCDU (
p.4-37)
2.
Remove the two screws [A] and open the PCDU as shown above.
3.
Remove the upper development cover [A] (
4.
Fold up a sheet of copy paper [A] to fit the width of the uncovered area of the development
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
x 2).
roller, as shown below.

5.
SM
Slide the paper [A] along the length of the roller to clean the toner off the surface.
4-45
D129/D130
Development
6.
Rotate the development roller [A] in the direction of the arrow until the section you cleaned
is no longer visible.
7.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have cleaned the entire surface of the roller.
8.
Reassemble the PCDU and install the PCDU into the machine.
4.7.3 DEVELOPER
1.
PCDU (
2.
Open the PCDU. (
3.
Development roller (
4.
Joint bracket [A] (
5.
Development unit [B]
D129/D130
p.4-37)
p.4-38 "Drum")
p.4-44)
x 2,
x 1)
4-46
SM
Development
6.
Tip out the old developer [C].
7.
Turn drive gear [D] to ensure that no developer remains in the unit or on the developer
roller.
Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations. Work carefully
to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
Clean the development roller with a dry cloth.
9.
Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer [E] evenly along the length of the development
Replacement
and
Adjustment
8.
unit.
10. Rotate the drive gear [F] to work the developer into the unit.
11. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all toner is in the unit and level with the edges.
12. Re-install the development roller.
Make sure that the seals at the both sides of the development roller are set inside
the case after you re-install the development roller.
SM
4-47
D129/D130
Development
13. Place a piece of paper [G] over the toner entrance hole. This prevents used toner falling
from the drum into the development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering
with the Vref setting (toner density reference voltage)
14. Secure the drum [H] to the development unit, to close the PCDU (
x 2).
15. Install the PCDU in the machine and close the front and right doors.
16. Turn on the main power switch, and wait for the machine to warm up.
17. Do SP2801 to initialize the TD sensor and enter the developer lot number.
18. After performing the TD sensor initial setting, remove the sheet of paper from the PCDU.
D129/D130
4-48
SM
Development
4.7.4 TD SENSOR
PCDU (
2.
Empty all developer from the development unit. (
3.
Seal
4.
TD sensor [A] (
p.4-37)
p.4-46 "Developer")
x1)
The TD sensor is attached to the casing with double-sided tape [B]. Pry it off with
the flat head of a screwdriver. Use fresh double-sided tape to re-attach the sensor.
5.
Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting
using SP2-801.
When performing the TD sensor initial setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a
piece of paper.
SM
4-49
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
Transfer
4.8 TRANSFER
4.8.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
To avoid exposing the drum to strong light, cover it with paper if the right cover will be
open for a long period.
1.
2.
Release the lever [B].
3.
Transfer belt unit [C]
D129/D130
Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
4-50
SM
Transfer
4.8.2 TRANSFER BELT

1.
Transfer belt unit (
p.4-50)
2.
Connector [A] (
3.
Remove the springs (front and rear) [B].
4.
Release the hooks (front and rear) [C].
5.
Transfer belt with rollers [D]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 1)
SM
4-51
D129/D130
Transfer
6.
Lay the transfer belt with rollers on a flat clean surface, and fold the unit [E] to release the
tension on the belt (
7.
x 2).
Transfer belt [F]
Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and shafts with alcohol
to prevent the belt from slipping.
When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure that the belt is under the pin [F].
To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation, manually turn the rollers
and make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of any of
the rollers.
D129/D130
4-52
SM
Transfer
4.8.3 TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR

p.4-50)
2.
Toner overflow sensor [A] (
x 1,
x 1)
4.8.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE/TONER OVERFLOW

SENSOR
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
1.
2.
Transfer belt (
3.
Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] (
p.4-50)
p.4-51)
x 2)
Avoid touching the edge of the new blade. Check the new blade for dust or
damage.
SM
4-53
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
Transfer
Toner Overflow Sensor

1.
2.
Toner overflow sensor [A] (
D129/D130
p.4-50)
x 1,
x 1)
4-54
SM
Paper Feed
4.9 PAPER FEED

4.9.1 PAPER FEED UNIT
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1.
Right rear cover (
2.
Duplex unit (
3.
Pull out tray 1 and tray 2.
4.
Paper guide plate [A] (hook x 2)
5.
Harness cover [A] (
SM
p.4-5)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
p.4-75)
x 1)
4-55
D129/D130
Paper Feed
6.
Paper feed unit [A] (
x 2,
x 1)
4.9.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

Tray 1 and Tray 2
1.
Paper feed unit (
p.4-55 "Paper Feed Unit")
2.
Roller holder [A] (
x 1)
3.
Pick-up roller [B]
4.
Feed roller [C]
5.
Separation roller [D] and torque limiter [E] (
D129/D130
x 1)
4-56
SM
Paper Feed
4.9.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

Rear cover (
2.
Tray lift motor 1 or 2 [A] (
SM
p.4-4)
x 2,
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
x 3)
4-57
D129/D130
Paper Feed
4.9.4 RELAY, TRAY LIFT, PAPER END AND PAPER FEED

SENSORS
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1.
Right rear cover (
2.
Duplex unit (
3.
Paper feed unit (
4.
Tray lift sensor [A] (
5.
Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook,
6.
Relay sensor bracket [D] (
7.
Relay sensor [E] (
8.
Paper feed sensor bracket [F] (
9.
Paper feed sensor [G] (
D129/D130
p.4-5)
p.4-75)
p.4-55)
x 1)
x 1 each)
x 1)
x 1, hook)
x 1)
x 1, hook)
4-58
SM
Paper Feed
4.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1.
Right rear cover (
2.
Duplex unit (
3.
Paper feed unit for tray 1 (
4.
Paper Trays 1 and 2
5.
Paper dust box [A]
6.
7.
Pull out the paper dust container [B].
8.
Remove two screws [C].
SM
p.4-5)
p.4-75)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
p.4-55 "Paper Feed Unit")
4-59
D129/D130
Paper Feed
9.
This makes the paper guide [D] tilt a little bit. Now you can access the screw [E].
Dust container rail [F] (
10. Sensor bracket [G] (
[E] x 1)
x 1)
You can only access the screw on the sensor bracket from the inside (paper tray
location) of the machine.
11. Registration sensor [H] (
x 1, hooks)
Reinstall the registration sensor

It is very difficult to secure the sensor bracket to the frame. First attach the sensor bracket with
tape temporarily.
D129/D130
4-60
SM
Fusing
4.10 FUSING
4.10.1 FUSING UNIT
Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any
of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
Turn off the main power switch.
2.
Open the right door.
3.
Pull up the lock levers [A].
4.
Pull the fusing unit [B] until you hear a click.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
The lock levers lock the fusing unit again at this time to prevent the fusing unit from
falling down.
5.
SM
Pull up the lock levers [A] again, and then remove the fusing unit [B].
4-61
D129/D130
Fusing
4.10.2 WEB ROLLER UNIT

1.
Fusing unit (
p.4-61)
2.
Web roller unit [A] (
x 2)
4.10.3 BRAKE PAD

1.
Web roller unit (
2.
Web left cover [A] (
x 1, stepped screw x 3)
3.
Web top frame [B] (
x 2)
D129/D130
p.4-62)
4-62
SM
Fusing
4.
Web left frame [C] (
5.
Brake pad [D]
x 2)
1.
Web roller unit (
p.4-62)
2.
Web left cover (
p.4-62 "Brake Pad")
3.
Web top frame (
p.4-62 "Brake Pad")
4.
Web left frame (
p.4-62 "Brake Pad")
5.
Front gear bracket [A] (
6.
All gears and bushings (rear side) [B] (
SM
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4.10.4 WEB HOLDER ROLLER AND WEB ROLLERS
x 2)
x 2)
4-63
D129/D130
Fusing
x 2)
7.
Rear gear bracket [C] (
8.
All gear and bushings (rear side) [D] (
9.
Front bracket [E] (
x 2, spring x 1)
x 2)
10. Web holder roller [F] (holder x 2, spring x 2)

)
11. Web take up roller [G] (

12. Web supply roller [H] (
D129/D130
4-64
SM
Fusing
Installing a new web holder roller
The holder [A] has a one-way clutch. Make sure that the holder [A] is set at the front side.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Installing new web rollers
1.
Install the web supply roller [A] first (
). Make sure that the web sheet is under the
pin [B].
2.
Install the web take up roller [C] (
). Make sure that the printed number [D] is
outside the web take up roller.

3.
Reinstall the rear gear bracket (
4.
Reinstall the front and rear gears and bushings (
p.4-63 "Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers").

p.4-63 "Web Holder Roller and Web
Rollers").
5.
SM
Reinstall the rear gear bracket (
4-65
D129/D130
Fusing
6.
Turn the rear gear [E] in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet.
7.
Reinstall the front gear bracket [F] (
8.
Turn the coupling [G] in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet.
9.
Reinstall the web unit.
10. If you install a new cleaning web, reset SP 7806-008 (press "Execute" on the LCD).
4.10.5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER

1.
Fusing unit (
2.
Fusing exit guide [A] (lock x 2)
3.
Fusing front upper cover [B] (
x 3)
4.
Fusing rear upper cover [C] (
x 3)
5.
Fusing outer guide [D] (front:
D129/D130
p.4-61)
x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1)
4-66
SM
Fusing
x 4)
6.
Cleaning roller unit [E] (
7.
Pressure roller cleaning roller [F] (spring x 2, holder x 2)
1.
Fusing unit (
2.
Web roller unit (
3.
Fusing top cover [A] (front:
4.
Thermostat holder [B] (
x 2)
5.
Thermostat cover [C] (
x 2)
6.
Thermostat [D] (terminal x 2)
SM
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4.10.6 THERMOSTATS
p.4-61)
p.4-62)
x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1)
4-67
D129/D130
Fusing
4.10.7 THERMISTOR
1.
Fusing unit (
2.
Web roller unit (
3.
Fusing top cover (
4.
Pull the two tabs [A].
5.
Disconnect the two terminals [B].
6.
Sensor stays [C] (
7.
Thermistors [D] (
D129/D130
p.4-61)
p.4-62)
p.4-67 "Thermostats")
x 1 each)
x 2,
x 1)
4-68
SM
Fusing
4.10.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS

1.
Fusing unit (
2.
Web roller unit (
3.
Fusing top cover (
4.
Fusing top frame [A] (
p.4-61)
p.4-62)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 5)
The cords on this frame are still connected to the fusing unit at this time. Be careful
not to damage the cords when removing the hot roller stripper [B].
5.
SM
Hot roller stripper [B] (spring x 1)
4-69
D129/D130
Fusing
4.10.9 FUSING LAMPS

1.
Fusing unit (
2.
Web roller unit (
3.
Fusing top cover (
4.
Connector cover [A] (
5.
Fusing top frame with connector [B] (
6.
Fusing front lower cover [C] (
7.
Fusing front frame [D] (
8.
Fusing rear lower cover [E] (
9.
Fusing rear frame [F] (
D129/D130
p.4-61)
p.4-62)
x 2)
x 9)
x 2)
x 3)
x 2)
x 5)
4-70
SM
Fusing
x 4)
10. Terminal bracket [G] (
11. Front holder bracket [H] (

12. Terminal base [I] (
x 1)
x 3)
13. Rear holder bracket [J] (
x 1)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
14. Fusing lamp-Center (550W) [K]

15. Fusing lamp-End (750W) [L]
4.10.10 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER

1.
Fusing lamps-Center and End (
2.
Hot roller [A] (snap ring x 2, gear x 2, bushing x 2)
3.
Pressure roller [B] (
SM
p.4-70 "Fusing Lamps")
x 2, bushing x 2)
4-71
D129/D130
Paper Exit
4.11 PAPER EXIT

4.11.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT
1.
Fusing unit (
2.
Fusing exhaust fan duct (
3.
Paper exit unit [A] (
D129/D130
p.4-61)
x 3,
p.4-106 "Fusing Exhaust Fan")
x 2)
4-72
SM
Paper Exit
1.
Paper exit unit (
2.
Sensor bracket [A] (
3.
Paper exit sensor [B] (
4.
Paper overflow sensor [C] (
5.
Sensor bracket [D] (
6.
Fusing exit sensor [E] (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4.11.2 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, AND PAPER EXIT

SENSORS
p.4-72)
x 1)
x 1, hooks)
x 1, hooks)
x 2)
x 1,
x 1)
4.11.3 JUNCTION JAM SENSOR
1.
Paper exit unit (
p.4-72)
2.
Paper guide [A] (
x 3)
3.
Junction jam sensor [B] (
SM
x 1)
4-73
D129/D130
Paper Exit
4.11.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR

1.
Paper exit unit (
2.
Motor cover [A] (
3.
Exit motor [B] (
D129/D130
p.4-72)
x 1)
x 2,
x 2,
x 1)
4-74
SM
Duplex
4.12 DUPLEX
4.12.1 DUPLEX UNIT
Right rear cover (
2.
Open the lower right cover [A] at the duplex unit.
3.
Release the tab [B] and remove the lower door (spring x 2).
4.
5.
Release the front link [C] (
SM
p.4-5)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
x 1).
4-75
D129/D130
Duplex
6.
Keep the right door fully open.
7.
Push up the duplex unit a little bit, while pressing the bracket [D] to lock the spring [E].
Do not let the duplex unit open fully before releasing the wire (step 9). Otherwise,
the lock for the spring [E] is released.
8.
Wire [F] (
9.
Push the projection [G].
D129/D130
x 1)
4-76
SM
Duplex
10. Duplex unit (
x 3,
x 1, ground cable x 1)
1.
Open the duplex door [A] and by-pass tray.
2.
Right door cover [B] (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4.12.2 RIGHT DOOR COVER
x 4)
4.12.3 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR

1.
Right door cover (
2.
Duplex door sensor [A] (
SM
p.4-77)
x 1, hook)
4-77
D129/D130
Duplex
4.12.4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR

1.
Right door cover (
2.
3.
Duplex entrance guide [A] ([B]:
4.
Duplex entrance sensor bracket [A] (
5.
Duplex entrance sensor [A] (hooks)
D129/D130
p.4-77)
x1, [C]: Stepped screw x 2)
x 1,
4-78
x 1)
SM
Duplex
4.12.5 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR

2.
Right door rear cover [A] (
3.
Remove the shaft [B] (
4.
Transfer belt unit holder [C] (
p.4-50)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
x 3)
x 1).
x 1,
x 1)
When re-installing the transfer belt unit holder, make sure that the spring [D]
correctly hooks onto the frame.
SM
4-79
D129/D130
Duplex
5.
Guide plate [E] (two hooks)
6.
Duplex exit sensor [F] (
D129/D130
x 1, hooks)
4-80
SM
Duplex
4.12.6 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR

1.
Rear cover (
2.
Right rear cover (
3.
Frame [A] (
4.
Duplex/By-pass motor bracket [B] (
5.
Duplex/By-pass motor [C] (
SM
p.4-4)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
p.4-5)
x 4)
x 2,
x 1)
x 4, bushing x 8, timing belt x 1)
4-81
D129/D130
Duplex
4.12.7 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR

1.
Right door cover (
2.
3.
Right door rear cover [A] (
4.
Duplex door [B]
5.
Duplex guide plate [C] (
D129/D130
p.4-77)
x 3)
x 3)
4-82
SM
Duplex
x 2)
Bracket [D] (
7.
Duplex inverter motor [E] (
x 3,
x 1)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
6.
SM
4-83
D129/D130
By-pass
4.13 BY-PASS
4.13.1 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH
SENSOR
1.
Open the lower right cover [A].
2.
Disconnect the connector and clamp.
3.
Open the by-pass tray [A].
D129/D130
4-84
SM
By-pass
4.
Move the side fences to the center.
5.
By-pass tray cover [A] (
6.
By-pass paper size sensor [A] (
7.
By-pass paper length sensor [B] (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 4)
SM
x 1)
x 1)
4-85
D129/D130
By-pass
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor
1.
Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered).
2.
Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the
projection [C] of the left side fence bar.
3.
Reassemble the copier.
4.
5.
Check this switch operation with SP5803-024 (By-pass: Paper Size Sensor< Input Check).
- Display on the LCD -
Paper Size
Display
Paper Size
Display
A3 SEF
00001110
A5 SEF
00001011
B4 SEF
00001100
B6 SEF
00000011
A4 SEF
00001101
A6 SEF
00000111
B5 SEF
00001001
Smaller A6 SEF
00001111
D129/D130
4-86
SM
By-pass
4.13.2 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR

Right door cover (
p.4-77 "Right Door Cover")
2.
By-pass feed unit cover [A] (
3.
By-pass paper end sensor [B] (
x 2).
x 1, hooks)
4.13.3 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER,

TORQUE LIMITER
1.
Right door cover (
2.
By-pass feed unit cover (
3.
By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook)
4.
By-pass feed roller [B] (
5.
By-pass separation roller [C] (
6.
Torque limiter [D]
SM
p.4-77)
p.4-87 "By-pass Paper End Sensor")
x 1)
x 1)
4-87
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
By-pass
4.13.4 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

1.
2.
Right door rear cover (
3.
4.
Transfer belt unit holder (
5.
By-pass feed clutch holder [A] (
6.
By-pass feed clutch [B] (
D129/D130
p.4-79 "Duplex Exit Sensor")

p.4-50)
p.4-79 "Duplex Exit Sensor")
x 1,
x 2)
x 1)
4-88
SM
Drive Area
4.14 DRIVE AREA

4.14.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH
Tray 1 and Tray 2
Rear cover (
p.4-4)
2.
Clutch bracket [A] (
3.
Paper feed clutch [B] (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
SM
x 2,
x 1, bushing x 1)
x 1)
4-89
D129/D130
Drive Area
4.14.2 DEVELOPMENT PADDLE MOTOR

1.
Rear cover (
p.4-4)
2.
Development paddle motor [A] (
x 4,
x 1)
4.14.3 TRANSFER/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR

1.
Rear cover (
2.
Transfer/development motor [A] (
D129/D130
p.4-4)
x 4,
x 1)
4-90
SM
Drive Area
4.14.4 DRUM MOTOR

Rear cover (
2.
Drum motor [A] (
p.4-4)
x 4,
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
x 1)
4.14.5 FUSING MOTOR

1.
Rear cover (
2.
Fusing motor [A] (
SM
p.4-4)
x 4,
x 1)
4-91
D129/D130
Drive Area
4.14.6 WEB MOTOR

1.
Rear cover (
p.4-4)
2.
Bracket [A] (
3.
Web motor [B] (
x 1)
x 1,
x 1)
4.14.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR

1.
Rear cover (
2.
Right rear cover (
3.
Paper feed motor [A] (
D129/D130
p.4-4)
p.4-5)
x 2,
x 1)
4-92
SM
Drive Area
4.14.8 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR

1.
Rear cover (
p.4-4)
2.
Right rear cover (
3.
Transfer belt contact motor [A] (
p.4-5)
x 1)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 2,
4.14.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR

1.
Rear cover (
2.
Right rear cover (
3.
Registration motor bracket [A] (
4.
Registration motor [B] (
SM
p.4-4)
p.4-5)
x 2,
x 3,
x 1)
x 1)
4-93
D129/D130
Drive Area
4.14.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR

1.
Left cover (
2.
Upper inner cover (
3.
Inner Tray (
4.
Exhaust duct [A] (
5.
Toner supply motor [B] (hooks,
D129/D130
p.4-4)
p.4-3 "Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover")
p.4-9)
x 2)
x 1)
4-94
SM
Electrical Components
4.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1.
SM
Controller unit [A] (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4.15.1 CONTROLLER UNIT
x 2)
4-95
D129/D130
4.15.2 HDD UNIT

Before Replacing the HDD Unit
Copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with SP5846-051 if possible.
Replacement Procedure
1.
Controller unit (
2.
HDD unit [A] with connecting board [B] (
D129/D130
p.4-95)
x 3,
4-96
x 2)
SM
3.
HDD unit [A] (
x 2,
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 2)
After installing the new HDD unit

1.
Do SP5832-001 to format the hard disk.
2.
Do SP5853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk.
3.
Do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the hard disk from the SD card to which
you have already copied the address book data if possible.
4.
Disposal of HDD Units
Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the
HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.

Specifically, the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary
files created automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored on
the HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal
methods.
SM
4-97
D129/D130
Reinstallation
Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the
HDD is replaced: document server documents, fixed stamps, document server address
book
The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input again.
4.15.3 CONTROLLER BOARD
The battery on the control board can explode if replaced incorrectly.
Dispose of the old battery in accordance with the instructions.
Before Replacing the Controller Board in the Model without HDD

When you replace the controller board in a model without a HDD, address book data can be
copied from an old controller board to a new controller board using an SD card.
Copy the address book data to an SD card from the flash ROM on the controller board with
SP5846-051 if possible.
Replacement Procedure
1.
Controller unit (
2.
HDD unit (if it has been installed.) (
3.
Controller cover [A] (
D129/D130
p.4-95)
p.4-96)
x 2)
4-98
SM
4.
Controller right bracket [A] (
5.
Controller board assembly [A] (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 5)
SM
x 4, connector caps)
4-99
D129/D130
6.
NVRAMs [A]
7.
Interface rails [B] (hooks each)
8.
DIMM-RAM (If it is installed.)
9.
Controller board [C]
When Installing the New Controller Board

1.
Remove the NVRAMs from the old controller board.
2.
Install them on the new controller board after you replace the controller board.
3.
Replace the NVRAMs if the NVRAM on the old controller board is defective.
Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data")
before you replace the NVRAMs.
Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static
electricity can damage NVRAM data.
Make sure the NVRAMs are correctly installed on the controller board.
Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old controller board are the same for
the new controller board. Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board
in the field.
D129/D130
4-100
SM
4.15.4 AFTER INSTALLING THE CONTROLLER BOARD

1.
For a model without a HDD, do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the flash
ROM on the controller board from the SD card to which you have already copied the
address book data if possible.
2.
If the customer is using the data encryption feature, the encryption key must be restored.
3.
4.15.5 MOTHER BOARD

1.
Rear cover (
p.4-4)
2.
Controller unit (
3.
Exhaust fan duct [A] (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
p.4-95)
SM
x 2,
x 1)
4-101
D129/D130
4.
Controller box [A] (
x 6,
5.
Mother board [A] (
x 6)
D129/D130
x 4,
x 3)
4-102
SM
4.15.6 BCU
1.
Controller box (
2.
BCU [A] (
3.
Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old board and install it on the new board.
4.
Set the DIP switches on the new BCU board to the same settings as the old board.
x 4)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 4,
Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the
NVRAM slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the left side.
SM
4-103
D129/D130
When installing the new BCU

1.
Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU.
2.
Install the NVRAM on the new BCU after you replace the BCU.
3.
4.
Turn on the main power switch.
5.
"SC995-01" occurs.
6.
Enter the serial number with SP5-811-004.
7.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before
you replace the NVRAM.
Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage NVRAM data.
4.15.7 IPU
1.
Controller box (
2.
IPU[[A] (
D129/D130
x 6,
x all)
4-104
SM
4.15.8 IOB
Rear cover (
2.
IOB [A] (
p.4-4)
x 6,
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
x all)
When installing a new IOB

Set the bit switches on the new IOB to the same settings as the old IOB.
4.15.9 PSU
1.
Left cover (
2.
PSU [A] (
3.
Two clamps [B] (These clamps will be used for the new PSU.)
SM
p.4-4)
x 4,
x all)
4-105
D129/D130
4.15.10 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

1.
Rear cover (
p.4-4)
2.
Right rear cover (
3.
High voltage power supply board [A] (
p.4-5)
x 5,
x all)
4.15.11 FUSING EXHAUST FAN

1.
Rear cover (
p.4-4)
2.
Fusing exhaust duct [A] (
3.
Separate the duct (hooks).
4.
Fusing exhaust fan [B]
x 2,
x 1)
When installing the fusing exhaust fan

Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine.
D129/D130
4-106
SM
4.15.12 CONTROLLER FAN

1.
Controller box (
2.
Fan cover [A] (
3.
Controller fan [B] (
x 2)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
x 1)
When installing the controller fan

Make sure that the controller fan is installed with its decal facing upward.
SM
4-107
D129/D130
Rev. 1/4/2013
4.15.13 NVRAM ON THE BCU BOARD

Replacement Procedure for the NVRAM on the BCU Board
1. Turn the main power switch ON.
2. Access SP5990-001 and print out all data lists.
2. Turn the main power switch OFF.
3. Insert the SD card into the lower slot on the controller box.
4. Turn the main power switch ON.
5. Upload the NVRAM data (SP5-824-001) onto the SD card.
6. Turn the main power switch OFF.
7. Remove the old NVRAM from the BCU and attach the new one.
Important: Even if SC995 is displayed when you turn on the main switch (after
replacing the NVRAM), continue with this procedure.
9. Access SP5807-001 and set the area code.
Important: SP5807-001 is a Sales SP mode. Dealers must contact the Hotline for the
regional support rep. Direct must contact the Hotline for Sensei rep.
- The initial value stored in the NVRAM is 1.
- After the NVRAM is replaced, the display for SP5807-001 changes to Japanese.
- Refer to the following area destination code list.
Area code
Destination
JP
NA
EU
TWN
AA
CHN
KOR
10. Access SP5-811-001 and program the machine serial number.

11. Access SP5-811-004 and program the BCU serial number.
12. Turn the main switch off.
13. Download the NVRAM data (SP5-825-001) stored on the SD card in Step 5 onto the
machine.
14. Remove the SD card from the lower slot in the controller box.
Important: If you cannot upload the NVRAM data (SP5-824-001) or download the NVRAM data
(SP5-825-001), do the following:
-Enter the data from the SMC report manually (included in the factory sheet).
-Reinstall the security options (Data Overwrite Security, HDD Encryption).
D129/D130
4-108
SM
Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
Rev. 12/27/2012
4.16 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

4.16.1 OVERVIEW
Perform these adjustments after replacing any of the following:
Scanner Wire
Lens Block/SBU Assembly
Scanner Drive Motor
Polygon Mirror Motor
Paper Side Fence
Memory All Clear
4.16.2 PRINTING
Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these
adjustments.
2.
Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-1, No. 14) to print the test pattern for the following
procedures.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
1.
Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper type and paper feed station, and
adjust it with following SP modes.
SP No.
Tray: Plain
Specification
SP1-001-1
0 9.0 mm
Tray: Thick 1
SM
SP1-001-2
4-109
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1.
Rev. 12/27/2012
SP No.
2.
Tray: Thick 2
SP1-001-3
By-pass: Plain
SP1-001-4
By-pass: Thick 1
SP1-001-5
By-pass: Thick 2
SP1-001-6
Duplex: Plain
SP1-001-7
Duplex: Thick 1
SP1-001-8
Specification
Check side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following
SP modes.
SP No.
By-pass
SP1-002-1
Tray 1
SP1-002-2
Tray 2
SP1-002-3
Tray 3
SP1-002-4
Tray 4
SP1-002-5
LCT
SP1-002-6
Duplex
SP1-002-7
D129/D130
Specification
0 4.0 mm
4-110
SM
Rev. 12/27/2012
Blank Margin
If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications,
1.
Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C] and left edge [D] blank margins,
and adjust them with the following SP modes.
SP No.
Leading Edge
Specification
SP2-103-1
3.0 mm [0.0 to 9.0 mm]
Trailing Edge
SP2-103-2
Left
SP2-103-3
2.0 mm [0.0 to 9.0 mm]
Right
Duplex: Trailing Edge:
L Size: Plain
M Size: Plain
S Size: Plain
SP2-103-4
SP2-103-5
1.0 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
SP2-103-6
0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
SP2-103-7
0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
Duplex: Left: Plain
SP2-103-8
Duplex: Right: Plain
SP2-103-9
0.3 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm]
SM
4-111
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
Rev. 12/27/2012
SP No.
L Size: Thick
M Size: Thick
S Size: Thick
Duplex: Left: Thick
SP2-103-10
Specification
0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
SP2-103-11
0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
SP2-103-12
0.4 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
SP2-103-13
0.1 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm]
Duplex: Right: Thick
SP2-103-14
L Size: Paper length is 297.1 mm or more.
M Size: Paper length is 216.1 to 297 mm
S Size: Paper length is 216 mm or less.
Main Scan Magnification

1.
Use SP2-109-001 no 5 (Grid Pattern) to print a single dot pattern.
2.
Check magnification, and then SP2-102 (Magnification Adjustment Main Scan) to adjust
magnification if required. Specification: 2%.
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if a parallelogram prints while adjusting the printing registration or
printing margin using a trimming area pattern.
The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side registration for each
paper tray station.
Use SP2-109-1 No. 14 (Trimming Area) to determine whether a parallelogram image appears. If
the parallelogram pattern appears, perform the following procedure.
D129/D130
4-112
SM
1.
Laser unit [A]
2.
Bracket [B] (
3.
Install adjustment cam [C] (P/N: A2309003).
4.
Secure positioning pin [D] (P/N A2309004) with the two screws removed with the bracket
x2)
[B]. Do not tighten the screws at this time.

5.
To adjust the position of the laser unit [E]

1) Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam. (See the illustration above.)
2) Tighten the adjustment bracket.
3) Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If the results are not satisfactory,
repeat steps 5-1) to 5-3).
SM
4-113
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Rev. 12/27/2012
Rev. 12/27/2012
4.16.3 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
Use the S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode
1.
Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2.
Check the leading edge [A] and side-to-side [B] registration, and adjust them with the
following SP modes if necessary.
SP No.
Specification
Leading Edge
SP4-010-1
0 2.0 mm
Side-to-side
SP4-011-1
0 2.5 mm
D129/D130
4-114
SM
Rev. 12/27/2012
Magnification
Use the S5S test chart to perform the following adjustment.
1.
Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2.
Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if
necessary. Specification: 0.9%.
SM
4-115
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Sub Scan Magnification
Rev. 12/27/2012
4.16.4 ADF
Registration
1.
Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
2.
Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
3.
Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP No.
Specification
Side-to-side: 1st side
SP6-006-1
Side-to-side: 2nd side
SP6-006-2
Leading Edge
SP6-006-3
0.0 mm 5 mm
Leading Edge: 1st side
SP6-006-5
0.0 mm 3 mm
Leading Edge: 2nd side
SP6-006-6
0.0 mm 2.5 mm
Trailing Erase edge:
SP6-006-7
0.0 mm 10.0 mm
0.0 mm 3 mm
D129/D130
4-116
SM
Rev. 12/27/2012
4.16.5 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
After clearing the memory, replacing the operation panel or NVRAM, or if the touch panel
detection function is not working correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
Do not attempt to use items [2] to [7] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for
1.
Press
, "1", "9", "9", "3", and then press
5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics
menu.
2.
On the touch screen press "Touch Screen Adjust" (or press "1").
3.
Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark
4.
Press the lower right mark
5.
Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears exactly where
after it appears.
the screen is touched.

If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and repeat from
Step 2.
6.
When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press
7.
Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the calibration
).
settings.
SM
4-117
D129/D130
Replacement
and
Adjustment
design use only.
SERVICE TABLES
Pag e
Date

None
Service Program Mode
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the power off,
wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION

The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and adjust
values.
Service
Tables
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate
the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure
that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1.
If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and
then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and
on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is
turned on.
2.
SM
If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1".
5-1
D129/D130
Service Program Mode
3.
After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
Turn the machine off and on.
Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
The administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

Please note these general changes in this section:
Group 8(Data Log 2) is a new group of counters.
Along with the addition of Group 8, many of the Group 7 counters have been removed.
Service Table Key
Notation
What it means
Example: [-9 to +9 / 0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
[range / default / step]
adjusted in the range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM

reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with
each key press.
DFU
Japan only
Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value

(factory setting) is restored.
Denotes "Design or Factory Use". Do not change this value.
The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this
value.
C2b
D129
C2c
D130
SSP
This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode.
D129/D130
5-2
SM
Service Program Mode Tables
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

5.2.1 SP TABLES
There are the most commonly used SP codes in the "Main SP Tables - 1 to - 9" of "Main
Chapters".
System SP Tables
Printer SP Tables
Scanner SP Tables
Service
Tables
SM
5-3
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-1
5.3 MAIN SP TABLES-1

5.3.1 SP1-XXX: FEED
Leading Edge Registration

1001*
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch

operation timing.
001 Tray: Plain
002 Tray: Thick 1
003 Tray: Thick 2
004 By-pass: Plain
[9 to 9/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 By-pass: Thick 1
007 Duplex: Plain
008 Duplex: Thick 1
Side-to-Side Registration
1002*
Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser main scan start
position for each mode.
001 By-pass
002 Tray 1
003 Tray 2
004 Tray 3
[4 to 4/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 Tray 4
006 LCT
007 Duplex
D129/D130
5-4
SM
Main SP Tables-1
Registration Buckle Adjustment

1003*
Adjusts the paper feed motor timing. Paper feed motor timing determines
the amount of paper buckle at Registration. (A "+" setting causes more
buckling.)
001 Tray 1: Plain
002 Tray 1: Thick 1
003 Tray 1: Thick 2
[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
004 Tray 2, 3, 4: Plain
005 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick1
006 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick2
007 By-pass: Plain
[-9 to 5 / -2 /1 mm step]
010 Duplex: Plain
[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
011 Duplex: Thick 1
[-9 to 5 / -3 / 1 mm step]
Service
Tables
012 LCT: Plain

013 LCT: Thick1
[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
014 LCT: Thick2
By-pass Paper Size Detection

1007*
Controls paper size detection for the by-pass feed table.
001 Detection Timing
002 LG Detection
SM
[-15 to 15 / 0 / 5 mm step]
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: LTSEF, 1: LG
5-5
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-1
Fusing Temperature Adjustment

Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the
roller for the quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine
has two fusing lamps: one heats the center of the roller, the other heats both
1105*
ends. Each fusing lamp can be adjusted separately.

The "re-load temperature" is the "print ready temperature". When the fusing
temperature exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a
re-load temperature (Re-load Temp. = Fusing. Temp SP Value.) that is
higher than the SP1-105-2 setting.
Roller Center
001
C2b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]

C2c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller.
Roller Ends
002
C2b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]

C2c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller.

Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Center
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting
depends on the target temperature.
003 Reload temp. = Target Temp This SP Setting
Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 1
(Roller Center: Trays)
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Ends
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends
on the target temperature.
(Roller Ends: Trays)
005 to The following SPs adjust the fusing temperature at the center or ends of the
022 hot roller for each paper type.
D129/D130
5-6
SM
Main SP Tables-1
005 Roller Center: M-Thick
006 Roller Ends: M-Thick
C2b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]

C2c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C2b: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C2c: [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg]
007 Roller Center: Thick 1

[100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]
008 Roller Ends: Thick 1
[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
010 Wait Temp: Center Minus
011 Wait Temp: Ends Minus
012 Roller Ends: Thin
013 Roller Center: OHP: Plain
C2b: [100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]

C2c: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
C2b: [100 to 170 / 135 / 1 deg]
C2c: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
014 Roller Ends: OHP: Plain

[100 to 170 / 155/ 1 deg]
016 Roller Ends: OHP: Thick
017 Roller Center: Special 1
018 Roller Ends: Special 1
SM
Service
Tables
015 Roller Center: OHP: Thick

[100 to 170 / 160/ 1 deg]
C2b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
C2c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C2b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
C2c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C2b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
C2c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C2b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
C2c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C2b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
C2c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C2b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
C2c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
5-7
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-1
023 Feed Waiting: Plain

024 Feed Waiting: M-Thick
025 Feed Waiting: Thick 1
Turns the feed waiting mode on or off for

each paper type.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0=Off, 1=On
The paper waits at the registration roller
until the fusing temperature reaches the

prescribed temperature (adjustable with
SP1105-028 to -37).
027 Feed Waiting: Thin
If you enable this feature, also set SP

1105-38 to a convenient value for the
customer.
028 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Plain

029 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Plain
030 Feed Wait: Center Minus: M-Thick
031 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: M-Thick
Adjusts the offset value for each re-load
032 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 1
temperature to exit the feed waiting
033 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 1
mode.
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]

036 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thin
037 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thin
Sets the maximum feed waiting time.
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]
The paper is fed when the time specified
038 Feed Waiting: Maximum Time
with this SP has passed even though the

fusing temperature has not reached the
prescribed temperature.
0: Disabled.
D129/D130
5-8
SM
Main SP Tables-1
1106
Fusing Temperature Display

001 Roller Center
Displays the temperature of the fusing

unit.
002 Roller Ends
[-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
003 Machine Inside at Power On
Displays the temperature inside the

machine.
004 Machine Inside
[-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
MotorSpeedAdjust
Adjusts the speeds of each motor. Each step decreases or increases motor
speed in 0.05% increments
Regist: Registration motor, Feed: Feed motor,
1801*
Duplex: Duplex/By-pass motor, Inverter: Duplex inverter motor,

Exit: Paper exit motor, Bridge: Bridge unit drive motor,
OpcMot: Drum motor, TransferMot: Transfer/Development Motor,
FusingMot: Fusing motor,
Service
Tables
DevPuddleMot: Development Paddle motor

001 Regist: 90: Thick 2
[-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.05 %]
003 Regist: 180: Plain
005 Feed: 90: Thick 2
[-2 to 2 / -0.4 / 0.05 %]
007 Feed: 180: Plain
[-2 to 2 / -1 / 0.05 %]
009 Duplex_CW: 90: Thick 2
[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
011 Duplex_CW: 180: Plain
SM
[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]
5-9
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-1

013 Duplex_CCW: 90: Thick 2
[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
015 Duplex_CCW: 180: Plain
[-4 to 4 / -0.2 / 0.1 %]
017 Inverter_CW: 90: Thick 2
019 Inverter_CW: 180: Plain
021 Inverter_CCW: 90: Thick 2
023 Inverter_CCW: 180: Plain
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
025 Exit_CW: 90: Thick 2
027 Exit_CW: 180: Plain
029 Bridge: 90: Thick 2
031 Bridge: 180: Plain
033 OpcMot:90
034 OpcMot:154
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %]
035 OpcMot:180
036 OpcMot:230
D129/D130
5-10
SM
Main SP Tables-1
037 TransferMot:90
038 TransferMot:154
039 TransferMot:180
040 TransferMot:230
041 FusingMot:90
042 FusingMot:154
043 FusingMot:180
044 FusingMot:230
045 DevPuddleMot
1902*
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
Cleaning Web Setting

Web Consumption
[0 to 120 / 0 / 1 %]
001
Displays the consumed amount of the web roll.
002
C2b: [3 to 130 / 8.4 / 0.1 sec]

C2c: [3 to 130 / 6.7 / 0.1 sec]
Service
Tables
Web Motor Interval
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation.

Web Motor Time
[0.3 to 10 / 4.2 / 0.1 sec]
003
Adjusts the rotation time of the web motor.
C2b: EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
Web Near End Setting
004
C2b: ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]

C2c: EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
C2c: ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]
Adjusts the threshold for web near end.

Web Motor Interval: Thick 1
[3 to 130 / 11.2 / 0.1 sec]
005
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation (thick 1).
[3 to 130 / 16.8 / 0.1 sec]
006
SM
5-11
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-1
Paper Interval Time
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
007 Adjusts the threshold for paper feeding. When the time between trailing
edge detection and leading edge detection is within the value of this setting,
the machine determines that the paper is still being fed.
Web Motor Setting: Web End
[0 to 60 / 27 / 1 sec]
008
Adjusts the motor rotation time after the web end.
Web Motor Rotation: Power On
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]
009
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the re-load state.
Web Motor Interval: Pre-idle
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]
010
Adjusts the motor waiting time after the fusing motor idling.
Web Motor Rotation: Pre-idle
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]
011
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the fusing idling state.
Tray Lock at Jam
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON
1950*
Not used
D129/D130
5-12
SM
Main SP Tables-2

5.4.1 SP2-XXX: DRUM
2005*
Bias Control
Bias Correction 1
[0.1 to 1 / 0.85 / 0.05 step]
001 Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of VSDP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller
voltage increases by 30 V (e.g., from 500 to 530).
Bias Correction 2
[0.1 to 1 / 0.9 / 0.05 step]
002 Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
voltage decreases by 30 V (absolute value).
Bias Adjustment 1
[1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 vol]
003
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction.
[1000 to 2000 / 2000 / 10 vol]
Service
Tables
Bias Adjustment 2
004
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction.
Bias Adjustment 3
[0 to 100 / 30 / 10 vol]
005
Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.
Erase Margin Adjustment

Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
2103*
L Size: 297.1 mm or more (length)

M Size: 216.1 to 297 mm (length)
S Size: 216 mm or less (length)
001 Leading Edge
[0 to 9 / 3 / 0.1mm]
002 Trailing Edge
003 Left
SM
[0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
5-13
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-2
004 Right
005 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Plain
[0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Plain
[0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Plain
[0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Duplex Left: Plain

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Duplex Right: Plain
010 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Thick
[0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
011 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Thick
[0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
012 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Thick
[0 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1mm]
013 Duplex Left: Thick

[0 to 1.5 / 0.1 / 0.1mm]
014 Duplex Right: Thick
LD Power Adjustment
2105*
Adjusts the LD power for each mode.

Each LD power setting is decided by the process control.
001 LD1: Copy
[50 to 79 / -24 (C2b), 5 (C2c) /1 ]
002 LD2: Copy
003 LD1: Printer/Fax
[50 to 79 / -44 (C2b), -25 (C2c)/1 ]
2109
Test Pattern
001 Pattern Selection
D129/D130
[0 to 24 / 0 /1 ]
Test pattern of the GAVD
5-14
SM
Main SP Tables-2
0: None
13: Independent Pattern (4 dot)
1: Vertical Line (1 dot)
14: Trimming Area
15: Hounds Tooth Check (Vertical)
3: Horizontal Line (1 dot)
16: Hounds Tooth Check (Horizontal)
17: Black Band (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line
18: Black band (Vertical)
6: Grid Horizontal Line
19: Checker Flag Pattern
7: Grid pattern small
20: Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8: Grid Pattern Large
21: Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9: Argyle Pattern Small
22: Two Beam Density Pattern
10: Argyle Pattern Large
23: Full Dot Pattern
11: Independent pattern (1 dot)
24:All white Pattern
[0 to 15 / 15 /1 ]
002 Density
Set the density of the test pattern which is output in

SP2109-001. This SP is not used for the Grayscale
patterns.
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after
replacing the development unit with another development unit that contains
toner.
[1 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 ]
2220*
1.
Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit
and the machine that you are going to move it to.
2.
Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit
into SP2-220.
3.
After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220
back to the original value.
SM
5-15
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Vref Setting
Main SP Tables-2
Reverse Interval Drum,Transfer
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheets]
Adjusts the threshold for the reverse rotation of the drum and
2221*
development/transfer motors. This helps the drum and transfer belt cleaning
operations. This reverse rotation will interrupt a multiple printing job.
TD Sensor Initial Setting
Initialization
Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to
enter the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the
edge of the developer package.) This SP mode controls the voltage applied
2801
to the TD sensor to make the TD sensor output about 3.0 V. Press

"Execute" to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor output voltage is
displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or
adding new developer.
[0 = OFF, 1= ON]
2960*
Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated.
Grayscale Limit (SSP)

Controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC. The
2972*
halftone density is detected by the ID sensor, and the machine adjusts the
intensity of the LD beam according to the upper/lower limit setting.
Upper Limit
[0 to 100 / 58 (C2b), 63 (C2c)/ 1vol ]
Defines the upper limit for grayscale.

001 A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale.
If the image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark
areas, reduce this value to make the borders clearer.
Lower Limit
[0 to 100 / 52 (C2b), 57 (C2c) / 1vol ]
002 Defines the lower limit for grayscale.

A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the
scale.
D129/D130
5-16
SM
Main SP Tables-2
Grayscale Cycle (SSP)

2973*
[0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 sheets ]
Set s the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the

OPC. If the number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if
the door is opened and closed, charge correction is executed.
2974*
Image Density
Adjustment Mode
[1 to 5 / 3 / 1 ]
001 Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and
ID sensor output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.
Charge Counter
[0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 sheets ]
Set the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before
the charge input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in
2980*
the polarity of the carrier.

The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually
increase after a specified number of copies can compensate for this effect.
SM
5-17
D129/D130
Service
Tables
decrease and cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to
Main SP Tables-3

5.5.1 SP3-XXX: PROCESS
3001
P Sensor Setting
Current
[0 to 43 / 13 / 0.1 mA ]
001* Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call
error after clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
Initialization
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum
002 (VSG) is adjusted automatically to 4.0 0.2 V.
Press "Execute" to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the
ID sensor, replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM.
3045*
Toner End Setting DFU

001 ON/OFF
3902*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=Off, 1=On
New PCU Detection (Not used)
ON/OFF Setting
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: On, 1: Off
001
Turns on or off the new unit detection for the transfer belt unit and fusing
unit.
D129/D130
5-18
SM
Main SP Tables-4

5.6.1 SP4-XXX: SCANNER
Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment

4008*
Adjusts the magnification of the sub scan direction during scanning.

Changing this value changes the scanner motor speed.
[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1% ]
L-Edge Regist Adjustment

4010*
Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning.

[2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 mm ]
As you enter a negative value, the image moves toward the leading edge.
Scanner Erase Margin: Scale

Adjusts scanning margins for the leading and trailing edges (sub scan) and
Service
Tables
right and left edge (main scan).

4012*
Do not adjust unless the customer desires a scanner margin

greater than the printer margin.
These settings are adjusted to erase shadows caused by the gap

between the original and the scale of the scanner unit.
SM
001 Book: Leading Edge
[0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
002 Book: Trailing Edge
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 Book: Left
[0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
004 Book: Right
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 ADF: Leading Edge
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
007 ADF: Right
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
008 ADF: Left
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
5-19
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
Scanner Free Run

4013
Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off.
001 Lamp: OFF
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Lamp: ON
0=Off, 1=On
4014
Scan
001 HP Detection Enable
Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
002 HP Detection Disable
Scanner free run without HP sensor check.
Dust Check
This function checks the narrow scanning glass of the ADF for dust that can
4020*
cause black lines in copies. If dust is detected a system banner message is

displayed, but processing does not stop.
Dust Detect: On/Off
Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF
when the original size is detected before a job starts. This function can
detect dust on the white plate above the scanning glass, as well as dust on
the glass. Sensitivity of the level of detection is adjusted with SP4020-2.
001 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Off. No dust warning.
1: On. Dust warning. This warning does not stop the job.
Before switching this setting on, clean the ADF scanning glass and
the white plate above the scanning glass.
002 Dust Detect: Lvl
D129/D130
5-20
SM
Main SP Tables-4
Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP
is available only after SP4020-1 is switched on.
[0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise
the setting to increase the level of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when
you see not black streaks in copies, lower the setting.
Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass
by the originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing
originals, this is not detected and the warning remains on.
Dust Reject: Lvl

003 Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: Weakest, 2: Weak, 3: Strong, 4: Strongest
APS Operation Check

Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original
sensors. (
"Input Check Table" in "Main SP Tables-9")

Service
Tables
4301
APS Min. Size

Determines whether an original of non-standard size is detected as A5/HLT
size by the APS sensor.
4303
0: No original
1: A5 - lengthwise (SEF)
2: A5 - Sideways (LEF)
If "0" is selected, "Cannot detect original size" will be displayed.
SM
5-21
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
8K/16K Detection
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Normal Detection ( the machine detects A4/LT size as A4 or LT,
4305
depending on the paper size setting)

1: A4-sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-sideways A4-Lenghtwise
3: 8K 16K
4308*
Scan Size Detection

Detection ON/OFF
Selects whether the machine detects the original size.
001 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 step]
0: OFF
1: ON
4309*
Scan Size Detect: Setting

Original Density Thresh
001 Adjust the density for the scan size detection.
[0 to 255 / 18 / 1 step]
Detection Time
002 Adjust the detection time for scan size detection.
[20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec]
Lamp ON: Delay Time
003 Adjust the timing when to lamp on for the scan size detection.
[0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec]
LED PWM Duty
004 Adjust the light value for the scan size detection.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 %]
D129/D130
5-22
SM
Main SP Tables-4
Scan Size Detect Value
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
4310
Displays the scanned data for the original width detection.
001 S1: R
002 S1: G
003 S1: B
004 S2: R
005 S2: G
006 S2: B
007 S3: R
008 S3: G
009 S3: B
Each detection point (S1, S2, S3) in SP4310 is as follows.

Service
Tables
SM
5-23
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
IPU Test Pattern

Selects the IPU test Pattern.
[0 to 28 / 0 / 1]
0: Scanned image
15: Gray pattern (1)
1: Gradation main scan A
2: Gradation main scan B
3: Gradation main scan C
18: Shading pattern
4: Gradation main scan D
19: Thin line pattern
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
Test
6: Grid pattern (1)
21: Scanned + Gray scale
Pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
8: Gradation K
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
9: Gray patch 16
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
10: Gray patch 16 (1)
25: Gray Scale 18 text
26: Gray Scale 18 photo
12: Gray patch 64
13: Grid pattern (2)
4417
14: Color patch K
4429*
Select Copy Data Security

001 Copying
002 Scanning
003 Fax Operation
D129/D130
Adjusts the density of the embedded message

with the copy data security unit.
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]
3: Darkest density
5-24
SM
Main SP Tables-4
4450
Scan Image Path Selection

Black Subtraction ON/OFF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0=OFF, 1=ON
001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=OFF, 1=ON
002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
Printer Vector Correction

4540*
This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4
001-004
RY Phase: Option/R/G/B
005-008
YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012
YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016
GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020
GC Phase: Option/R/G/B
021-024
CG Phase: Option/R/G/B
Specifies the printer vector correction value.
025-028
CB Phase: Option/R/G/B
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
029-032
BC Phase: Option/R/G/B
033-036
BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040
MB Phase: Option/R/G/B
041-044
MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048
RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
SM
5-25
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Colors [R, G, B, Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.
Main SP Tables-4
4600
SBU Version
001 SBU ID
Displays the ID of the SBU.
002 GASBU-N ID
Displays the ID of the GASBU.
003 VSP5100 ID
Displays the ID of the VSP5100.
4602
Scanner Memory Access
001 Scanner Memory Access
4603
Enables the read and write check for the

SBU registers.
AGC Execution
Executes the AGC with the scanner detection.
4609*
Gray Balance Set: R

Book Scan
[-384 to 255 / -46 / 1 digit]
001
Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the red signal in Book Scan.
DF Scan
[-384 to 255 / -46 / 1 digit]
002
Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the red signal in DF Scan.
4610*
Gray Balance Set: G

Book Scan
[-384 to 255 / -20 / 1 digit]
001 Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the green signal in Book
Scan.
DF Scan
[-384 to 255 / -20 / 1 digit]
002 Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the green signal in DF
Scan.
D129/D130
5-26
SM
Main SP Tables-4
4611*
Gray Balance Set: B

Book Scan
[-384 to 255 / -28 / 1 digit]
001 Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the blue signal in Book
Scan.
DF Scan
[-384 to 255 / -28 / 1 digit]
002
Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the blue signal in DF Scan.
4623 Black Level Adj. Display

Latest: RE Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]
001 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in the
SBU (color printing speed).
Latest: RO Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the
4624
Service
Tables
RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
Black Level Adj. Display

Latest: GE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal in
the SBU (color printing speed).
Latest: GO Color
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]
Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the
SM
GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
5-27
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
4625

Latest: BE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the
Latest: BO Color
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]
Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the
BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
Analog Gain Adjust

4628
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
Only for the color scanner
001 Latest: R Color
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
Analog Gain Adjust

4629
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
SP4629-003 and -004 are used only for the color scanner model.
001 Latest: G Color
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
Analog Gain Adjust

4630
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Latest: B Color
D129/D130
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
5-28
SM
Main SP Tables-4
Digital Gain Adjust

4631
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for RE or RO.
001 Latest: RE Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Latest RO Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
Digital Gain Adjust

4632
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for GE or GO.
001 Latest: GE Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Latest: GO Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
Digital Gain Adjust

4633
001 Latest: BE Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Latest: BO Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
Service
Tables
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for BE or BO.
Scan Adjust Error

4645
Displays the error value of the white level or black level adjustment.
001 White level
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Black level
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 digit]
Scanner Hard Error

Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
4647
[0 to 35535 / 0 / 1 ]
Power-ON
0: OK, 1: SBU connection check failure

If the SBU connection check fails, SC144-001, -002 or
-003 occurs.
SM
5-29
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
4654* Black Level Adj. Display

Latest Correct Value: RE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red
signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
Last Correct Value: RO Color
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red
4655*

Last Correct Value: GE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green
Last Correct Value: GO Color
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
4656*

Last Correct Value: BE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue
D129/D130
5-30
SM
Main SP Tables-4
Last Correct Value: BO Color

002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue
Analog Gain Adjust

4658*
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Last Correct Value: R Color
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Analog Gain Adjust

4659*
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Service
Tables
001 Last Correct Value: G Color
Analog Gain Adjust

4660*
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Last Correct Value: B Color
4661*
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Digital Gain Adjust

Last Correct Value: RE Color
001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even
red signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd
SM
5-31
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
4662*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

green signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
4663*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

blue signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
D129/D130
5-32
SM
Main SP Tables-4
4673

Factory Setting: RE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the factory setting value of the 2nd black offset level rough
adjustment for the even red signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
Factory Setting: RO Color
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level rough
adjustment for the odd red signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
4674

Factory Setting: GE Color
Service
Tables
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]

adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
Factory Setting: GO Color
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
SM
5-33
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
4675

Factory Setting: BE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
adjustment for the even blue signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
Factory Setting: BO Color
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
adjustment for the odd blue signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
Analog Gain Adjust

4677
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
001 Factory Setting: R
[ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
Analog Gain Adjust

4678
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.
001 Factory Setting: G
[ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
Analog Gain Adjust

4679
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
001 Factory Setting: B
D129/D130
[ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
5-34
SM
Main SP Tables-4
4680*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for odd Red.
4681*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Service
Tables
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for odd Green.
4682*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

002
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for odd Blue.
SM
5-35
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
Scan Image Density Adjustment

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
4688*
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode
is different.
[80 to 120 / 98 / 1 % ]
White Level Peak Read

4690
Displays the peak level of the white level scanning.
001 RE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 RO

4691
001 GE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 GO

4692
001 BE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 BO
Black Level Peak Read

4693
Displays the peak level of the black level scanning.
001 RE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 RO
D129/D130
5-36
SM
Main SP Tables-4

4694
Display the peak level of the black level scanning.
001 GE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 GO

4695
001 BE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 BO
4802
DF Shading FreeRun
001 Lamp OFF
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
Executes the scanner free run of the shading
movement with exposure lamp on or off.
002 Lamp ON
Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free

Service
Tables
run continues.
Moves the exposure lamp a short distance

4804
Home Position
and immediately returns it to its home

position.
Touch [Execute] > "Completed" > [Exit]
Carriage Save
Moves the exposure lamp a short distance away from the home position and
stops.
4806
Do SP4804 to return the exposure lamp to its home position.
This SP is done before shipping the machine to another location.
Cycling the machine power off/on also returns the exposure lamp to
its home position.
SM
5-37
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
SBU Test Pattern Change

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
1: Grid pattern
4807
2: Gradation main scan

3: Gradation sub scan
4 to 250: Default (Scanning Image)
4808
Factory Setting Input

002* Execution Flag
Man Gamma Adj (DFU)

Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black in Photo mode or
4918
Letter mode.
Touch [Change] to open the printer gamma screen.
Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen.
4954
Read/Restore Std
Read New Chart
001
Execute the scanning of the A4 chart.
Recall Prev Chart
002
Clear the data of the scanned A4 chart.
Read Std Chart
003
Execute the scanning of the A4 standard chart.
Set Std Chart
004
Overwrite the standard data.
Read/Restore Std
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005* Adjusts chromaticity rank. When replacing the scanner lamp, select a
number according to the barcode on the new scanner lamp.
D129/D130
5-38
SM
Main SP Tables-4
4991
IPU Image Pass Selection DFU

RGB Frame Memory
Selects the image path. Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key
pad.
[0 to 11 / 2/ 1]
0
Scanner input RGB images
Scanner I/F RGB images
RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset

ON)
Shading data
Inner pattern data: Gray scale
RGB images done by Line skipping correction
RGB images done by Digital AE
RGB images done by Vertical line correction
RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction
RGB image done by Filtering correction
10
RGB images done by Full color ADS
11
RGB image done by Color correction
SM
5-39
Service
Tables
001
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-4
4993*
High Light Correction

Selects the Highlight correction level.
001 Sensitivity Selection
[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
002 Range Selection
[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction
4994*
Text/Photo Detect Level Adj.

High Compression PDF
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression
PDF.
001 [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 ]
0: Text priority
1: Normal
2: Photo priority
D129/D130
5-40
SM
Main SP Tables-5

5.7.1 SP5-XXX: MODE
mm/inch Display Selection
0: Europe/Asia (mm)
1: North America (inch)
5024*
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
5047*
Paper Display
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
Display IP Address
5055*
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.

Service
Tables
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5056*
Coverage Counter Display

Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5061*
Toner Remaining Icon Display Change

Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not display, 1: Display
SM
5-41
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
5071
Set Bypass Paper Size Display

Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up
prevents mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation
001 panel and an actual paper size on the by-pass tray.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
5104*
A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)

Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except
from the bypass tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are
counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.
5113*
Optional Counter Type

Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4) Japan only
001 2: Key Card Down
3: Pre-paid Card
4: Coin Rack
5: MF Key Card
11: Exp. Key Card (Add)
12: Exp. Key Card (Deduct)
External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: "SDK" refers to software on an SD card.
002 [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
D129/D130
5-42
SM
Main SP Tables-5
5114*
Optional Counter I/F

MF Key Card Extension
001 Use this SP and change the setting to "1" only when the "5" (MF Key Card)
is selected with SP5113-001.
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning accounting)]
Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only
5118*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Release for normal operation [Default]
1: Prohibit access to machine
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal

Selects if mode clear is done for an optional counter when an optional
5120*
counter is removed.
0: Yes. (Always mode clear)
1: StandBy. (Mode clear before/after a job)
Service
Tables
2: No. (No mode clear)
Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or
5121*
at paper exit.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Feed, 1: Exit
F Size Original Setting

Selects F size original setting.
5126*
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: 8 1/2 x 13 (Foolscap)
1: 8 1/4 x 13 (Folio)
2: 8 x 13 (F)
SM
5-43
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
APS Mode
5127*
Selects whether the APS function is enabled or disabled with the contact of
a pre-paid card or coin lock.
0: Disable (APS active) [Default], 1: Enable (APS not active)
Paper Size Type Selection

Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper.
5131*
[0 to 2 / - / 1 step]
0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the
archive files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result.
Bypass Length Setting

Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.
5150
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off [Default]
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
App. Switch Method

Determines whether the application screen is switched with a hardware
5162*
switch or software switch.

0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off

Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device.
5167*
This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted for by an external

accounting device.
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
D129/D130
5-44
SM
Main SP Tables-5
CE Login
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode
5169*
with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
Paper Size Setting

5181*
SM
001 Tray 1: 1
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
002 Tray 1: 2
0: A3, 1: DLT
003 Tray 1: 3
0: B4, 1: LG
004 Tray 1: 4
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
005 Tray 2: 1
006 Tray 2: 2
0: A3, 1: DLT
007 Tray 2: 3
0: B4, 1: LG
008 Tray 2: 4
009 Tray 3: 1 (Tandem)
010 Tray 3: 2
0: A3, 1: DLT
011 Tray 3: 3
0: B4, 1: LG
012 Tray 3: 4
013 Tray 4: 1
014 Tray 4: 2
0: A3, 1: DLT
015 Tray 4: 3
0: B4, 1: LG
016 Tray 4: 4
017 LCT
[0 to 2 / - / 1 ] 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF
5-45
Service
Tables
Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 1 / - / 1]
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
RK4: Setting (Japan only)

Enable or distance the prevention for RK4 (Accounting device)
5186
Disconnection. If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is

set to "1 (Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and
stops.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Copy Nv Version
5188*
Displays the NV version on the controller.
External Controller Info. Settings

5193
DFU
Limitless SW
5195*
DFU
Paper Exit After Staple End

This SP determines whether a machine can continue to output paper if
5199
staple supply runs cannot continue to operate.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF. Paper cannot exit if no staples are available.
1: ON. Paper can exit with no staples.
D129/D130
5-46
SM
Main SP Tables-5
5212*
Page Numbering
Horizontally positions the page numbers
003
Duplex Printout Left/Right
printed on both sides during duplexing.
Position
[10 to 10/ 0 / 1 mm]

0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
Vertically positions the page numbers printed
004
Duplex Printout High/Low
on both sides during duplexing.
Position
[10 to 10/ 0 / 1 mm]

0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
5302*
Set Time
Time Difference
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory
before delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[1440 to 1440 / - / 1 min.]
Service
Tables
Japan: +540 (Tokyo)

002 NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
KO: +540 (Korea)
SM
5-47
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
5307
Summer Time
[0 to 1 / 1 (NA/EU), 0 (ASIA) / 1 /step]
Setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start)

Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour
/step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]

For example: 3500010
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March.
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
004

The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
D129/D130
5-48
SM
Main SP Tables-5
User Code Count Clear

5404
Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict
the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5413
Lockout Setting
Lockout On/Off
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: OFF, 1:ON
001
Turns on or off the account lock for the local address book account.
Lockout Threshold
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
002
Sets the maximum trial times for accessing the address book account.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Lockout is not cancelled.)
Cancellation On/Off
003
1: ON (Lockout is cancelled if a user ID and

password are correctly entered after the lockout
function has been executed and a specific time has
passed.)
Cancellation Time
[1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min]
004 Sets the interval of the retry for accessing the local address book account
after the lockout function has been executed.
This setting is enabled only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (ON).
SM
5-49
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Turns on or off the cancellation function of the account lockout.
Main SP Tables-5
5414
Access Mitigation
Mitigation ON / OFF
Permits or does not permit consecutive access to the machine with the
001 same ID and password.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Permitted)
1: ON (Not permitted)
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the prohibiting time for consecutive access to the machine with the
same ID and password.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min]
5415*
Password Attack
Permissible Number
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 times]
001 Sets the threshold number of attempts to attack the system with random
passwords to gain illegal access to the system.
Detect Time
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
002
Sets a detection time to count a password attack.
5416*
Access Information
Access User Max Num
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]
001 Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and password attack
detection function.
Access Password Num
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]
002 Sets the number of passwords for the access exclusion and password
attack detection function.
Monitor interval
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]
003
Sets the interval of watching out for user information and passwords.
D129/D130
5-50
SM
Main SP Tables-5
5417
Access Attack
Access Permissible number
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1]
001
Sets a limit on access attempts to prevent password cracking.
Access Detect Time
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]
002
Sets a detection time to count password cracking.
Productivity Fall Weight
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec]
003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive
number of access attempts have been detected.
Attack Max Num
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
004 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to
slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access
attempts have been detected.
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

5420*
These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
001 Copy
Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the copy application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
011 Document Server

before a user can use the document server.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
021 Fax

before a user can use the fax application.
SM
5-51
D129/D130
Service
Tables
User Authentication
Main SP Tables-5
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
031 Scanner
before a user can use the scanner

application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
041 Printer

before a user can use the printer application.
051 SDK1
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2

before a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
081 Browser
before a user can use the browser

application.
Authentication Error Code

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 System Log Disp
0: OFF [Default], 1: ON
Determines whether an error code appears in the
system log after a user authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON [Default]
002 Panel Disp
Determines whether an error code appears on the

operation panel after a user authentication failure
occurs.
D129/D130
5-52
SM
Main SP Tables-5
MF KeyCard (Japan only)

Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.
5490
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a user code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user code.
5501*
PM Alarm
PM Alarm Level
001 Sets the PM alarm interval.
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
0: No PM alarm
Original Count Alarm (DFU)
002 Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
If this is "1", the PM alarm function is enabled.
Jam Alarm
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
5504*
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
SM
5-53
D129/D130
Service
Tables
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Main SP Tables-5
Error Alarm
Sets the number of sheets to clear the error alarm counter.
The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a
5505*
set number of copied sheets (for example, default 5000 (C1b) or 10000
(C1c) sheets). The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter
reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 45 (C2b), 50 (C1b/C1.5b), 60 (C2c), 100 (C1c/C1.5c) / 100
copies / step]
5508
CC Call
001 Jam Remains
002 Continuous Jams
003 Continuous Door Open
Enables/disables initiating a call.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Sets the length of time to determine the
011 Jam Detection: Time Length
length of an unattended paper jam.

[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute]
012
Jam Detection Continuous

Count
Sets the number of continuous paper jams

required to initiate a call.
[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time]
Sets the length of time the remains opens
013 Door Open: Time Length
to determine when to initiate a call.

[3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute]
D129/D130
5-54
SM
Main SP Tables-5
SC/Alarm Setting
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when
5515*
an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when
an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call
004 User Call
006 Communication Information Test Call
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF
007 Machine Information Notice
1: ON
008 Alarm Notice

010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
Service
Tables
012 Jam/Door Open Call
Individual PM Part Alarm Call

5516
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call
when one of the SP parts reaches its yield.
001
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
send, 1: Send)
0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
SM
5-55
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Memory Clear
5801
Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these
SP codes, print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear
002 Engine
Initializes items 2 to 15 below.

Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System
003 SCS
Control Service) settings, operation display

coordinates, and ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clr
Initializes the image file system.

(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored
005 MCS
documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
006 Copier application
Initializes all copier application settings.

Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax Application
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook

timer.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
008 Printer Application
the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS

counter.
009 Scanner Application
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the

scanner SP modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and
010 Web Service
thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.

Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
D129/D130
5-56
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings

(IP addresses also), the SmartDeviceMonitor for
011 NCS
Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the

TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
014 Clear DCS Setting
015 Clear UCS Setting
016 MIRS Setting
017 CCS
018 SRM Memory Clr
SM
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for

Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)
settings.
019 LCS
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
020 Web Uapli
Initializes the web user application settings.
021 ECS
Initializes ECS (Engine Control Service).
023 AICS
Initializes the AICS settings.
5-57
Service
Tables
012 R-FAX
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
FreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
The correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is
5802*
not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode
for a test.
001 TRAY1:A4LEF
002 TRAY2:A3
003 TRAY2:A4SEF
Input Check
5803
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. (
"Input Check
Table" in "Main SP Tables-9")
Output Check
5804
Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes. (

"Output Check Table" in "Main SP Tables-9")
Anti-Condensation Heater
5805
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0:OFF / 1:ON
5810
SC Reset
Resets all level A service call conditions, such as
001 Fusing SC Reset
fusing errors. To clear the service call, touch

"Execute" on the LCD, then turn the main power
switch off/on.
D129/D130
5-58
SM
Main SP Tables-5
MachineSerial
5812*
002 Display
Displays the machine serial number.
003 BCU
Inputs the serial number.
005 FRAM
Displays the FRAM serial number.
Service Tel. No. Setting
001 Service
002 Facsimile
003 Supply
004 Operation
5816
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a

service call condition occurs.)
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the
Counter Report (UP mode).
Inputs the telephone number of the supplier displayed on the
user mode screen.
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be
displayed on the user mode screen.
Service
Tables
5811
Remote Service
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to 2.
SM
5-59
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registration has
been completed.
Communication Test Call
004 This SP issues a test call from a GW machine to determine whether it can
communicate successfully with the call center after it has been set up for
NRS. Successful return will be in the range 0 to 99.
Device Information Call
005 This SP issues a call to notify the NRS device information to the call center.
Successful return will be in the range 0 to 99.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
D129/D130
5-60
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Port 80 Enable
011 Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
@Remote Communication Permission
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 ]
012 0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
2: Partially limited
RFU (Remote Firmware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.
013 [0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.
1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG Error Cause
Service
Tables
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
014 0: Normal
1: Fails to reflect the client/server certificate settings by network failure to
reboot. Transition to 0 on restarting the machine.
RCGC Registed
021 This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.
023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
SM
5-61
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Cert. Expire Timing DFU

061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or
display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set
063 up Embedded RC Gate-N.
The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond

the 128 character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC

report.
Proxy Port Number

This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to
064 set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
Proxy User Name

This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

beyond the 31st character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC

report.
D129/D130
5-62
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character


report.
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
4
067
11
12
The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.

The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified
of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
failed update.
Service
Tables
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
update is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed
13
successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update

request from the rescue GW URL.
14
15
SM
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
the successful completion of this event.
5-63
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
16
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
17
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
completed, but a certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
18
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
0
068
Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.

Request for certification update in progress. The current certification
has expired.
An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual
certification.
Notification of a common certification without ID2.
Notification that no certification was issued.
Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up ID
The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status
Displays the status of the firmware update.

This SP setting determines if the operator can
confirm the previous version of the firmware
before the firmware update execution. If the
085 Firm Up User Check
option to confirm the previous version is selected,

a notification is sent to the system manager and
the firmware update is done with the firmware
files from the URL.
D129/D130
5-64
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Allows the service technician to confirm the size

086 Firmware Size
of the firmware data files during the firmware

update execution.
087 CERT: Macro Ver.
088 CERT: PAC Ver.
Displays the macro version of the @Remote

certification.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification.
Spaces are displayed as underscores (_).
089 CERT: ID2 Code
Asteriskes (*) indicate that no @Remote

certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".
Displays the common name of the @Remote
certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
090 CERT: Subject

Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote
Service
Tables

Displays serial number for the @Remote
091 CERT: SerialNo.
certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no

@Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the
092 CERT: Issuer
@Remote certification. CN = the following 30

bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no @Remote
certification exists.
093 CERT: Valid Start
094 CERT: Valid End
Displays the start time of the period for which the

current @Remote certification is enabled.
Displays the end time of the period for which the
Server CN Check
096
Not used
SM
5-65
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
GW Host
096
Not used
GW URL Path
097
Not used
Debug RescueG/WURL Set
099
Not used
CERT: Encrypt Level
Displays the encryption level for the NRS certificate.
102* [1 or 2 / 1 / ]
1: Indicates that the certificate encryption level is 512 bits.
2: Indicates that the certificate encryption level is 2048 bits.
Selection Country
150
Not used
Line Type Automatic Judgment
151
Not used
Line Type Judgment Result
152
Not used
Selection Dial / Push
153
Not used
Outside Line Outgoing Number
154
Not used
Dial Up User Name
156
Not used
D129/D130
5-66
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Dial Up Password
157
Not used
Local Phone Number
161
Not used
Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming
162
Not used
Access Point
163
Not used
Line Connecting
164
Not used
Modem Serial No.
173
Not used
Retransmission Limit
Service
Tables
174
Not used
RCG-C M DebugBitSW
186
Not used
FAX TX Priority
187
Not used
SM
5-67
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Manual Polling
200
Executes the manual polling.
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
201 In this status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device
cannot communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate
cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
202 Letter Number
203 Confirm Execute
Allows entry of the request number needed for the

Embedded RCG Gate.
Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote
Gateway.
204 Confirm Result

Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
D129/D130
5-68
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in
answer to the confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is
registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute
Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause
Illegal Modem
208
Parameter
Code
Meaning
-11001
Chat parameter error
-11002
Chat execution error
-11003
Unexpected error
-12002
Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting
-12003
-12004
SM
Inquiry, registration attempted without

acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution
of an inquiry and no previous registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for
certification and ID2.
5-69
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Error Code
Main SP Tables-5
@Remote communication is prohibited.

-12005
The device has an Embedded RC

gate-related problem.
A confirmation request was made after
-12006
the confirmation had been already

completed.
The request number used at registration
-12007
was different from the one used at

confirmation.
-12008
-12009
-12010
Update certification failed because

mainframe was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual
certification and NVRAM
Certification area is not initialized.
Attempted dial up overseas without the
-2385
correct international prefix for the

telephone number.
Error Caused by
-2387
Not supported at the Service Center
Response from GW
-2389
Database out of service
-2390
Program out of service
-2391
Two registrations for same device
-2392
Parameter error
-2393
RCG device not managed
-2394
Device not managed
-2395
Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396
Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2397
Incorrect ID2 format
-2398
Incorrect request number format
URL
D129/D130
5-70
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG

209 Instl Clear
Gate setup.
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after
this setting has been changed.
250 CommLog Print
5821*
Prints the communication log.
Remote Service Address

Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
002 RCG IP Address
Communication Gate) destination for call

processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1]
Sets the port number of the RCG (Remote
003 RCG Port

[0 to 65535 / 443 / 1]
Sets the URL path of the RCG (Remote
Service
Tables
004 RCG URL Path
[0 to 16 characters / /RCG/services/ /-]
NV-RAM Data Upload

5824
Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card. Push Execute.

Note: When uploading data in this SP mode, the front door must be open.
NV-RAM Data Download

5825
Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After

downloading is completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off
and on.
SM
5-71
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
5828
Network Setting
IPv4 Address (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
001 This SP allows you to check and reset the IPv4 address for Ethernet and
wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
IPv4 Subnet Mask (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
002 This SP allows you to check and reset the IPv4 subnet mask for Ethernet
and wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
IPv4 Default Gateway (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
003 This SP allows you to check and reset the IPv4 default gateway used by the
network for Ethernet and wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
DHCP (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
This SP code allows you check and change the setting that determines
whether the IP address is used with DHCP on an Ethernet or wireless
006 (802.11) LAN network.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not used (manual setting)
1: Used
Active IPv4 Address
021 This SP allows you to check the IPv4 address that was used when the
machine started up with DHCP.
Active IPv4 Subnet Mask
022 This SP allows you to check the IPv4 subnet mask setting that was used
when the machine started up with DHCP.
D129/D130
5-72
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Active IPv4 Gateway Address

023 This SP allows you to check the IPv4 default gateway setting that was used
Enables and disables bi-directional
050
1284 Compatibility
(Centro)
communication on the parallel connection

between the machine and a computer.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
0:Off, 1: On
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284
052 ECP (Centro)
Mode) for data transfer.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Switches the job spooling on and off.
065 Job Spooling
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No spooling, 1: Spooling enabled
This SP determines whether the job interrupted
066
Job Spooling Clear: Start

Time
This SP operates only when SP5828-065 is set

to "1".
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: OFF Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: ON Clears spooled job.
This SP determines whether job spooling is
enabled or disabled for each protocol. This is a
Job Spooling (Protocol)
8-bit setting.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
069
SM
LPR
BMLinks (Japan Only)
FTP (Not Used)
DIPRINT
IPP
Reserved (Not Used)
SMB
Reserved (Not Used)
5-73
D129/D130
Service
Tables
at power off is resumed at the next power on.
Main SP Tables-5
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP

090
TELNET
is disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
(0:OFF 1:ON)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
091
Web
(0:OFF 1:ON)
Disables or enables the Web operation.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
This is the IPv6 local address referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11) in the format:
145
Active IPv6 Link Local

Address
"Link-Local address" + "Prefix Length"

The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These
notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6
Addresses " below this table.
147
149
151
153
155
Active IPv6 Stateless

Address 1
Address 2
These SPs are the IPv6 stateless addresses (1

to 5) referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11b) in the format:
Address 3
"Stateless Address" + "Prefix Length"

Address 4

configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.

Address 5
IPv6 Manual Address
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or
wireless LAN (802.11) in the format:
156 "Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"

The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses"
below this table.
D129/D130
5-74
SM
Main SP Tables-5
IPv6 Gateway Address

This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless
158 LAN (802.11). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8
blocks of 16 bits each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6
Addresses" below this table.
Note: IPV6 Addresses
Ethernet and the Wireless LAN (802.11) reference the IPV6 "Link-Local address + Prefix
Length". The IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of 16 bits:
aaaa:bbbb:cccc:dddd:eeee:ffff:gggg:hhhh:
The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte (Prefix Range: 0x0 to 0x80). The initial
setting is 0x40 (64).
For example, the data: "2001123456789012abcdef012345678940h" is expressed:
"2001:1234:5678:9012:abcd:ef01:2345:6789": prefixlen 64
However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the following rules.
Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses
1.
The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the
following characters:
2.
Service
Tables
0123456789abcdefABCDEF
A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character.
fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e
3.
The notations can be abbreviated by eliminating zeros where the MSB and digits
following the MSB are zero. The example in "2" above, then, becomes
fe80:0:0:0207:40ff:0:340e
4.
Sections where only zeros exist can be abbreviated with double colons (::). This
abbreviation can be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros (but
this can be done only at one point in the address). The example in "2" and "3" above
then becomes:
fe80::207:40ff:0:340e (only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as "::")
-orfe80:0:0:0:207:40ff::340e (only the last null set before "340e" is abbreviated as "::")
SM
5-75
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6

161
IPv6 Stateless Auto
stateless.
Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
1: Enable, 0: Disable
Web Item visible

Displays or does not display the Web system items.
236 [0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Web shopping link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link
237 page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
Web supplies Link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top
238 page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Web Link1 Name
239 This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
Web Link1 URL
240 his SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
D129/D130
5-76
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Web Link1 visible

Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web
241 system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name
Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL
Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible
Same as "-241"
DHCPv6 DUID
Sets DHCPv6 DUID.
249 [0000000000000000000000000000h to
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh /
0000000000000000000000000000h / -]
5832
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
SM
5-77
D129/D130
Service
Tables
HDD
Main SP Tables-5
010 HDD Formatting (Log)

011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
5836*
Capture Setting
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot
001 be initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or
002 updated from the initial system screen.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
075 Reduction for Printer B&W
0 1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3
078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8

[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
082 Format for Copy B&W Text
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2:
TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
D129/D130
5-78
SM
Main SP Tables-5
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
083 Format Copy B&W Other
TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
085 Format for Printer B&W
TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Default for JPEG
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document
091 management server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board)
is installed.
Sets the IP address for the primary capture
101 Primary srv IP address
server. This is basically adjusted by the

remote system.
103 Primary srv port number
104 Primary srv URL path
This is basically adjusted by the remote

system.
Service
Tables
102 Primary srv scheme
system.
system.
Sets the IP address for the secondary capture
111 Secondary srv IP address

remote system.
112 Secondary srv scheme
113 Secondary srv port number
114 Secondary srv URL path
SM

system.
system.
system.
5-79
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
120 Default Reso Rate Switch
122 Reso: Copy (Mono)

system.
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi
124 Reso: Print (Mono)
system.
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
126 Reso: Fax (Mono)
system.
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for BW fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi
127 Reso: Scan (Color)
system.
[0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.
128 Reso: Scan (Mono)
system.
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by

the remote system.
D129/D130
5-80
SM
Main SP Tables-5
141 All Addr Info Switch
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off all the address information transmission for the captured
resources.
142 Stand-by Doc Max Number
[10 to 9999 / 2000 / 1/step]
Selects the maximum number of captured documents to be transmitted to

the document server.
5840*
IEEE 802.11
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This
006 bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 11 (NA), 13 (EU), 14 (JPN) / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN.
007 This bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Transmission speed
[0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix
008 0 x 0F - 36M Fix
0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix
0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 0D - 12M Fix
0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
0 x 0B - 9M Fix
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
SM
5-81
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Channel MIN
Main SP Tables-5
WEP Key Select

Selects the WEP key.
011 Bit 1 and 0
00: Key1, 01: Key2 (Reserved),
10: Key3 (Reserved), 11: Key4(Reserved)
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
RTS/CTS Thresh
013 Adjusts the RTS/CTS threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.
[0 to 3000 / 2432 / 1]
Fragment Thresh
042 Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.
[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
11g CTS to Self
043 Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
11g Slot Time
044 Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
WPA Debug Lvl
045 Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application.
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
D129/D130
5-82
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Supply Name Setting

5841*
Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
007 OrgStamp
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2
013 StapleStd3
014 StapleStd4
021 StapleBind1
022 StapleBind2
023 StapleBind3
USB
Service
Tables
5844
Transfer Rate
001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
[0 x 01 or 0 x 04 / 0 x 04 /-]
0 x 01 [Full Speed], 0 x 04 [Auto Change]
Vendor ID
002 Sets the vendor ID:
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] (DFU)
Product ID
003 Sets the product ID.
SM
5-83
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Device Release No.

Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999 / 100 / 1] (DFU)
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal
number recognized as the BCD.
005 Fixed USB Port
This SP standardizes for common use the model name and serial number
for USB PnP (Plug & Play). It determines whether the driver requires
re-installation.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
006 PnP Model Name
This SP sets the model name to be used by the USB PnP when "Function
Enable (Level 2) is set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name
(SP5844-5).
Default: Laser Printer (up to 20 characters allowed).
007 PnP Serial Number
This SP sets the serial number to be used by the USB PnP when "Function
Enable (Level 2)
set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name (SP5844-5).
Default: None (up to 12 characters allowed for entry).
Make sure that this entry is the same as the serial number in use.
At initialization the serial number generated from the model name is

used, not the setting of this SP code.
D129/D130
At times other than initialization, the value set for this SP code is used.
5-84
SM
Main SP Tables-5
100 Notify Unsupport

This SP determines whether an alert message appears on the control panel
when a USB device (unsupported device) that cannot use an A-connector is
connected.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Function enable
1: Function disable
An unsupported device is a device that cannot use the functions of the

USB device. For example, a USB mouse cannot be used even if it
connected.
If the PictBridge option is not mounted, even if a digital camera is

connected it cannot be used because it is an unsupported device.
Delivery Server Setting

5845*
These are delivery server settings.
FTP Port No.
001
Service
Tables
[0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1]
IP Address (Primary)
002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under
the transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255]
Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a
006 test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and
an external device.
[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 sec]
IP Address (Secondary)
Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary
008 delivery server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address,
and does not refer to the DNS setting.
[Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255]
SM
5-85
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Delivery Server Model

Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O
device.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 step]
009 0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
010 Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
011 These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of
registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
013 Server Scheme (Primary)
014 Server port Number (Primary)
[1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
015 Server URL Path (Primary)

016 Server Scheme (Secondary)
017 Server Port Number(Secondary)
[1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
018 Server URL Path (Secondary)
D129/D130
5-86
SM
Main SP Tables-5
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
Rapid Sending Control
022
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
error.
5846*
UCS Setting
Machine ID (for Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The
001 value is only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (for Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
002 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery
server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again
automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Service
Tables
Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
003 [2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 step]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
006 the delivery server address book.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step]
0: No retries
SM
5-87
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Delivery Server Retry Times

007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
the delivery server address book.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1step]
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
008 Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about
the users of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 step]
LDAP Search Timeout
010 Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1 to 255 / 60 /1 step]
WSD Maximum Entries
020 WSD (Web Services on Devices) is the Microsoft standard for connectivity
to web-service enabled devices.
[50 to 250 / 250 / 1]
Folder Auth Change
This SP determines whether the user login information (Login User name
and Password) or address (destination setting in the address book for
Scan-to-SMB) is used to permit folder access. The machine must be cycled
021 off/on for this setting to take effect if it is changed.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Login User
Uses operator login information (initial value of main machine)
1: Destination
Uses address authorization information
Initial Value of Upper Limit Count
022
[0 to 999999 / 500 / 1]
D129/D130
5-88
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Addr Book Migration (USB -> HDD)

This SP moves the address book data from the SD card or flash ROM on the
controller board to the HDD. You must cycle the machine off and on after
executing this SP.
1.
Turn the machine off.
2.
Install the HDD.
3.
Turn the machine on.
4.
Do SP5846 040.
040 5.
Turn the machine off/on.
Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the

HDD with the data from the flash ROM on the controller board.
We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD

card with SP5846-051 before you execute this SP.
After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book
data is deleted from the flash ROM. If the operation fails, the data is
not erased from the flash ROM.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However,
the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1.
2.
Install the new HDD.
3.
4.
The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD
automatically. However, at this point the address book can be accessed
by only the system administrator or key operator.
5.
Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes

successfully, any user can access the address book.
SM
5-89
D129/D130
Service
Tables
041 Fill Addr Acl Info.
Main SP Tables-5
Addr Book Media

Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
043
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1
20: HDD
2: SD Slot 2
30: Nothing
4: USB Flash ROM

Initialize All Setting & Addr Book
046
Initializes all settings and the address book.
Initialize Local Address Book
047 Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a
machine managed with UCS.
Initialize Delivery Addr Book
048 Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the
delivery address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize LDAP Addr Book
LDAP address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize All Addr Book
050 Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information
managed by UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system
administrators are not deleted.
Backup All Addr Book
051 Copies all directory information to the SD card. Do this SP before replacing
the controller board or HDD. The operation may not succeed if the controller
board or HDD is damaged.
D129/D130
5-90
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Restore All Addr Book

052 Copies back all directory information from the SD card to the flash ROM or
HDD. Upload the address book from the old flash ROM or HDD with
SP5846-51 before removing it. Do SP5846 52 after installing the new HDD.
Clear Backup Info
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot 2. Deletes
053 only the files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the
card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS
local address book.
Bit
Meaning
Checks both upper/lower case characters
060
Service
Tables
1
Japan Only
SM
--- Not Used ---
--- Not Used ---
--- Not Used ---
--- Not Used ---
5-91
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a

group password policy to control access to the address book.
Complexity Option 2
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case
and defines the length of the password.
063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Complexity Option 3
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and
defines the length of the password.
064 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

D129/D130
5-92
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Complexity Option 4
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and
065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

FTP Auth Port Setting

091 Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the
individual authorization mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1step]
Encryption Start
094 Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the
LDAP server.
Service
Tables
[0 to 255 / 1 ] No default
Rep Resolution Reduction

5847-2 through 5847-6 changes the default settings of image data sent
externally by the Net File page reference function.
5847*
5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
"NetFile" refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC
and the DeskTopBinder software.
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
005 Rate for Printer B&W
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
4: 1/5x
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x1
SM
5-93
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi [0 to 6 / 1 / 1]

Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
021 This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option
installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1step]
Web Service
5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
5848*
Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848-100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control
002 Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4 Bits)
0001: Denies access to

DeskTop Binder.
003 Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 Bits)

004 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits)
007 Acc. Ctrl Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits)
Switches access control on

and off.
011 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
021 Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)

022 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits)
099 Repository: Download Image Setting
D129/D130
5-94
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Specified the max size of

100 Repository: Download Image Max. Size
the image data that the

machine can download/
[1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1 MB]
Setting: Log Type: Job 1

210
No information is available at this time.
211
Setting: Log Type: Access
212
Setting: Primary Srv
213
Setting: Secondary Srv
214
Service
Tables

Setting: Start Time
215
Setting: Interval Time
216
Setting: Timing
217
SM
5-95
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
001 Display
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to

"Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on
the printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
When the total number of pages that are made reaches
003 Total Counter
this value, the current date becomes the 'official'

installation date for this machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
5850*
Address Book Function Japan Only

Replacement of Circuit Classification
The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to
003 switch all at once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for
some reason the G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to
G3.
Bluetooth
5851*
Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0: Public] / [1: Private]
D129/D130
5-96
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Stamp Data Download

Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM
onto the hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is
5853
not done, the user will not have access to the fixed stamps ("Confidential",
"Secret", etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting
the HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
5856
Remote ROM Update

When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE
1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the
machine is cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware
002 using a parallel cable
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
Save Debug Log
Service
Tables
5857
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)

Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until
001 this feature is switched on.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the
002 event selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 / 2 / 1]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
SM
5-97
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies
009 them to the SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can
be copied one by one to each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it
to the SD Card.
010 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can
be copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is
no log on the HDD with no key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data
011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging
012 files generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when
SP5857 010 or 011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
D129/D130
5-98
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Free Space on SD Card

013
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
014 Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared
memory) onto an SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
015 This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information
written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number.
Make HDD Debug
016
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
Make SD Debug
017
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to
5858*
the destination selected by SP5857-002.

SP5858-003 stores one SC specified by number.
001* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
002*
SM
Stores SC codes generated by copier

engine errors.
Controller SC Error (0:OFF
Stores SC codes generated by GW
1:ON)
controller errors.
003* Any SC Error
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1step]
004* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON)
Stores jam errors.
5-99
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Debug Save When
Main SP Tables-5
5859*
Debug Save Key No.

001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
functions that use common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860*
SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail
is not received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply
021 mail.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: No, 1: Yes
D129/D130
5-100
SM
Main SP Tables-5
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement

Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022 validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Select the authentication method for SMPT.
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM_MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit 4 to Bit 7: Not Used
This SP is activated only when SMTP authentication is enabled by

UP mode.
Service
Tables
S/MIME: MIME Header Setting

Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by S/MIME.
026 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
028 S/MIME: Authentication Check
When sending S/MIME mail, specifies whether to check the destination
authentication.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not checked
1: Checked
SM
5-101
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
5870
Common Key Info Writing

Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the
001 Writing
device for @Remote specifications.
003 Initialize
004
Initializes the data area of the common proof for validating.
Writing:
Writes to flash ROM the common proof (2048-bit) for validating
2048bit
the device for @Remote specifications.
SD Card Appli Move

5873
Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see
"SD Card Appli Move" in the chapter "System Maintenance (Main Chapters).
001 Move Exec
Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec
This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
5875
SC Auto Reboot
This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.

[0 to 1/ 0 / 1]
001
Reboot
Setting
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine

issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same
SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
002 Reboot Type
D129/D130
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5-102
SM
Main SP Tables-5
5878
Option Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite
001 Data Overwrite Security
Security option for the copier. For more, see

"DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" in the chapter
"Installation".
Fixed Phase Block Erasing

5881
Detects the Fixed phrase.
5885*
Set WIM Function

Allows or disallows the functions of web image
monitor.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit:
0: Forbid all document server access
1: Forbid user mode access
2: Forbid print function
Service
Tables
020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl
3: Forbid Fax
4: Forbid scan sending
5: Forbid download
6: Forbid delete
7: Forbid guest user
DocSvr Format
50 Selects the display type for the document box list.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
DocSvr Trans
51 Sets the number of documents to be displayed in the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
SM
5-103
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Set Signature
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Signature for each e-mail
100 1: Signature for all e-mails
2: No signature
Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the
WIM when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
Set Encryption
Determines whether the scanned documents with the WIM are encrypted
101 when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200 Detect Mem Leak
Not used
201 DocSvr Timeout
Not used
SD Get Counter
5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory
of the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt)
001 prefixed with the number of the machine.
1.
Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2.
Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
D129/D130
5-104
SM
Main SP Tables-5
Personal Information Protect

Selects the protection level for logs.
5888*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
SDK Application Counter

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
1 SDK-1
2 SDK-2
3 SDK-3
4 SDK-4
5 SDK-5
Service
Tables
6 SDK-6
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name

Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
5907
This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these

names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913*
Switchover Permission Time

Print Application Timer
[3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second step]
002 Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take
control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is
not operating because a key has not been pressed.
SM
5-105
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-5
Copy Server: Set Function
0: ON, 1: OFF
Enable and disable the document server. This is a security measure that
5967*
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable
the new setting.
Cherry Server
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, "Light" or
"Full" (Professional) is installed.
5974*
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Light
1: Full
Device Setting
The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
5985
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
Other network applications than @Remote or

LDAP/NT authentication are not available when
this SP is set to "2". Even though you can
change the initial settings of those network
applications, the settings do not work
002 On Board USB
D129/D130
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5-106
SM
Main SP Tables-5
5987*
Counter Falsification Prevention

This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed. If it is
detected, SC610 occurs.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON
SP Print Mode
5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
001 All ( Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
Service
Tables
007 NIB Summary

008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Print SP
SM
5-107
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-6

5.8.1 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS
ADF Registration Adjust

Adjusts the side-to-side and leading edge registration for simplex and
6006*
duplex original feeding in ARDF mode.

SP6006-5 sets the maximum setting allowed for rear edge erase.
001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front
[3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear
003 Leading Edge Registration
[5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
005 Buckle: Duplex Front
[3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
006 Buckle: Duplex Rear
[2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
007 Rear Edge Erase
[10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
6007
ADF Input Check
001
002
003
Original Length 1 (B5 Detection

Sensor)
Original Length 2 (A4 Detection
Sensor)
Original Length 3 (LG
Detection Sensor)
004 Original Width Sensor 1
0: Paper not detected

1: Paper detected

D129/D130
5-108
SM
Main SP Tables-6
009 Original Set Sensor

010 Separation Sensor
011 Skew Correction Sensor
012 Scan Entrance Sensor
013 Registration Sensor
014 Exit Sensor
016 Lift Up Sensor
017 Inverter Sensor
018 Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
019 Original Set HP Sensor
6008
0: ADF cover closed

1: ADF cover open
0: ADF closed
1: ADF open
1: Paper detected
0: HP (Pick-up roller: Up)
1: Not HP (Pick-up roller: Down)
0: HP (Stopper: UP)
1: Not HP (Stopper: Down)
Service
Tables
015 Feed Cover Sensor
ADF Output Check

001 Pick-up Motor Forward
002 Pick-up Motor Reserve
003 Feed Motor Forward
004 Feed Motor Reserve
005 Relay Motor Forward
007 Inverter Motor Forward
008 Inverter Motor Reserve
011 Inverter Solenoid
012 Stamp
SM
5-109
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-6
013 Fan Motor
ADF FreeRun
Performs an ARDF free run in duplex mode. Press [ON] to start, press [OFF]
6009
to stop.
Note: This is a general free run controlled from the copier.
001 Free Run: Simplex Motion
002 Free Run: Duplex Motion
003 Free Run: Stamp Motion
ADF Stamp Position Adjust.
[5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 mm step]
6010*
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
Original Size Detect Setting

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since
original sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
(7) 0000 0000 (0)
Different bits are used for detection, depending on the location as shown
below.
Bit
7
6016*
Size
Location
A4 (L)/LT (L)
Japan only
11" x 15"/DLT (L)
DLT (L)/ 11" x 15"
LT (S)/ US Exec (S)
LT (L)/ 8" x 10" (L)
LG (L)/ F4 (L)
A4 (L)/ 16K (L)
8K (L)/ DLT (L)
NA only
EU/AA only
D129/D130
5-110
SM
Main SP Tables-6
DF Magnification Adj.
6017*
[5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1% step]
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for ADF mode.

Use the key to toggle between + and - before entering the value
Skew Correction Moving Setting

Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off.
6020*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Off (only for small original sizes)
1: On (for all original sizes)
Punch Position: Sub Scan

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. (For D636/D637)
001 2-Hole: DOM (Japan)
002 3-Hole: NA
[-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
Service
Tables
003 4-Hole: EU
004 5-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Punch Position: Main Scan

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction. (For D636/D637)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.4 mm]
004 4-Hole: SCAN

005 2-Hole: NA
SM
5-111
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-6
Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.

6130*
Adjusts the paper buckle at the punch unit for each paper size. (For
D636/D637)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.25 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Skew Correction Control

6131*
Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. (For D636/D637)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT SEF
D129/D130
5-112
SM
Main SP Tables-6
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Jogger Fence Fine Adj.

6132*
This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack on the finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher D636/D637. The
adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
Service
Tables
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
SM
5-113
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-6
Staple Position Adjustment

Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (D636/D637).
6133*
+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.

- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
[-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
Saddle Stitch Position Adj.

6134*
Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper
is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher (D637).
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
[-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
003 A4 SEF
004 B5 SEF
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.

- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease
005 DLT SEF

006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
D129/D130
5-114
SM
Main SP Tables-6
Folder Position Adj.

6135*
This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
Booklet Finisher D637.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
[-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
003 A4 SEF
004 B5 SEF

- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
005 DLT SEF

006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
6136*
Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher D637.
[2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
Entrance Sensor
6139
Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet)
finisher. (D588) (
FIN (EUP) INPUT Check

6140
finisher. (D636/D637) (
SM
5-115
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Book Fold Repeat
Main SP Tables-6
FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check

6144
finisher. (D588) (
FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check

6145
Max. Pre-Stack Sheet
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheets step]
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149*
You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding
thick or slick paper.
D129/D130
5-116
SM
Main SP Tables-7

5.9.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG
7401*
Total SC Counter
SC Counter
001 Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred.
This SC counter can be reset by executing SP7807 (SC/Jam Counter
Reset).
Total SC Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of service calls that have occurred.
This SC counter cannot be reset by executing SP7807 (SC/Jam Counter
Reset).
7403*
SC History
Service
Tables
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
SM
5-117
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-7
7502*
Total Paper Jam

Jam Counter
001
Displays the total number of paper jams.
Total Jam Counter
002
Displays the cumulative sum of paper jams.
7503*
Total Original Jam

Original Jam Counter
001
Displays the total number of original jams.
Total Original Counter
002
Displays the cumulative sum of original jams.
013 Bank: Transport Sn 1: On

Total Jams Location
These SPs display the total number of paper jams by location. A "Check-in"
7504*
(paper late) error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the
precise time. A "Check-out" ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper
remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
001 At power On
003 Tray 1: On
004 Tray 2: On
005 Tray 3: On
006 Tray 4: On
007 LCT: On
008 Bypass: On
009 Duplex: On
D129/D130
5-118
SM
Main SP Tables-7

011 Vertical Transport 1: On
017 Registration: On
019 Fusing Exit: On
020 Paper Exit: On
021 Bridge Exit On
022 Bridge Transport: On
024 Junction Gate Sensor: On
025 Duplex Exit: On
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In)
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out)
Service
Tables
051 Vertical Transport 1: Off

053 Bank Transport 1: Off
057 Registration Sensor: Off
058 LCT Feed Sensor: Off
060 Paper Exit: Off
061 Bridge: Exit: Off
062 Bridge: Transport: Off
064 Junction Gate Sensor: Off
065 Duplex Exit: Off
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In)
SM
5-119
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-7

067 Duplex Entrance: Off (Out)
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN
102 Finisher Staple: KIN
103 Finisher Exit: KIN
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP
194 Finisher Staple Exit: EUP
195 Finisher Exit: EUP
198 Finisher Folder: EUP
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP
206 Finisher Punch Motor:EUP
D129/D130
5-120
SM
Main SP Tables-7
Original Jam Detection

Displays the total number of original jams by location. These jams occur
7505
when the original does not activate the sensors. A Check-in ("paper late")
error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time. A
Check-out ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the
sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
001 At Power: On
003 Separation Sensor: On
004 Skew Correction Sensor: On
005 Interval Sensor: On
006 Registration Sensor: On
007 Inverter Sensor: On
008 Original Exit Sensor: On
053 Separation Sensor: Off
Service
Tables
054 Skew Correction Sensor: Off

055 Interval Sensor: Off
057 Inverter Sensor: Off
058 Original Exit Sensor: Off
SM
5-121
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-7
7506*
Jam Count by Paper Size

005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
D129/D130
5-122
SM
Main SP Tables-7
7507*
Plotter Jam History

001 Last
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)

Sample Display:
CODE:007
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Latest 5
where:
007 Latest 6
CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.

SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7502)

DATE is the date the jams occurred.
Size
Code
Size
Code
Size
Code
A4 (S)
05
A3 (L)
84
DLT (L)
A0
A5 (S)
06
A4 (L)
85
LG (L)
A4
B5 (S)
0E
A5 (L)
86
LT (L)
A6
LT (S)
26
B4 (L)
8D
HLT (L)
AC
HLT (S)
2C
B5 (L)
8E
Others
FF
SM
5-123
Service
Tables
010 Latest 9
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-7
7508*
Original Jam History

001 Last
002 Last 1
003 Last 2
Displays the original jam history (the most recent 10 jams).

Sample Display:
CODE:007
004 Last 3
005 Last 4
SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Last 5
where:
007 Last 6
CODE is the SP7505*** number (see above.

008 Last 7
009 Last 8

010 Last 9
Size
Code
Size
Code
Size
Code
A4 (S)
05
A3 (L)
84
DLT (L)
A0
A5 (S)
06
A4 (L)
85
LG (L)
A4
B5 (S)
0E
A5 (L)
86
LT (L)
A6
LT (S)
26
B4 (L)
8D
HLT (L)
AC
HLT (S)
2C
B5 (L)
8E
Others
FF
ROM No./Firmware Version

7801
This SP codes display the firmware versions of all ROMs in the system,
including the mainframe, the ARDF, and peripheral devices.
D129/D130
5-124
SM
Main SP Tables-7
PM Counter Display
7803*
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
Paper
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
001
Displays the paper counter (pages)
Page: PCD
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
002
Displays the PCD (Drum and Development unit) counter (pages)
Page: Transfer
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
003
Displays the transfer unit counter (pages).
Page: Fuser
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
004
Displays the fusing unit counter (pages).
Rotation: PCD
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
005
Displays the PCD rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Transfer
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
Service
Tables
006
Displays the transfer unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Fuser
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
007
Displays the fuser unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation(%): PCD
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
008
Displays the PCD (%) rotation counter (Distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Transfer
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
009
Displays the transfer unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Fuser
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the fuser unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Web
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
011
Displays the web unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
SM
5-125
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-7
PM Counter Reset
7804
Resets the PM counter.

Touch [Execute] two times > "Completed" > [Exit]
Paper
001
Resets the PM counter of the paper.
PCD
002 Resets the PM counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit except
developer).
Transfer
003
Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser
004
Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit.
Web
005
Reset the PM counter of the web unit.
All Clear
006
Resets all PM counter
SC/Jam Counter Reset

7807
Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press Execute on the touch
panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7507, SP7508.
D129/D130
5-126
SM
Main SP Tables-7
Self-Diagnose Result Display

Execute to open the "Self-Diagnostics Result Display" to view details about
7832
errors. Use the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all
the information. If no errors have occurred, you will see the "No Error"
message on the screen.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
DF Glass Dust Check

Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on
7852*
the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter.
Counting is done only if SP4-020-1 (Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter
Dust Detection Clear
Counter
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Service
Tables
002
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
7853
Replacement Counter
PCD
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
001
Displays the replacement counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit).
Transfer
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
002
Displays the replacement counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
003
Displays the replacement counter of the fusing unit.
Web
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
004
Displays the replacement counter of the cleaning web.
SM
5-127
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-7
7906
Prev Counter
Page: PCD
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
001
Displays the counter (pages) of the previous PCD
Page: Transfer
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
002
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous transfer unit.
Page: Fuser
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
003
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous fusing unit.
Rotation: PCD
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
004
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous PCD
Rotation: Transfer
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
005
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous transfer unit.
Rotation: Fuser
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
006
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous fusing unit.
Rotation(%):PCD
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]
007
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous PCD
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]
008
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous transfer unit.
Rotation(%):Fuser
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]
009
Rotation(%):Web
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010 Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous cleaning

web.
D129/D130
5-128
SM
Main SP Tables-7
7950
Replacement Date
PCD
001
Displays the replacement date of the PCD.
Transfer
002
Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit.
Fuser
003
Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit.
Web
004
Displays the replacement date of the web unit.
7951
Remaining Counter
PCD(Page)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
001
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the PCD.
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
Service
Tables
Transfer(Page)
002
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the transfer unit.

Fuser(Page)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
003
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the fusing unit.
PCD(Rotation)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
005
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the PCD.
Transfer(Rotation)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
006
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Rotation)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
007
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the fusing unit.
PCD (%)
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
009
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the PCD.
SM
5-129
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-7
Transfer (%)
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
010
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the transfer unit.
Fuser (%)
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
011
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the fusing unit.
Web (%)
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
013
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the cleaning web.
PM Yield Setting
7952
Sets the each yield of the following.
PCD(Page)
[0 to 99999999/ 160000 / 1 sheet]
001
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Pages).
Transfer(Page)
[0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]
002
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Pages).
Fuser(Page)
[0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]
003
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Pages).
PCD(Rotation)
005
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 71990000 / 1 mm]

C2c: [0 to 999999999 / 75500000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Rotations).
Transfer(Rotation)
006
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 62770000 / 1 mm]

C2c: [0 to 999999999 / 65420000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Rotations).
Fuser(Rotation)
007
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 54880000 / 1 mm]

C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 55800000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Rotations).

Web (%)
[0 to 255 / 92 / 1 %]
009
Sets the PM yield (%) of the web unit.
D129/D130
5-130
SM
Main SP Tables-7
Day Threshold: PCD
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 days]
021
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end for the PCD.
Day Threshold: Transfer Unit
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 days]
022
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end for the transfer unit.
Day Threshold: Fusing Unit
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 days]
023
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end for the fusing unit.
7953
Operation Env Log

T<10
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
001
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: T<10C
10<=T<=17
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
002
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 10C<=T<=17C
17<T<23
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
003
23<=T<=27
Service
Tables
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 17<=T<=23

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
004
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 23<=T<=27
27<=T<=32
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
005
32<T
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
006
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 32<T
Env Log Clear

7954
Resets the environment logs (SP7953).
SM
5-131
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8

5.10.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG 2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as
sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8codes that when used in
combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers
What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216
The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406
The number of pages printed from the document server.
SP8691 to SP8696
The number of pages sent from the document server.
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an 'application'). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes
What It Means
T:
Total: (Grand Total).
C:
Copy application.
F:
Fax application.
P:
Print application.
S:
Scan application.
Grand total of the items counted for all applications

(C, F, P, etc.).
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the
D129/D130
document server.
5-132
SM
Main SP Tables-8
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.

The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
L:
Local storage
mode (from the document server window), or from
(document server)
another mode, such as from a printer driver or by

pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by case.
O:
Other applications
Refers to network applications such as Web Image
(external network
Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
applications, for
Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example)
group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them
on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of
abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not
understand.
Abbreviation
What It Means
"By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
>
More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook
Address Book
Apl
Application
B/W
Black & White
Bk
Black
Cyan
ColCr
Color Create
ColMode
Color Mode
SM
Service
Tables
Key for Abbreviations
5-133
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
Abbreviation
What It Means
Comb
Combine
Comp
Compression
Deliv
Delivery
DesApl
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print)

used to store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul
Emulation
FC
Full Color
FIN
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed
No Margins
GenCopy
Generation Copy Mode

Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
GPC
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax
ImgEdt
Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
LS
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize
Large (paper) Size
Mag
Magnification
MC
One color (monochrome)
D129/D130
5-134
SM
Main SP Tables-8
Abbreviation
What It Means
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor
NRS
machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in

Japan.
Org
Original for scanning
OrgJam
Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows
Palm 2
print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the

network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC
Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
PGS
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
PJob
Print Jobs
Ppr
Paper
PrtJam
Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS
Print Pages
Service
Tables
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

R
only. This machine is under development and currently not

available.
Rez
Resolution
SC
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn
Scan
Sim, Simplex
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email
Scan-to-E-mail
SMC
SM
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8counters are
recorded in the SMC report.
5-135
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
Abbreviation
What It Means
Svr
Server
TonEnd
Toner End
TonSave
Toner Save
TXJob
Send, Transmission
YMC
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK
All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801-1 Memory All Clear.
8001
8002
T:Total Jobs
These SPs count the number of times each
C:Total Jobs
application is used to do a job.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8003
F:Total Jobs
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8004
P:Total Jobs
other applications are used to send a job to the
8005
S:Total Jobs
8006
L:Total Jobs
document server, plus the number of times a file
already on the document server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does
not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast
D129/D130
5-136
SM
Main SP Tables-8
are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If
one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the
transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document
server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter
8011
T:Jobs/LS
8012
C:Jobs/LS
8013
F:Jobs/LS
8014
P:Jobs/LS
8015
S:Jobs/LS
8016
L:Jobs/LS
8017
O:Jobs/LS
Service
Tables
increments.
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the

document server by each application, to reveal how local
storage is being used for input.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation
panel.
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you
enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
SM
5-137
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
8021
T:Pjob/LS
8022
C:Pjob/LS
These SPs reveal how files printed from the document
8023
F:Pjob/LS
8024
P:Pjob/LS
8025
S:Pjob/LS
8026
L:Pjob/LS
8027
O:Pjob/LS
server were stored on the document server originally.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
panel.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the
document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P:
counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L:
counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the
S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then
the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2),
are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
D129/D130
5-138
SM
Main SP Tables-8
8031
T:Pjob/DesApl
8032
C:Pjob/DesApl
These SPs reveal what applications were used to
8033
F:Pjob/DesApl
8034
P:Pjob/DesApl
8035
S:Pjob/DesApl
8036
L:Pjob/DesApl
8037
O:Pjob/DesApl
output documents from the document server.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image
Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8041
T:TX Jobs/LS
8042
C:TX Jobs/LS
8043
F:TX Jobs/LS
8044
P:TX Jobs/LS
8045
S:TX Jobs/LS
8046
L:TX Jobs/LS
8047
O:TX Jobs/LS
the document server that were later accessed for

transmission over the telephone line or over a network
(attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax).
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned from
operation panel.
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as
an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
SM
5-139
D129/D130
Service
Tables
These SPs count the applications that stored files on
Main SP Tables-8
8051
T:TX Jobs/DesApl
These SPs count the applications used to send
8052
C:TX Jobs/DesApl
8053
F:TX Jobs/DesApl
8054
P:TX Jobs/DesApl
8055
S:TX Jobs/DesApl
8056
L:TX Jobs/DesApl
8057
O:TX Jobs/DesApl
files from the document server over the telephone

line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as
a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending
are counted separately.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs
8061
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
C:FIN Jobs
8062
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method
is specified by the application.
F:FIN Jobs
8063
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs
8064
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method
S:FIN Jobs
8065
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
D129/D130
5-140
SM
Main SP Tables-8
L:FIN Jobs
8066
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing
method is specified from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs
8067
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external

application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored
806x 1 Sort
copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the

document server, the L: counter increments. (See
SP8066 1)
806x 2 Stack
Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple
Number of jobs started in Staple mode.

Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the
806x 4 Booklet
machine is in staple mode, the Staple counter also
806x 5 Z-Fold
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the

Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch
806x 6 Punch
is set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See

SP8064 6.)
806x 7 Other
806x 8 Inside-Fold
806x 9 Three-IN-Fold
SM
Reserved. Not used

Booklet mode and set for folding (Inside-fold).
Letter Fold-in Not Used
806x 10 Three-OUT-Fold
Letter Fold-out Not Used
806x 11 Four-Fold
Double Parallel Fold Not Used
806x 12 KANNON-Fold
Gate Fold Not Used
5-141
D129/D130
Service
Tables
increments.
Main SP Tables-8
806x 13 Perfect-Bind
Perfect Binder Not Used
806x 14 Ring-Bind
Ring Binder Not Used
T:Jobs/PGS
8071
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
8072
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS
8073
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on
P:Jobs/PGS
8074
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
S:Jobs/PGS
8075
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
L:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
8076
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of

pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs
8077
(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages
in the job.
807x 1 1 Page
807x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages
807x 9 51 to 100 Pages
D129/D130
5-142
SM
Main SP Tables-8
807x 3 3 Pages
807x 10 101 to 300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages
807x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x 5 5 Pages
807x 12 501 to 700 Pages
807x 6 6 to 10 Pages
807x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x 7 11 to 20 Pages
807x 14 1001 to Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
Service
Tables
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
8111
by fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a

telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
001 B/W
Black TX
F:FAX TX Jobs
8113
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
by fax directly on a telephone line.
001 B/W
SM
Black TX
5-143
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
These counters count jobs, not pages.
This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including
documents stored on the document server.
If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job
started.
If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where
both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (812x) also
increments.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:IFAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
8121
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
001 B/W
Black TX
F:IFAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
8123
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.

001 B/W
Black TX
The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at
this time.
D129/D130
5-144
SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:S-to-Email Jobs
8131
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an
e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
001 B/W
Black TX
002 Color
Color TX
003 ACS
Color TX
S:S-to-Email Jobs
8135
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail,
001 B/W
Black TX
002 Color
Color TX
003 ACS
Color TX
If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color
or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what
stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC,
or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For
example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is
counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
SM
5-145
D129/D130
Service
Tables
without storing the original on the document server.
Main SP Tables-8
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8141
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan
Router server.
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8145
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router
server.
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router
server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a
"Color" job.
waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
D129/D130
5-146
SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
8151
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on
a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8151 and 8155 perform identical counts.
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
8155
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with
Scan-to-PC.
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Service
Tables
SM
5-147
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
8161
T:PCFAX TX Jobs
These SPs count the number of PC Fax

transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it is
registered for sending, not when it is sent.
8163
F:PCFAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out
to the destination from the PC through the copier.
8171
T:Deliv Jobs/WSD
These SPs count the pages scanned by WSD.
8175
S:Deliv Jobs/WSD
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
8181
T:Scan to Media Jobs
8185
S:Scan to Media Jobs
These SPs count the pages scanned to media by

the scanner application.
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
D129/D130
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
5-148
SM
Main SP Tables-8
8191
T:Total Scan PGS
8192
C:Total Scan PGS
8193
F:Total Scan PGS
8195
S:Total Scan PGS
8196
L:Total Scan PGS
These SPs count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan images.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust
color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S:
count is 4.
Service
Tables
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store
File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8201
T:LSize Scan PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8203
F Lsize Scan PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
S:LSize Scan PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP codes count the total number of large pages input with the
8205
scanner for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax
transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display..
SM
5-149
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
8211
T:Scan PGS/LS
8212
C:Scan PGS/LS
8213
F:Scan PGS/LS
8215
S:Scan PGS/LS
8216
L:Scan PGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages scanned into

the document server .
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen
Reading user stamp data is not counted.
If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6
and the L: count is 6.
ADF Org Feeds

8221
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
001 Front
simplex or duplex scanning.

With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for
duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which
side the user loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
002 Back
scanning.
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
rear-side scanning.
D129/D130
5-150
SM
Main SP Tables-8
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
Scan PGS/Mode
8231
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
002 SADF
003 Mixed Size
004 Custom Size
005 Platen
006 Mixed 1side/2side
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in

the ADF at one time.
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation
panel.
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original
directly on the platen.
Selectable. Select "Simplex/Duplex" on the operation
Service
Tables
001 Large Volume
panel.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the
original's page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
T:Scan PGS/Org
8241
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8242
SM
C:Scan PGS/Org
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
5-151
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
F:Scan PGS/Org
8243
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax
jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org
8245
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org
8246
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen
8241
8242
8243
8245
8246
824x 1: Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
824x 2: Text/Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
824x 3: Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
824x 4: GenCopy, Pale
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
824x 5: Map
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
824x 6: Normal/Detail
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
824x 7: Fine/Super Fine
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
824x 8: Binary
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
824x 9: Grayscale
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
824x 10: Color
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
824x 11: Other
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
D129/D130
5-152
SM
Main SP Tables-8
8251
T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8252
C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8255
S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8256
L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
These SPs show how many times Image Edit

features have been selected at the operation panel
for each application. Some examples of these
editing features are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
8257
O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit
features have been used. A detailed breakdown of
exactly which features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8281
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how
8285
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
identical counts.
8291
T:Scan PGS/Stamp
8293
F:Scan PGS/Stamp
These SPs count the number of pages stamped

with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8295
S:Scan PGS/Stamp

SM
5-153
D129/D130
Service
Tables
the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
Main SP Tables-8
T:Scan PGS/Size
8301
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
8302
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
F:Scan PGS/Size
8303
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size
8305
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
L:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored
8306
from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-446].
830x 1
A3
830x 2
A4
830x 3
A5
830x 4
B4
830x 5
B5
830x 6
DLT
D129/D130
5-154
SM
Main SP Tables-8
830x 7
LG
830x 8
LT
830x 9
HLT
830x 10
Full Bleed
830x 254
Other (Standard)
830x 255
Other (Custom)
T:Scan PGS/Rez
8311
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez
8315
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
831x 1
1200dpi to
831x 2
600dpito1199dpi
831x 3
400dpito599dpi
831x 4
200dpito399dpi
831x 5
to199dpi
Service
Tables
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.
The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done
for the Fax application.
SM
5-155
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
8381
T:Total PrtPGS
These SPs count the number of pages printed by
8382
C:Total PrtPGS
8383
F:Total PrtPGS
8384
P:Total PrtPGS
8385
S:Total PrtPGS
8386
L:Total PrtPGS
8387
O:Total PrtPGS
the customer. The counter for the application used

for storing the pages increments.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go to
the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS
8391
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
D129/D130
5-156
SM
Main SP Tables-8
8401
T:PrtPGS/LS
8402
C:PrtPGS/LS
8403
F:PrtPGS/LS
8404
P:PrtPGS/LS
8405
S:PrtPGS/LS
operation panel.
These SPs count the number of pages printed from the

document server. The counter for the application used
to print the pages is incremented.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8406
L:PrtPGS/LS
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

8411
Prints/Duplex
counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last pages

printed only on one side are not counted.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8421
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8422
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8423
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8424
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8425
SM
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
5-157
D129/D130
Service
Tables
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
Main SP Tables-8
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8426
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8427
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
842x 1
Simplex> Duplex
842x 2
Duplex> Duplex
842x 3
Book> Duplex
842x 4
Simplex Combine
842x 5
Duplex Combine
842x 6
2in1
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
842x 7
4in1
842x 8
6in1
842x 9
8in1
8pages on 1 side (8-Up)
842x 10
9in1
842x 11
16in1
842x 12
Booklet
842x 13
Magazine
842x 14
2in1 + Booklet
842x 15
4in1 + Booklet
842x 16
6in1 + Booklet
842x 17
8in1 + Booklet
D129/D130
5-158
SM
Main SP Tables-8
842x 18
9in1 + Booklet
842x 19
2in1 + Magazine
842x 20
4in1 + Magazine
842x 21
6in1 + Magazine
842x 22
8in1 + Magazine
842x 23
9in1 + Magazine
842x 24
16in1 + Magazine
These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need to
improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
SM
Magazine
Original Pages
Count
Original Pages
Count
5-159
Service
Tables
Booklet
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8431
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8432
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8434
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8436
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8437
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
843x 1
Cover/Slip Sheet
843x 2
Series/Book
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The

count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were
843x 3
User Stamp
applied, including page numbering and date

stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8441
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
8442
D129/D130
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
5-160
SM
Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8443
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8444
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8445
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8446
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8447
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
844x 1
A3
844x 2
A4
844x 3
A5
844x 4
B4
844x 5
B5
844x 6
DLT
844x 7
LG
844x 8
LT
844x 9
HLT
844x 10
Full Bleed
SM
5-161
D129/D130
Service
Tables
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
Main SP Tables-8
844x 254
Other (Standard)
844x 255
Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass Tray
Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1
Copier
003 Tray 2
Copier
004 Tray 3
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
005 Tray 4
006 Tray 5
LCT (Option)
007 Tray 6
Currently not used.
008 Tray 7
Currently not used.
009 Tray 8
Currently not used.
010 Tray 9
Currently not used.
011 Tray 10
Currently not used.
012 Tray 11
Currently not used.
013 Tray 12
Currently not used.
014 Tray 13
Currently not used.
015 Tray 14
Currently not used.
016 Tray 15
Currently not used.
D129/D130
5-162
SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
8461
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8462
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8463
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
8464
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8466
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
846x 1
Normal
846x 2
Recycled
846x 3
Special
846x 4
Thick
846x 5
Normal (Back)
846x 6
Thick (Back)
846x 7
OHP
SM
5-163
D129/D130
Service
Tables
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
Main SP Tables-8
846x 8
Other
PrtPGS/Mag
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 to 49%
002 50% to 99%
003 100%
004 101% to 200%
005 201% to
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing
magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the
document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying

are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned
a rate of 100%.
8481
T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8484
P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
D129/D130
5-164
SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Emul
8511
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul
8514
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
printed.
001 RPCS
002 RPDL
003 PS3
004 R98
005 R16
006 GL/GL2
007 R55
Service
Tables
008 RTIFF
009 PDF
010 PCL5e/5c
011 PCL XL
012 IPDL-C
013 BM-Links
Japan Only
014 Other
015 IPDS
SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
SM
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
5-165
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/FIN
8521
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
all applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
8522
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8523
the Fax application.

Note:
Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
8524
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
8525
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
8526
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
852x 1
Sort
852x 2
Stack
852x 3
Staple
852x 4
Booklet
852x 5
Z-Fold
852x 6
Punch
852x 7
Other
D129/D130
5-166
SM
Main SP Tables-8
852x 8
Inside-Fold
852x 9
Three-IN-Fold
852x 10
Three-OUT-Fold
852x 11
Four-Fold
852x 12
KANNON-Fold
852x 13
Perfect-Bind
852x 14
Ring-Bind
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the

8531
Staples
machine.
8551
T:PrtBooks/FIN
8552
C:PrtBooks/FIN
8554
P:PrtBooks/FIN
8556
L:PrtBooks/FIN
Service
Tables
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Perfect-Bind
Not Used
002 Ring-Bind
Not Used
8561
T:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8562
C:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8563
F:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8564
P:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
SM
5-167
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
8566
L:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
O:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8567
These SPs count the totals number of duplex pages printed.
001 Total: Over A3/DLT
002 Total: Under A3/DLT
003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT
004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT
T: Counter
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless
of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
8581
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
O: Counter
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
8591
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
001 A3/DLT
002 Duplex
D129/D130
5-168
SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Coverage Counter
8601
These SPs count the total coverage for each color and printout pages.
001 B/W
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
011 B/W Printing Pages
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
C:Coverage Counter
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
8602
These SPs count the total coverage for B/W.
F:Coverage Counter
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
8603
P:Coverage Counter
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
8604
L:Coverage Counter
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
8606
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
SDK Apli Counter

8617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
SM
5-169
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
T:FAX TX PGS
8631
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
001 B/W
Black TX
F:FAX TX PGS
8633
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
telephone number.
001 B/W
Black TX
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted
separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and
SP8633 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is
done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
D129/D130
5-170
SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:FAX TX PGS
8641
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
001 B/W
Black TX
F:FAX TX PGS
8643
[0 o 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
001 B/W
Black TX
Service
Tables
destination.
SM
5-171
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
T:S-to-Email PGS
8651
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
001 B/W
002 Color
S:S-to-Email PGS
8655
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
e-mail for the Scan application only.
001 B/W
002 Color
The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If
the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10

(the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the

document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page

document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted
separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is
10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100
destinations, for a total of 20).
D129/D130
5-172
SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
8661
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
001 B/W
002 Color
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
8665
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Router server by the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the
Scan Router server.
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are
not done.
The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan
Router server.
T: Deliv PGS/PC
8671
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
001 B/W
002 Color
S: Deliv PGS/PC
8675
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
SM
5-173
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Main SP Tables-8
8681
T:PCFAX TXPGS
These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC

Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax application
only, so the counts for SP8681 and SP8683 are the
8683
F:PCFAX TXPGS
same.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the
copier to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages
are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B.
The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8691
T:TX PGS/LS
8692
C:TX PGS/LS
8693
F:TX PGS/LS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8694
P:TX PGS/LS
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
These SPs count the number of pages sent from the

document server. The counter for the application that
was used to store the pages is incremented.

8695
S:TX PGS/LS
8696
L:TX PGS/LS
operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File button

from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the
number of pages sent to each destination.
D129/D130
5-174
SM
Main SP Tables-8
TX PGS/Port
8701
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
T:Scan PGS/Comp
8711
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
document server, counted by the formats listed below.
001 JPEG/JPEG2000
Service
Tables
002 TIFF (Multi/Single)

003 PDF
004 Other
005 PDF/Comp
006 PDF/A
S:Scan PGS/Comp
8715
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan
application, counted by the formats listed below.
001 JPEG/JPEG2000
003 PDF
SM
5-175
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
004 Other
005 PDF/Comp
006 PDF/A
8721
T:Deliv PGS/WSD
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
S:Deliv PGS/WSD
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8725
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
001 B/W
002 Color
8731
8735
T:Scan PGS/Media
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Media
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by
each scanner mode.
001 B/W
002 Color
RX PGS/Port
8741
[0to9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
D129/D130
5-176
SM
Main SP Tables-8
Dev Counter
[0to9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the

8771
development rollers) for black and other color toners.

Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the
same as the Total count.
Toner_Botol_Info.
8781
This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based
on the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle.
This SP displays the percent of space

8791
LS Memory Remain
available on the document server for storing

documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Toner Remain
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note:
8801
This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is

better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
SM
5-177
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
8811
Eco Counter
Eco Total
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Displays the number of pages reduced by using the duplex and the combine
function.
Duplex
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
004
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the duplex function.
Combine
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
005
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the combine function.
Duplex(%)
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
008
Displays the utilization ratio of the duplex function.
Combine(%)
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
009
Paper Cut(%)
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
010
Displays the paper reduction ratio.
Cvr Cnt:0-10%
8851
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color
toners.
011 0 to 2%: BK
021 3 to 4%: BK
031 5 to 7%: BK
041 8 to 10%: BK
D129/D130
5-178
SM
Main SP Tables-8
Cvr Cnt:11-20%
8861
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
toners.
001 BK
Black toner
Cvr Cnt:21-30%
8871
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
toners.
001 BK
Black toner
Cvr Cnt:31%8881
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
toners.
Black toner
Page/Toner Bottle
Service
Tables
001 BK
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner.
001 BK
Black toner
Page/Toner_Prev1
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner.
001 BK
SM
Black toner
5-179
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
Page/Toner_Prev2
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8911
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner.
001 BK
Black toner
Cvr Cnt/Total
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage (%) BK
011 Coverage/P:BK
Machine Status
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each
8941
operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to
investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with
ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
001 Operation Time
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not

operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
002 Standby Time
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in

Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
003 Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing

background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
004 Low Power Time
Includes time while machine is performing

005 Off Mode Time
background printing. Does not include time machine

remains powered off with the power switches.
006 SC
D129/D130
Total down time due to SC errors.
5-180
SM
Main SP Tables-8
007 PrtJam
008 OrgJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.

Total down time due to original jams during
scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total down time due to supply unit end.
AddBook Register
8951
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code /User
ID
User code registrations.
002 Mail Address
Mail address registrations.
003 Fax Destination
Fax destination registrations.
004 Group
005
Group destination
registrations.
Transfer
Fax relay destination
Request
registrations for relay TX.
006 F-Code
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
001
F-Code box registrations.

Copy application
007 Copy Program
registrations with the

Program (job settings)
feature.
Fax application registrations
008 Fax Program
with the Program (job
[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
settings) feature.
Printer application
009 Printer Program

feature.
SM
5-181
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-8
Scanner application
010
Scanner
Program

feature.
Adomin. Counter List
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8999
Display the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Total
003 Copy: BW
007 Printer: BW
010 Fax Print: BW
012 A3/DLT
013 Duplex
023 Copy: BW (%)
027 Printer: BW (%)
030 Fax Print: BW (%)
101 Transmission Total: Color
102 Transmission Total: BW
103 Fax Transmission
104 Scanner Transmission: Color
105 Scanner Transmission: BW
D129/D130
5-182
SM
Main SP Tables-9

5.11.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No.
Result
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
Copier
Input Check
5803
Reading
Description
0
See the table 1 following this table.

Service
Tables
001 Tray 1: Paper Size Sensor
002 Tray 1: Tray Set Sensor
Set
Not set
003 Tray 1: Paper Lift Sensor
Not upper limit
Upper limit
004 Tray 1: Paper End Sensor
No paper
Paper remaining
005
Tray 1:
Paper Height Sensor 1
006
Tray 1:
SM
Set
Not set
Not upper limit
Upper limit
No paper
Paper remaining
5-183
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-9
011
Tray 2:
012
Tray 2:
013 Tray 1: Paper Feed Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
Paper detected
No paper detected
Paper detected
No paper detected
Paper detected
No paper detected
No paper detected
Paper detected
018 Relay Sensor 1
Paper detected
No paper detected
019 Relay Sensor 2
Paper detected
No paper detected
020 Relay Sensor 3
No paper detected
Paper detected
021 Relay Sensor 4
No paper detected
Paper detected
022 Relay Sensor: LCT
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not end
Paper end
017 LCT: Paper Feed Sensor
023 By-pass: Paper End Sensor

024 By-pass: Paper Size Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
026 Fusing Exit Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
027 Fusing Entrance Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
028 Junction Gate Relay Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
029 Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
030 Paper Overflow Sensor
Not full
Full
031 Right Cover Open/Close
Close
Open
032 Duplex Unit Open/Close
Open
Close
033 Duplex Entrance Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
034 Duplex Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
D129/D130
5-184
SM
Main SP Tables-9
035 Bank Right Cover Open/Close
Close
Open
036 Tray Cover Open/Close
Close
Open
Set
Not set
038 Bridge/Exit Tray: Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
039 Bridge/Exit Tray: Relay Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
040 Bridge/Exit/Shift: Set Detection
Set
Not set
Close
Open
Close
Open
Not HP
HP
Set (Bit1)
Not set (Bit1)
Not full
Full
037 LCT Set
042
Bridge/Exit Tray: Left Guide

Open/Close
Bridge/Exit Tray: Right Guide
Open/Close
043 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor

046 Fusing Unit Set
047 Toner Overflow Sensor
048 Interlock Detection 1
Right or front door is Right or front door is

open.

open.
close.
050 Key Card Set
Set
Not set
051 Key Counter Set
Set
Not set
Not set
set
Set
Not set
Paper detected
No paper detected
Not end
End
No paper detected
Paper detected
Stay at rear
Stay at front
Paper detected
No paper detected
052 Mechanical Counter Set

053 1-Bin Unit Set
054 1-Bin Unit: Paper Set
057 Cleaning Web End
060 Shift Sensor
064 Shift Tray Sensor
065
SM
close.
Bypass Tray Paper Length

Detection
5-185
D129/D130
Service
Tables
041
Main SP Tables-9
200 Scanner HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
201 Platen Cover Sensor
Open
Close
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper
Paper height sensor 1
Full
Nearly full
Near end
Almost empty
D129/D130
5-186
SM
Main SP Tables-9
Table 2: Paper Size Switch

Switch 1 is used for the tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
North America
Switch Location
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF*1
A3 SEF*1
(A3 SEF)
(11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2
B4 SEF *2
(B4 SEF)
(8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF
A4 SEF
8.5" x 11" SEF
8.5" x 11" SEF
B5 SEF
B5 SEF
11" x 81/2" LEF*3
A4 LEF*3
(A4 LEF)
(11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4
B5 LEF*4
(B5 LEF)
(10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF
A5 LEF
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002 (Tray 1) or -006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-003 (Tray 1) or -007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-001 (Tray 1) or -005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-181-004 (Tray 1) or -008 (Tray 2)..
SM
5-187
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Models
Main SP Tables-9
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

Models
Bit No.
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF*1
A3 SEF*1
(11" x 8.5" LEF)
(A4 LEF)
11" x 17" SEF*1
A3 SEF*1
(11" x 8.5" LEF)
(A4 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1
A4 SEF*1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2)
(A5 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1
A4 SEF*1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2)
(B5 LEF)
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 SEF
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 SEF
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A6 SEF
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A6 SEF
*1: When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is "LEF", it considers
that the paper size is bracketed size.
D129/D130
5-188
SM
Main SP Tables-9
APS Original Size Detection
Original Size
Length Sensor
Width
Sensor
SP4-301
display
Metric version
Inch version
L3
L2
L1
W1
W2
A3
11" x 17"
00011111
B4
10" x 14"
00011110
8.5" x 14"
00011100
A4 LEF
8.5" x 11"
00000011
B5 LEF
00000010
A4 SEF
11" x 8.5"
00001100
B5 SEF
00000100
00000000
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x
13", or 8" x 13"
SP 5126 controls the
A5 LEF/ SEF
SM
5.5" x 8.5",
8.5" x 5.5"
5-189
D129/D130
Service
Tables
size that is detected
Main SP Tables-9
3000/2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)
Reading
6140
Bit Description
0
001 Entrance Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
002 Proof Exit Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not Full
Full
No paper
Paper
detected*1
detected*1
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not HP
HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not HP
HP
009 Lower Tray Height Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
010 Upper Tray Height Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
011 Upper Tray Full Sensor
Not Full
Full
012 Stack Roller HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
013 Jogger HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
HP
Not HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
016 Corner Stapler HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
017 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
Not Limit
Limit
019 Door Switch
Closed
Open
020 Corner Stapler Operation
Not HP
HP
003 Proof Full Detection Sensor
004 Upper Tray Exit Sensor
005 Staple Exit Sensor

006 Shift Roller HP Sensor
007 Shift Exit Sensor
008 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
014 Feed Out Belt HP Sensor

015 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor
018 Upper Tray Limit SW
D129/D130
5-190
SM
Main SP Tables-9
Reading
Bit Description
0
021 Staple Detection
No staple detected
Staple detected
022 Staple Dip Detection
No staple detected
Staple detected
023 Punch Movement HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
024 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
026 Punch Full Sensor
Not Full
Full
027 Punch HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
025 Paper Position Sensor
028 Punch DIP SW 1
See *1
029 Punch DIP SW 2
See *1
030 Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not HP
HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
034 Bottom Fence HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
035 Fold Cam HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
036 Fold Plate HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
037 Fold Unit Exit Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
No paper
Paper
detected*2
detected*2
No paper
Paper
detected*2
detected*2
Not HP
HP
No staple detected
Staple detected
031 Stack Present Sensor

032 Clamp Roller HP Sensor
033 Fold Entrance Sensor
038 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Front
039 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Rear
040
Booklet Stapler 1: Operation

(Rotation/Front)
041 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Front)
SM
5-191
D129/D130
Service
Tables
6140
Main SP Tables-9
Reading
6140
Bit Description
042
043
Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In

(Leading Edge/Front)
(Rotation/Rear)
044 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Rear)
045

(Leading Edge/Rear)
046 Upper Tray Full Sensor: 3000
No staple detected
Staple detected
Not HP
HP
No staple detected
Staple detected
No staple detected
Staple detected
Not Full
Full
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1
DIP SW 2
Punch Type
Japan
Europe
North America
North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (D637 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "3000/2000-Sheet
(Booklet) Finisher ".
D129/D130
5-192
SM
Main SP Tables-9
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)
Reading
Bit
Description
0
001 Entrance Sensor
002
003
004
005
Paper detected
Shift Exit Sensor
No paper detected
(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)

Staple Entrance Sensor
Paper detected
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor)

Staple Moving HP Sensor
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
006 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor

007 Staple Tray Paper Sensor
008
Staple Rotation Sensor

(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
013
014
SM
Paper Sensor
(Stack Height Sensor)
Tray Lower Sensor
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
5-193
No paper
detected
HP
HP
Not HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not HP
HP
Staple detected
012 Shift HP Sensor
Paper detected
Not HP
010 Staple READY Detection
(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
detected
HP
Staple detected
Exit Guide Plate HP
No paper
Not HP
009 Staple Sensor
011
No staple
detected
No staple
detected
Not HP
HP
Not HP
HP
No output tray
Output tray
detected
detected
Lower limit
Not lower limit
D129/D130
Service
Tables
6139
Main SP Tables-9
Reading
6139
015
Bit
Description
Proof Full Sensor

(Paper Limit Sensor)
Not full
Full
5.11.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

Copier
5804
Output Check
001 Exit Motor: 350
002 Exit Motor: 175
003 Exit Motor: 230
Paper exit motor (Mainframe)
004 Exit Motor: 180
005 Exit Motor: 154
006 Exit Motor: 90
007 Feed Motor: 300
008 Feed Motor: 255
009 Feed Motor: 230
Paper feed motor (Mainframe)
010 Feed Motor: 215

011 Feed Motor: 180
012 Feed Motor: 154
013 Feed Motor: 90
014 Bank: Feed Motor: 300
Paper feed motor (Optional paper
feed unit)
D129/D130
5-194
SM
Main SP Tables-9
5804
Output Check
021 LCT: Feed Motor: 300
Paper feed motor (Optional LCT)

028 Paper Feed Clutch 1
Paper feed clutch 1/2 (Mainframe)

Service
Tables

030 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 3
Paper feed clutch 3/4 (Optional
paper feed unit)
032 LCT: Paper Feed Clutch
Paper feed clutch (Optional LCT)
033 Pick-up Solenoid 1

Pick-up Solenoid 1/2 (Mainframe)
035 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 3
Pick-up Solenoid 3/4 (Optional
paper feed unit)
037 LCT: Pick-up Solenoid
Pick-up Solenoid (LCT)
038 Tray Lift Motor 1: Up

039 Tray Lift Motor 1: Down
SM
5-195
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-9
5804
Output Check
042 Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
Not used
043 Bank: Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
Tray lock solenoid (Optional paper

feed unit)
044 Registration Motor: 230

048 Exit: Junction Gate Solenoid
Junction gate 1 solenoid
049 Duplex: Inverter Gate Solenoid
Not used
050 Duplex Inverter Motor: Fwd: 230

054 Duplex Inverter Motor: Rev: 230
058 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Fwd: 230
062 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Rev: 230
D129/D130
5-196
SM
Main SP Tables-9
5804
Output Check
066 By-pass Feed Clutch
067 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid
068 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: 230

Drive motor (Bridge unit)
Bridge/Exit Tray: Junction Gate
Junction Gate Solenoid (Bridge
Solenoid
unit)
073 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: Reset
074 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: Enable
075 Bridge: Cooling Fan Motor
Not used
076 Transfer Belt Contact Motor
Service
Tables
072
077 OPC Motor: 230

078 OPC Motor: 180
Drum motor
079 OPC Motor: 154
080 OPC Motor: 90
081 Transfer/Development Motor: 230
085 Fusing Motor: 230
SM
5-197
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-9
5804
Output Check
089 Development Paddle Motor
090 PTL Control
091 Fusing Fan Motor: High

Fusing exhaust fan motor
092 Fusing Fan Motor: Low
093 Exhaust Fan Motor: High
Exhaust fan motor
094 Exhaust Fan Motor: Low
095 Duct Fan Motor
Cooling fan motor
096 Exit Fan Motor: High

Paper exit cooling fan motor
097 Exit Fan Motor: Low
098 PSU Fan Motor
Junction gate 2 solenoid (1-bin
099 1-Bin Junction Gate Solenoid
unit)
100 Polygon Motor: 230

104 LD 1
105 LD 2
106 Toner Bottle Motor: Fwd
Toner supply motor
107 Quenching Lamp
108 Charge Bias
109 Development Bias
D129/D130
5-198
SM
Main SP Tables-9
5804
Output Check
110 Transfer Belt Voltage
111 ID Sensor LED
115 Cleaning Web Motor
Web motor
116 Shift Tray Motor
Not used
117 CTL Cooling FAN
Controller fan
202 Scanner Lamp
Output Check
6144
SM
Description
001 Upper Relay Motor
Upper Transport Motor
002 Lower Relay Motor
Lower Transport Motor
003 Exit Motor
004 Proof Junction Gate SOL
Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
005 Lower Tray Lift Motor
006 Jogger Fence Motor
007 Stapler Motor
008 Stapler Hammer
009 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
010 Positioning Roller Solenoid
011 Stack Feed-out Motor
012 Shift Motor
013 Exit Guide Plate Motor
5-199
Service
Tables
Display
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-9
3000 /2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)
Output
6145
Display
Description
001 Entrance Motor
002 Upper Transport Motor
003 Lower Transport Motor
004 Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor
005 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
006 Shift Roller Motor
008 Upper Tray Lift Motor
009 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor
011 Feed Out Belt Motor
012 Corner Stapler Movement Motor
013 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor
014 Corner Stapler
015 Proof Junction Gate Solenoid
016 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
017
Stapling Edge Pressure Plate
Solenoid
019 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid
020 Stack Junction Gate Motor
021 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor
D129/D130
5-200
SM
Main SP Tables-9
023 Booklet Stapler: Rear
024 Fold Plate Motor
025 Fold Roller Motor
026 Positioning Roller Motor
027 Punch Drive Motor
028 Punch Movement Motor
029 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
Service
Tables
022 Booklet Stapler: Front
SM
5-201
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-9
5.11.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLES

SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001
Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
No I/O Timeout
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 4
SD Card Save Mode
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot.

bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
[RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.
1001
Bit Switch
002 Bit Switch 2
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
Applying a collation Type
Shift
Normal
Collate
Collate
D129/D130
5-202
SM
Main SP Tables-9
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
already have a Collate Type configured.
bit 3
If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
[PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching
0: Enable
1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
Bit Switch
003 Bit Switch 3

bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
[PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility
0: Disable
1: Enable
Service
Tables
1001
bit 4
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as

HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
SM
bit 3
DFU
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
5-203
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-9
1001
Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
IPDS print-side reversal
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable: Increases printing speed but simplex pages may be printed on the
back side of the sheet.
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
D129/D130
5-204
SM
Main SP Tables-9
1001
Bit Switch
005 Bit Switch 5
Disable
Enable
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and

"Punch Type" buttons on the operation
panel.
bit 0
If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1
Multiple copies if a paper size or type

mismatch occurs
0: Disable
(Single
copy)
1: Enable
(Multiple copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this Bit Switch, the
device can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
[PS] PS Criteria
Service
Tables
occurs.
-
Pattern3
Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4
Increase max number of the stored jobs

to 1000 jobs.
Disable
Enable (1000)
(100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
Method for determining the image

rotation for the edge to bind on.
SM
5-205
0: Disable
1: Enable
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-9
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7
Letterhead mode printing
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.

If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex
job are not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems
with letterhead/pre-printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
1001
Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU
1001
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit Switch
007 Bit Switch 7

Print path
If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only)

bit 0
and the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are
always routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths
increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
to 7
1001
DFU
Bit Switch
D129/D130
5-206
SM
Main SP Tables-9
1001
Bit Switch
009 Bit Switch 9

PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs
submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
1284).
"Disabled
"Enabled
(Immediately)"
(10 seconds)"
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
Job Cancel
Disabled
(Not
cancelled)
Enabled
(Cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might
result in problems:
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3
PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation

(SEF/LEF)
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous

generations. It only takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" =
"Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the
bypass tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch,
the MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by
the MFP bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
bit 4
Response to PJL USTATUS when

multiple collated copies are printed
SM
5-207
0: Disable
1: Enable
D129/D130
Service
Tables
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
Main SP Tables-9
When enabled, if multiple collated copies are printed, the device no longer
responds to PJL USTATUS with the number of pages in the current copy.
Instead the device will return the total number of pages for all copies.
Bit 5
DFU
to 7
1001
Bit Switch
010 Bit Switch 10

bit 0
to 4
bit 5
DFU
List / Test Print Lock
0: Disable
1: Enable
If enabled, you can lock or unlock the [List/Test Print] items under the
Pinter Features menu when the Store and Skip Errored Job Function is
on.
Bit 6
Optional charge machines
0: Disable
1: Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
If enabled, you can use the optional charge

machines when the Store and Skip Errored
Job Function is on.
Bit 7
1001
DFU
Bit Switch
011 Bit Switch 11

bit 0
List / Test Print menu
When enabled, [Multiple Lists] menu is displayed in [List / Test Print] under
the Printer Features menu.
bit 1
D129/D130
Interrupt printing
0: Job
5-208
1: Page
SM
Main SP Tables-9
Selects the interrupt unit for the interrupt printing function.

When you select "0," you can interrupt the printing of a job while being
processed.
When you select "1," you can interrupt the printing of a page while being
processed.
Bit 2
DFU
to 7
1001
Bit Switch
012 Bit Switch 12

bit 0
to 7
1003
DFU
[Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System
1003 001
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1004
Service
Tables
1003 003 Delete Program
[Print Summary]
Print Printer Summary
1004 001
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1006
[Sample/Locked Print]
*CTL
0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the
1006 001
document server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service

Mode SP5-967. When you select "1," the document server is enabled
regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
SM
5-209
D129/D130
Main SP Tables-9
5.11.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLES

SP1-xxx (System and Others)
[Erase margin (Remote Scan)]

1005
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.

If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This
SP is activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm
1009
[Remote scan disable]
*CTL
*CTL
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: enable, 1: disable
1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan.
1010
[Non Display Clear Light

PDF]
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Display, 1: Non display
D129/D130
5-210
SM
Main SP Tables-9
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)
[Compression Level (Gray-scale)]

2021
Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the
three settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2021 1 Comp1: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2021 2 Comp2: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
2021 3 Comp3: 5-95
*CTL
[5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
2021 4 Comp4: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2021 5 Comp5: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]

2024
Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can
be selected at the operation panel.
2024 2
SM
Compression Ratio (High
[5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
Service
Tables
2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal)

*CTL
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
comp image)
5-211
D129/D130
Updating the Firmware
5.12 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware
downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2
(Lower Slot) on the controller box.
5.12.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle
SD cards:
Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into
the slot with the power on.
Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high
humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card get
exposed to shock or vibration.
Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an
application to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs
during a firmware upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
"Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to
send data from the SD card to the machine.
To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the
LCD, or, press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation panel. For
example, when "Exit (0)" shows on the screen you can touch the Exit button on the screen,
or, press the "0" button on the operation panel of the copier.
Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for
arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update
procedure.
D129/D130
5-212
SM
5.12.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE

Preparation
1.
If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
2.
If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D129" folder onto the card.
Updating Procedure
1.
Turn the main power switch off.
2.
Remove the controller cover (
3.
Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A]. Make sure the label on the SD card
Service
Tables
x 2).
faces the rear side of the machine.

4.
Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure
the SD card locks in place.
SM
5-213
D129/D130
To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops
out of the slot.
5.
Disconnect the network cable from the copier if the machine is connected to a network.
6.
Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update screen
appears on the LCD in English.
7.
On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation
panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.
ROM/NEW
What it means
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version
ROM:
currently installed. The first line is the module number, the second
line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD
NEW:
card. The first line is the module number, the second line the
version name.
Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same
time. It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
8.
Touch "UpDate (#)" (or
) to start the update.
While downloading is in progress, the LCD will display "Loading". When

downloading has been completed, the panel will display "update done".
For operation panel software, the Start key lights red while downloading is in
progress, and then lights green again after downloading is completed.
9.
The "Update is Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing the
updating. The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the "Update is Done" message or
follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
D129/D130
5-214
SM
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24"
displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table. (
"Handling Firmware Update
Errors" in this section)
Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update
Service
Tables
because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.
Recovery after Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is
updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is
switched on again. If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in
order to ensure the correct operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to
show until the ROM is updated successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download
automatically from the card without the menu display.
SM
5-215
D129/D130
5.12.3 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code
consists of the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code
Meaning
Solution
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or
20
Cannot map logical address
21
Cannot access memory
HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD.
Cannot decompress
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
compressed data
damaged.
Error occurred when ROM
Controller program defective. If the second
update program started
attempt fails, replace controller board.
22
23
24
30
31
32
33
34
SD card access error
No HDD available for stamp

data download
Data incorrect for continuous

download
Data incorrect after download

interrupted
Incorrect SD card version
use a different SD card.
Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly, or

use a different SD card.
HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD.
Insert the SD card with the remaining data

required for the download, the re-start the
procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended
module download, then repeat the installation
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct
SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct
module is not on the SD
data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
card)
again.
D129/D130
5-216
SM
35
36
40
42
43
44
50
SM
Meaning
Solution
Module mismatch Module
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
on SD card is not for this
card is for another machine. Acquire correct
machine
update data then install again.
Cannot write module

Cause other than E34, E35
Engine module download

failed

Replace the update data for the module on the
SD card and try again, or replace the BCU
board.
Operation panel module
download failed
SD card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module
download failed
SD card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Controller module download

failed
Electronic confirmation check

failed

SD card and tray again, or replace controller
board.
5-217
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Code
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data
5.13 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA

The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card.
5.13.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824)

1.
Turn off the main switch.
2.
Remove the controller cover [A] (
3.
Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A].
4.
5.
Execute SP5-824.
6.
Press "1" to start uploading the NVRAM data.
D129/D130
x 2).
5-218
SM
5.13.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825)

The following data are not downloaded from the SD card:
Total counter
C/O, P/O Counter
Duplex, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning counters (system
settings).
Engine SP data
1.
2.
3.
Plug the SD card into SD card slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A].
4.
5.
Execute SP5-825.
6.
Press "1" to start downloading the NVRAM data.
Service
Tables
x 2).
SM
5-219
D129/D130
Note that the following errors could occur during downloading:
If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that downloading cannot
proceed, you cannot execute downloading, even by pressing "1".
If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you press "1" a
message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the card is abnormal and
the execution will halt.
D129/D130
5-220
SM
Self-Diagnostic Mode
5.14 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

5.14.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON
As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial settings of the
copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent self-diagnostic test program. The
self-diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart shown below and checks the CPU, memory,
HDD, and so on. An SC code is displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program
Service
Tables
detects any malfunction or abnormal condition.
SM
5-221
D129/D130
5.14.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST FLOW
D129/D130
5-222
SM
5.14.3 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is powered on, you
can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually in order to test other
components or conditions that are not tested during self-diagnosis after power on. The following
device is required in order to put the machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.
No.
Name
G02119350
Parallel Loopback Connector
5.14.4 EXECUTING DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSIS

Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1.
Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the Centronics I/F port.
2.
Hold down
, press and hold down
, and then while pressing both keys at the same
time, switch on the machine.

You will see "Now Loading" on the touch-panel, and then you will see the results of the test.
A report is printed every time a detailed self-diagnostic test is executed, whether errors
Service
Tables
were detected or not.
SM
5-223
D129/D130
Using the Debug Log
5.15 USING THE DEBUG LOG

5.15.1 OVERVIEW
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save
and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this
information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later
retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure below to set up
the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD. Then ask the user to
reproduce the problem.
5.15.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved the until the "Save Debug Log" function has been
switched on and a target has been selected.
1.
Enter the SP mode.
2.
Under "5857 Save Debug Log", press "1".
3.
On the control panel keypad, press "1" then press
. This switches the Save Debug Log
feature on.
The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the
debug information to be saved.
4.
Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857
Save Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2" with the operation panel key to select the hard
disk as the target destination, then press
D129/D130
5-224
SM
Using the Debug Log
Select "3 SD Card" to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is
inserted in Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
5.
Now touch "5858" and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858
(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Engine SC Error
Controller SC Error
Any SC Error
Jam
Saves data when an engine-related SC code is

generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC Code
is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by
Service
Tables
entering code number.

Saves data for jams.
More than one event can be selected.
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4

Touch the appropriate items(s). Press "ON" for each selection. This example shows
"Engine SC Error" selected.
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number
keys, then press
SM
. This example shows an entry for SC670.

5-225
D129/D130
Using the Debug Log
For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section "4.
Troubleshooting"
6.
Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information.
Touch "5859".
Under "5859" press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press
Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered.
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses
indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No.
Copy
2222 (SCS)
2223 (SRM)
256 (IMH)
1000 (ECS)
1025 (MCS)
D129/D130
Printer
5-226
Scanner
Web
SM
Using the Debug Log
4848(COPY)
4400 (GPS)
5375 (Scan)
5682 (NFA)
2224 (BCU)
4500 (PDL)
5682 (NFA)
6600 (WebDB)
3000 (NCS)
3300 (PTS)
2000 (NCS)
6666 (WebSys)
4600
(GPS-PM)
2000 (NCS)
10
2224 (BCU)
2000 (NCS)
The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0").
Acronym
Meaning
Acronym
Meaning
ECS
Engine Control Service
NFA
Net File Application
GPS
GW Print Service
PDL
Printer Design Language
PTS
Print Server
System Control Service
GSP-PM
GW Print Service Print

Module
IMH
Image Memory Handler
SCS
MCS
Memory Control Service
SRM
NCS
Network Control Service
WebDB
System Resource
Management
Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the
target selected with SP5-857-002) for the events that you selected SP5-858and the memory
modules selected with SP5-859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner,
and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings,
especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
SM
5-227
D129/D130
Service
Tables
Key to Acronyms
Using the Debug Log
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding
4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006to010. For example,
if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9
available selections for the "PRINTER" column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4
MB.
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD

1.
Insert the SD card into Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
2.
Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) to write
the debugging data to the SD card.
The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger than 4MB,
you can switch to another SD card.
3.
Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative
by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
Recording Errors Manually

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any other errors
that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct customers to perform the
following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data. Such problems would include a
controller or panel freeze.
In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously switched on
the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard disk as the save
destination (SP5857-002).
1.
When the error occurs, on the operation panel, press
2.
On the control panel, enter "01" then hold down
(Reset Key).
for at least 3 sec. until the machine
beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD
card by the service representatives.
3.
Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.

The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service representatives
can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card.
D129/D130
5-228
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Pag e
Date

None
Service Call Conditions
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
6.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level
Definition
Reset Procedure
To prevent damage to the machine, the main
Enter SP mode, use SP
machine cannot be operated until the SC has
5810, touch [Execute], and
been reset by a service representative (see the
then turn the main power
note below).
switch off and on.
SCs that disable only the features that use the

defective item. Although these SCs are not shown
B
to the user under normal conditions, they are

displayed on the operation panel only when the
Turn the operation switch or

main switch off and on.
defective feature is selected.
operated as usual.
The SC will not be displayed.

Only the SC history is
updated.
Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs
Turn the operation switch off
displayed on the operation panel. These are
and on.
re-displayed if the error occurs again.
Also see below.
Troubleshooting
The SC history is updated. The machine can be
When a Level "D" SC code occurs

When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the operator:
An error occurred
The job in progress will be erased
The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch "Reset" on the screen to
reset the machine immediately and go back to the copy screen.
SM
6-1
D129/D130
If the operator does not touch "Reset"

The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and that the
previous job was lost and must be started again. After reading the message, the operator
touches "Confirm" on the screen. The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code,
and stops until the operator turns the machine off and on.
If the operator touches "Reset"
If the operator touches "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to reboot, the
machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy screen.
Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.
If the Remote Service System is in use, the SC code is sent immediately to the Service
Center.
6.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors and
then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the
problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB.
If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to replace
the motor or sensors.
When a Level "A" or "B" SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display
the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode.
The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level "D" SC code.
This is done for Level "D" SC codes only.
D129/D130
6-2
SM
SC Tables: SC1xx
Exposure lamp error

-001: Shading at AGC
-002: Shading at scanning
The standard white level was not detected properly when scanning the
white plate
101
Exposure lamp defective
Lamp stabilizer defective
Exposure lamp connector defective
Standard white plate dirty
Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty
SBU defective
BCU defective
The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the
shading plate. (The shading data peak does not reach the specified
threshold)
Scanner home position error 1

Troubleshooting
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "OFF" condition
during initialization or copying.
120
SIB (B/W), SIB (Color) or scanner drive motor defective
Scanner motor defective
Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected
Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source

disconnected
SM
Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between SIB and HP sensor disconnected
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective
BCU defective
6-3
D129/D130
Scanner home position error 2

The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "ON" condition during
initialization or copying.
121
SIB (B/W), SIB (Color) or scanner motor drive board defective
Scanner motor defective
Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected
Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source

disconnected
Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between SIB and scanner HP sensor disconnected
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective
BCU defective
Black level detection error

The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero
141
clamp.
Defective SBU
BCU defective
White level detection error

The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control.
142
D129/D130
Dirty exposure glass or optics section
SBU board defective
Exposure lamp defective
Lamp stabilizer defective
BCU defective
6-4
SM
SBU connection error

The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the
144
energy save mode.
Defective SBU
Defective harness
Defective detection port on the BCU
IPU error
161
The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the IPU is detected.
Defective IPU
Defective connection between IPU and SBU
IPU PCIE Communication error

The link up interrupt did not proceed from the LYRA when the main switch
162
was turned on or when recovering from the energy saver mode.
Defective IPU
Defective BCU
The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data security
function is set "ON" with the initial setting.
165
A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set to
"ON" with the initial setting.
SM
Incorrect installation of the copy data security board
Defective copy data security board
6-5
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
Copy Data Security Unit error
SC Tables: SC2xx
Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout

202
The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within
10 sec. after turning on or changing speed
Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout
203
The polygon mirror motor does not leave the READY status within 3 sec.
after the polygon motor switched off.
Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error
The SCRDY_N signal remains HIGH for 200 ms while the LD unit is firing.
204
Polygon motor/driver board harness loose or broken
Polygon motor/driver board defective
Laser optics unit defective
IPU defective
Laser synchronizing detection error: start position LD0

The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is
not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is
220
rotating normally
The Copy Data Security Unit card not installed
The Copy Data Security Unit card is installed, but it is not the correct
type for the machine.
Laser synchronizing detection error: start position LD1

The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is
not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is
221
rotating normally.
The Copy Data Security Unit card not installed
The Copy Data Security Unit card is installed, but it is not the correct
type for the machine.
D129/D130
6-6
SM
FGATE ON error
230
The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time. (The IPU
generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration
sensor switches on.)
FGATE OFF error
The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time. (The IPU
generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration
231
sensor switches on.)
IPU defective
IPU, Controller board harness loose or broken
Controller board defective.
LD error
240
The IPU detected a problem at the LD unit.
Worn-out LD
Disconnected or broken harness of the LD.
270
SM
The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization.
A device-status error occurs during I2C bus communication.
The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than
a buffer shortage.
Loose connection
Defective IPU
Defective LD controller board
6-7
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
GAVD communication error
SC Tables: SC3xx
Charge roller bias leak

A charge roller bias leak signal was detected.
302
Charge roller damaged
High voltage supply board defective
PCDU harness defective or disconnected
Charge roller bias correction leak

The charge roller bias correction is performed twice even if the maximum
304
charge roller bias (-2000V) is applied to the roller.
ID sensor defective
Worn charge roller
Charge roller damaged
Development roller bias leak

The development roller bias leak is detected for 60 ms after the high voltage
has been supplied to the development unit.
320
D129/D130
Development bias leak
Broken harness
Defective high voltage power supply, voltage supply
Defective high voltage supply unit
6-8
SM
Development paddle motor error

The machine detects a lock signal error from the development puddle motor
for 2 seconds after the drum motor has turned on.
324
Overload on the development puddle motor
Defective development puddle motor
Defective harness
Defective IOB
ID sensor pattern test error

One of the following readings occurred 10 times in the ID sensor output when
the ID sensor pattern was checked:
1) Vsp > 2.5V
2) Vsg < 2.5V
D
3) Vsp =0V
4) Vsg = 0V
ID sensor connector defective
Poor ID sensor connector connection
I/O board (IOB) defective
Poor writing of ID sensor pattern on the drum
ID sensor Vsg test error

When the ID sensor was checked, the ID sensor output voltage is 5.0V while
the LED current value is 0.
351
SM
ID sensor defective or dirty
ID sensor connector defective
Poor ID sensor connection
Scanning system defective
Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum
6-9
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
350
Grayscale measurement error

When the grayscale control result is the maximum and it does not operate
355
correctly and these cases are detected 15 times.
ID sensor defective or dirty
The life of ID sensor or photo conductor
Shield glass dirty
TD sensor (Vt) error 1

The following condition occurs thirty times consecutively during printing. Vt is
360
less than 0.5V or 4.8V or more
TD sensor disconnected
Harness between TD sensor and PCDU defective
Defective TD sensor.
TD sensor adjustment error

Vts is less than 1.8V or 4.8V or more during TD sensor initialization.
372
Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack
TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective
TD sensor defective
Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
Drum motor error

The machine detects a lock signal error from the drum motor for 2 seconds
after the drum motor turned on.
396
D129/D130
Overload on the motor
Defective drum motor
Defective harness
Defective IOB
6-10
SM
SC Tables: SC4xx
Vsg adjustment error
400
Vsg is more than 4.2V or 3.8V or less when the machine adjusts Vsg value.
Dirty or defective ID sensor
Defective ID sensor shutter
Transfer belt bias error

The feed back bias from the transfer belt is more than 4V for 60 msec while
the transfer belt bias is output.
440
The A/D conversion level is 20 or less for 60 msec.

The PWM duty is 24% or more for 60 msec.
Power pack broken
Defective harness
Disconnected connector
Transfer/Development motor error

The machine detects a lock signal error from the transfer/development motor
441
SM
Overload on the motor
Defective transfer/development motor
Defective harness
Defective IOB
6-11
Troubleshooting
for a continuous 20 times after the transfer/development motor turned on.
D129/D130
Transfer belt contact motor error

The transfer belt HP sensor detects incorrect movement of the transfer belt
after the transfer belt contact motor has turned on.
442
Dirty transfer belt HP sensor
Defective transfer belt contact motor
Disconnected connector of the transfer belt HP sensor or motor
Disconnected cable
Defective IOB
SC Tables: SC5xx
1st tray lift malfunction

The tray lift sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10
seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at
the feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the
tray lift sensor should de-activate within 1.5 sec after the paper bottom plate
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 1.5 sec., a message will prompt
501
the user to reset Tray 1. After two attempts to release the error by re-setting
the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed.
An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the

motor drive and caused an overload.
D129/D130
Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
Tray lift sensor defective
Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
Tray lift motor defective
6-12
SM
2nd tray lift malfunction

The tray lift sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10
seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at
the feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the
tray lift sensor should de-activate within 1.5 sec. after the paper bottom plate
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 1.5 sec., a message will prompt
502
the user to reset Tray 2. After two attempts to re-set the paper tray, if this
does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed.
An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the

motor drive and caused an overload.
503
Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
Tray lift sensor defective
Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
Tray lift motor defective
3rd tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)

For the paper feed unit:
SC 503-01 occurs if the lift sensor does not turn on within 10 seconds
after the tray lift motor has turned on.
For the LCT:
SC 503-01 occurs if the lift sensor does not turn on or turn off within 8
Troubleshooting
seconds after the tray lift motor has turned on to lift or lower the tray.
-01
Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection
Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection
For the LCT:
SM
Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection
Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection
6-13
D129/D130
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive times.

When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
For the LCT:
When the main switch is turned on or when the LCT is set, if the end
fence is not in its position (home position sensor ON), the tray lift motor
stops.
-02
If the upper limit does not go off for 1.5 seconds even the tray lift motor
turns on to lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at
power on.
For the LCT:
Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection
4th tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)

For the two-tray paper feed unit:
When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within
15 seconds. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
For the LCT:

504
After the job is finished, if the end fence is not in the home position
(home position sensor ON), the tray lift motor stops.
When the main switch is turned on or when the paper feed unit is set, if
the end fence is not in the home position (home position sensor ON), the
tray lift motor stops. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the
SC is generated.
If the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray
lift motor is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
D129/D130
6-14
SM
For the LCT:
5th tray lift malfunction (optional LCT)

For the two-tray paper feed unit:
If the upper limit of the LCT 1200-sheet is not detected within 8 seconds
when the tray lift motor is turned on to lift up the tray.
For the LCT:

505
If the upper limit of the LCT 1200-sheet is not detected within 8 seconds
when the tray lift motor is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
The tray lift sensor of the LCT 1200-sheet does not go off within 1.5
seconds when the tray lowers. If this condition occurs three consecutive
times, the SC is generated.
Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
Upper limit sensor defective or disconnected
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for10 seconds after turning on the
530
SM
fusing exhaust fan.
Defective fusing exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection
Defective IOB
Disconnected harness
6-15
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
Fusing exhaust fan motor error
Exhaust fan motor error

The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the
531
exhaust fan motor.
Defective exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection.
Defective IOB
Cooling fan motor error

The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after
532
turning on the cooling fan motor.
Defective cooling fan motor or connector disconnection.
Defective IOB
Paper exit cooling fan motor error

The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after
533
turning on the paper exit cooling fan motor.
Defective paper exit cooling fan motor or connector disconnection.
Defective IOB
Fusing motor error

The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 2 seconds after turning on the
fusing motor.
540
D129/D130
Motor overload
Defective fusing motor or connector disconnection.
Defective IOB
6-16
SM
Fusing thermistor open (center)
541
The thermistor (center) detects 0C or less for 5 sec.
Fusing thermistor disconnected
Fusing thermistor connector defective
Fusing temperature warm-up error(center)

This SC is generated if the following condition occurs:
542
The thermistor (center) does not detect an 8C increment in the fusing

temperature for 1.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45C.
The temperature of the center thermistor does not reach the target
temperature for 28 seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
Thermistor warped or broken
Fusing overheat error 1 (software detection)

A fusing temperature (at the center) of over 230C (446F) is detected for 1
second by the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing
A
roller.
Power supply unit defective
BCU defective
TRIAC short on PSU (PSU defective)
Troubleshooting
543
Fusing overheat error 1 (hardware detection)

A fusing temperature (at the center) over 250C is detected by the fusing
544
SM
temperature monitor circuit in the BCU board.
BCU defective
6-17
D129/D130
Fusing lamp consecutive full power 1

After warm-up the fusing lamp remains at full power for 15 seconds without
545
the hot roller rotating.
Disconnected or defective thermistors (center)
Defective fusing lamp
Zero cross error
The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater
relay is off when turning on the main power.
The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the
heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front
547
door.
The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal
detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is
less than 45.
Defective fusing lamp relay
Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
Unstable power supply
Fusing thermistor open (end)
551
The thermistor (end) detects 0C or less for 5 sec.
Fusing thermistor (end) disconnected
Fusing thermistor (end) connector defective
Fusing temperature warm-up error (end)

This SC is generated if the following condition occurs:
552
The thermistor (end) does not detect an 8C increment in the fusing

temperature for 1.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45C.
The temperature of the end thermistor does not reach the target
temperature for 31 seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
D129/D130
Thermistor warped or broken

6-18
SM
Fusing overheat error 1 (software detection)

A fusing temperature (at the end) of over 230C (446F) is detected for 1
second by the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing
553
roller.
Power supply unit defective
BCU defective
TRIAC short on PSU (PSU defective)
Fusing overheat error 1 (hardware detection)

A fusing temperature (at the end) over 250C is detected by the fusing
554
temperature monitor circuit in the BCU board.
BCU defective
Fusing lamp consecutive full power 1

After warm-up, the fusing lamp remains at full power for 40 seconds without
A
the hot roller rotating.
Disconnected or defective thermistors (ends)
Defective fusing lamp

Troubleshooting
555
Zero cross frequency error

When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more
557
in 11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557

occurs.
SM
Noise (High frequency)
6-19
D129/D130
Fusing unit jam

The fusing sensor detected a fusing unit paper late jam three times. The
paper was late and the fusing exit sensor could not detect the paper three
559
times.
Remove the paper that is stopped in the fusing unit.
Check that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper
feed path.
If the error persists, replace the fusing unit.
SC559 does not operate until SP1159 has been set to "1" (ON). This sets the machine
to count the number of occurrences of paper late jams in the fusing unit. The default
setting is "0" (OFF).
SC559 is issued after the third occurrence of a paper late jam in the fusing unit. Once
this SC has been issued, the machine cannot be used until the service technician
removes the cause of the jam and restores it to normal operation.
The jam counter is reset after a sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing exit
sensor after the cause of the jam has been removed.
D129/D130
6-20
SM
SC Tables: SC6xx
Mechanical counter error: BK

This SC is only for NA models.
610
620
The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set
to "1".
Disconnected mechanical counter
Defective mechanical counter
ADF communication error

Communication error between machine and ADF
Communication error between machine and ADF with ASAP is detected.
-01
Disconnected cable
ARDF defective
IPU board defective
External noise
Communication error between IPU and ADF
After the ARDF is detected, the break signal occurs or communication
-02
Incorrect installation of ARDF
ARDF defective
IPU board defective
External noise
Troubleshooting
timeout occurs.
Communication timeout error between IOB and finisher or mailbox

A break (low) signal is received from the finisher or the mailbox.
621
SM
Disconnected cable
Defective IOB
Defective main board in the peripherals
6-21
D129/D130
Paper feed unit communication error

While the IOB communicates with a peripheral, an SC code is displayed if
one of following conditions occurs.
622
The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the peripheral
only just after the main switch is turned on.
The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by URAT.
Defective main control board of the peripheral
Defective BCU or IOB
Disconnected peripheral
2nd Paper Bank communication error
623
This SC is not issued for this machine when a communication error signal
between the 1st paper bank and 2nd paper bank is received.
Loose connector
CSS communication error

630
A communication error occurred during communication with the CSS.
Communication line error
MF accounting device error 1
632
The controller sends data to the accounting device, but the device does not
respond. This occurs three times.
Loose connection between the controller and the accounting device
633
After communication is established, the controller receives the brake signal

from the accounting device.
D129/D130
Loose connection between the controller and the accounting device
6-22
SM

The accounting device sends the controller the report that indicates a
634
backup RAM error has occurred.
Defective controller of the MF accounting device
Battery error

The accounting device sends the controller the report that indicates the
635
636
battery voltage error has occurred.
Defective controller of the MF accounting device
Battery error
IC Card Error
External authentication module error
This SC is generated if the external authentication is enabled and following
-01
condition occurs:
No external authentication module
SD card error or external authentication module broken
No DESS module
-02
Troubleshooting
Version error
The version of the external authentication module is not correct.
Incorrect module version
OSM User Code File Error

The correct "usercode" file could not be found in the root folder of the SD
-11
card because the file is not present, or the existing file is corrupted or the
wrong type file.
Make sure the eccm.mod file is in the root folder of the SD card.
Note: Check the eccm.mod file is in the root folder of the SD card.
SM
6-23
D129/D130
Management area error
-99
The management number of the external authentication module exceeds

the maximum limit.
637
Software error
Tracking Information Notice Error

Tracking Application Error
When the tracking information is lost, this SC is issued.
-01
The machine failed to give notice the tracking information to the

tracking SDK application.
Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
Tracking Information Notice Error

When the tracking information is lost, this SC is issued.
-02
The machine failed to give notice the tracking information to the

management server.
Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
BCU communication error
641
D129/D130
The BCU does not respond to the frame transmitted from the controller.
Defective controller
Detective BCU
6-24
SM
650
Communication error of the remote service modem

(Embedded RCG-M)
Authentication error
The authentication for the Embedded RCG-M fails at a dial up connection.
-001
Incorrect SP settings
Disconnected telephone line
Disconnected modem board
Check and set the correct user name (SP5816-156) and password
(SP5816-157).
Incorrect modem setting
-004
Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting.
Same as -001
Check and set the correct AT command (SP5816-160).

Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to a defective communication line
-005
or defective connection.
Same as -001
Consult with the user's local telephone company.
The modem board does not work properly even though the setting of the
modem board is installed with a dial up connection.
-013
Same as -001
1.
Install the modem board.
2.
Check and reset the modem board setting with SP5816.
3.
Replace the modem board.
Modem board error 2
-014
SM
The modem board is installed even though the RCG-N is installed.

1.
Uninstall the modem board, if it is installed.
2.
Check that the Wireless LAN or Ethernet LAN is working properly.

6-25
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
Modem board error 1
Incorrect dial up connection

-001: Program parameter error
651
-002: Program execution error

An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to
call the center with a dial up connection.
Caused by a software bug
ID2 mismatching
ID2 for @Remote certification is mismatching between the controller board
and NVRAM.
652
Used controller board installed
Used NVRAM installed

1.
Install the correct controller board or new controller board.
2.
Install the correct NVRAM or new NVRAM.
ID2 error
ID2 stored in the NVRAM is incorrect.
653
Used NVRAM installed

Clear the ID2 in the NVRAM, and then input a correct ID2.
D129/D130
6-26
SM
EEPROM error
[1]
Open communication error: ID error
[2]
Open communication error: Channel error
[3]
Open communication error: Device error
[4]
Open communication error: Communication failed error
[5]
Open communication error: Communication time error
[6]
SM
Open communication error: Communication suspended

error
[7]
Open communication error: Buffer full error
[8]
Close communication error: No error code
[9]
Close communication error: ID error
[10]
Close communication error: No error code
[11]
Data write error: ID error
[12]
Data write error: Channel error
[13]
Data write error: Device error
[14]
Data write error: Communication suspended error
[15]
Data write error: Communication time over error
[16]
Data write error: Communication suspended error
[17]
Data write error: Buffer full error
[18]
Data write error: No error code
[19]
Data read error: ID error
[20]
Data read error: Channel error
[21]
Data read error: Device error
[22]
Data read error: Communication failed error
[23]
Data read error: Communication time over error

6-27
Troubleshooting
669
D129/D130
[24]
Data read error: Communication suspended error
[25]
Data read error: Buffer full error
[26]
Data read error: No error code
[27]
Device detection error: ID error
[28]
Device detection error: Channel error
[29]
Device detection error: Device error
[30]
Device detection error: Communication failed error
[31]
Device detection error: Communication time over error
[32]
Device detection error: Communication suspended error
[33]
Device detection error: Buffer full error
[34]
Device detection error: No error code
Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has
detected the EEPROM error.
Caused by noise
Engine startup error

The BCU fails to respond with the prescribed time when the machine is
turned on.
670
Connections between BCU and controller board are loose,

disconnected, or damaged
D129/D130
1.
Replace the BCU
2.
Replace the controller board
6-28
SM
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup
After the machine is powered on, the communication between the

controller and the operation panel is not established, or communication
with controller is interrupted after a normal startup.
After startup reset of the operation panel, the attention code or the
attention acknowledge code is not sent from the controller within 30
seconds.
672
After the controller issues a command to check the communication line

with the controller at 30-second intervals, the controller fails to respond
twice.
Controller stalled
Controller board installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
Operation panel connector loose or defective
The controller is not completely shutdown when you turn the main
switch off.
Check the setting of SP5875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it
to "0 (ON)".
Transmission error in controller board

D
Video transmission error is detected in the controller board.
Defective Controller Board
Troubleshooting
674
Memory address (PER) command error

The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the controller
for the prescribed time after the paper has reached the registration sensor.
687
SM
Harness Disconnection at BCU
Controller board loose or broken
Defective BCU
Defective Controller Board
6-29
D129/D130
SC Tables: SC7xx
700
Scanner feeding error 1

Pick-up roller HP error
When the pick-up motor turns on counterclockwise, the pick-up roller HP
01
sensor does not detect the home position of the pick-up roller.
Defective pick-up roller HP sensor
Defective pick-up motor
Defective DF drive board
Original stopper HP error

When the pick-up motor turns on clockwise, the original stopper HP sensor
02
does not detect the home position of the original stopper.
Defective original stopper HP sensor
Defective pick-up motor
Defective DF drive board
DF fan motor 1 error
12
DF fan motor lock signal is detected after the original transportation has
finished.
701
Turn the main switch off and on.
Scanner feeding error 2

Pick-up motor driver error
The error flag of the pick-up motor driver IC is asserted when the jam error is
02
issued.
Pick-up motor driver detected an error.
D129/D130
6-30
SM
Paper feed motor error

The error flag of the paper feed motor driver IC is asserted when the jam
03
error is issued.
Pick-up motor driver detected an error.
720
2000/3000-Sheet (booklet) Finisher Error

Finisher exit guide plate motor error
After moving away from the guide plate position sensor, the exit guide is not
detected at the home position within the prescribed time.
-24
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
Guide plate motor disconnected, defective
Guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
Guide plate position sensor disconnected, defective
Finisher punch motor error

The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the
punch motor turned on.
SM
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
SC code.
Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective
Punch motor disconnected or defective
Punch motor overload due to obstruction
6-31
Troubleshooting
-25
D129/D130
Finisher jogger motor error

The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor output
does not change within the specified number of pulses.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues
-30
this SC code.
Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective
Jogger motor disconnected, defective
Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher main board and jogger motor
Stack feed-out motor error
The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
stack feed-out belt 3000ms after the stack feed-out belt has moved to its
home position.
The stack feed-out HP sensor does not turn off 200 ms after the stack
feed-out belt has moved from its home position.
-41
SC code.
Defective stack feed-out HP sensor
Overload on the stack feed-out motor
Defective stack feed-out motor
Defective main board
Disconnected or defective harness
Finisher stapler movement motor error

Staple movement is not finished within a certain time.
SC code.
-42
D129/D130
Motor overload
Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor
Loose connection of the stapler movement motor
Defective stapler home position sensor
Defective stapler movement motor
6-32
SM
Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error

The stapler does not return to its home position within the specified time
after stapling.
-43
SC code.
Defective stapler rotation motor
Overload on the stapler rotation motor
Defective stapler rotation HP sensor
Finisher corner stapler motor error

SC code.
The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after
operating.
-44
The HP sensor of the staple unit does not detect the home position after
the staple unit moves to its home position.
The HP sensor of the staple unit detects the home position after the
staple unit moves from its home position.
Staple jam
Motor overload
Defective stapler motor
Troubleshooting
SM
6-33
D129/D130
Finisher folder plate motor error

The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the
specified time.
-52
SC code.
Folder plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
Folder plate motor disconnected, defective
Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction.
Folding unit bottom fence lift motor

The folding unit bottom fence movement is not finished within a certain time.
-53
SC code.
Motor harness loose, broken
Motor drive obstructed
Motor defective
Clamp roller retraction motor error

The clamp roller movement is not finished within a certain time.
-55
SC code.
Motor defective
Stack junction gate motor error

The stack junction gate motor moves but the stack junction gate is not
detected at its position within a specific time.
-57
D129/D130
SC code.
Motor broken
Motor connection loose
Motor overloaded
6-34
SM
Booklet stapler motor error 1

SC code.
-60
The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the
specified time.
Motor overload
Loose connection of the front stapler motor
Defective front stapler motor
Booklet staple motor error 2

SC code.
-61
The rear stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the
specified time.
Motor overload
Loose connection of the rear stapler motor
Defective rear stapler motor
Tray lift motor error

SC code.
SM
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the
specified time after the tray raises or lowers.
Motor overload
Loose connection of the tray lift motor
Defective tray lift motor
6-35
Troubleshooting
-70
D129/D130
Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error

The shift roller HP sensor of the upper tray does not activate within the
prescribed time after the shift tray starts to move toward or away from the
home position.
-71
SC code.
Shift tray HP sensor of the upper tray disconnected, defective
Shift tray motor of the upper tray disconnected, defective
Shift tray motor of the upper tray overloaded due to obstruction
Shift jogger motor 1 error

The side fence does not retract within the prescribed time after the shift
jogger motor 1 switches on.
-72
SC code.
Shift jogger motor 1 disconnected, defective
Shift jogger motor 1 overloaded due to obstruction
Shift jogger 1 HP sensor disconnected, defective
Shift jogger motor 2 error

The side fence does not retract within the prescribed time after the shift
jogger motor 2 switches on.
-73
D129/D130
SC code.
Shift jogger motor 2 disconnected, defective
Shift jogger motor 2 overloaded due to obstruction
Shift jogger 2 HP sensor disconnected, defective
6-36
SM
Shift jogger retraction motor error

The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the retraction
motor switches on.
-74
SC code.
Shift jogger retraction motor broken
Shift jogger retraction motor connection loose
Shift jogger retraction motor overloaded
Defective shift jogger retraction HP sensor
Return roller motor error

This occurs during the operation of the lower tray pressure motor
-75
Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
Motor overloaded
Home position sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective
Home position defective
Punch movement motor error

The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within the
specified time.
-80
Defective motor
Troubleshooting
SC code.
Paper position sensor slide motor error

The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position
within the specified time.
-81
SC code.
SM
Defective motor
6-37
D129/D130
722
1000-Sheet Finisher Error

Upper transport motor error
The upper transport motor in the finisher is not operating.
-10
Upper transport motor drive is obstructed (jammed paper, paper scraps,

etc.)
The motor harness is loose or broken
Upper transport motor defective
Lower transport motor error

The lower transport motor in the finisher is not operating.
-14
Lower transport motor drive is obstructed (jammed paper, paper scraps,

etc.)
Lower transport motor defective
Exit motor error

The exit motor in the finisher is not operating.
-17
Exit motor drive is obstructed (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.)
Exit motor defective
Finisher exit guide plate motor error

The exit guide plate HP sensor did not activate within the prescribed time
after the exit guide plate motor turned on.
-24
D129/D130
Finisher exit guide plate motor drive is obstructed (jammed paper, paper
scraps, etc.)
Exit guide plate motor harness loose, broken
Exit guide plate HP sensor harness loose, broken
Exit guide plate motor defective
Exit guide plate HP sensor defective
6-38
SM
Front fence motor error

The jogger fence motor in the finisher is not operating.
-30
Jogger motor drive is obstructed (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.)
Jogger fence HP sensor dirty, loose, defective
Jogger fence motor defective
Feed-out belt motor error

The feed-out belt did not return to the home position within the prescribed
time.
-41
Feed-out belt motor drive is obstructed (jammed paper, paper scraps,

etc.)
Motor harness loose or broken
Feed-out belt HP sensor dirty, disconnected, broken
Motor defective
Stapler movement motor

The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
SC code.
The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the
SM
stapler motor turned on.
Stapler or motor drive is blocked by obstruction
Motor harness loose or broken
Stapler HP sensor harness loose, broken
Motor defective
Stapler HP sensor defective
6-39
Troubleshooting
-42
D129/D130
Corner stapler motor error

The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
SC code.
The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after
operating.
-44
The HP sensor of the staple unit does not detect the home position after
the staple unit moves to its home position.
The HP sensor of the staple unit detects the home position after the staple
unit moves from its home position.
Staple jam
Number of sheets in stack exceeds allowed number of sheets for

stapling
Stapler motor obstructed
Stapler motor defective
Tray lift motor error

The tray lift motor is not operating.
-70
Stack height sensor dirty, harness loose, broken
Motor defective
Stack height sensor defective
Shift tray motor error

The shift tray motor is not operating.
-71
D129/D130
Shift motor drive is obstructed (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.)
Shift motor harness loose, broken
Shift tray HP sensor harness loose, broken
Shift motor defective
Shit tray HP sensor defective
6-40
SM
Shift motor error

The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1.86 seconds after
770
the shift motor has turned on at power on or during its operation.
Defective shift motor
Defective shift motor HP sensor
Bridge unit error

The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge unit.
791
Defective connector
Broken harness
Incorrect installation
Finisher error
The machine does not recognize the finisher, but recognizes the bridge unit.
B
Defective connector
Defective harness
Incorrect installation
Troubleshooting
792
SM
6-41
D129/D130
SC Tables: SC8xx
Energy save I/O sub-system error

816
Energy saver sub-system detects an error.
Defective controller board
Monitor Error
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot
loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root
817
system files from the OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the
controller slot are false or corrupted.
OS Flash ROM data defective; change the controller firmware
SD card data defective; use another SD card
Watchdog timer error

The watchdog timer detect the error even if system processing normally.
818
D129/D130
System program defective
Optional board defective
6-42
SM
Fatal kernel error

Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing.
One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel.
819
0x6261
6261 6420 6469 7200 00 -> "bad dir"
0x696e
0x69742064 -> "init died"
0x766d
0x5f706167 -> "vm_pageout: VM is full"
554C
UL (USB error)
----
Error in the OS
"init died", "vm_pageout: VM is full", "Cache
Error"
System program defective
Optional board defective
Replace controller firmware
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so
Troubleshooting
you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
SM
6-43
D129/D130
820
CTL
Self-diagnostics error: CPU
[XXXX]: Detailed error code

CPU error
During the self-diagnostic, the controller CPU detects an error. There
are 47 types of error code (0001 to 4005) depending on the cause of
the error. The CPU detects an error and displays the specific error code
with the program address where the error occurs.
[0001] to
[06FF]
System firmware problem
1.
[0801] to [4005] 2.
3.
Reinstall the controller system firmware.

Replace the controller.
When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure, the
following information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to a
technical support center.
SC code
Detailed error code
Program address
CPU/Memory Error
[0701] to
[070A]
D129/D130
Defective RAM-DIMM
1.
Reinstall the controller system software.
2.
Replace the RAM-DIMM.
3.
6-44
SM
821
Self-diagnostics error: ASIC

ASIC error
[0B00]
The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC.
Defective ASIC device
Replace the controller board.

Self-diagnosis error: ASIC
The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the CPU
timer. If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range, this SC code
[0D05]
is displayed.
Defective RAM-DIMM

Video bridge device (ASIC) error 1
[50A1]
The CPU does not detect the video bridge device.
Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
[50A2]
The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from the
video bridge device.
Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so
you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
SM
6-45
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
Video bridge device (ASIC) register error 1
822
Self-diagnostic error: HDD

Check performed only when HDD is installed:
HDD device busy for over 31 s.
After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains
busy for over 6 s.
[3003]
HDD defective
HDD harness disconnected, defective
No response to the self-diagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDDs.

[3004]
823
HDD defective
Self-diagnostic error: NIB

MAC address check sum error
[6101]
The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum
stored in ROM.
PHY IC error
[6104]
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.

PHY IC loop-back error
[6105]
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller.
Self-diagnostic error : NVRAM

NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM device is damaged, or NVRAM
socket damaged.
824
D129/D130
NVRAM defective
NVRAM backup battery exhausted
NVRAM socket damaged
6-46
SM
826
Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/optional NVRAM

The one second counted by the RTC is different from the one second
counted by the CPU on the controller.
[1501]
Defective RTC device
The RTC device is not detected.

[15FF]
827
Defective RTC device
NVRAM without RTC installed
Discharged backup battery
Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM

Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM
[0201]
DIMM).
Loose connection
Defective SDRAM DIMM
Resident memory error
[0202]
Defective RAM DIMM
Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
Defective 12C bus
Troubleshooting
The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are incorrect or unreadable.
Replace the RAM DIMM.
SM
6-47
D129/D130
828
Self-diagnostic error: ROM

Check sum error 1
The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is

checked. If the check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is
[0101]
displayed.
1.
829
Self-diagnostic error: Optional RAM

Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the optional RAM (SDRAM
DIMM).
[0301]
Loose connection
Defective SDRAM DIMM

Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
Memory structure data error
The memory structure data error for the optional RAM (SDRAM DIMM) is
detected when the self-diagnostic is executed.
[0302]
Defective RAM DIMM
Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
Defective 12C bus
Replace the RAM DIMM.
D129/D130
6-48
SM
833
Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC

ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI
[0F30]
configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
[0F31]
Replace the IPU.
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI
[0F41]
configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.

Replace the IPU.
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
[50B1]
Check for loose connections at the mother board.

Replace the IPU.
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
[50B2]
Check for loose connections at the mother board.
Troubleshooting
Replace the IPU.
SM
6-49
D129/D130
835
Self-diagnostic error: Centronic device

Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
[1102]
IEEE1284 connector error
Centronic loopback connector defective

Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
[110C]
ASIC device error
IEEE1284 connector error

Centronic loopback connector is not connected for detailed self-diagnostic
test.
[1120]
Centronic loopback connector not connected correctly
ASIC device defective
838
Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator

A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator
via the I2C bus.
[2701]
Defective clock generator
Defective I2C bus
Defective I2C port on the CPU
D129/D130
6-50
SM
839
USB NAND Flash ROM error

USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.
[9001]
The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.

[9101]
The USB NAND Flash ROM controller is disconnected.

[9110]
EEPROM error 1: EEPROM access
840
During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd reading
failure causes this SC code.
During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
Defective EEPROM
EEPROM error 2: EEPROM read/write error

841
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM.
Troubleshooting
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
Flash ROM verification error

Verification error of the flash ROM on the controller board occurs.
842
This SC is logged at 1st error detection.SC819 is issued at 2nd error

detection.
SC819 is issued at 2nd error detection.
Defective flash ROM (controller board)
SM
6-51
D129/D130
IEEE 1394 I/F error

Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F.
851
Not supported by this machine
NIB (PHY), LINK module defective; change the Interface Board
Wireless LAN Error 1

During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is inserted
853
into the controller board.
During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is

inserted into the controller board.
Wireless LAN Error 2

During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is pulled out
854
from the controller board.
During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is pulled

out from the controller board.
Wireless LAN error 3
855
An error is detected on the wireless LAN card (802.11a/g, g).
Wireless LAN card defective
Wireless LAN card connection incorrect
USB I/F Error
857
The USB driver is not stable and caused an error.
Bad USB card connection
Replace the controller board
D129/D130
6-52
SM
HDD Encryption unit error 1

858
A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key

with the HDD encryption unit.
Encryption key acquisition error:
The controller fails to get a new encryption key.
-00

Encryption key setting for HDD error:
The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.
-01
Defective SATA chip on the controller board

NVRAM data encryption error 1:
An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-02
Defective NVRAM on the controller board
Replace the NVRAM.

NVRAM data encryption error 2:
An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-30
Troubleshooting

Other error:
-31
A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.
SM
Same as SC991
6-53
D129/D130
HDD Encryption unit error 2

859
A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an

encryption key with the HDD encryption unit.
HDD check error:
The HDD is not correctly installed.
-08
No HDD installed
Unformatted HDD
The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on the HDD
1.
Install the HDD correctly.
2.
Initialize the HDD.
Power failure during the data encryption:

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been completed.
-09
Power failure during the data encryption
Initialize the HDD.

Data read/write error:
-10
The DMAC error is detected twice or more.
Same as SC863
HDD startup error at main power on
860
HDD is connected but a driver error is detected.
The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 s.
HDD is not initialized
Label data is corrupted
Defective HDD
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001.
D129/D130
6-54
SM
HDD re-try failure

At power on, the HDD is detected. Power supply to the HDD is interrupted
after the system has entered the energy save mode, but after the HDD has
been awakened from the energy save mode, it does not return to the ready
861
status within 30 sec.
Harness between HDD and controller board disconnected, defective
HDD power connector disconnected
HDD defective
Bad sector number error

The number of bad sectors in the HDD (image data area) goes over 101.
862
Defective HDD
Format the HDD with SP5-832-002.

Replace the HDD.
863
HDD data read failure

The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad sectors
generated during operation.
Troubleshooting
Note: [001] to [017] indicate the type of partition where the error occurred.
Enable display of these numbers with SP7902.
SM
[001]
An area which does not belong to a partition
[002]
a partition
[003]
b partition
[004]
c partition
[005]
d partition
[006]
e partition
[007]
f partition
6-55
D129/D130
[008]
g partition
[009]
h partition
[010]
i partition
[011]
j partition
[012]
k partition
[013]
l partition
[014]
m partition
[015]
n partition
[016]
o partition
[017]
p partition
[018]
q partition
[019]
r partition
[020]
s partition
[021]
q partition
[022]
t partition
[023]
u partition
HDD defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad sector
information is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is accessed,
these bad sectors will not be accessed for read/write operation.
D129/D130
6-56
SM
864
HDD data CRC error

During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data
transfer does not execute normally while data is being written to the HDD.
SM
[002]
a partition
[003]
b partition
[004]
c partition
[005]
d partition
[006]
e partition
[007]
f partition
[008]
g partition
[009]
h partition
[010]
i partition
[011]
j partition
[012]
k partition
[013]
l partition
[014]
m partition
[015]
n partition
[016]
o partition
[017]
p partition
[018]
q partition
[019]
r partition
[020]
s partition
Troubleshooting
[001]
6-57
D129/D130
[021]
q partition
[022]
t partition
[023]
u partition
865
HDD defective
HDD access error

HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those
for SC863, 864.
D129/D130
[001]
[002]
a partition
[003]
b partition
[004]
c partition
[005]
d partition
[006]
e partition
[007]
f partition
[008]
g partition
[009]
h partition
[010]
i partition
[011]
j partition
[012]
k partition
[013]
l partition
[014]
m partition
[015]
n partition
[016]
o partition
6-58
SM
[017]
p partition
[018]
q partition
[019]
r partition
[020]
s partition
[021]
q partition
[022]
t partition
[023]
u partition
HDD defective.
SD card error 1: Confirmation

The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD
card in the controller slot immediately after the machine is turned on. The
program on the SD card contains electronic confirmation license data. If the
866
program does not contain this license data, or if the result of the check shows
that the license data in the program on the SD card is incorrect, then the
checked program cannot execute and this SC code is displayed.
Program missing from the SD card
Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card
867
Troubleshooting
SD card error 2: SD card removed

The SD card in the slot is removed while the machine is on.
Insert the SD card, then turn the machine off and on.
SM
6-59
D129/D130
SD card error 3: SC card access

An error occurs while an SD card is used.
868
SD card not inserted correctly
SD card defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
Address book data error

The address book data cannot be read from the HDD, SD card or flash ROM
on the controller where it is stored, or the data read from the media is
defective.
Software defective:
Turn the machine off/on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then
870
replace the controller firmware.
HDD defective.
More Details
Do SP5846-046 (Initialize All Setting & Addr Book) to reset all address
book data.
Reset the user information with SP5832-006 (HDD Formatting User

Information).
Replace the HDDs.
HDD mail receive data error
872
The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly at power on.
The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly (can neither
read nor write) while processing incoming email.
HDD defective
The machine is turned off while the HDD is being accessed.
Do SP5832-008 to format the mail RX data on the HDD.
D129/D130
6-60
SM
HDD mail send data error

An error is detected on the HDD immediately after the machine has been
873
turned on, or power has been turned off while the machine has used the
HDD.
1.
Do SP5832-008 (Format HDD Mail TX Data) to initialize the HDD.
2.
Replace the HDD
Delete All error 1: HDD

A data error is detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option has
been used.
874
Note: The source of this error is the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit running from
an SD card.
1.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
2.
Install the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit again. For more, see "Installation".
3.
HDD defective
Troubleshooting
Delete All error 2: Data area

An error occurs while the machine deletes data from the HDD.
Note: The source of this error is the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362)
running from an SD card.
875
-001
An error occurs in hddchack-i.
-002
Failed to delete data from the HDD.
-003
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
SM
6-61
D129/D130
Log Data Error

876
An error is detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during

machine operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it
is operating.
Log Data Error 1
-01
Damaged log data file in the HDD

Log Data Error 2
-02
HDD encryption unit not installed
1.
Ask the customer's administrator to disable the HDD encryption setting

with a user tool.
2.
Install the HDD encryption unit.
Log Data Error 3
-03
Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data
1.
2.
Ask the customer's administrator to disable the HDD encryption setting

with a user tool.
Log Data Error 4

-04
Unusual HDD encryption function due to defective NVRAM data

Log Data Error 5
-05
Installed a NVRAM or HDD which was used in another machine
1.
Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
2.
Log Data Error 99

-99
Other than the above causes
Ask your supervisor.

D129/D130
6-62
SM
HDD DataOverwriteSecurity SD card error

The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the DataOverwriteSecurity
Unit is installed and activated.
877
878
Defective SD card
SD card not installed
1.
Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card.
2.
Check and reinstall the SD card.
USB Flash Error

TPM system authentication error
The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).
-00
Incorrect updating for the system firmware
Defective flash ROM on the controller board

USB Flash Error
File system in the USB flash device is defective.
-
Cannot mount partition 3 in the USB flash device.
Encryption key does not exist.
Cannot find the file for KMMD to be operated.

Troubleshooting
-01

TPM Error
An error occurred in TPM or in TPM driver.
-02
TPM defective
SM
6-63
D129/D130
TCSD Error
An error occurred in TPM or in TPM driver.
-03
TPM defective
File Format Converter (MLB) error

880
A request to get access to the MLB is not answered within the specified time.
MLB defective, replace the MLB
Authentication area error
881
Authentication application error is detected.
Error data in an authentication application reaches the management

limit.
Software performance error

If the processing program shows abnormal performance and the program is
899
D129/D130
abnormally ended, this SC is issued.
Software defective
6-64
SM
SC Tables: SC9xx
Electrical total counter error

The total counter contains something that is not a number.
900
920
NVRAM incorrect type
NVRAM defective
NVRAM data scrambled
Unexpected error from external source
Printer error
-01
Timeout error during the PM operation
-02
Working memory error

-
-03
Cannot start-up the filtering process
-04
Abnormal exit from the filtering process

An internal application error was detected and operation cannot continue.
Software defective; turn the machine off/on, or change the controller

firmware
Insufficient memory
921
Printer font error
-01
Resident font is not found
-02
Option font is not found
Troubleshooting
A necessary font is not found in the SD card.

-
SM
A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
The SD card data is corrupted.
6-65
D129/D130
925
Net File function error
-00
HDD is defective
-01
NetFile management file is broken

The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile
management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are
defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router
functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web

services, and other network functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code.
Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925).
Here is a list of HDD status codes:
Display
Meaning
(-1)
HDD not connected
(-2)
HDD not ready
(-3)
No label
(-4)
Partition type incorrect
(-5)
Error returned during label read or check
(-6)
Error returned during label read or check
(-7)
"filesystem" repair failed
(-8)
"filesystem" mount failed
(-9)
Drive does not answer command
(-10)
Internal kernel error
(-11)
Size of drive is too small
(-12)
Specified partition does not exist
D129/D130
6-66
SM
Display
(-13)
Meaning
Device file does not exist
Recovery from SC 925

Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery
procedures for SC860 to SC865.
Procedure 2
If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 to SC865), turn the machine
power off and on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on
the HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that:
Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
All captured documents will be erased
DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased
Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be erased.
The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management information
must be configured again (this will use a lot of time).
Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
1.
Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all received fax documents
2.
In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer Documents.
3.
Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.
Procedure 3
If "Procedure 2" is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD Formatting All), then
turn the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask the customer
before you do this SP code.
SM
6-67
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
Procedure 4
If "Procedure 3" is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
Software error 1
990
The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot

continue.
Software defective, re-boot
Software error 2
991
The software performs an unexpected function. However, unlike SC990,

recovery processing allows the program to continue.
Software defective, re-boot
In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:

1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent
logged errors.
2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you
will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the software
file name, line number, and so on.
1) is the recommended method, because another SC could write over the information
for the previous SC.
Undefined error
992
Defective software program
An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
Application Item Error
994
The number of executed application items on the operation panel reach

the maximum limit for the operation panel structure.
D129/D130
Too much executed application items
6-68
SM
995
-01
CPM setting error
Defective BCU
NVRAM Replacement error
1.
Install the previous NVRAM.
2.
Input the serial number with SP5811-003, and turn the main power
switch off/on.
-02
Defective NVRAM
1.
Update the controller firmware.
2.
Install a new NVRAM, and turn off and on the main power switch after
SC995-002 has occurred.
-03
-04
Incorrect type controller installed
1.
Replace the controller with the correct type.
Incorrect model controller installed.
1.
Replace the controller with the correct model.
Software Error 3: Cannot select application function

An application does not start after the user pushed the correct key on the
B
operation panel.
Software bug
A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed

or not installed correctly.
SM
6-69
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
997
Software Error 4: Application cannot start

Register processing does not operate for an application within 60 s after
the machine power is turned on. No applications start correctly, and all
998
end abnormally.
Software bug
A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed

or not installed correctly.
D129/D130
6-70
SM
Electrical Component Defects
6.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

6.2.1 SENSORS
Component
(Symbol)
CN
Condition
By-pass Paper
236-2
Open
Length Sensor
(IOB)
Shorted
Duplex Entrance
217-A8 (IOB)
Duplex Cover
Duplex Exit
Symptom
Paper size error
Open
Jam Z
Shorted
Jam Z
217-A11
Open
"Open Cover" is displayed.
(IOB)
Shorted
Open cover" cannot be detected.
217-A14
Open
Jam Z
(IOB)
Shorted
am Z (Jam 1)
The Paper End indicator lights
Open
even if paper is placed on the

by-pass tray.
By-pass Paper End
217-B3 (IOB)
Shorted
light even if there is no paper on

the by-pass tray.
217-B9,
By-pass Paper Size
Open
B10,B12,B13
(IOB)
Paper size error

Shorted
CPU cannot detect the toner
Open
Toner Overflow
overflow even the waste toner in
217-B15
the transfer belt unit is full.
(IOB)
CPU detects the toner overflow

Shorted
even the waste toner in the

transfer belt unit is not full.
SM
6-71
D129/D130
Troubleshooting
The Paper End indicator does not
Component
(Symbol)
CN
Condition
Symptom
No symptom, but this may cause

Paper Feed 1
216-A4 (IOB) Open/Shorted
Jam A, and some pieces of paper

are remaining at the paper feed
unit when tray 1 is opened.
Relay 1
Open
Jam A
Shorted
Jam A, B
216-A7 (IOB)

Open
Paper End 1
even if paper is placed in the
216-A10
paper tray 1.
(IOB)

Shorted
light even if there is no paper in

the paper tray 1.
Tray Lift 1
216-A13
Open/
(IOB)
Shorted
SC501 is displayed.
No symptom, but this may cause

Paper Feed 2
216-B4 (IOB)
Open/
Jam A and some pieces of paper
Shorted
are remaining at the paper feed

unit when tray 2 is opened.
Relay 2
Open
Jam A
Shorted
Jam A, B
216-B7 (IOB)

Open
Paper End 2
even if paper is placed in the
216-B10
paper tray 2.
(IOB)

Shorted
light even if there is no paper in

the paper tray 2.
D129/D130
6-72
SM
(Symbol)
Tray Lift 2
Registration
Paper Size 1
Paper Size 2
Lower Paper Height

1
Lower Paper Height
2
Upper Paper Height
1
Upper Paper Height
2
Junction Jam
Paper Exit
Fusing Exit
SM
CN
Condition
216-B13
Open/
(IOB)
Shorted
Symptom
SC502 is displayed.
Open
Jam A (Jam 8, 17)
Shorted
Jam A, B (Jam 1)
209-2 (IOB)
209-4, 5, 5, 8 Open/
(IOB)
Shorted
209-9, 10,
Open/
11, 13 (IOB)
Shorted
210-4 (IOB)
210-7 (IOB)
210-12 (IOB)
210-15 (IOB)
Paper size error in tray 1
Paper size error in tray 2
Open/
Shorted
Remaining paper volume in tray 2
Open/
on the LCD is wrong.
Shorted
Open/
Shorted
Remaining paper volume in tray 1
Open/
on the LCD is wrong.
Shorted
221-A10
Open/
(IOB)
Shorted
Jam C
Open
Jam C
Shorted
Jam C
Open
Jam C
Shorted
Jam C
Troubleshooting
Component
221-B2 (IOB)
221-B5 (IOB)
6-73
D129/D130
Component
(Symbol)
CN
Condition
Symptom
Paper overflow message is not

Open
displayed when a paper overflow

condition exists.
Paper Overflow
221-B8 (IOB)
Paper overflow message is
Shorted
displayed when a paper overflow

condition does not exist.
The add toner indicator blinks
Open
TD (Toner Density)
even if there is toner in the
213-14 (IOB)
development unit.
Shorted
CPU detects the web end even
Open
Web End
the web is not used up.
208-16 (IOB)
Shorted
ID (Image Density)
SC390 is displayed.
CPU cannot detect the web end

even the web is used up.
Open
SC350 is displayed after copying.
Shorted
SC351 is displayed after copying.
208-11 (IOB)
CPU cannot detect paper even a

Open
sheet of paper remains at the

fusing unit.
Fusing Entrance
208-8 (IOB)
CPU detects paper even a sheet
Shorted
of paper does not remain at the

fusing unit.
Scanner Home
Position
D129/D130
Open
SC121 is displayed.
Shorted
SC120 is displayed.
318-2 (SIO)
6-74
SM
Component
CN
(Symbol)
Condition
APS and ARE do not function
Open
Platen Cover
properly.
318-5 (SIO)
Shorted
Original Length 1
Original Length 2
Symptom
No symptom.
CPU cannot detect the original
313-2
Open/
(SIO)
Shorted
313-8
Open/
(SIO)
Shorted
size properly. APS and ARE do

not function correctly.
CPU cannot detect the original
size properly. APS and ARE do
not function correctly.
6.2.2 SWITCHES
(Symbol)
CN
Condition
"Open Cover" is displayed even if
Open
Right Door
the right door is closed.
221-B10
(IOB)
Shorted
Main Power
Symptom
The LCD goes blank when the

right door is opened.
903-1,2
Open
The machine does not turn on.
(PSU)
Shorted
The machine does not turn off.
Troubleshooting
Component
"Doors/Covers Open" is displayed

Open
Interlock
even if the front or right door is
913-1,2
closed.
(PSU)
Shorted
SM
6-75
The LCD goes blank when the

front or right door is opened.
D129/D130
Blown Fuse Conditions
6.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Use a correct rating fuse for the fuse replacement. Never use a wrong rating fuse. If do
so, the machine may be damaged.
Rating
Fuse
Symptom at power on
115V
210 to 230V
Power Supply Board

FU21
6.3A / 250V
6.3A / 250V
SC 533 (Power to IOB)
FU22
6.3A / 250V
6.3A / 250V
SC 144-02 (Power to SIO)
FU23
10A / 250V
10A / 250V
FU24
10A / 250V
10A / 250V
FU25
6.3A / 250V
6.3A / 250V

(Power to Interlock Switch)
(Power to Interlock Switch)
Alert LED turns on and operation panel does
not turn on. (Power to MB)
Stack paper in the optional paper feed unit or
FU26
6.3A / 250V
6.3A / 250V
LCT is not detected. SC 503 is issued after

opening and closing the tray 3 or 4. (Power
to optional PFU or LCT)
The machine does not detect a finisher.
FU27
6.3A / 250V
6.3 A/ 250V
FU101
15A / 250V
8A / 250V
No response
FU102
12A / 250V
4A / 250V
No response
D129/D130
(Power to optional Finisher)
6-76
SM
Fuses
6.4 FUSES
Part No.
Q'ty
FU11
11071229
FU21, 22, 25, 26, 27
11071295
FU23, 24
11071216
FU101
11071252
FU102
11071320
FU103, 12, 14
11071225
Troubleshooting
Fuse Address
SM
6-77
D129/D130
D129/D130
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D129/D130 APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................. 1-1
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 POWER CONSUMPTION ................................................................ 1-4
1.1.3 PRINTER CONTROLLER................................................................. 1-5
1.1.4 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 1-7
1.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT........................................................................... 1-8
1.2.1 ARDF (D630) .................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT (D580) .......................................... 1-9
1.2.3 LCT 2000-SHEET (D581) ................................................................. 1-9
1.2.4 LCT 1200-SHEET (D631) ............................................................... 1-10
1.2.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D632) ............................................................... 1-10
1.2.6 SIDE TRAY (D635) ......................................................................... 1-11
1.2.7 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY (D633) .................................................... 1-11
1.2.8 BRIDGE UNIT (D634) ..................................................................... 1-12
1.2.9 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588) ..................................................... 1-12
Upper Tray ......................................................................................... 1-12
Lower Tray ......................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.10
3000-SHEET FINISHER (D636) .............................................. 1-14
1.2.11
2000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER (D637) ............................ 1-16
1.2.12
PUNCH UNIT FOR 2000/3000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER1-18
2. APPENDIX: PM TABLES .............................................................. 2-1

2.1 PM TABLES ............................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 MAINFRAME .................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 OPTIONS.......................................................................................... 2-5
ARDF ................................................................................................... 2-6
PFU ...................................................................................................... 2-6
LCT ...................................................................................................... 2-7
SR5020 ................................................................................................ 2-7
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher ..................................................... 2-8
SM Appendix
D129/D130
Rev. 11/15/2012
Bridge Unit ........................................................................................... 2-8

1-Bin Tray Unit ..................................................................................... 2-9
3. APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ................... 3-1

3.1 SYSTEM SP TABLE-1 ............................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 SP1-XXX: FEED ............................................................................... 3-1
3.2 SYSTEM SP TABLES-2 .......................................................................... 3-17
3.2.1 SP2-XXX: DRUM ............................................................................ 3-17
3.3 SYSTEM SP TABLE-3 ............................................................................. 3-43
3.3.1 SP3-XXX: PROCESS ..................................................................... 3-43
3.4 SYSTEM SP TABLES-4 .......................................................................... 3-46
3.4.1 SP4-XXX: SCANNER ..................................................................... 3-46
3.5 SYSTEM SP TABLES-5 .......................................................................... 3-79
3.5.1 SP5-XXX: MODE ............................................................................ 3-79
3.6 SYSTEM SP TABLES-6 ........................................................................ 3-165
3.6.1 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS............................................................ 3-165
3.7 SYSTEM SP TABLES-7 ........................................................................ 3-176
3.7.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG................................................................... 3-176
3.8 SYSTEM SP TABLES-8 ........................................................................ 3-197
3.8.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG 2................................................................ 3-197
3.9 INPUT CHECK....................................................................................... 3-251
3.9.1 COPIER ........................................................................................ 3-251
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor .......................................................... 3-254
Table 2: Paper Size Switch .............................................................. 3-255
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ............................................... 3-256
APS Original Size Detection............................................................. 3-257
3.9.2 OPTIONS...................................................................................... 3-258
3000/2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) ........................... 3-258
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 3-261
3.10 OUTPUT CHECK ............................................................................. 3-263
3.10.1
COPIER ................................................................................. 3-263
3.10.2
1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588) ............................................ 3-268
3.10.3
3000 /2000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637)..... 3-269
3.11 PRINTER SERVICE TABLES .......................................................... 3-271
3.11.1
SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) ................................................. 3-271
3.12 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE........................................................... 3-282
3.12.1
SP TABLES ........................................................................... 3-282
3.13 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF SP5-749 ......................................... 3-284
D129/D130
ii
SM Appendix
APPENDIX:
SPECIFICATIONS
Pag e
Date

None
Appendix:
Specifications
1. APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 GENERAL
Configuration
Desktop
Copy Process
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Original
Sheet, book, three-dimensional object
Original Size
Maximum A3/11" x 17"

A3/11" x 17" - A5 LEF
Paper trays:
Non-standard sizes:
Width: 182 - 297 mm (7.2" - 11.7")
Length: 148 mm - 432 mm (5.8" - 17")
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm,
A3/11" x 17" - A6 SEF
Copy Paper Size
By-pass tray:
Non-standard sizes:
Width: 90 - 305 mm (3.6" - 12")
Length: 148 - 600 mm (5.8" - 23.6")
A3/11" x 17" - A6 SEF
Duplex:
Non-standard sizes:
Width: 90 - 297 mm (3.6" - 11.7")
Length: 148 - 432 mm (5.8" - 17")
Copy Paper Weight
SM Appendix
Paper trays:
60 - 216 g/m 2 (16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover)
By-pass:
52 - 220 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover)
Duplex:
60 - 169 g/m 2 (16 lb. Bond - 90 lb. Index)
1-1
D129/D130
Metric version (%): 400, 200, 141, 122, 115,

7R5E:
Reproduction Ratios
93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25

Inch version (%): 400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 93,
85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25
Zoom:
25 to 400% in 1% steps
D129
40 cpm A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF)
D130
50 cpm, A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF)
Basic
4.1 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF
SP
3.5 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF
Basic
Less than 14.7s
SP
Less than 19 s
Copying Speed
First Copy Time
Warm-up Time
Continuous Copy
1 to 999 (operation panel entry)
Paper Capacity
1,200 sheets
(without options)
(550 sheets/tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by-pass tray)
Paper Capacity (with

options)
4,400 sheets
(550 sheets/tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by-pass tray,
1200-sheet LCT and 2000-sheet LCT)
A4, 81/2" x 11" and
Paper Output
Power Source
smaller:
500 sheets
B4 and larger:
250 sheets
North America:
120 127V/60 Hz, 12 A
Europe/Asia:
220 240 V/50, 60 Hz, 7 A
Taiwan
110V/60Hz, 14 A
Without ADF
670 mm x 682 mm x 760 mm (26.4" x

26.9" x 30.0")
Dimensions (w x d x h)
With ADF
D129/D130
670 mm x 682 mm x 895 mm (26.3" x

26.9" x 35.3")
1-2
SM Appendix
EU
Less than 85 kg (187.4 lb.)
NA
Less than 97 kg (213.9 lb.)
Appendix:
Specifications
Weight
Resolution
600 dpi (Scanning and Printing)
Gradation
256 levels (Scanning and Printing)
Original Archive
More than 2,500 A4 pages for document server (ITU-T No. 4

Chart)
Toner Replenishment
Cartridge exchange (630 g)
Total Counter
Electric counter
Noise Emission:
Copying
Noise Emission:
Stand-by
SM Appendix
Mainframe Only
Full System
D129
64.6 dB(A)
71.1 dB(A)
D130
66.4 dB(A)
71.6 dB(A)
Mainframe Only
Full System
D129
33.8 dB(A)
34.0 dB(A)
D130
32.6 dB(A)
33.6 dB(A)
1-3
D129/D130
1.1.2 POWER CONSUMPTION
Basic
D129
D130
NA
156 W
NA
165 W
EU, Asia
157 W
EU, Asia
166 W
NA
745 W
NA
835 W
EU, Asia
742 W
EU, Asia
849 W
NA
1490 W
NA
1490 W
EU, Asia
1460W
EU, Asia
1460 W
Ready
Operating
Maximum
SP
D129
D130
NA
160 W
NA
167 W
EU, Asia
159 W
EU, Asia
172 W
NA
736 W
NA
828 W
EU, Asia
754 W
EU, Asia
864 W
NA
1490 W
NA
1490 W
EU, Asia
1460W
EU, Asia
1460 W
Ready
Operating
Maximum
Full System
D129
D130
NA
1584 W
NA
1584 W
EU, Asia
1550 W
EU, Asia
1550 W
Maximum
The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.
In the above "Panel Off" condition, the polygonal mirror motor is not rotating.
D129/D130
1-4
SM Appendix
Appendix:
Specifications
1.1.3 PRINTER CONTROLLER
PCL 6/5e
PDF Direct
Printer Languages:
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)

IPDS (optional)
MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF
PCL 5e:
300 x 300 dpi
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
PCL 6:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
Resolution and
Gradation:
PDF Direct:
300 x 300 dpi/600 x 600 dpi
PS3:
300 x 300 dpi/600 x 600 dpi
XPS:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
IPDS:
300 x 300 dpi/ 600 x 600 dpi
Printing speed:
D129: Maximum 40 ppm (A4/LT LEF)

D130: Maximum 50 ppm (A4/LT LEF)
PCL 6/5e (Standard): 45 Compatible fonts, 13 International fonts,
Resident Fonts:
6 Bitmap fonts
PDF Direct: 136 fonts
IPDS (Optional): 108 fonts
USB2.0 Type A and Type B: Standard
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard
Host Interfaces:
Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional

IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional
IEEE802.11a/b/g (Wireless LAN): Optional
Bluetooth (USB type): Optional
SM Appendix
1-5
D129/D130
Network Protocols:
TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX

Maximum
Basic model: 512 MB
RAM:
SP model: 1024 MB (Resident 512 MB + Additional 512)
Additional 512 MB is required for all printer/scanner unit

and printer units.
D129/D130
1-6
SM Appendix
Appendix:
Specifications
1.1.4 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Scanner
Main scan/Sub scan
Resolution:
100 to 600 dpi

Twain Mode:
Available scanning
100 to 1200 dpi
Resolution Range:
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales:
Scanning
Throughput
(ARDF mode):
Interface:
1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB

BW: 61 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text/ Photo / 200dpi /Compression: On
(MH))
FC: 31 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / Compression:
Standard)
Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-TX, Gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T),
Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11a/b/g)
Compression
B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2)
Method:
Gray Scale/Full Color: JPEG
Video Memory
Capacity:
109.41 MB (A4, Full Color, 600dpi)
Number of originals per file: Maximum 1,000 pages

Image Storage
Maximum of files: 3,000 files
Capacity:
Storage on Doc.Server: Maximum 9,000 pages (B&W (ITU-T

No.1/200 dpi MMR)
SM Appendix
1-7
D129/D130
Optional Equipment
1.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

1.2.1 ARDF (D630)
Size
A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Weight
40 to 128 g/m 2 (11 to 34 lb.)
Size
A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Weight
52 to 128 g/m 2 (14 to 34 lb.)
Simplex
Paper Size/Weight:
Duplex
Table Capacity:
100 sheets (81.4 g/m 2, 22 lb)
Original Standard Position:
Rear left corner
Separation:
Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport:
Roller transport
Original Feed Order:
From the top original
Supported Magnification
Ratios:
32 to 200 %
Power Source:
DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption:
Less than 70W
Dimensions (W x D x H):
570 mm x 520 mm x 135 mm (22.4"x20.5"x5.3")
Weight:
Less than 12kg (26.5 lb.)
D129/D130
1-8
SM Appendix
Appendix:
Specifications
Optional Equipment
1.2.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT (D580)
Paper Feed System:
FRR
Paper Height Detection:
5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty)
Capacity:
550 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Weight:
60 to 216 g/m 2 (16 to 80 lb. Cover)
Paper Size:
A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source:
DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption:
Less than 40 W (Max.)/ Less than 25 W (Ave,)
580 mm x 629 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.8" x 10.2")
Weight:
26 kg (57.3 lb.)
1.2.3 LCT 2000-SHEET (D581)
Paper Size:
A4 LEF/LT LEF
Paper Weight:
60 g/m 2 to 216 g/m 2, 16 lb. Bond to 80 lb. Cover
Tray Capacity:
2,000 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20 lb. Bond)
Remaining Paper Detection:
5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10%, Empty): Right Tray

4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Empty): Left Tray
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption:
45 W (Max.)/27 W (Ave.)
580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")
Weight:
26 kg (57.3 lb.)
SM Appendix
1-9
D129/D130
Optional Equipment
1.2.4 LCT 1200-SHEET (D631)
Paper Size:
A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF
Paper Weight:
60 g/m 2 to 216 g/m 2, 16 lb. Bond to 80 lb. Cover
Tray Capacity:
1200 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20lb. Bond)
Remaining Paper Detection:
5 steps (100%, 75%, 30%, 10%, End)
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption:
55 W (Max)/ 25 W (Ave.)
348 mm x 540 mm x 290 mm (13.7" x 21.3" x 11.4")
Weight:
14 kg (30.8 lb.)
1.2.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D632)
Paper Size:
Standard Size:
A3 /DLT to A6/ HLT SEF
Paper Weight:
60 to 169 g/m 2, 16 to 45 lb. Bond
Tray Capacity:
125 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20 lb. Bond, A4)
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption:
12 W or less
565 mm x 410 mm x 115 mm (22.3"x16.2"x4.6")
Weight:
2 .5 kg (5.6 lb.)
D129/D130
1-10
SM Appendix
Appendix:
Specifications
Optional Equipment
1.2.6 SIDE TRAY (D635)
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Standard Size:
52 to 300 g/m 2, 14 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Cover
Internal tray:
250 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20 lb. Bond, A4/LT or smaller)
Tray Capacity:
125 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20 lb. Bond, B4, LG or larger)

External tray:
125 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20 lb. Bond)
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
20 W or less
780 mm x 412 mm x 138 mm (30.8"x16.3"x5.5")
Weight:
4.5 kg (10.0 lb.)
1.2.7 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY (D633)
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Standard Size:
52 to 160 g/m 2, 14 lb. Bond to 60 lb. Cover
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
10 W or less
432 mm x 468 mm x 114 mm (16.7"x18.5"x4.5")
Weight:
2 kg (4.5 lb.)
SM Appendix
1-11
D129/D130
Optional Equipment
1.2.8 BRIDGE UNIT (D634)
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
52 g/m 2 to 256 g/m 2, 16 lb. Bond to 68 lb. Bond

Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer)
Power Consumption:
20 W or less
415 mm x 412 mm x 111 mm (16.3" x 16.2" x 4.4")
Weight
4 kg (8.9 lb.)
1.2.9 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588)

Upper Tray
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Paper Capacity:
D129/D130
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3 to A6, 11" x 17" to 5.5" x

8.5"
52 to 256 g/m 2 (14 to 68 lb. Bond)
250 sheets (A4, LT or smaller)
50 sheets (B4, LG or larger)
1-12
SM Appendix
Appendix:
Specifications
Optional Equipment
Lower Tray
No staple mode:
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Paper Size:
Staple mode:
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4, B5, DLT to LT
No staple mode: 52 to 160 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond to 60 lb.
Paper Weight:
Cover)
Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m 2 (17 to 24 lb. Bond)
Stapler Capacity:
50 sheets (A4, B5, LT)

30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)
No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m 2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (B4 /LG or larger: 80 g/m 2, 20 lb.)
Staple mode: (80 g/m 2, 20 lb., number of sets)
Paper Capacity:
Paper Size
Sheets
Sets
A4,/LT LEF, B5 LEF
2 to 9
100
A4,/LT LEF,
10 to 50
100 to 20
A4,/LT LEF, B5 LEF
10 to 50
50 to 10
A3, B4, DLT, LG
2 to 9
50
A3, B4, DLT, LG
10 to 30
50 to 10
Staple positions:
Top, Bottom, 2 Staples
Staple Replenishment:
Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source:
DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption:
50 W
Weight:
25 kg (55.2 lbs)
Dimensions
SM Appendix
(W x D x H):
520 x 520 x 790 mm (20.5" x 20.5" x 31.2")
1-13
D129/D130
Optional Equipment
Finisher
Dimension (w x d x h)
657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9" x 24.2" x 37.8")

Less than 54 kg (119 lb.) (no punch unit)
Weight
Less than 56 kg (123.5 lb.) (with punch unit)
Power Consumption
Less than 96 W
Noise
Less than 75 db
Configuration
Console type attached base-unit
Power Source
From base-unit
Stack Capacity
Proof Tray
Paper Size
Paper Weight
250 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14 or larger
A6 SEF, B6 SEF, A5-A3 SEF,
5.5" x 8.5"-11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
52 g/m 2 - 160 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond - 60 lb. Cover)
3,000 sheets
A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF

A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5, 11" x
1,500 sheets
Stack Capacity
100 sheets
Paper Size
Paper Weight
SEF,
12" x 18" SEF
500 sheets
Shift Tray
17" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 8.5" x 11"
A5 LEF
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF,
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5"- 11" x 17"

SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
52 g/m 2 - 256 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond - 68 lb. Bond)
Staples
D129/D130
1-14
SM Appendix
Optional Equipment
8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18"
Paper Weight
Staple Position
Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
Stapling
Capacity
Appendix:
Specifications
B5 - A3
Paper Size
Same Paper
50 sheets
A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller
Size
30 sheets
B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
Mixed Paper
30 sheets
Size
Staple Replenishment
A4 LEF + A3 SEF, B5 LEF + B4 SEF,

8.5" x11" LEF + 11" x 17" SEF
Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge

Paper Size
Pages/Set
Sets
20 - 50 pages
150 - 60 sets
2 - 19 pages
150 sets
A4 SEF, B5, 8.5" x 11"
15 - 50 pages
100 - 30 sets
SEF
2 - 14 pages
100 sets
15 - 30 pages
100 - 33 sets
2 - 14 pages
100 sets
2 - 30 pages
50 set
A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF

Stapled Stack Capacity
(same size)
Others
Stapled Stack Capacity

(mixed sizes)
SM Appendix
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5

LEF & B4 SEF, 8.5" x11"
LEF & 11" x 17" SEF,
1-15
D129/D130
Optional Equipment
1.2.11 2000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER (D637)
Finisher
Dimension W x D x H
657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.2 x 37.8")

Less than 63 kg (138.6 lb.) (no punch unit)
Weight
Less than 65 kg (143 lb.) (with punch unit)
Power Consumption
Less than 96 W
Noise
Less than 75 db
Configuration
Console type attached base-unit
Power Source
From base-unit
Stack Capacity
Proof Tray
Paper Size
Paper Weight
250 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14 or larger
A6 SEF, B6 SEF, A5-A3 SEF,
5.5" x 8.5"-11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
52 g/m 2 - 160 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond - 60 lb. Cover)
2,000
A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
sheets
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5
1,000
Stack Capacity
11" x 17" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF,
sheets
8.5" x 11" SEF, 12"x18" SEF
500 sheets A5 LEF
Shift Tray
100 sheets
Paper Size
Paper Weight
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5"

SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF

5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
Staple
Paper Size
D129/D130
B5-A3, 8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18"

1-16
SM Appendix
Paper Weight
64 g/m 2 - 90 g/m 2, 17 lb. Bond - 28 lb. Bond
Staple Position
Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant

Same Paper
50 sheets
A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller
Size
30 sheets
B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
Mixed Paper
Staples Capacity
Size
Appendix:
Specifications
Optional Equipment
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & B4

30 sheets
SEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF & 11" x 17"

SEF
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF,
Booklet Stapling
15 sheets
8.5" x 11" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF,

11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
Corner staple
5,000 staples per

cartridge
Staple Replenishment
Booklet staple
2,000 staples per

cartridge
13 - 50 pages
A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF

2 - 12 pages
10 - 50 pages
Same Size
A4 SEF, B5, 8.5" x 11" SEF

2 - 9 pages
Corner Staple
Capacity
10 - 30 pages
Others
2 - 9 pages
A4 LEF + A3 SEF
Mixed Size
B5 LEF + B4 SEF
2 - 30 pages
8.5" x 11" LEF + 11" x 17" SEF
Booklet Staple
Capacity
SM Appendix
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 11" x 17" SEF
12" x 18" SEF
2 - 5 pages
6 - 10 pages
11 - 15 pages
1-17
D129/D130
Optional Equipment
1.2.12 PUNCH UNIT FOR 2000/3000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER
Available Punch Units
Punch Waste Replenishment
NA
2/3 holes switchable
EU
2/4 holes switchable
Scandinavia
4 holes
NA 2-holes
Up to 5,000 sheets
NA 3-holes
Up to 5,000 sheets
EU 2-holes
Up to 14,000 sheets
EU 4-holes
Up to 7,000 sheets
Scandinavia
4-holes
Up to 7,000 sheets
52 g/m 2 - 163 g/m 2, 14 lb Bond - 43 lb Bond
Paper Weight
SEF
A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"
LEF
A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5" , 8.5" x 11"
SEF
A3, B4, 11" x 17"
LEF
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
SEF
A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"
LEF
A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"
SEF
A3, B4, 11"x17"
LEF
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Scandinavia
SEF
A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"
4-holes
LEF
A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"
NA 2-holes
NA 3-holes
Paper Sizes EU 2-holes
EU 4-holes
D129/D130
1-18
SM Appendix
APPENDIX:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
P a ge
Date
1~9
8/21/2012
PM tables
PM Tables
Rev. 8/21/2012
2. APPENDIX: PM TABLES
2.1 PM TABLES
Appendix:
Preventive
Maintenance
Tables
Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
2.1.1 MAINFRAME
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
EM
160K
320K
800K
Note
Scanner/Optics
Reflector
Optics cloth
1st Mirror
Optics cloth
2nd Mirror
Optics cloth
3rd Mirror
Optics cloth
Scanner Guide Rails
Do not use alcohol.
Exposure Glass
Cleaner
Toner Shield Glass
Dry cloth or cleaner
Dry cloth
Cleaner
APS Sensor
Exposure Glass (Sheet
through)
LED Board
Drum (OPC) Area

OPC Drum
Charge Roller
Charge Roller Cleaning
Roller
Drum Cleaning Blade 1
SM Appendix
R
R
2-1
D129/D130
PM Tables
Rev. 08/21/2012
EM
Quenching Lamp
320K
800K
Pick-off Pawls
Note
Dry cloth
Spurs
ID Sensor
Cleaning Entrance Seal
160K
Dry cloth
Perform SP3-001-2 after
blower brush cleaning.
Blower brush.
Side Seal
Replace if required.
Development Unit
Development Drive
Gears
Development Filter
Developer
Entrance Seal
I
C
R
C
Side Seal
Development Roller
Development Case
Development Sleeve
Lock Lever
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
C
C
Paper Feed
Registration Roller
Water
Detach and tap gently on
Idle Roller Dust Blade
flat surface to empty.

Blower brush.
D129/D130
2-2
SM Appendix
PM Tables
Rev. 08/21/2012
160K
Blower brush.
Feed Rollers
Water
Pick-up Rollers
Water
Separation Rollers
Water
By-pass Feed Roller
Water
By-pass Pick-up Roller
Water
Water
Paper Feed Guides
Dry cloth
Relay Rollers
Water
Bottom Plate Pad
Water
Water
Blower brush
Silicone Grease G-501
Relay Sensors
Blower Brush
Paper Feed Sensors
Blower Brush
Inverter Rollers
Water
Transport Rollers
Water
Entrance Sensor
Water
Exit Sensor
Water
Registration Roller Dust

Blade
By-pass Separation
Roller
Bottom Plate Pad

(By-pass feed)
Registration Sensor
By-pass Feed Roller
Gear
320K
800K
Note
Appendix:
Preventive
Maintenance
Tables
EM
Duplex Unit
SM Appendix
2-3
D129/D130
PM Tables
Rev. 8/21/2012
EM
160K
320K
800K
Note
Transfer Belt Unit

Dry cloth.
To prevent damage to the
Transfer Belt
cleaning blade, always
replace these items

together.
Transfer Belt Cleaning
Blade
Transfer Belt Rollers
Dry cloth
Entrance Seal
Dry cloth
Transfer Entrance Guide
Dry cloth
Used Toner Tank
Empty the tank
Seal (for paper dust)
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Sensor
Blower brush
Blower brush
Fusing Exit Sensor
Blower brush
Paper Exit Rollers
Water
Junction Transport Roller
Water
Paper Exit Guide
Water
Junction Gate Jam

sensor
Due to their durability and extended service life, the feed rollers, separation rollers, and
pick-up rollers of the mainframe, optional paper trays, and LCT are not replaced at PM.
*1
: Lubricate the by-pass feed clutch gear with Silicone Grease G501 every P.M.
D129/D130
2-4
SM Appendix
PM Tables
Rev. 8/21/2012
EM
160K
320K
800K
Note
Fusing Unit and Paper Exit
Exit Guide Plates
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
Fusing Thermistors
Cleaning Roller
Bushings
Water or alcohol
Appendix:
Preventive
Maintenance
Tables
Fusing Entrance and
Hot Roller Strippers
Grease: Barrierta JFE 55/2
Web Supply Roller
Web Holder Roller
Brake Pad
2.1.2 OPTIONS
Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints/ originals.
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
SM Appendix
2-5
D129/D130
PM Tables
Rev. 8/21/2012
ARDF
D630
120K
EM
Note
(Originals)
ARDF (for originals)
Pick-up Roller
Damp cloth; alcohol
Feed Belt
Damp cloth; alcohol
Separation Roller
Damp cloth; alcohol
Sensors
Blower brush
Platen Sheet Cover
Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
White Plate
Dry or damp cloth
Drive Gear
Grease G501
Transport Roller
Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller
Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller
Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers
Damp cloth; alcohol
PFU
D580
EM
150K
300K
450K
Note
Paper Feed Unit

Relay Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad
Dry or damp cloth
Relay Sensors
Dry or damp cloth
Paper Feed Sensors
Dry or damp cloth
Paper Feed Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
D129/D130
2-6
SM Appendix
PM Tables
Rev. 08/21/2012
LCT
D581
EM
150K
300K
450K
Note
Bottom Plate Pad
Dry or damp cloth
Relay Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
Relay Sensors
Dry or damp cloth
Paper Feed Sensors
Dry or damp cloth
Paper Feed Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
D631
EM
150K
300K
450K
Appendix:
Preventive
Maintenance
Tables
LCT 2000-sheet
Note
LCT 1200-sheet
Bottom Plate Pad
Dry or damp cloth
Relay Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
Relay Sensors
Dry or damp cloth
Paper Feed Sensors
Dry or damp cloth
Paper Feed Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
B588
EM
150K
300K
450K
Note
1000-Sheet Finisher
Rollers
Discharge Brush
Sensors
Jogger Fences
SM Appendix
Water or alcohol.
C
Dry cloth
Blower brush
2-7
D129/D130
PM Tables
Rev. 8/21/2012
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher
D637/D636
EM
Note
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher

Rollers
Water or alcohol.
Discharge Brush
Dry cloth
Sensors
Blower brush
Jogger Fences
Discard chads.
Punch Unit
Punch Chads
Bridge Unit
D634
EM
Note
Bridge Unit
Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray
Dry or damp cloth
Sensors
Blower brush
D129/D130
2-8
SM Appendix
PM Tables
Rev. 8/21/2012
1-Bin Tray Unit
D632
EM
Note
Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray
Dry or damp cloth
Sensors
Blower brush
Appendix:
Preventive
Maintenance
Tables
1-Bin Tray Unit
Side Tray
D635
EM
Note
Side Tray
Rollers
Dry or damp cloth
Sensors
Blower brush
Shift Tray
D633
EM
Note
Shift Tray
Copy Tray
SM Appendix
Dry or damp cloth
2-9
D129/D130
APPENDIX:
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
P a ge
Date
82
11/15/2012
SP5104 Default changed to 1 Blinks, added Note to SP5083
82 ~ 83
08/21/2012
SP5083 [LED Light Switch Setting - Toner Near End]
08/27/2012
Added SP5747 204 and 205.
105
System SP Table-1
3. APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

TABLES
3.1 SYSTEM SP TABLE-1
3.1.1 SP1-XXX: FEED
1001*
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Leading Edge Registration:

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch
operation timing.
001 Tray: Plain
002 Tray: Thick 1
003 Tray: Thick 2
004 By-pass: Plain
[9 to 9/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
007 Duplex: Plain
008 Duplex: Thick 1
SM Appendix
3-1
D129/D130
System SP Table-1
Side-to-Side Registration
1002*
Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser main scan start
position for each mode.
001 By-pass
002 Tray 1
003 Tray 2
004 Tray 3
[4 to 4/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 Tray 4
006 LCT
007 Duplex
Registration Buckle Adjustment

Adjusts the paper feed motor timing. Paper feed motor timing determines
1003*
the amount of paper buckle at Registration. (A "+" setting causes more

buckling.)
001 Tray 1: Plain
002 Tray 1: Thick 1
003 Tray 1: Thick 2
[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
004 Tray 2, 3, 4: Plain
005 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick1
006 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick2
007 By-pass: Plain
[-9 to 5 / -2 /1 mm step]

010 Duplex: Plain
[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
011 Duplex: Thick 1
[-9 to 5 / -3 / 1 mm step]
D129/D130
3-2
SM Appendix
System SP Table-1
012 LCT: Plain

013 LCT: Thick1
[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
014 LCT: Thick2
By-pass Paper Size Detection

1007*
Controls paper size detection for the by-pass feed table.
002 LG Detection
[-15 to 15 / 0 / 5 mm step]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
001 Detection Timing
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: LT SEF, 1: LG
Fusing Idling
Switches fusing idling on/off. When on, printing will not start until enough
time has elapsed so the hot roller can reach optimum temperature. This
1103*
ensures even heat on the hot roller.

Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete (this may occur if
the room is cold.). You must switch SP1103-1 ON before you set the fusing
interval with SP1103-2.
001 Enable Fusing Idling
0 = Off, 1 = On
002 Interval
[0 to 60 / 30 / 1 sec.]
Sets the machine to fusing idling only for 30
sec. for every job (when the original is set on
the ARDF, when the ARDF cover is opened,
003 Idling Time at Every Job
etc.) and the fusing unit has reached the

reload temperature (optimum temperature for
operation).
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec.]
0: No idling done before a job.
SM Appendix
3-3
D129/D130
System SP Table-1
Fusing Temperature Control

On-Off/Phase
Selects the fusing temperature control method. After changing this setting,
be sure to turn the machine off and on again with the main power switch to
enable the new setting.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal (ON/OFF control). Allows full application from ac power supply to
bring the hot roller up to the target fusing temperature then shuts off.
Determines the on-time from the present temperature (detected by the
thermistor on the hot roller) and the temperature of 1 cycle before.
1: Phase (hysterisis) control. Sets the upper and lower limits for the
1104*
temperature; at the lower temperature the fusing lamp is on and at the

higher temperature the fusing lamp is off.
Change this setting to "0" only if the user has excessive electrical noise or
interference on the power supply line. Such interference can cause voltage
to drop when power is applied using the ON/OFF control method.
Interference can be caused by the general poor quality of the power supply
lines, or if the machine is sharing a power supply with other electrical
devices such as fluorescent lights. Before changing this setting, make sure
that the machine is connected to a power supply not shared by other
electrical equipment.
Selecting Phase control ("1") could cause the fusing temperature

control board to emit low pitched noise
Fusing Temperature Adjustment

Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the
roller for the quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine
has two fusing lamps: one heats the center of the roller, the other heats both
1105*
ends. Each fusing lamp can be adjusted separately.

The "re-load temperature" is the "print ready temperature". When the fusing
temperature exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a
re-load temperature (Re-load Temp. = Fusing. Temp SP Value.) that is
higher than the SP1-105-2 setting.
D129/D130
3-4
SM Appendix
System SP Table-1
Roller Center
001
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]

C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller.
Roller Ends
002
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]

C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller.

Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Center
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting
depends on the target temperature.
(Roller Center: Trays)
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Ends
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends
on the target temperature.
(Roller Ends: Trays)
005 to The following SPs adjust the fusing temperature at the center or ends of the
022 hot roller for each paper type.
005 Roller Center: M-Thick
006 Roller Ends: M-Thick
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]

C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg]

[100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]
[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
SM Appendix
3-5
D129/D130
System SP Table-1
011 Roller Center: Thin
012 Roller Ends: Thin
013 Roller Center: OHP: Plain
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]

C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 135 / 1 deg]
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
014 Roller Ends: OHP: Plain

[100 to 170 / 155/ 1 deg]
015 Roller Center: OHP: Thick
016 Roller Ends: OHP: Thick
023 Feed Waiting: Plain

024 Feed Waiting: M-Thick
[100 to 170 / 160/ 1 deg]

C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
Turns the feed waiting mode on or off for
each paper type.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0=Off, 1=On
The paper waits at the registration roller
until the fusing temperature reaches the

prescribed temperature (adjustable with
SP1105-028 to -37).
027 Feed Waiting: Thin
If you enable this feature, also set SP

1105-38 to a convenient value for the
customer.
D129/D130
3-6
SM Appendix
System SP Table-1
028 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Plain

029 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Plain
030 Feed Wait: Center Minus: M-Thick
031 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: M-Thick
Adjusts the offset value for each re-load
temperature to exit the feed waiting
mode.
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables

036 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thin
037 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thin
Sets the maximum feed waiting time.
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]
The paper is fed when the time specified
038 Feed Waiting: Maximum Time
with this SP has passed even though the

fusing temperature has not reached the
prescribed temperature.
0: Disabled.
1106
Fusing Temperature Display

001 Roller Center
Displays the temperature of the fusing

unit.
002 Roller Ends
[-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
003 Machine Inside at Power On
Displays the temperature inside the

machine.
004 Machine Inside
SM Appendix
[-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
3-7
D129/D130
System SP Table-1
Fusing Nip Band Check

1109*
Checks the fusing nip band.
001 Execution
Idling Rotation Time
[0 to 120 / 60 / 1 sec]
002
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001.
Pre-Idling Time
[5 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]
003 Specifies the time that the paper stops in the fusing unit for measuring the
nip.
Fusing Jam Detection

1159
SC Code Display
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0:OFF, 1:ON
This SP setting determines whether SC559 is issued after three paper late
jams occur in the fusing unit. After this SP code is turned on, a counter
monitors the number of paper late jams that occur in the fusing unit. After
the 3rd occurrence of a fusing jam, SC559 is issued and the machine
cannot be used until the service technician releases the error.
Switching the machine off/on does not reset this jam counter. The
counter is reset after the cause of the jam has been removed and a
sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing exit sensor.
D129/D130
3-8
SM Appendix
System SP Table-1
Motor Speed Adjustment

Adjusts the speeds of each motor. Each step decreases or increases motor
speed in 0.05% increments
Regist: Registration motor, Feed: Feed motor,
1801*
Duplex: Duplex/By-pass motor, Inverter: Duplex inverter motor,

Exit: Paper exit motor, Bridge: Bridge unit drive motor,
OpcMot: Drum motor, TransferMot: Transfer/Development Motor,
FusingMot: Fusing motor,
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
DevPuddleMot: Development Paddle motor

[-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.05 %]
[-2 to 2 / -0.4 / 0.05 %]
[-2 to 2 / -1 / 0.05 %]
[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]
[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
SM Appendix
3-9
D129/D130
System SP Table-1

033 OpcMot:90
034 OpcMot:154
035 OpcMot:180
036 OpcMot:230
037 TransferMot:90
038 TransferMot:154
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %]
039 TransferMot:180
040 TransferMot:230
041 FusingMot:90
042 FusingMot:154
043 FusingMot:180
D129/D130
3-10
SM Appendix
System SP Table-1
044 FusingMot:230
045 DevPuddleMot
1902
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]

Web Consumption
[0 to 120 / 0 / 1 %]
001
Displays the consumed amount of the web roll.
002
C1b/C1.5b: [3 to 130 / 8.4 / 0.1 sec]

C1c/C1.5c: [3 to 130 / 6.7 / 0.1 sec]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Web Motor Interval
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation.

Web Motor Time
[0.3 to 10 / 4.2 / 0.1 sec]
003
Adjusts the rotation time of the web motor.
C1b/C1.5b: EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
Web Near End Setting
004
C1b/C1.5b: ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]

C1c/C1.5c: EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
C1c/C1.5c: ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]
Adjusts the threshold for web near end.

[3 to 130 / 11.2 / 0.1 sec]
005
[3 to 130 / 16.8 / 0.1 sec]
006
Paper Interval Time
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
007 Adjusts the threshold for paper feeding. When the time between trailing
edge detection and leading edge detection is within the value of this setting,
the machine determines that the paper is still being fed.
Web Motor Setting: Web End
[0 to 60 / 27 / 1 sec]
008
Adjusts the motor rotation time after the web end.
009 Web Motor Rotation: Power On
SM Appendix
[0 to 10 / 2 / 1 times]
3-11
D129/D130
System SP Table-1
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the re-load state.

Web Motor Interval: Pre-idle
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 sec]
010
Adjusts the motor waiting time after the fusing motor idling.
Web Motor Rotation: Pre-idle
[0 to 10 / 2 / 1 times]
011
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the fusing idling state.
1903

Total Paper Counter
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 sec]
001
Displays the total paper feeding time.
Total Web Motor Drive Time
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 sec]
002
Displays the total time of web motor rotation.
1907
Paper Feed Timing Adj. (DFU)

001 Feed Solenoid ON: Plain
[-10 to 40 / 0 / 2.5 mm]
002 Feed Solenoid ON: Thick
003 Feed Solenoid OFF: Plain
004 Feed Solenoid OFF: Thick
005 Feed Clutch ON: Plain
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
006 Feed Clutch ON: Thick

007 Stop Position before Inverter
008 Stop Position after Inverter
009 Re-Feed Stop Position
010 By-pass Solenoid OFF
[0 to 40 / 0 / 1 mm]
011 By-pass Solenoid ON
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
012 By-pass Feed Clutch ON
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
D129/D130
3-12
SM Appendix
System SP Table-1
013 Exit Roller: Shift: 180

014 Exit Roller: Shift: 230
015 Exit: Junction Solenoid ON
016 Exit: Junction Solenoid OFF
017 Bridge: Junction Solenoid ON
018 Bridge: Junction Solenoid OFF
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
019 1-Bin: Junction Solenoid ON

020 1-Bin: Junction Solenoid OFF
021 Shift Motor ON
1908
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Paper Bank Feed Timing Adj (DFU)

001 Feed Clutch ON: Plain
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
002 Feed Clutch ON: Thick
SM Appendix
3-13
D129/D130
System SP Table-1
CPM Down Setting

When this machine gets a sequence of coping/printing jobs, the machine
1916
uses CPM down mode to prevent the fusing temperature from becoming too
low.
001 Temp.: Plain
002 Temp.: M-Thick
Adjusts the thresholds for each

environmental condition (between Low
003 Temp.: Thick 1
and Medium).
[10 to 23 / 17 / 1 deg]
004 Temp.: Thick 2

005 Temp.: Thin
006 ON/OFF: Low: Plain
007 ON/OFF: Low: M-Thick
008 ON/OFF: Low: Thick 1
009 ON/OFF: Low: Thick 2
Turns on or off the CPM down setting
010 ON/OFF: Low: Thin
for each paper type and ambient

temperature.
011 ON/OFF: Medium: Plain
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
012 ON/OFF: Medium: M-Thick
0= Off, 1= On
013 ON/OFF: Medium:: Thick 1

014 ON/OFF: Medium: Thick 2
015 ON/OFF: Medium: Thin
016 Waiting Time: Low: Plain
Adjusts the threshold time to enter the
017 Waiting Time: Low: M-Thick
CPM down mode.

[0 to 180 / 60 / 1 sec]
018 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 1
The machine determines whether the

019 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 2
CPM down mode is activated or not
020 Waiting Time: Low: Thin
after the time specified with these SPs

has passed.
021 Waiting Time: Medium: Plain
D129/D130
3-14
SM Appendix
System SP Table-1
022 Waiting Time: Medium: M-Thick

023 Waiting Time: Medium: Thick 1
024 Waiting Time: Medium: Thick 2
025 Waiting Time: Medium: Thin
026 Temp.: Low: Plain
027 Temp.: Low: Plain
the fusing unit to enter the CPM down

029 Temp.: Low: Thick 2
mode.
[100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg]
030 Temp.: Low: Thin
If the temperature of the fusing unit is

031 Temp.: Medium: Plain
less than the temperature specified
032 Temp.: Medium: M-Thick
with these SPs, the machine changes

the CPM (adjustable with SP1916-36
033 Temp.: Medium: Thick 1
to -45).
034 Temp.: Medium: Thick 2

035 Temp.: Medium: Thin
Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down
mode.
036 CPM: Low: Plain
C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm]

C1c/C1.5c: [20 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
mode.
037 CPM: Low: M-Thick
C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm]

C1c/C1.5c: [20 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
mode.
038 CPM: Low: Thick 1
C1b/C1.5b: [5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
C1c/C1.5c: [5 to 25 / 25 / 5 cpm]
039 CPM: Low: Thick 2
mode.
[5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
SM Appendix
3-15
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Adjusts the threshold temperature of
028 Temp.: Low: Thick 1
System SP Table-1
040 CPM: Low: Thin

mode.
041 CPM: Medium: Plain
C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm]

C1c/C1.5c: [30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
042 CPM: Medium: M-Thick

mode.
043 CPM: Medium: Thick 1
C1b/C1.5b: [5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
C1c/C1.5c: [5 to 25 / 25 / 5 cpm]
044 CPM: Medium: Thick 2
mode.
[5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
mode.
045 CPM: Medium: Thin
C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm]

C1c/C1.5c: [30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
1930
OnOff Time Adjust

On Time Adjust
[0 to 100 / 40 / 10 msec]
001 Adjusts the Off-On interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("On" means
that the transfer belt is in contact with the drum.)
Off Time Adjust
[0 to 100 / 20 / 10 msec]
002 Adjusts the On-Off interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("Off" means
that the transfer belt is away from the drum.)
Tray Lock at Jam
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON
1950
Not used
D129/D130
3-16
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
3.2 SYSTEM SP TABLES-2

3.2.1 SP2-XXX: DRUM
2001*
Charge Bias
Setting (Copying)
[1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 V]
001
Setting (P Pattern)
[0 to 700 / 250 / 10 V]
002 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when making the VSDP ID
sensor pattern (for charge roller voltage correction). The actual charge roller
voltage is this value plus the value of SP2001-1.
2005*
Bias Control
Bias Correction 1
[0.1 to 1 / 0.85 / 0.05 step]
001 Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
voltage increases by 30 V (e.g., from 500 to 530).
Bias Correction 2
[0.1 to 1 / 0.9 / 0.05 step]
002 Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
voltage decreases by 30 V (absolute value).
Bias Adjustment 1
[1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 vol]
003
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction.
Bias Adjustment 2
[1000 to 2000 / 2000 / 10 vol]
004
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction.
Bias Adjustment 3
[0 to 100 / 30 / 10 vol]
005
Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.
SM Appendix
3-17
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for copying.
System SP Tables-2
Magnification Adjustment
Main Scan
2102*
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 %]
Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for copy mode and
printer mode.
Erase Margin Adjustment

Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
2103*
L Size: 297.1 mm or more (length)

M Size: 216.1 to 297 mm (length)
S Size: 216 mm or less (length)
001 Leading Edge
[0 to 9 / 3 / 0.1mm]
002 Trailing Edge
003 Left
[0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
004 Right
005 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Plain
[0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Plain
[0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Plain
[0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Duplex Left: Plain

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Duplex Right: Plain
010 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Thick
[0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
011 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Thick
[0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
012 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Thick
[0 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1mm]
013 Duplex Left: Thick

[0 to 1.5 / 0.1 / 0.1mm]
014 Duplex Right: Thick
D129/D130
3-18
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
LD Power Adjustment(DFU)
2105*
Adjusts the LD power for each mode.

Each LD power setting is decided by the process control.
001 LD1: Copy
[50 to 79 / -24 (C2b), 5 (C2c) /1 ]
002 LD2: Copy
[50 to 79 / -44 (C2b), -25 (C2c)/1 ]
2106*
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
POL REV TIME (Polygon motor rotation time)

PRE TIME
[0 to 60 / 10 /1 sec]
001 Adjusts the time of polygon motor rotation before a job.

If this is set to "0", this SP is not activated.
POST TIME
[0 to 60 / 0 /1 sec]
Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation after a job.

002 If this is set to "0", the polygon motor never switches off in standby mode.
However, if the machine enters the energy saver mode, the polygon motor
will ignore the zero setting and switch itself off.
SM Appendix
3-19
D129/D130
System SP Tables-2
2109
Test Pattern
001 Pattern Selection
[0 to 24 / 0 /1 ]
Test pattern of the GAVD
0: None
14: Trimming Area
15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
16: Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
17: Black Band (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line
18: Black band ( Vertical)
6: Grid Horizontal Line
19: Checker Flag Pattern
7: Grid pattern small
20: Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8: Grid Pattern Large
21: Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9: Argyle Pattern Small
22: Two Beam Density Pattern
10: Argyle Pattern Large
23: Full Dot Pattern
11: Independent pattern (1 dot)
24:All white Pattern
[0 to 15 / 15 /1 ]
002 Density
Set the density of the test pattern which is output in

SP2109-001. This SP is not used for the Grayscale
patterns.
2201*
Development Bias Adjustment

Development Bias
[200 to 700 / 560 / 10V ]
001 Adjusts the development bias for copying.

Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies from an aging drum.
ID Sensor Pattern
[200 to 700 / 400 / 10V ]
002
Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor pattern for VSP
D129/D130
3-20
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
Forced Toner Supply

2207
Forces the toner bottle to supply toner at 1-second intervals for up to 30

seconds. To start, press [EXECUTE].
Toner Supply Mode
[0: Sensor, 1: pixel ]
Selects the toner mode.

2208*
pixel count modes only as a temporary measure if the ID or TD sensor is

defective.
2209*
Toner Supply Rate

Toner Rate
[10 to 800 / 60 mg/s / 5 mg ]
Sets the amount of toner supplied every second by the toner supply motor.
The length of time the motor remains on is determined by the data read by
001 the TD sensor and ID sensor.
Increasing this value reduces the toner supply clutch on time. Use a lower
value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of
black.
Correction Data
[25 to 300 / 300 / 25 ]
Displays the toner supply correction coefficient (K). It can also be used to
adjust K, but the value is changed again when VT is measured for the next
002 copy.
The toner supply rate depends on the amount of toner in the toner bottle.
This change is corrected using this coefficient. This SP can be used to
check the toner supply condition. The lower the value of K, the lower the
toner density
SM Appendix
3-21
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
If you select "1", SP2-209-002 should be set to its default value. Use image
System SP Tables-2
P Pattern Cycle
2210*
Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern prints.
Job Page Count
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 sheet]
001* Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing. For users that do not
make many copies daily, set a smaller interval to compensate for the effects
of seasonal and weather changes.
Forced Page Count
[2 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheet]
002* Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing.

Forces creation of the ID sensor pattern to prevent low density copies for
customers who use the copier for long copy jobs.
Toner End Setting

Selects the detection type for toner end.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 step]
[0: 90 copies, 1: No copies, 2: 10 copies]
2213*
90 copies: Toner end is determined if a low density image (Vref <

Vt(10)) is detected 90 times after toner near end.
If "1" is selected, the machine stops printing when the TD sensor

output drops below the prescribed level.
Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies of very high

density.
D129/D130
3-22
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
Vref Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after
replacing the development unit with another development unit that contains
toner.
[1 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 ]
2220*
1.
Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit
and the machine that you are going to move it to.
2.
Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit
3.
After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220
back to the original value.
Reverse Interval Drum,Transfer
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheets]
Adjusts the threshold for the reverse rotation of the drum and
2221*
development/transfer motors. This helps the drum and transfer belt cleaning
operations. This reverse rotation will interrupt a multiple printing job.
2223*
Vt Display
Current
[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01]
001
Displays the TD sensor output voltage for the immediately previous copy.
Average 10 copies
[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01]
002 Displays the average of the most recent TD sensor outputs (from the
previous 10 copies).
Rate of Change
[-10000 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
003
Displays the rate of change in the TD sensor output.
GAIN
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 Displays the GAIN value used to calculate the on time for the toner supply
motor.
SM Appendix
3-23
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
into SP2-220.
System SP Tables-2
Image Pixel Count
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005
Displays the image pixel count.
Developer Lot
2228*
Displays the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on
the top edge of the developer pack.)
Transfer Current Adjustment

If the transfer current of image area is set highly than normal, the print
2301*
image is easily come out. If the leading transfer current is set as same, the
black line is come out due to exfoliation leave.
Image Area: 1st Side

001
C2b: [10 to 100 / 35 / 1 A]

C2c: [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper
Image Area: 2nd Side

002
C2b: [10 to 100 / 35 / 1 A]

C2c: [10 to 100 / 40 / 1 A]
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the second side of the paper
Leading Edge: 1st Side
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the first side of the
003 paper.
Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high
humidity and high temperature conditions.
Leading Edge: 2nd Side
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the second side of
004 the paper.
D129/D130
3-24
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
By-pass: Image Area
C2b: [10 to 100 / 35 / 1 A]

C2c: [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]
005 Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by-pass tray.
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the bypass tray, use a higher
setting.
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A ]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed
006 from the by-pass tray.
No Image Area (SSP)
[10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A ]
008
Adjusts the transfer current for copying.
2309*
Current: Paper Size Correction (SSP)

Paper Lower Width (a)
[1 to 150 / 150 / 1 mm ]
Adjusts the lower paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge
voltage, and development bias corrections.
001 Use this SP when an image problem (e.g., insufficient toner transfer) occurs
with a small width paper. If the paper width is smaller than this value, the
transfer current will be multiplied by the factor in SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or
SP2-309-5 (by-pass).
Paper Upper Width (a)
[151 to 296 / 216 / 1 mm ]
Adjusts the upper paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge
002 voltage, and development bias corrections.
As for SP2-309-1, but the factors are in SP2-309-4 (paper tray) and
SP2-309-6 (by-pass).
SM Appendix
3-25
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
By-pass: Leading Edge
System SP Tables-2
Paper Tray: Plain (alpha)
[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
003 Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is
less than the setting of SP2-309-1.
Paper Tray: Plain (beta)
[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
By-pass: Plain (gamma)
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
By-pass: Plain (delta)
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
007 Paper Tray: Thick 1 (alpha)
[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
008 Paper Tray: Thick 1 (beta)
009 By-pass: Thick 1 (gamma)
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
010 By-pass: Thick 1 (delta)
011 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (alpha)
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
012 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (beta)
013 By-pass: Thick 2 (gamma)
[1 to 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 ]
014 By-pass: Thick 2 (delta)
015 Paper Tray: M-Thick (alpha)
[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
016 Paper Tray: M-Thick (beta)
017 By-pass: M-Thick (gamma)
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
018 By-pass: M-Thick (delta)
D129/D130
3-26
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
019 Paper Tray: Thin (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
020 Paper Tray: Thin (beta)
021 By-pass: Thin (gamma)
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
022 By-pass: Thin (delta)
023 Paper Tray: Special 1 (alpha)
[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
024 Paper Tray: Special 1 (beta)

025 By-pass: Special 1 (gamma)
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
026 By-pass: Special 1 (delta)
[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
SM Appendix
3-27
D129/D130
System SP Tables-2
Current: Paper Type Correction (SSP)

Adjust the transfer current for each paper type. If the transfer current of
2310*
image area is set highly than normal, the print image is easily come out. If
the leading transfer current is set as same, the black line is come out due to
exfoliation leave.
Image 1st Side: Thick 1
[10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]
001
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper (Thick 1).
Leading Edge 1st Side: Thick 1
[10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
002 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the first side of the
paper. Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in
high humidity and high temperature conditions (Thick 1).
Image 2nd Side: Thick 1
[10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]
003 Adjusts the transfer current for printing the second side of the paper (Thick
1).
Leading Edge 2nd Side: Thick 1
[10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
004 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the second side of
the paper (Thick 1). Increase the current to separate the paper from the
drum properly in high humidity and high temperature conditions.
Image: Thick 2
[10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]
005
Adjusts the transfer current for printing (Thick 2).
Leading Edge: Thick 2
[10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
006 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper (Thick
2). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high
D129/D130
3-28
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
Image: OHP
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
007
Adjusts the transfer current for printing (OHP).
Leading Edge: OHP
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
008 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper (OHP).
Image: Envelope
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
009
Adjusts the transfer current for printing (Envelope).
Leading Edge: Envelope
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
010 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper
(Envelope). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum
properly in high humidity and high temperature conditions.
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]
Image 1st Side: M-Thick
C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
011
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper (M-Thick).
Leading Edge 1st Side: M-Thick
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
paper (M-Thick). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]
Image 2nd Side: M-Thick
C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
013
(M-Thick).
SM Appendix
3-29
D129/D130
System SP Tables-2
Leading Edge 2nd Side: M-Thick
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
the paper (M-Thick). Increase the current to separate the paper from the
C2b: [10 to 100 / 35 / 1 A]
Image 1st Side: Special 1
C2c: [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]
015
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper (Special 1).
Leading Edge 1st Side: Special 1
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
paper (Special 1). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum
C2b: [10 to 100 / 35 / 1 A]
Image 2nd Side: Special 1
C2c: [10 to 100 / 40 / 1 A]
017
(Special 1).
Leading Edge 2nd Side: Special 1
[10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
the paper (Special 1). Increase the current to separate the paper from the
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]
C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
019
D129/D130
3-30
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]

C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]
C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
021
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
(Special 2).
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]

C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]
C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
023
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]

C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]
C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
025
(Special 3).
SM Appendix
3-31
D129/D130
System SP Tables-2
C2b: [10 to 100 / 24 / 1 A]

C2c: [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]
PTL Control (SSP)

Use this SP when an image problem occurs caused by the pick-off paws.
This SP is for the printing which target line speed is 230 or 180 mm/sec. Set
2602*
the PTL control (SP2603-001) to 1: ON after installing the PTL. If the PTL
control is set to ON, the black line is come out due to exfoliation leave. Set
SP2911-002 (or 005, 008, 011) to 20 when using the PTL.
1st Side: OFF/ON
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
Sets the PTL control setting for printing the first side of the paper.
1st Side: OFF Timing
[-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]
002 Sets the PTL control time for printing the first side of the paper when
SP2602-001 is set to 1.
2nd Side: OFF/ON
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003
Sets the PTL control setting for printing the second side of the paper.
2nd Side: OFF Timing
[-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]
004 Sets the PTL control time for printing the second side of the paper when
SP2602-003 is set to 1.
D129/D130
3-32
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
PTL Control: 154 mm/s (SSP)

This SP is for the printing which target line speed is 154 mm/sec. Set the
2603*
PTL control (SP2603-001) to 1: ON after installing the PTL. If the PTL

control is set to ON, the black line is come out due to exfoliation leave. Set
1st Side: OFF/ON
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
[-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]
SP2602-001 is set to 1.
2nd Side: OFF/ON
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003
[-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]
SP2602-003 is set to 1.
SM Appendix
3-33
D129/D130
System SP Tables-2
PTL Control: 90 mm/s (SSP)

This SP is for the printing which target line speed is 90 mm/sec. Set the PTL
2604*
control (SP2603-001) to 1: ON after installing the PTL. If the PTL control is

set to ON, the black line is come out due to exfoliation leave. Set
1st Side: OFF/ON
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
[-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]
SP2602-001 is set to 1.
2nd Side: OFF/ON
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003
[-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]
SP2602-003 is set to 1.
TD Sensor Initial Setting
Initialization
Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to
enter the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the
edge of the developer package.) This SP mode controls the voltage applied
2801*
to the TD sensor to make the TD sensor output about 3.0 V. Press

"Execute" to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor output voltage is
displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or
adding new developer.
D129/D130
3-34
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
TD Sensor Manual Setting

2802*
Allows you to adjust the TD sensor output manually for the following.
VTS
[1 to 5 / 4.78 / 0.01vol ]
Adjusts the TD sensor output (VT).

001 Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one
that already contains toner. For example, when using a development unit
from another machine for test purposes. To adjust VT, use a similar
VTMAX
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
procedure as for SP2-220.

[1 to 5 / 4.78 / 0.01vol ]
002
Adjusts the maximum value for SP2802 1.
VTMIN
[1 to 5 / 1 / 0.01vol ]
003
Adjusts the minimum value for SP2802 1.
Process Setting
2805
Performs the developer initialization. Press "Execute" to start. This SP

should be performed after doing SP2801 at installation and after replacing
the drum.
Grayscale Setting
2810
Initializes the LD power setting. This SP should be done after replacing the
drum.
SM Appendix
3-35
D129/D130
System SP Tables-2
2812*
Drum Reverse Rotation (SSP)

Reverse time
[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 ]
001
Sets the reverse time of the drum motor after the end of a job.
Interval time
[0 to 19 / 9 /1 ]
002
Sets the waiting time of the drum motor reverse after the end of a job.
2911*
Transfer Current On/Off Timing (SSP)

La (On Timing)
[-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]
001
Adjust the timing to turn on the transfer current for the leading edge.
Lb (Switch Timing)
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 mm]
002 Adjust the timing to switch transfer current from the leading edge to the
image area.
Lc (Off Timing)
[-20 to 20 / -5 / 1 mm]
003
Adjust the timing to turn off the transfer current for the image area.
La (On Timing): Special 1
[-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]
004 Adjust the timing to turn on the transfer current for the leading edge (Special
1).
Lb (Switch Timing): Special 1
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 mm]
image area (Special 1).
D129/D130
3-36
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
Lc (Off Timing): Special 1
[-20 to 20 / -5 / 1 mm]
006 Adjust the timing to turn off the transfer current for the image area (Special
1).
[-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]
2).
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 mm]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
[-20 to 20 / -5 / 1 mm]
2).
[-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]
2).
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 mm]
[-20 to 20 / -5 / 1 mm]
2).
2912*
Transfer Reverse Rotation

Interval
[0 to 10 / 3 / 1 ]
002 Sets the reverse time of the transfer/development motor after the end of a
job.
SM Appendix
3-37
D129/D130
System SP Tables-2
2914*
Paper Setting
C-alpha
[0 to 400 / 150 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed
from the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts
001 depends on the value of SP2-309-1.
Use this SP when an image problem (such as white spots at the center of
black dots or breaks in thin black lines) occurs when paper with a small
width is fed from the by-pass feed tray.
C-beta
[0 to 400 / 0 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed
002 from the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts
depends on the value of SP2-309-2.
Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with
a small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray.
B-gamma
[0 to 300 / 200 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed
B-delta
[0 to 300 / 50 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed
D129/D130
3-38
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
2940*
Toner consump. (SSP)

[0: OFF 1: ON]
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 If this SP is set to ON, toner bottle consumes toner when the SP2801 (TD
Sensor Initial Setting) is executed. This prevents the image offset.
Setting
[0 to 1 / 0.06 / 0.01]
002 Specifies the threshold value for the toner consumption mode if
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
SP2940-001 is set to ON.
[0 = OFF, 1= ON]
2960*
Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated.
Trans Cleaning Blade Forming (SSP)

Applies a pattern of toner to the transfer belt at a defined interval between
sheets on the transfer belt in order to reduce friction between the belt
surface and the cleaning blade.
2964*
Under conditions of high temperature and high humidity, the density control
feature may reduce the amount of toner, which also reduces the amount of
toner on the surface of the transfer belt. With less toner on the belt, the
friction between the belt and the blade increases, and could cause the blade
to bend or scour the surface of the belt.
001 0: OFF, 1: ON
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Pattern Interval
[1 to 100 / 15 / 1 sheet]
003 Pattern Number
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1 line]
004 Pattern LD Power
[0 to 15 / 2 / 1 ]
SM Appendix
3-39
D129/D130
System SP Tables-2
Grayscale Limit (SSP)

Controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC. The
2972*
halftone density is detected by the ID sensor, and the machine adjusts the
intensity of the LD beam according to the upper/lower limit setting.
Upper Limit
[0 to 100 / 58 (C2b), 63 (C2c)/ 1vol ]
Defines the upper limit for grayscale.

001 A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale.
If the image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark
areas, reduce this value to make the borders clearer.
Lower Limit
[0 to 100 / 52 (C2b), 57 (C2c) / 1vol ]
002 Defines the lower limit for grayscale.

A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the
scale.
Grayscale Cycle (SSP)
[0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 sheets ]
Set s the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the
2973*
OPC. If the number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if
the door is opened and closed, charge correction is executed.
2974*
Image Density
Adjustment Mode
[1 to 5 / 3 / 1 ]
001 Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and
ID sensor output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.
D129/D130
3-40
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-2
Near End Setting

Detection Time
2975*
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 10 sec ]
Sets a time for toner supply motor rotation for issuing the toner near end
warning on the operation panel. The time may need to be shorter for
customers who run especially large print jobs (working at night, for example)
to ensure earlier warning of the toner near end condition so toner out does
Bottle Motor Time

Displays the total ON time of the toner supply motor, calculated from when
the toner bottle was replaced. Use this to check that the toner end count
2976*
(SP2975) is working properly.

When SP2975 is set to any value other than "0", this value is displayed
when it matches the setting of SP2975. When SP2975 is set to "0", SP2976
is disabled. SP2976 is automatically set to zero by toner end recovery.)
Time
SM Appendix
[0 to 7,000,000 / 0 / 1 msec]
3-41
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
not interrupt a long job.
System SP Tables-2
Toner End Status

2977*
Indicates the toner near end or end condition.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not detected
1: Detected by SP2975-001
001 Near End
2: Vt (10) - Vref > 0.2 and Vsp > 0.6

3: Vt (10) - Vref > 0.45
4: 0.45 > Vt (10) - Vref > 0.2 and toner end counter > 300
5 to 10: Not used
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not detected
1: Vsp > 2.0
2: Toner end counter > 90 when SP2213-001 is set to "0".
002 End
3: Toner end counter < 90 and Vt (10) > (Vref + 0.3) when
SP2213-001 is set to "0".
4: When SP2213-001 is set to "2"
5: Vsp > 0.9 when SP2213-001 is set to "2"
6: Special order
7 to 10: Not used
Charge Counter
[0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 sheets ]
Set the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before
the charge input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in
2980*
the polarity of the carrier.

The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually
decrease and cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to
increase after a specified number of copies can compensate for this effect.
D129/D130
3-42
SM Appendix
System SP Table-3
3.3 SYSTEM SP TABLE-3

3.3.1 SP3-XXX: PROCESS
P Sensor Setting
Current
[0 to 43 / 13 / 0.1 mA ]
001 Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call
error after clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
ID Initialization
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum
002 (VSG) is adjusted automatically to 4.0 0.2 V.
Press "Execute" to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the
ID sensor, replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM.
Toner End Setting, ON/OFF
DFU
3045*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=Off, 1=On
P Sensor Output
Displays the current VSG, VSP, VSDP, and grayscale control.
If the P sensor does not detect the P pattern, "VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V" is
3103*
displayed and an SC code is generated.

If the P sensor does not detect the bare area of the drum, "VSP = 0.0
V/VSG =0.0 V" is displayed and an SC code is generated.
001 Vsg
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1]
002 Vsp
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1]
003 Vsdp
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1]
004 Vsm/Vsg
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1]
SM Appendix
3-43
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
3001*
System SP Table-3
3902*
New PCU Detection (Not used)
On/OFF Setting
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: On, 1: Off
001
Turns on or off the new unit detection for the transfer belt unit and fusing
unit.
Hot Roller Stripper Cleaning

3905*
"Cleaning A": 15 sec. off/on cycle for the fusing motor.

"Cleaning B": Off (45 sec.) and On (15 sec.) cycle for the fusing motor.
1st Cleaning: Interval
001 Sets the threshold for the 1st cleaning mode.
"Cleaning A" is done once.
[0 to 5 / 5 / 1 sheets]
1st Cleaning: Mode Setting
002 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 1st cleaning mode.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
2nd Cleaning: Interval
003 Sets the threshold for the 2nd cleaning mode.
"Cleaning A" is done twice.
[6 to 49 / 30 / 1 sheets]
2nd Cleaning: Mode Setting
004 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 2nd cleaning mode.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
3rd Cleaning: Interval
Sets the threshold for the 3rd cleaning mode.
005 "Cleaning A" is done twice and "Cleaning B" is done "N" times.
"N" is specified with SP3905-006.
[50 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheets]
D129/D130
3-44
SM Appendix
System SP Table-3
3rd Cleaning: Mode Setting

Sets the number of execution times of the 3rd cleaning mode.
006 [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
All fans remain on during cleaning and then switch off 60sec after
the cleaning cycle ends.
Cleaning Priority Setting
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 sheets]
0: Priority to printing (No job interruption)
1: Priority to cleaning (Job interruption)
SM Appendix
3-45
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4

3.4.1 SP4-XXX: SCANNER
Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment

Adjusts the magnification of the sub scan direction during scanning.
4008*
Changing this value changes the scanner motor speed.

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1% ]
L-Edge Regist Adjustment

Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning.
4010*
[2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 mm ]
As you enter a negative value, the image moves toward the leading edge.
S-to-S Regist Adjustment

Adjusts side-to-side registration for scanning.
4011*
[2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm ]

As you enter negative values, the image will disappear at the left, and as
you enter positive values, the image will appear at the left.
Scanner Erase Margin: Scale

Adjusts scanning margins for the leading and trailing edges (sub scan) and
right and left edge (main scan).
4012*
Do not adjust unless the customer desires a scanner margin

greater than the printer margin.
These settings are adjusted to erase shadows caused by the gap

between the original and the scale of the scanner unit.
[0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 Book: Left
[0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
D129/D130
3-46
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
004 Book: Right
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
007 ADF: Right
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
008 ADF: Left
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Scanner Free Run

4013
001 Lamp: OFF
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Lamp: ON
0=Off, 1=On
4014
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off.
Scan
Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
Scanner free run without HP sensor check.
Dust Check
This function checks the narrow scanning glass of the ADF for dust that can
4020*
cause black lines in copies. If dust is detected a system banner message is

displayed, but processing does not stop.
Dust Detect: On/Off
Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF
when the original size is detected before a job starts. This function can
detect dust on the white plate above the scanning glass, as well as dust on
the glass. Sensitivity of the level of detection is adjusted with SP4020-2.
001 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Off. No dust warning.
1: On. Dust warning. This warning does not stop the job.
Before switching this setting on, clean the ADF scanning glass and
the white plate above the scanning glass.
SM Appendix
3-47
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
Dust Detect: Lvl

Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP
is available only after SP4020-1 is switched on.
[0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise
002 the setting to increase the level of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when
you see not black streaks in copies, lower the setting.
Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass
by the originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing
originals, this is not detected and the warning remains on.
Dust Reject: Lvl

003 Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: Weakest, 2: Weak, 3: Strong, 4: Strongest
APS Operation Check

4301
Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original
sensors. (
p.3-251 "Input Check")
APS Min. Size

Determines whether an original of non-standard size is detected as A5/HLT
size by the APS sensor.
4303
0: No original
1: A5 - lengthwise (SEF)
2: A5 - Sideways (LEF)
If "0" is selected, "Cannot detect original size" will be displayed.
D129/D130
3-48
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
8K/16K Detection
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Normal Detection ( the machine detects A4/LT size as A4 or LT,
4305
depending on the paper size setting)

1: A4-sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-sideways A4-Lenghtwise
4308*
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
3: 8K 16K
Scan Size Detection

Detection ON/OFF
Selects whether the machine detects the original size.
001 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 step]
0: OFF
1: ON
4309*
Scan Size Detect: Setting

Original Density Thresh
001 Adjust the density for the scan size detection.
[0 to 255 / 18 / 1 step]
Detection Time
002 Adjust the detection time for scan size detection.
[20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec]
Lamp ON: Delay Time
003 Adjust the timing when to lamp on for the scan size detection.
[0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec]
LED PWM Duty
004 Adjust the light value for the scan size detection.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 %]
SM Appendix
3-49
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
Scan Size Detect Value
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
4310
Displays the scanned data for the original width detection.
001 S1: R
002 S1: G
003 S1: B
004 S2: R
005 S2: G
006 S2: B
007 S3: R
008 S3: G
009 S3: B
Each detection point (S1, S2, S3) in SP4310 is as follows.
D129/D130
3-50
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
Scanner Erase Margin

4400*
These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
003 Book: Left
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
004 Book: Right

007 ADF: Right
008 ADF: Left
SM Appendix
3-51
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
IPU Test Pattern

Selects the IPU test Pattern.
[0 to 28 / 0 / 1]
0: Scanned image
1: Gradation main scan A
2: Gradation main scan B
3: Gradation main scan C
18: Shading pattern
4: Gradation main scan D
19: Thin line pattern
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
Test
6: Grid pattern (1)
21: Scanned + Grid scale
Pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
8: Gradation K
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
9: Check pattern 16
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
12: Gray patch 64
13: Grid pattern (2)
4417
14: Color patch K
4429*
Select Copy Data Security

001 Copying
002 Scanning
003 Fax Operation
D129/D130
Adjusts the density of the embedded message

with the copy data security unit.
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]
3: Darkest density
3-52
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
4450
Scan Image Path Selection

Black Subtraction ON/OFF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0=OFF, 1=ON
001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=OFF, 1=ON
002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
4460*
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Digital AE
Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can
adjust its level for each scanning method (platen, ADF).
001 Low Limit Value
[0 to 1023 / 364 / 1 digit]
002 Background level
[512 to 1535 / 932 / 1 digit]
Printer Vector Correction

4540*
This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4
Colors [R, G, B, Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.
001-004
RY Phase: Option/R/G/B
005-008
YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012
YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016
GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020
GC Phase: Option/R/G/B
Specifies the printer vector correction value.
021-024
CG Phase: Option/R/G/B
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
025-028
CB Phase: Option/R/G/B
029-032
BC Phase: Option/R/G/B
033-036
BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040
MB Phase: Option/R/G/B
SM Appendix
3-53
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
041-044
MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048
RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
4550*
Scan Apli:Txt/Print
4551*
Scan Apli:Txt
4552*
Scan Apli:Txt Dropout
4553*
Scan Apli:Txt/Photo
4554*
Scan Apli:Photo
4565*
Scan Apli:GrayScale
4570*
Scan Apli:Col Txt/Photo
4571*
Scan Apli:Col Gloss Photo
4572*
Scan Apli:AutoCol
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 ]
MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak-Strong)
0: MTF OFF
-005
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve
image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7
[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 ]
-006 (Weak-Strong)
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1-255
[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ]
-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
Contrast: 1-255
[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ]
-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
D129/D130
3-54
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ]
(Weak-Strong)
-009 Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower
for weaker effect.
4580*
Fax Apli:Txt/Chart
4581*
Fax Apli:Txt
4582*
Fax Apli:Txt/Photo
4583*
Fax Apli:Photo
4584*
Fax Apli:Original 1
4585*
Fax Apli:Original 2
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
0: Not activated
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 ]
MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak-Strong)
0: MTF OFF
-005
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve
image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7
[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 ]
-006 (Weak-Strong)
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1-255
[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ]
-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
Contrast: 1-255
[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ]
-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ]
(Weak-Strong)
-009 Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower
for weaker effect.
0: Not activated
SM Appendix
3-55
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
Texture Erase: 0 (Fix), 1-2
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
-010 Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for
weaker effect.
Note: This SP code exists for SP4580, SP4582 and SP4583 only.
4600
SBU Version
001 SBU ID
Displays the ID of the SBU.
002 GASBU-N ID
Displays the ID of the GASBU.
003 VSP5100 ID
Displays the ID of the VSP5100.
4602
Scanner Memory Access
001 Scanner Memory Access
4603
Enables the read and write check for the

SBU registers.
AGC Execution
FGATE Open/Close
Opens or closes the FGATE signal. This SP automatically returns to the
4604
default status (close) after exiting this SP.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
D129/D130
3-56
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
4609*
Gray Balance Set: R

Book Scan
[-384 to 255 / -46 / 1 digit]
001
Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the red signal in Book Scan.
DF Scan
[-384 to 255 / -46 / 1 digit]
002
4610*
Gray Balance Set: G

Book Scan
[-384 to 255 / -20 / 1 digit]
001 Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the green signal in Book
Scan.
DF Scan
[-384 to 255 / -20 / 1 digit]
002 Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the green signal in DF
Scan.
4611*
Gray Balance Set: B

Book Scan
[-384 to 255 / -28 / 1 digit]
001 Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the blue signal in Book
Scan.
DF Scan
[-384 to 255 / -28 / 1 digit]
002
Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the blue signal in DF Scan.
SM Appendix
3-57
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Displays the scanning level value (adjustment) for the red signal in DF Scan.
System SP Tables-4
4623

Latest: RE Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]
001 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in the
Latest: RO Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the
4624

Latest: GE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal in
the SBU (color printing speed).
Latest: GO Color
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]
Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the
4625

Latest: BE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the
D129/D130
3-58
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit]
Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the
Analog Gain Adjust

Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
4628
Only for the color scanner

001 Latest: R Color
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
Analog Gain Adjust

4629
001 Latest: G Color
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
Analog Gain Adjust

4630
001 Latest: B Color
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
Digital Gain Adjust

4631
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for RE or RO.
001 Latest: RE Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Latest RO Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
SM Appendix
3-59
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
Digital Gain Adjust

4632
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for GE or GO.
001 Latest: GE Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Latest: GO Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
Digital Gain Adjust

4633
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for BE or BO.
001 Latest: BE Color
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit]
4635*
SSCG Correction Set (DFU)

Apply ON/OFF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 digit]
Calculation ON/OFF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 digit]
001
002
4636
SSCG Correction Execution (DFU)

SSCG Correction Execution
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 digit]
SSCG Correction Error Flag
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 digit]
001
002
SSCG Result Apply

003 Execution 80H
D129/D130
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 digit]
3-60
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
SSCG Result Apply

004 Execution Last
4637
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 digit]
SSCG Correction Adj (DFU)

Latest:RE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Latest:RO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Latest:GE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Latest:GO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Latest:BE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Latest:BO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
001
002
003
004
005
006
4638*

Last:RE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Last:RO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
001
002
SM Appendix
3-61
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
Last:GE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Last:GO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Last:BE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Last:BO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
003
004
005
006
4639*

Factory Setting:RE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Factory Setting:RO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Factory Setting:GE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Factory Setting:GO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Factory Setting:BE
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
Factory Setting:BO
[0 to 225 / 128 / 1]
001
002
003
004
005
006
D129/D130
3-62
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
4640
SSCG Noise Size (DFU)

Before Adj: RE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
Before Adj: RO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
Before Adj: GE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
Before Adj: GO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
Before Adj: BE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
Before Adj: BO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
After Adj: RE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
After Adj: RO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
After Adj: GE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
After Adj: GO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
SM Appendix
3-63
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
After Adj: BE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
After Adj: BO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 ]
011
012
Scan Adjust Error

4645
Displays the error value of the white level or black level adjustment.
001 White level
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 digit]
002 Black level
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 digit]
Scanner Hard Error

Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
4647
[0 to 35535 / 0 / 1 ]
Power-ON
0: OK, 1: SBU connection check failure

If the SBU connection check fails, SC144-001, -002 or
-003 occurs.
4654*

Latest Correct Value: RE Color
001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red
D129/D130
3-64
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
4655*

001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]


002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
4656*

001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue
SM Appendix
3-65
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
System SP Tables-4
Analog Gain Adjust

4658*
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Last Correct Value: R Color
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Analog Gain Adjust

4659*
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Last Correct Value: G Color
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Analog Gain Adjust

4660*
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Last Correct Value: B Color
4661*
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Digital Gain Adjust

Last Correct Value: RE Color
001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
D129/D130
3-66
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
4662*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]


002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
4663*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
SM Appendix
3-67
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
System SP Tables-4
4673

001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
adjustment for the even red signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
adjustment for the odd red signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
4674

001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
D129/D130
3-68
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
4675

001 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
adjustment for the even blue signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
002 [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit ]
adjustment for the odd blue signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
Analog Gain Adjust

4677
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
001 Factory Setting: R
[ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
Analog Gain Adjust

4678
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.
001 Factory Setting: G
SM Appendix
[ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
3-69
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
Analog Gain Adjust

4679
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
001 Factory Setting: B
4680*
[ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit]
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for odd Red.
4681*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

002 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for odd Green.
4682*
Digital Gain Adjust

001 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]

002
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for odd Blue.
D129/D130
3-70
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
Scan Image Density Adjustment

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
4688*
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode
is different.
[80 to 120 / 98 / 1 % ]

Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
4690
001 RE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 RO

4691
001 GE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 GO

4692
001 BE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 BO

4693
Displays the peak level of the black level scanning.
001 RE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 RO
SM Appendix
3-71
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4

4694
001 GE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 GO

4695
001 BE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
002 BO
4802
DF Shading FreeRun
001 Lamp OFF
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
Executes the scanner free run of the shading
movement with exposure lamp on or off.
002 Lamp ON
Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free

run continues.
Moves the exposure lamp a short distance

4804
Home Position
and immediately returns it to its home

position.
D129/D130
3-72
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
Carriage Save
Moves the exposure lamp a short distance away from the home position and
stops.
4806
Do SP4804 to return the exposure lamp to its home position.
This SP is done before shipping the machine to another location.
Cycling the machine power off/on also returns the exposure lamp to
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
its home position.
SBU Test Pattern Change

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4807
1: Grid pattern
2: Gradation main scan
3: Gradation sub scan
4 to 250: Default (Scanning Image)
Factory Setting Input (DFU)

4808*
Execution Flag
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Scanner Lamp Select

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
4809*
0: Xenon Lamp
1: LED
This SP switch the light value depends on the scanner lamp type.
SM Appendix
3-73
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
4810
PWM (DFU)
Latest
[0 to 8191 / 0 / 1 /step]
Factory Setting
[0 to 8191 / 0 / 1 /step]
001
002*
4811
LED White Level Peak Read (DFU)

Latest: RE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Latest: RO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Latest: GE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Latest: GO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Latest: BE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Latest: BO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
001
002
003
004
005
006
D129/D130
3-74
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
4812*
LED White Level Peak Read (DFU)

Factory Setting: RE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Factory Setting: RO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Factory Setting: GE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Factory Setting: GO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Factory Setting: BE
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
Factory Setting: BO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
001
002
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
003
004
005
006
Filter Setting
This SP code sets the threshold value for independent dot erase.
These adjustments are effective only for the "Custom Setting" original type.
4903*
The "0" setting disables independent dot erase.

A higher setting detects more spurious dots for erasing. However, this could
erase dots in images that contain areas filled by dithering.
001 Ind Dot Erase: Text
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Ind Dot Erase: Generation Copy
SM Appendix
3-75
D129/D130
System SP Tables-4
4905*
Select Gradation Level
4918
Man Gamma Adj (DFU)
Changes the parameters for dithering.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black in Photo mode or
Letter mode.
Touch [Change] to open the printer gamma screen.
Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen.
4954
Read/Restore Std
Read New Chart
001
Execute the scanning of the A4 chart.
Recall Prev Chart
002
Clear the data of the scanned A4 chart.
Read Std Chart
003
Execute the scanning of the A4 standard chart.
Set Std Chart
004
Overwrite the standard data.
Read/Restore Std
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005* Adjusts chromaticity rank. When replacing the scanner lamp, select a
number according to the barcode on the new scanner lamp.
D129/D130
3-76
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-4
4991
IPU Image Pass Selection DFU

RGB Frame Memory
Selects the image path. Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key
pad.
001
SM Appendix
Scanner input RGB images
Scanner I/F RGB images
RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
Shading data
Inner pattern data: Gray scale
RGB images done by Line skipping correction
RGB images done by Digital AE
RGB images done by Vertical line correction
RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction
RGB image done by Filtering correction
10
RGB images done by Full color ADS
11
RGB image done by Color correction
3-77
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
[0 to 11 / 2/ 1]
System SP Tables-4
4993*
High Light Correction

001 Sensitivity Selection
[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
002 Range Selection
[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction
4994*
Text/Photo Detect Level Adj.

High Compression PDF
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression
PDF.
001 [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 ]
0: Text priority
1: Normal
2: Photo priority
4996*
White Paper Level
001
D129/D130
Select the detection level for the white paper.

[0 to 6 / 3 / 1 ]
3-78
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5

3.5.1 SP5-XXX: MODE
mm/inch Display Selection
0: Europe/Asia (mm)
1: North America (inch)
5024*
Selects the unit of measurement.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
Accounting counter
Selects whether the printer counter is displayed on the LCD.
5045*
[0-1 / 0 / 1]
0: Displays the total counter only.
1: Displays both total counter and printer counter.
5047*
Paper Display
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
ReturnTimePriorityType
Select the priority to return to the stand-by mode.
5052*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Energy Save has priority
1: Return time has priority
Display IP Address
5055*
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
SM Appendix
3-79
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
5056*
Coverage Counter Display

Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5061*
Toner Remaining Icon Display Change

Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
Parts Replacement Alert Display

5062
Display or does not display the parts replacement alert on the LCD.
PCU_Bk
001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not displayed, 1: Display
Fuser
002 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
Transfer Unit
003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
FuserCleaner
004 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
D129/D130
3-80
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5071
Set Bypass Paper Size Display

Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up
prevents mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation
001 panel and the actual paper size on the by-pass tray.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Home Screen Login

Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
5074*
Sets the application that appears when the home key is pressed.
Setting
002 [0 to 11111111 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Home Key Customization
091 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
0: OFF (Function disable), 1: SDK, 2: Reserve (Legacy application)
Product ID
092 Sets the Application product ID.
[0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1]
Application Screen ID
093 Sets the display category of the application that is specified in the
SP5075-001.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
SM Appendix
3-81
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
5075*
Rev. 11/15/2012
USB Keyboard
Function Setting
001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
5083
[LED Light Switch Setting - Toner Near End]

001 Choose whether or not the [Check Status] key blinks when Toner Near End
is reached.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
[0: Does not blink/ 1: Blinks]
5104*
NOTE: (Requires System/Copy Firmware 2.05 of later)

- This SP makes it possible to set whether or not the [Check
Status] key blinks when Toner Near End is reached.
- With previous firmware versions, this key always blinked
when Toner Near End was reached.
A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)

001
When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4 x2
and LT x2 respectively.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
[0: Single Count/ 1: Double Count (Default)]
5113*
NOTE: (Requires System/Copy Firmware

2.06 of later) for default = 1.
Optional Counter Type

Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4) Japan only
001 2: Key Card Down
3: Pre-paid Card
4: Coin Rack
5: MF Key Card
11: Exp. Key Card (Add)
12: Exp. Key Card (Deduct)
002 External Optional Counter Type
D129/D130
3-82
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Rev. 8/21/2012
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: "SDK" refers to software on an SD card.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: None
5114*
Optional Counter I/F

MF Key Card Extension
001 Use this SP and change the setting to "1" only when the "5" (MF Key Card)
is selected with SP5113-001.
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning accounting)]
Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only
5118*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Release for normal operation [Default]
1: Prohibit access to machine
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal

Selects if mode clear is done for an optional counter when an optional
5120*
counter is removed.
0: Yes. (Always mode clear)
1: StandBy. (Mode clear before/after a job)
2: No. (No mode clear)
Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or
5121*
at paper exit.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Feed, 1: Exit
SM Appendix
3-83
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
System SP Tables-5
F Size Original Setting

Selects F size original setting.
5126*
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: 8 1/2 x 13 (Foolscap)
1: 8 1/4 x 13 (Folio)
2: 8 x 13 (F)
APS Mode
5127*
Selects whether the APS function is enabled or disabled with the contact of
a pre-paid card or coin lock.
0: Disable (APS active) [Default], 1: Enable (APS not active)
Paper Size Type Selection

Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper.
5131*
[0 to 2 / - / 1 step]
0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the
archive files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result.
Bypass Length Setting

Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.
5150
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off [Default]
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
D129/D130
3-84
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
App. Switch Method

Determines whether the application screen is switched with a hardware
5162*
switch or software switch.

0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
Z-Fold Position
5165*
5166*
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Not Used
Lump Delete Form Setting

Last Deleted Time
021 Displays the last delete time.
[0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off

Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device.
5167*
This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted for by an external

accounting device.
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
CE Login
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode
5169*
with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
SM Appendix
3-85
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
By-pass Tray Paper Size Error
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON
This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the
5179*
machine detects the wrong paper size for the job and during feed from the
by-pass tray.
Paper Size Setting

5181*
Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 1 / - / 1]
001 Tray 1: 1
002 Tray 1: 2
0: A3, 1: DLT
003 Tray 1: 3
0: B4, 1: LG
004 Tray 1: 4
005 Tray 2: 1
006 Tray 2: 2
0: A3, 1: DLT
007 Tray 2: 3
0: B4, 1: LG
008 Tray 2: 4
009 Tray 3: 1 (Tandem)
010 Tray 3: 2
0: A3, 1: DLT
011 Tray 3: 3
0: B4, 1: LG
012 Tray 3: 4
013 Tray 4: 1
014 Tray 4: 2
0: A3, 1: DLT
015 Tray 4: 3
0: B4, 1: LG
016 Tray 4: 4
017 LCT
[0 to 2 / - / 1 ] 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF
D129/D130
3-86
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
RK4: Setting (Japan only)

Enable or distance the prevention for RK4 (Accounting device)
5186
Disconnection. If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is

set to "1 (Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and
stops.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Copy Nv Version
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
5188*
Displays the NV version on the controller.
External Controller Info. Settings

5193
DFU
Limitless SW
5195*
DFU
Paper Exit After Staple End

This SP determines whether the machine can output paper if staple supply
5199
runs out.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF. Paper cannot exit if no staples are available.
1: ON. Paper can exit with no staples.
SM Appendix
3-87
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
5212*
Page Numbering
Horizontally positions the page numbers
003
Duplex Printout Left/Right
printed on both sides during duplexing.
Position
[10 to 10/ 0 / 1 mm]

0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
Vertically positions the page numbers printed
004
Duplex Printout High/Low
on both sides during duplexing.
Position
[10 to 10/ 0 / 1 mm]

0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
5227*
Page Numbering
Sets the number of input digits for the job
201 Allow Page No. Entry
serial number of the starting page numbering.

[2 to 9 / 9 / 1]
Sets the zero surplus serial number of the
202 Zero Surplus Setting
starting page numbering.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5302*
Set Time
Time Difference
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory
before delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[1440 to 1440 / - / 1 min.]
Japan: +540 (Tokyo)
002 NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
KO: +540 (Korea)
D129/D130
3-88
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5307
Summer Time
[0 to 1 / 1 (NA/EU), 0 (ASIA) / 1 /step]
Setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
Rule Set (Start)

Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
003

7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour
/step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]

For example: 3500010
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March.
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
004

The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
SM Appendix
3-89
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
System SP Tables-5
Access Control (DFU)

5401*
This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
Default Document ACL
Whenever a new login user is added to the address book in external
certification mode (for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default document ACL is
updated according to this SP setting.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
103 0: View
1: Edit
2: Edit/Delete
3: Full control
Note: This SP setting is ignored on a machine that is not using document
server.
Specifies the timeout of the
authentication.
104 Authentication Time
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec./step]
0: 60 seconds
1 to 250 seconds
Selects the log out type for the extend
authentication device.
162 Extend Certification Detail
Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card

0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed
200 SDK1 Unique ID

201 SDK1 Certification Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID
"SDK" is the "Software Development

Kit". This data can be converted from
SAS (VAS) when installed or uninstalled.
(DFU)
220 SDK3 Unique ID
D129/D130
3-90
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5

230 SDK certification device
Enables or disables the log out
confirmation option.
Bit 0: Log out confirmation option
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
240 Detail Option
Selects the automatic log out time.

Bit 1 and 2: Automatic log out timer
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10
seconds,
10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds
Access Control (DFU)

5402
Sets limited uses for SDKJ application data.
101 to 130 SDKJ1 Limit Setting.. SDKJ30 Limit Setting
141 to 170 SDKJ1 Product ID.. SDKJ30 Product ID
User Code Count Clear

5404
Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict
the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
SM Appendix
3-91
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
5411*
LDAP-Certification
Turns simple authentication on or off for LDAP.
004
Simplified
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Certification
0: OFF
1: ON
This SP is enabled only when SP5411-4 is set to "1"
005
Password Null Not

Permit
(ON).
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Password null is permitted.
1: Password null is not permitted.
Determines whether LDAP option (anonymous
006 Detail Option
certification) is turned on or off.

[0 to 11111111 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5412
Krb-Certification
Sets the level of Kerberos Certification.
[0x01:AES256-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 /
100 Encrypt Mode
0x02:AES128-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 /
0x04:DES3-CBC-SHA / 0x08:RC4-HMAC /
0x10:DES-CBC-MD5 / 0xFF:ALL / 0xFF / 1bit]
D129/D130
3-92
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5413
Lockout Setting
Lockout On/Off
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: OFF, 1:ON
001
Turns on or off the account lock for the local address book account.
Lockout Threshold
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
002
Sets the maximum trial times for accessing the address book account.
0: OFF (Lockout is not cancelled.)

Cancellation On/Off
003
1: ON (Lockout is cancelled if a user ID and

password are correctly entered after the lockout
function has been executed and a specific time has
passed.)
Turns on or off the cancellation function of the account lockout.

Cancellation Time
[1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min]
004 Sets the interval of the retry for accessing the local address book account
after the lockout function has been executed.
This setting is enabled only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (ON).
5414
Access Mitigation
Mitigation ON/OFF
Permits or does not permit consecutive access to the machine with the
001 same ID and password.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Permitted)
1: ON (Not permitted)
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the prohibiting time for consecutive access to the machine with the
same ID and password.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min]
SM Appendix
3-93
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
System SP Tables-5
5415*
Password Attack
Permissible Number
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 times]
001 Sets the threshold number of attempts to attack the system with random
passwords to gain illegal access to the system.
Detect Time
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
002
Sets a detection time to count a password attack.
5416*
Access Information
Access User Max Num
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]
001 Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and password attack
detection function.
Access Password Num
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]
002 Sets the number of passwords for the access exclusion and password
attack detection function.
Monitor interval
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]
003
Sets the interval of watching out for user information and passwords.
D129/D130
3-94
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5417
Access Attack
Access Permissible number
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1]
001
Sets a limit on access attempts to prevent password cracking.
Access Detect Time
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]
002
Sets a detection time to count password cracking.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec]
003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive
number of access attempts have been detected.
Attack Max Num
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
004 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to
slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access
attempts have been detected.
User Authentication
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.
5420*
These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
001 Copy

before a user can use the copy application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
011 Document Server

before a user can use the document server.
SM Appendix
3-95
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Productivity Fall Weight
System SP Tables-5
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
021 Fax

before a user can use the fax application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
031 Scanner

before a user can use the scanner
application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
041 Printer

before a user can use the printer application.
051 SDK1
061 SDK2
071 SDK3
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
before a user can use the SDK application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
081 Browser

before a user can use the browser
application.
5430
Auth Dialog Message Change

Turns on or off the displayed message
001 Message Change On/Off
change for the authentication.

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
002 Message Text Download
003 Message Text ID
D129/D130
Executes the message download for the

authentication.
Inputs message text for the authentication.
3-96
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5431
External Auth User Preset
Tag
010
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit
Turns on or off the tag copy permission for the external authentication.
Entry
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
011
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Turns on or off the copy permission of the entry information for the external
authentication.
Group
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
012
Turns on or off the copy permission of the group information for the external
authentication.
Mail
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
020
Turns on or off the copy permission of the mail information for the external
authentication.
Fax
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
030
Turns on or off the copy permission of the fax information for the external
authentication.
FaxSub
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
031
Turns on or off the copy permission of the fax additional information for the
external authentication.
Folder
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
032
Turns on or off the copy permission of the folder information for the external
authentication.
SM Appendix
3-97
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
ProtectCode
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
033
Turns on or off the copy permission of the protection code information for the
SmtpAuth
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
034
Turns on or off the copy permission of the SMTP information for the external
authentication.
LdapAuth
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
035
Turns on or off the copy permission of the LDAP information for the external
authentication.
Smb Ftp Fldr Auth
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
036
Turns on or off the copy permission of the SMB/FTP information for the
AcntAcl
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
037
Turns on or off the copy permission of the account ACL information for the
DocumentAcl
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
038
Turns on or off the copy permission of the document ACL information for the
D129/D130
3-98
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
CertCrypt
040
Turns on or off the copy permission of the authentication information for the
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
UserLimitCount
050
Turns on or off the copy permission of the maximum number information for
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
the external authentication.
Authentication Error Code

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 System Log Disp
0: OFF [Default], 1: ON
Determines whether an error code appears in the
system log after a user authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON [Default]
002 Panel Disp
Determines whether an error code appears on the

operation panel after a user authentication failure
occurs.
SM Appendix
3-99
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
MF KeyCard (Japan only)

Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.
5490
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a user code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user code.
Optional Counter
Determines whether to cancel the job when MK1 keycard is pulled out from
the machine during job.
5491*
[0 to 11111111 / 0 / 1]
0: On. Cancels the job.
1: Off. Allows operation if MK1 keycard is pulled out from the machine
during the job.
5501*
PM Alarm
PM Alarm Level
001 Sets the PM alarm level.
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
0: No PM alarm
Original Count Alarm (DFU)
002 Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
If this is "1", the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
D129/D130
3-100
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Jam Alarm
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
5504*
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
3: High (6K jams)
Error Alarm
Sets the number of sheets to clear the error alarm counter.
The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a
5505*
set number of copied sheets (for example, default 5000 (C1b) or 10000
(C1c) sheets). The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter
reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 45 (C2b), 50 (C1b/C1.5b), 60 (C2c), 100 (C1c/C1.5c) / 100
copies / step]
5507*
Supply Alarm
Switches the control call on/off for the paper
supply. (DFU)
001
Paper supply Alarm

(0:Off 1:On)
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm.
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified
number transfer sheets for each paper size (A3,
A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
Switches the control call on/off for the stapler
002
Staple Supply Alarm

(0:Off 1:On)
installed in the finisher. (DFU)

0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
SM Appendix
3-101
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Switches the control call on/off for the toner end.

003
Toner Supply Alarm

(0:Off 1:On)
(DFU)
0: Off, 1: On
If you select "1" the alarm will sound when the
copier detects toner end.
Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call" via
the @Remote, when the following conditions
080 Toner Call Timing
occur.
0: At replacement
1: At near end
128 Interval: Others

132 Interval: A3
133 Interval: A4
134 Interval: A5
The "Paper Supply Call Level: nn" SPs specify the
141 Interval: B4
paper control call interval for the referenced paper
142 Interval: B5
sizes. (DFU)
[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
160 Interval: DLT

164 Interval: LG
166 Interval: LT
172 Interval: HLT
D129/D130
3-102
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5508
CC Call
001 Jam Remains
002 Continuous Jams
003 Continuous Door Open
Enables/disables initiating a call.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Sets the length of time to determine the
011 Jam Detection: Time Length
length of an unattended paper jam.
012
Jam Detection Continuous

Count
Sets the number of continuous paper jams

required to initiate a call.
[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time]
Sets the length of time the remains opens
013 Door Open: Time Length
to determine when to initiate a call.

[3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute]
SC/Alarm Setting
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when
5515*
an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when
an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
004 User Call
0: OFF
006 Communication Information Test Call
1: ON
007 Machine Information Notice

008 Alarm Notice
SM Appendix
3-103
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute]
System SP Tables-5
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call

011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
Individual PM Part Alarm Call

5516
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call
when one of SP parts reaches its yield.
001
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
send, 1: Send)
0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
Extend Function Setting

5730
DFU
5734
PDF Setting
PDF/A Fixed
001
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: No Limit
1: Limited
Node Authentication Timuout

5741
DFU
Network Security Level

5743
DFU
D129/D130
3-104
SM Appendix
Rev. 11/15/2012
5744
System SP Tables-5
Management
DFU
EcoCountTime
5745
DFU
Scroll Bar display

204 Vertical
mode
Confirmation dialog display
setting
205
NOTE:
- If enabled, the Page change
confirmation dialog is displayed
when the user moves from the
current page to a different one.
- The SSL certificate confirmation
dialog is displayed when an
SSL-related problem occurs.
- If the customer is using an internal
(original) Web application, i.e. a fully
trusted application, this SP can be
set to 2 (do not display either
dialog).
0: Always display (Default)

1: Display when pressing Program Key
Value
Page change
confirmation
dialog
SSL
certificate
confirmation
dialog
0 (Default)
Display
Display
Not display
Display
Not Display
Not display
Display
Not display
IMPORTANT: Only use these SP Modes with Browser

Version 2.00.0 or newer, EXJS version 1.11.00 or newer,
and Specification 2.01 or newer.
206 Displayed but it should not be used (Not for field use).
5749
Import/Export
NOTE: Refer to Section 3-13 Detailed Description of SP5749 for more information.
DFU
001 Import
101 Export
251 Export Result Print (SP)
252 Import Result Print (SP)
MCS Debug SW
5792
DFU
ECS Debug SW
5793
DFU
SM Appendix
3-105
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
[Vertical Scroll Bar display mode] (See IMPORTANT below)
5747
System SP Tables-5
Memory Clear
5801
Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these
SP codes, print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear
002 Engine
Initializes items 2 to 15 below.

Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System
003 SCS
Control Service) settings, operation display

coordinates, and ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clr
Initializes the image file system.

(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored
005 MCS
documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
006 Copier application
Initializes all copier application settings.

Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax Application
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook

timer.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
008 Printer Application
the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS

counter.
009 Scanner Application
D129/D130
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the

scanner SP modes.
3-106
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and

010 Web Service
thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.

Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
(IP addresses also), the SmartDeviceMonitor for
011 NCS
Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the

TELNET settings.
012 R-FAX
014 Clear DCS Setting
015 Clear UCS Setting
016 MIRS Setting
017 CCS
018 SRM Memory Clr
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for

Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)
settings.
019 LCS
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
020 Web Uapli
Initializes the web user application settings.
021 ECS
Initializes ECS (Engine Control Service).
023 AICS
Initializes the AICS settings.
SM Appendix
3-107
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
(NCS: Network Control Service)
System SP Tables-5
FreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
The correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is
5802*
not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode
for a test.
001 TRAY1:A4LEF
002 TRAY2:A3
003 TRAY2:A4SEF
Input Check
5803
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. (
p.3-251
"Input Check")
Output Check
5804
Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes. (

p.3-263 "Output Check")
Anti-Condensation Heater
5805
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0:OFF / 1:ON
5810
SC Reset
Resets all level A service call conditions, such as
001 Fusing SC Reset
fusing errors. To clear the service call, touch

"Execute" on the LCD, then turn the main power
switch off/on.
D129/D130
3-108
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5811
MachineSerial
002 Display
Displays the machine serial number.
003 BCU
Inputs the serial number.
005 FRAM
Displays the FRAM serial number.
Service Tel. No. Setting
001 Service
002 Facsimile
003 Supply
004 Operation
5816
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
5812*
service call condition occurs.)

Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the
Counter Report (UP mode).
Inputs the telephone number of the supplier displayed on the
user mode screen.
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be
displayed on the user mode screen.
Remote Service
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to 2.
SM Appendix
3-109
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registration has
been completed.
Communication Test Call
004 This SP issues a test call from a GW machine to determine whether it can
communicate successfully with the call center after it has been set up for
NRS. Successful return will be in the range 0 to 99.
Device Information Call
005 This SP issues a call to notify the NRS device information to the call center.
Successful return will be in the range 0 to 99.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
D129/D130
3-110
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
RCG Read Timeout

010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
011 Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
@Remote Communication Permission
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 ]
012 0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
2: Partially limit
RFU (Remote Firmware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.
013 [0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.
1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG Error Cause
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
014 0: Normal
1: Fails to reflect the client/server certificate settings by network failure to
reboot. Transition to 0 on restart the machine.
SM Appendix
3-111
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
RCGC Registed
021 This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.
023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert. Expire Timing DFU
061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or
display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set
063 up Embedded RC Gate-N.
The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond

the 128 character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC

report.
D129/D130
3-112
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Proxy Port Number

This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to
064 set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Proxy User Name

This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character


report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character


report.
SM Appendix
3-113
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0
11
067
12
The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.

The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified
of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
update is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed
13
successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update

request from the rescue GW URL.
14
15
16
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
the successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
17
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
completed, but a certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
D129/D130
3-114
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
18
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
068
Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.

Request for certification update in progress. The current certification
has expired.
An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual
certification.
Notification of a common certification without ID2.
Notification that no certification was issued.
Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up ID
The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status
Displays the status of the firmware update.

This SP setting determines if the operator can
confirm the previous version of the firmware
before the firmware update execution. If the
085 Firm Up User Check
option to confirm the previous version is selected,

a notification is sent to the system manager and
the firmware update is done with the firmware
files from the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size
086 Firmware Size
of the firmware data files during the firmware

update execution.
SM Appendix
3-115
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
System SP Tables-5
087 CERT: Macro Ver.
088 CERT: PAC Ver.
Displays the macro version of the @Remote

certification.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification.
089 CERT: ID2 Code
Asteriskes (*) indicate that no @Remote

Displays the common name of the @Remote
certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
090 CERT: Subject

Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote
Displays serial number for the @Remote
091 CERT: SerialNo.
certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no

@Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the
092 CERT: Issuer
@Remote certification. CN = the following 30

bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no @Remote
certification exists.
093 CERT: Valid Start
094 CERT: Valid End
Displays the start time of the period for which the

Displays the end time of the period for which the
Server CN Check
096
Not used
D129/D130
3-116
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
GW Host
096
Not used
GW URL Path
097
Not used
Debug RescueG/WURL Set
099
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Not used
102* CERT: Encrypt Level
Displays the encryption level for the NRS certificate.
[1 or 2 / 1 / ]
1: Indicates that the certificate encryption level is 512-bit.
2: Indicates that the certificate encryption level is 2048-bit.
Selection Country
150
Not used
Line Type Automatic Judgment
151
Not used
Line Type Judgment Result
152
Not used
Selection Dial / Push
153
Not used
Outside Line Outgoing Number
154
Not used
Dial Up User Name
156
Not used
SM Appendix
3-117
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Dial Up Password
157
Not used
Local Phone Number
161
Not used
Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming
162
Not used
Access Point
163
Not used
Line Connecting
164
Not used
Modem Serial No.
173
Not used
Retransmission Limit
174
Not used
RCG-C M DebugBitSW
186
Not used
FAX TX Priority
187
Not used
Manual Polling
200
Executes the manual polling.
D129/D130
3-118
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
201 In this status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device
cannot communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate
4: The @Remote module has not started.
202 Letter Number
203 Confirm Execute
Allows entry of the request number needed for the

Embedded RCG Gate.
Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote
Gateway.
204 Confirm Result

Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in
answer to the confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is
registered at the Gateway.
SM Appendix
3-119
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
cannot be set.
System SP Tables-5
206 Register Execute
Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
D129/D130
3-120
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
Cause
Illegal Modem
Parameter
Code
Meaning
-11001
Chat parameter error
-11002
Chat execution error
-11003
Unexpected error
-12002
-12003
-12004
208
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Inquiry, registration attempted without

acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution
of an inquiry and no previous registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited.
-12005
The device has an Embedded RC

gate-related problem.
A confirmation request was made after
Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting
-12006
the confirmation had been already

completed.
The request number used at registration
-12007
was different from the one used at

confirmation.
-12008
-12009
-12010
SM Appendix
Update certification failed because

mainframe was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual
certification and NVRAM
Certification area is not initialized.
3-121
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Attempted dial up overseas without the

-2385
correct international prefix for the

telephone number.
Error Caused by
-2387
Not supported at the Service Center
Response from GW
-2389
Database out of service
-2390
Program out of service
-2391
Two registrations for same device
-2392
Parameter error
-2393
RCG device not managed
-2394
Device not managed
-2395
Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396
Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2397
Incorrect ID2 format
-2398
Incorrect request number format
URL
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG

209 Instl Clear
Gate setup.
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after
this setting has been changed.
250 CommLog Print
D129/D130
Prints the communication log.
3-122
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5821*
Remote Service Address

Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
002 RCG IP Address

[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1]
Sets the port number of the RCG (Remote
003 RCG Port

Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
[0 to 65535 / 443 / 1]
Sets the URL path of the RCG (Remote
004 RCG URL Path

[0 to 16 characters / /RCG/services/ /-]
NV-RAM Data Upload

5824
Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card. Push Execute.

Note: When uploading data in this SP mode, the front door must be open.
NV-RAM Data Download

5825
Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After

downloading is completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off
and on.
SM Appendix
3-123
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
5828
Network Setting
IPv4 Address (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
001 This SP allows you to check and reset the IPv4 address for Ethernet and
wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
IPv4 Subnet Mask (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
002 This SP allows you to check and reset the IPv4 subnet mask for Ethernet
and wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
IPv4 Default Gateway (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
003 This SP allows you to check and reset the IPv4 default gateway used by the
network for Ethernet and wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
DHCP (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
This SP code allows you check and change the setting that determines
whether the IP address is used with DHCP on an Ethernet or wireless
006 (802.11) LAN network.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not used (manual setting)
1: Used
Active IPv4 Address
021 This SP allows you to check the IPv4 address that was used when the
machine started up with DHCP.
Active IPv4 Subnet Mask
022 This SP allows you to check the IPv4 subnet mask setting that was used
Active IPv4 Gateway Address
023 This SP allows you to check the IPv4 default gateway setting that was used
D129/D130
3-124
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Enables and disables bi-directional

050
1284 Compatibility
(Centro)
communication on the parallel connection

between the machine and a computer.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
0:Off, 1: On
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284
052 ECP (Centro)
Mode) for data transfer.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
065 Job Spooling
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Switches the job spooling on and off.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
This SP determines whether the job interrupted
at power off is resumed at the next power on.
066
Job Spooling Clear: Start

Time
This SP operates only when SP5828-065 is set

to "1".
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: OFF Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: ON Clears spooled job.
This SP determines whether job spooling is
enabled or disabled for each protocol. This is a
Job Spooling (Protocol)
8-bit setting.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
069
LPR
BMLinks (Japan Only)
FTP (Not Used)
DIPRINT
IPP
Reserved (Not Used)
SMB
Reserved (Not Used)
087 @Remote Protocol Cnt (DFU)
SM Appendix
3-125
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP

090
TELNET
is disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
(0:OFF 1:ON)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
091
Web
(0:OFF 1:ON)
Disables or enables the Web operation.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
This is the IPv6 local address referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11) in the format:
145
Active IPv6 Link Local

Address
"Link-Local address" + "Prefix Length"

configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These
notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6
Addresses " below this table.
147
149
151
153
155
D129/D130

Address 1
Address 2
These SPs are the IPv6 stateless addresses (1

to 5) referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11) in the format:
Address 3
"Stateless Address" + "Prefix Length"

Address 4

configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.

Address 5
3-126
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
IPv6 Manual Address

This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or
wireless LAN (802.11) in the format:
156 "Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses"
below this table.
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless

158 LAN (802.11). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8
blocks of 16 bits each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6
Addresses" below this table.
Note: IPV6 Addresses
Ethernet and the Wireless LAN (802.11) reference the IPV6 "Link-Local address + Prefix
Length". The IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of 16 bits:
aaaa:bbbb:cccc:dddd:eeee:ffff:gggg:hhhh:
The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte (Prefix Range: 0x0 to 0x80). The initial
setting is 0x40 (64).
For example, the data: "2001123456789012abcdef012345678940h" is expressed:
"2001:1234:5678:9012:abcd:ef01:2345:6789": prefixlen 64
However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the following rules.
SM Appendix
3-127
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
IPv6 Gateway Address
System SP Tables-5
Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses

1.
The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the
following characters:
0123456789abcdefABCDEF
2.
A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character.

fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e
3.
The notations can be abbreviated by eliminating zeros where the MSB and digits
following the MSB are zero. The example in "2" above, then, becomes
fe80:0:0:0207:40ff:0:340e
4.
Sections where only zeros exist can be abbreviated with double colons (::). This
abbreviation can be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros (but
this can be done only at one point in the address). The example in "2" and "3" above
then becomes:
fe80::207:40ff:0:340e (only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as "::")
-orfe80:0:0:0:207:40ff::340e (only the last null set before "340e" is abbreviated as "::")
Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6
161
IPv6 Stateless Auto
stateless.
Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Web Item visible

Displays or does not display the Web system items.
236 [0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Web shopping link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link
237 page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
D129/D130
3-128
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Web supplies Link visible

Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top
238 page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Web Link1 Name
239 This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
system. The maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
Web Link1 URL
240 his SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Web Link1 visible
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web
241 system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name
Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL
Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible
Same as "-241"
DHCPv6 DUID
Sets DHCPv6 DUID.
249 [0000000000000000000000000000h to
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh /
0000000000000000000000000000h / -]
SM Appendix
3-129
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
HDD
5832
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
5836*
Capture Setting
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot
001 be initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or
002 updated from the initial system screen.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
D129/D130
3-130
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
075 Reduction for Printer B&W
0 1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3
078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8
082 Format for Copy B&W Text
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
083 Format Copy B&W Other
TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
085 Format for Printer B&W
TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Default for JPEG
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document
091 management server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board)
is installed.
Sets the IP address for the primary capture
101 Primary srv IP address

remote system.
102 Primary srv scheme
103 Primary srv port number
SM Appendix

system.
system.
3-131
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
104 Primary srv URL path

system.
Sets the IP address for the secondary capture
111 Secondary srv IP address

remote system.
112 Secondary srv scheme
113 Secondary srv port number
114 Secondary srv URL path
122 Reso: Copy (Mono)

system.
system.
system.
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
124 Reso: Print (Mono)
system.
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
126 Reso: Fax (Mono)
system.
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for BW fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
D129/D130
3-132
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5

127 Reso: Scan (Color)
system.
[0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.
system.
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step]
Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.
141 All Addr Info Switch
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the all address information transmission for the captured
resources.
142 Stand-by Doc Max Number
[10 to 9999 / 2000 / 1/step]
Selects the maximum number of captured documents to be transmitted to

the document server.
SM Appendix
3-133
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
128 Reso: Scan (Mono)
System SP Tables-5
5840*
IEEE 802.11
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This
006 bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 11 (NA), 13 (EU), 14 (JPN) / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN.
007 This bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Transmission speed
[0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix
008 0 x 0F - 36M Fix
0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix
0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 0D - 12M Fix
0 x 0B - 9M Fix
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
WEP Key Select
Selects the WEP key.
011 Bit 1 and 0
00: Key1, 01: Key2 (Reserved),
10: Key3 (Reserved), 11: Key4(Reserved)
D129/D130
3-134
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
RTS/CTS Thresh
013 Adjusts the RTS/CTS threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.
[0 to 3000 / 2432 / 1]
Fragment Thresh
042 Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.
[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables

11g CTS to Self
043 Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
11g Slot Time
044 Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
WPA Debug Lvl
045 Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application.
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
SM Appendix
3-135
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Supply Name Setting

5841*
Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
007 OrgStamp
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2
013 StapleStd3
014 StapleStd4
021 StapleBind1
022 StapleBind2
023 StapleBind3
GWWS Analysis (DFU)

Bit
Groups
System & other groups (LSB)
Capture related
Certification related
process.
Address book related
Bit SW 0011 1111
Machine management related
Output related (printing, delivery)
Repository related
This is a debugging tool. It

5842*
sets the debugging output

mode of each Net File
D129/D130
3-136
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Default: 00000000 do not change

001 Setting 1
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document

server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder
software
Adjusts the debug program mode setting.
Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting
002 Setting 2
0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
5844
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
0 to 6: Not used
USB
Transfer Rate
001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
[0 x 01 or 0 x 04 / 0 x 04 /-]
0 x 01 [Full Speed], 0 x 04 [Auto Change]
Vendor ID
002 Sets the vendor ID:
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
Product ID
003 Sets the product ID.
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999 / 100 / 1] (DFU)
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal
number recognized as the BCD.
SM Appendix
3-137
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
005 Fixed USB Port

This SP standardizes for common use the model name and serial number
for USB PnP (Plug & Play). It determines whether the driver requires
re-installation.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
006 PnP Model Name
This SP sets the model name to be used by the USB PnP when "Function
Enable (Level 2) is set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name
(SP5844-5).
Default: Laser Printer (up to 20 characters allowed).
007 PnP Serial Number
This SP sets the serial number to be used by the USB PnP when "Function
Enable (Level 2)
set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name (SP5844-5).
Default: None (up to 12 characters allowed for entry).
Make sure that this entry is the same as the serial number in use.
At initialization the serial number generated from the model name is

used, not the setting of this SP code.
D129/D130
At times other than initialization, the value set for this SP code is used.
3-138
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
100 Notify Unsupport

This SP determines whether an alert message appears on the control panel
when a USB device (unsupported device) that cannot use an A-connector is
connected.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Function enable
1: Function disable
An unsupported device is a device that cannot use the functions of the

Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
USB device. For example, a USB mouse cannot be used even if it

connected.
If the PictBridge option is not mounted, even if a digital camera is

connected it cannot be used because it is an unsupported device.
Delivery Server Setting

5845*
These are delivery server settings.
FTP Port No.
001
[0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1]
IP Address (Primary)
002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under
the transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255]
Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a
006 test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and
an external device.
[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 sec]
IP Address (Secondary)
Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary
008 delivery server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address,
and does not refer to the DNS setting.
[Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255]
SM Appendix
3-139
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Delivery Server Model

Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O
device.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 step]
009 0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
010 Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
011 These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of
registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
013 Server Scheme (Primary)
014 Server port Number (Primary)
[1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
015 Server URL Path (Primary)

016 Server Scheme (Secondary)
017 Server Port Number(Secondary)
D129/D130
3-140
[1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
018 Server URL Path (Secondary)

[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
Rapid Sending Control
022
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
error.
UCS Setting
Machine ID (for Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The
001 value is only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (for Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
002 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery
server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again
automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
003 [2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 step]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
SM Appendix
3-141
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
5846*
System SP Tables-5
Delivery Server Retry Timer

Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
006 the delivery server address book.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step]
0: No retries
Delivery Server Retry Times
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
the delivery server address book.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1step]
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
008 Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about
the users of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 step]
LDAP Search Timeout
010 Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1 to 255 / 60 /1 step]
WSD Maximum Entries
020 WSD (Web Services on Devices) is the Microsoft standard for connectivity
to web-service enabled devices.
[50 to 250 / 250 / 1]
Folder Auth Change
This SP determines whether the user login information (Login User name
and Password) or address (destination setting in the address book for
Scan-to-SMB) is used to permit folder access. The machine must be cycled
021 off/on for this setting to take effect if it is changed.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Login User
Uses operator login information (initial value of main machine)
1: Destination
Uses address authorization information
D129/D130
3-142
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Initial Value of Upper Limit Count

022
[0 to 999999 / 500 / 1]
Addr Book Migration (USB -> HDD)
This SP moves the address book data from the SD card or flash ROM on the
controller board to the HDD. You must cycle the machine off and on after
1.
2.
Install the HDD.
3.
4.
040 5.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
executing this SP.
Do SP5846 040.
Turn the machine off/on.
Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the

HDD with the data from the flash ROM on the controller board.
We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD

card with SP5846-051 before you execute this SP.
After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book
data is deleted from the flash ROM. If the operation fails, the data is
not erased from the flash ROM.
SM Appendix
3-143
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
041 Fill Addr Acl Info.

This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a
basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However,
the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1.
2.
Install the new HDD.
3.
4.
The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD
automatically. However, at this point the address book can be accessed
by only the system administrator or key operator.
5.
Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes

successfully, any user can access the address book.
Addr Book Media

Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
043
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1
20: HDD
2: SD Slot 2
30: Nothing
4: USB Flash ROM

Initialize All Setting & Addr Book
046
Initializes all settings and the address book.
Initialize Local Address Book
047 Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a
machine managed with UCS.
D129/D130
3-144
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Initialize Delivery Addr Book

delivery address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize LDAP Addr Book
LDAP address book that is controlled by UCS.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Initialize All Addr Book

050 Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information
managed by UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system
administrators are not deleted.
Backup All Addr Book
051 Copies all directory information to the SD card. Do this SP before replacing
the controller board or HDD. The operation may not succeed if the controller
board or HDD is damaged.
Restore All Addr Book
052 Copies back all directory information from the SD card to the flash ROM or
HDD. Upload the address book from the old flash ROM or HDD with
SP5846-51 before removing it. Do SP5846 52 after installing the new HDD.
Clear Backup Info
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot 2. Deletes
053 only the files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the
card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
SM Appendix
3-145
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS
local address book.
Bit
Meaning
Checks both upper/lower case characters
1
060
Japan Only
3
4
--- Not Used ---
--- Not Used ---
--- Not Used ---
--- Not Used ---
Complexity Option 1
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

D129/D130
3-146
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Complexity Option 2
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case
and defines the length of the password.
063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables

Complexity Option 3
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and
064 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Complexity Option 4
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and
065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

FTP Auth Port Setting

091 Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the
individual authorization mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1step]
SM Appendix
3-147
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Encryption Start
094 Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the
LDAP server.
[0 to 255 / 1 ] No default
Rep Resolution Reduction

5847-2 through 5847-6 changes the default settings of image data sent
externally by the Net File page reference function.
5847*
5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
"NetFile" refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC
and the DeskTopBinder software.
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
005 Rate for Printer B&W
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/5x
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi [0 to 6 / 1 / 1]
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x1
Network Quality Default for JPEG

Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
021 This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option
installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1step]
D129/D130
3-148
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Web Service
5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
5848*
Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848-100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control
002 Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4 Bits)
0001: Denies access to
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
DeskTop Binder.
003 Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 Bits)
004 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits)
007 Acc. Ctrl Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits)
Switches access control on

and off.
011 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits)
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
021 Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)

022 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits)
099 Repository: Download Image Setting
Specified the max size of
100 Repository: Download Image Max. Size
the image data that the

machine can download/
[1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1 MB]

210
211
SM Appendix
3-149
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Setting: Log Type: Access

212
Setting: Primary Srv
213
Setting: Secondary Srv
214
Setting: Start Time
215
Setting: Interval Time
216
Setting: Timing
217
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
001 Display
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to

"Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on
the printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
When the total number of pages that are made reaches
003 Total Counter
this value, the current date becomes the 'official'

installation date for this machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
D129/D130
3-150
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5850*
Address Book Function Japan Only

Replacement of Circuit Classification
The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to
003 switch all at once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for
some reason the G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to
G3.
5851*
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Bluetooth
Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0: Public] / [1: Private]
Stamp Data Download

Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM
onto the hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is
5853
not done, the user will not have access to the fixed stamps ("Confidential",
"Secret", etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting
the HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
5856
Remote ROM Update

When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE
1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the
machine is cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware
002 using a parallel cable
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
SM Appendix
3-151
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
5857
Save Debug Log

On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until
001 this feature is switched on.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the
002 event selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 / 2 / 1]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies
009 them to the SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can
be copied one by one to each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it
to the SD Card.
010 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can
be copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is
no log on the HDD with no key specified.
D129/D130
3-152
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Erase HDD Debug Data

011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging
012 files generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when
SP5857 010 or 011 is executed.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card
013
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
014 Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared
memory) onto an SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
015 This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information
written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number.
Make HDD Debug
016
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
Make SD Debug
017
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
SM Appendix
3-153
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
Debug Save When

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to
5858*
the destination selected by SP5857-002.

SP5858-003 stores one SC specified by number.
001* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
002*
Stores SC codes generated by copier

engine errors.
Controller SC Error (0:OFF
Stores SC codes generated by GW
1:ON)
controller errors.
003* Any SC Error
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1step]
004* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON)
Stores jam errors.
5859*
Debug Save Key No.

001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
functions that use common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
D129/D130
3-154
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5860*
SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail
is not received during this prescribed time.
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply

021 mail.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: No, 1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022 validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Select the authentication method for SMPT.
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM_MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit 4 to Bit 7: Not Used
This SP is activated only when SMTP authentication is enabled by

UP mode.
SM Appendix
3-155
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
System SP Tables-5
S/MIME: MIME Header Setting

Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by S/MIME.
026 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
S/MIME: Authentication Check
When sending S/MIME mail, specify whether to check the destination
028 authentication.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not checked
1: Checked
5866
E-Mail Report
001 Report Validity
Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.

[0 or 1 / 0 / ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the
005 Add Date Field
alert mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Not added, 1: Added
5870
Common Key Info Writing
001 Writing
003 Initialize
004
D129/D130
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the

device for @Remote specifications.
Initializes the data area of the common proof for validating.
Writing:
Writes to flash ROM the common proof (2048-bit) for validating
2048bit
the device for @Remote specifications.
3-156
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
SD Card Appli. Move

5873
Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see
"SD Card Appli Move" in the chapter "System Maintenance (Main Chapters).
001 Move Exec
Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec
This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
SC Auto Reboot
This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.

[0 to 1/ 0 / 1]
001
Reboot
Setting
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine

issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same
SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
002 Reboot Type
5878
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
Option Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite
001 Data Overwrite Security
Security option for the copier. For more, see

"DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" in the chapter
"Installation".
Fixed Phase Block Erasing

5881
Detects the Fixed phrase.
SM Appendix
3-157
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
5875
System SP Tables-5
CPM Set
5882
DFU
5885*
Set WIM Function

Allows or disallows the functions of web image
monitor.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit:
0: Forbid all document server access
020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl
1: Forbid user mode access

2: Forbid print function
3: Forbid Fax
4: Forbid scan sending
5: Forbid download
6: Forbid delete
7: Forbid guest user
DocSvr Format
050 Selects the display type for the document box list.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
DocSvr Trans
051 Sets the number of documents to be displayed in the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
Set Signature
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Signature for each e-mail
100 1: Signature for all e-mails
2: No signature
Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the
WIM when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
D129/D130
3-158
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
Set Encryption
Determines whether the scanned documents with the WIM are encrypted
101 when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
200 Detect Mem Leak
Not used
201 DocSvr Timeout
Not used
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
SD Get Counter
5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower
slot). The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root
directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text
001 file (*.txt) prefixed with the number of the machine.
1.
Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2.
Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
Personal Information Protect

Selects the protection level for logs.
5888*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
SM Appendix
3-159
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
SDK Application Counter

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name

Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
5907
names should be registered again.

After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
LCT Paper Size

Specifies the paper size in the LCT.
5908*
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: A4
1: LT
5913*
Switchover Permission Time

Print Application Timer
[3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second step]
002 Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take
control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is
not operating because a key has not been pressed.
D129/D130
3-160
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
5919*
HDD Encryption
Display Operation State
Shows the status of the encryption function for the HDD.
001
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not Activated
Copy Server: Set Function
0: ON, 1: OFF
Enable and disable the document server. This is a security measure that
5967*
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable
the new setting.
5973*
User Stamp Registration
101
Frame deletion setting

[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 mm]
Cherry Server
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, "Light" or
5974*
"Full" (Professional) is installed.

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Light
1: Full
SM Appendix
3-161
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
1: Activated
System SP Tables-5
Device Setting
The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
5985
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
Other network applications than @Remote or

LDAP/NT authentication are not available when
this SP is set to "2". Even though you can
change the initial settings of those network
applications, the settings do not work
002 On Board USB
5987*
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Counter Falsification Prevention

This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed. If it is
detected, SC610 occurs.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON
D129/D130
3-162
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-5
SP Print Mode
5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
001 All ( Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
004 Logging Data

005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Print SP
SM Appendix
3-163
D129/D130
System SP Tables-5
SP Text Mode
5992
Writes the SMC sheets into the SD card.
001
All ( Data List)
002
SP (Mode Data List)
003
User Program
004
Logging Data
005
Diagnostic Report
006
Non-Default
007
NIB Summary
008
Capture Log
021
Copier User Program
022
Scanner SP
023
Scanner User Program
024
SDK/J Summary
025
SDK/J Application Info
026
Print SP
D129/D130
3-164
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-6

3.6.1 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS
ADF Registration Adjust

Adjusts the side-to-side and leading edge registration for simplex and
6006*
duplex original feeding in ARDF mode.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
SP6006-5 sets the maximum setting allowed for rear edge erase.
001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front
[3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear
003 Leading Edge Registration
[5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
005 Buckle: Duplex Front
[3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
006 Buckle: Duplex Rear
[2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
007 Rear Edge Erase
[10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
6007
ADF Input Check
001
002
003
Original Length 1 (B5

Detection Sensor)
Original Length 2 (A4
Detection Sensor)
Original Length 3 (LG
Detection Sensor)

1: Paper detected

SM Appendix
3-165
D129/D130
System SP Tables-6
009 Original Set Sensor

010 Separation Sensor
011 Skew Correction Sensor
012 Scan Entrance Sensor
014 Exit Sensor
015 Feed Cover Sensor
016 Lift Up Sensor
017 Inverter Sensor
018 Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
019 Original Set HP Sensor
D129/D130
0: ADF cover closed

1: ADF cover open
0: ADF closed
1: ADF open
1: Paper detected
0: HP (Pick-up roller: Up)
1: Not HP (Pick-up roller: Down)
0: HP (Stopper: UP)
1: Not HP (Stopper: Down)
3-166
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-6
6008
ADF Output Check

001 Pick-up Motor Forward
002 Pick-up Motor Reserve
003 Feed Motor Forward
004 Feed Motor Reserve
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
005 Relay Motor Forward

007 Inverter Motor Forward
008 Inverter Motor Reserve
011 Inverter Solenoid
012 Stamp
013 Fan Motor
ADF FreeRun
Performs an ARDF free run in duplex mode. Press [ON] to start, press [OFF]
6009
to stop.
Note: This is a general free run controlled from the copier.
001 Free Run: Simplex Motion
002 Free Run: Duplex Motion
003 Free Run: Stamp Motion
ADF Stamp Position Adjust.
[5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 mm step]
6010*
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
SM Appendix
3-167
D129/D130
System SP Tables-6
Original Size Detect Setting

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since
original sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
(7) 0000 0000 (0)
Different bits are used for detection, depending on the location as shown
below.
Bit
6016*
Size
A4 (L)/LT (L)
11" x 15"/DLT (L)
DLT (L)/ 11" x 15"
LT (S)/ US Exec (S)
Location
Japan only
NA only
3
LT (L)/ 8" x 10" (L)
LG (L)/ F4 (L)
A4 (L)/ 16K (L)
8K (L)/ DLT (L)
EU/AA only
DF Magnification Adj.
6017*
[5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1% step]
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for ADF mode.

Use the key to toggle between + and - before entering the value
Skew Correction Moving Setting

Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off.
6020*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Off (only for small original sizes)
1: On (for all original sizes)
D129/D130
3-168
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-6
Punch Position: Sub Scan

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. (For D636/D637)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU
[-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
004 5-Hole: SCAN

005 2-Hole: NA
Punch Position: Main Scan

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction. (For D636/D637)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.4 mm]
004 4-Hole: SCAN

005 2-Hole: NA
Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.

6130*
Adjusts the paper buckle at the punch unit for each paper size. (For
D636/D637)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.25 mm]
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
SM Appendix
3-169
D129/D130
System SP Tables-6
007 DLT SEF

008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Skew Correction Control

6131*
Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. (For D636/D637)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
D129/D130
3-170
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-6
Jogger Fence Fine Adj.

This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
6132*
stack on the finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher D636/D637. The
adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Staple Position Adjustment

Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (D636/D637).
6133*
+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.

- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
[-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
SM Appendix
3-171
D129/D130
System SP Tables-6
Saddle Stitch Position Adj.

6134*
Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper
is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher (D637).
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
[-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
003 A4 SEF
004 B5 SEF

- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease
005 DLT SEF

006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Folder Position Adj.

6135*
This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
Booklet Finisher D637.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
[-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
003 A4 SEF
004 B5 SEF

- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
005 DLT SEF

006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
D129/D130
3-172
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-6
Book Fold Repeat

6136*
Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher D637.
[2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
Finisher Free Run

6137
These SPs are used for the D588 or D636/D637.
002 Free Run 2
D588: System free run

D636/D637: Free run for paper edge stapling.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
001 Free Run 1
D588: Free run for durability testing

D636/D637: Not used
003 Free Run 3
Not used
004 Free Run 4
Not used
Entrance Sensor
6139
finisher. (D588) (
FIN (EUP) INPUT Check

6140
FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check

6144
finisher. (D588) (
FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check

6145
SM Appendix
3-173
D129/D130
System SP Tables-6
Max. Pre-Stack Sheet
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheets step]
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149*
You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding
thick or slick paper.
6800
Sheet Conversion (Thick Paper)

Permits punching, including tab sheets.
Note: Do not change this setting.
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheet]
1: 1 Sheet
2: 2 Sheets
3: 3 Sheets
Extra Staples
More than the standard number of sheets can be stapled. This SP sets the
additional number of sheets (This Setting + Standard Number = maximum
number of sheets).
6830*
If the number of the maximum for staples is increased, and the

mechanical warranty of the unit can be guaranteed, then the setting can
take effect without changing the controller software.
However, assurance that mechanical performance can be guaranteed is

required before changing the setting to increase the staple load for more
than the maximum in the feed/exit specifications. Raising this setting
without quality assurance could damage the machine.
Staple positions other than booklet stapling

1
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
2 Booklet stapling
2
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
D129/D130
3-174
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-6
6910
Shading Control
ON/OFF
001
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0= OFF, 1= ON
Enables or disables the shading adjustment for DF mode.

[0 to 60 / 3 / 1 sec] DFU
003 Shading Interval: B
[0 to 120 / 60 / 1 ] DFU
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
002 Shading Interval: A
SM Appendix
3-175
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7

3.7.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG
7401*
Total SC Counter
SC Counter
001 Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred.
Reset).
Total SC Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of service calls that have occurred.
Reset).
7403*
SC History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
D129/D130
3-176
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
7404*
SC991 History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Displays the 10 most recently detected SC991 codes.

006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
7502*
Total Paper Jam

Jam Counter
001 Displays the total number of paper jams.
Reset).
Total Jam Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of paper jams.
Reset).
SM Appendix
3-177
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
7503*
Total Original Jam

Original Jam Counter
001 Displays the total number of original jams.
Reset).
Total Original Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of original jams.
Reset).
Total Jams Location

These SPs display the total number of paper jams by location. A "Check-in"
7504*
(paper late) error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the
precise time. A "Check-out" ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper
remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
001 At power On
003 Tray 1: On
004 Tray 2: On
005 Tray 3: On
006 Tray 4: On
007 LCT: On
008 Bypass: On
009 Duplex: On
D129/D130
3-178
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7

017 Registration: On
019 Fusing Exit: On
020 Paper Exit: On
021 Bridge Exit On
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
022 Bridge Transport: On

024 Junction Gate Sensor: On
025 Duplex Exit: On
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In)
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out)
058 LCT Feed Sensor: Off
060 Paper Exit: Off
061 Bridge: Exit: Off
062 Bridge: Transport: Off
064 Junction Gate Sensor: Off
065 Duplex Exit: Off
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In)
067 Duplex Entrance: Off (Out)
SM Appendix
3-179
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN

101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN
102 Finisher Staple: KIN
103 Finisher Exit: KIN
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP
194 Finisher Staple Exit: EUP
195 Finisher Exit: EUP
198 Finisher Folder: EUP
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP
D129/D130
3-180
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
Original Jam Detection

Displays the total number of original jams by location. These jams occur
when the original does not activate the sensors. A Check-in ("paper late")
7505
error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time. A
Check-out ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the
sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
001 At Power: On
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
003 Separation Sensor: On

004 Skew Correction Sensor: On
005 Interval Sensor: On
006 Registration Sensor: On
007 Inverter Sensor: On
008 Original Exit Sensor: On
053 Separation Sensor: Off
054 Skew Correction Sensor: Off
055 Interval Sensor: Off
057 Inverter Sensor: Off
058 Original Exit Sensor: Off
SM Appendix
3-181
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
7506*
Jam Count by Paper Size

005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
D129/D130
3-182
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
7507*
Plotter Jam History

001 Last
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)

Sample Display:
CODE:007
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
006 Latest 5
where:
007 Latest 6
CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000

008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8

010 Latest 9
Size
Code
Size
Code
Size
Code
A4 (S)
05
A3 (L)
84
DLT (L)
A0
A5 (S)
06
A4 (L)
85
LG (L)
A4
B5 (S)
0E
A5 (L)
86
LT (L)
A6
LT (S)
26
B4 (L)
8D
HLT (L)
AC
HLT (S)
2C
B5 (L)
8E
Others
FF
SM Appendix
3-183
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
7508*
Original Jam History

001 Last
002 Last 1
003 Last 2
Displays the original jam history (the most recent 10 jams).

Sample Display:
CODE:007
004 Last 3
005 Last 4
SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Last 5
where:
007 Last 6
CODE is the SP7505*** number (see above.

008 Last 7
009 Last 8

010 Last 9
Size
Code
Size
Code
Size
Code
A4 (S)
05
A3 (L)
84
DLT (L)
A0
A5 (S)
06
A4 (L)
85
LG (L)
A4
B5 (S)
0E
A5 (L)
86
LT (L)
A6
LT (S)
26
B4 (L)
8D
HLT (L)
AC
HLT (S)
2C
B5 (L)
8E
Others
FF
D129/D130
3-184
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
Part Replacement Operation

7624*
Selects the PM maintenance for each part.
001 PCU-BK
002 Fuser
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0:No (Not PM maintenance)
003 Transfer Unit
1: Yes (PM maintenance)
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
004 FuserCleaner
ROM No./Firmware Version

7801
This SP codes display the firmware versions of all ROMs in the system,
including the mainframe, the ARDF, and peripheral devices.
PM Counter Display
7803*
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
Paper
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
001
Displays the paper counter (pages)
Page: PCD
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
002
Displays the PCD (Drum and Development unit) counter (pages)
Page: Transfer
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
003
Displays the transfer unit counter (pages).
Page: Fuser
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
004
Displays the fusing unit counter (pages).
Rotation: PCD
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
005
Displays the PCD rotation counter (distance).
SM Appendix
3-185
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
Rotation: Transfer
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
006
Displays the transfer unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Fuser
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
007
Displays the fuser unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation(%): PCD
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
008
Displays the PCD (%) rotation counter (Distance/PM).
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
009
Displays the transfer unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Fuser
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the fuser unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Web
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
011
Displays the web unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
PM Counter Reset
7804
Resets the PM counter.

Touch [Execute] two times > "Completed" > [Exit]
Paper
001
Resets the PM counter of the paper.
PCD
002 Resets the PM counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit except
developer).
Transfer
003
Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit.
D129/D130
3-186
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
Fuser
004
Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit.
Web
005
Reset the PM counter of the web unit.
All Clear
006
7805
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Resets all PM counter
Parts Counter
Page: OPC
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
001
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the OPC.
Page: Charge Roller
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
002
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the charge roller.
Page: Developer
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
003
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the developer.
Page: Belt Blade
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
004
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Page: Heat Roller
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
005
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the hot roller.
Page: Pressure Roller
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
006
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the pressure roller.
Page: Cleaning Roller
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
007
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the cleaning roller.
Page: Thermistor
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
008
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the thermistors.
SM Appendix
3-187
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
Page: Stripper
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
009
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the strippers.
Rotation: OPC
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
010
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the OPC.
Rotation: Charge Roller
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
011
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the charge roller.
Rotation: Developer
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
012
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the developer.
Rotation: Belt Blade
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
013
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the transfer belt, blade.
Rotation: Heat Roller
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
014
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the hot roller.
Rotation: Pressure Roller
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
015
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the pressure roller.
Rotation: Cleaning Roller
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
016
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the cleaning roller.
Rotation: Thermistor
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
017
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the thermistors.
Rotation: Stripper
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
018
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the strippers.
Page(%): Web
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
019
Displays the parts counter (rotations/PM %) of the cleaning web.
D129/D130
3-188
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
7806
Counter Clear
OPC
001
Resets the parts counter of the OPC.
Charge Roller
002
Resets the parts counter of the charge roller.
Developer
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
003
Resets the parts counter of the developer.
Belt: Blade
004
Resets the parts counter of the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Heat Roller
005
Resets the parts counter of the hot roller.
Pressure Roller
006
Resets the parts counter of the pressure roller.
Cleaning Roller
007
Resets the parts counter of the cleaning roller.
Web
008
Resets the parts counter of the cleaning web.
Thermistor
009
Resets the parts counter of the thermistors.
Stripper
010
Resets the parts counter of the strippers.
All Clear
011
Resets all parts counters.
SM Appendix
3-189
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
SC/Jam Counter Reset

Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press Execute on the touch
7807
panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7507, SP7508.
MF Error Counter Japan Only

7826
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
001 Error Total
002 Error Staple
A request for the count total failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
MF Error Counter Clear Japan Only

7827
Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only
Self-Diagnose Result Display

Execute to open the "Self-Diagnostics Result Display" to view details about
7832
errors. Use the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all
the information. If no errors have occurred, you will see the "No Error"
message on the screen.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
D129/D130
3-190
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
DF Glass Dust Check

Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on
7852*
the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter.
Counting is done only if SP4-020-1 (Dust Check) is switched on.
002
7853
Dust Detection Clear

Counter
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
001 Dust Detection Counter
Replacement Counter
PCD
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
001
Displays the replacement counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit).
Transfer
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
002
Displays the replacement counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
003
Displays the replacement counter of the fusing unit.
Web
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
004
Displays the replacement counter of the cleaning web.
zero cross
7856*
[0 to 255 / 60 / 1 ]
Stores and displays the detected zero cross frequency of the main ac power
supply from the wall socket.
SM Appendix
3-191
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
Assert Info. DFU

7901
These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent
SC code generated by the machine.
001* File Name
Module name
002* Number of Lines
Number of the lines where error occurred.
003* Location
Value
7906
Prev Counter
Page: PCD
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
001
Displays the counter (pages) of the previous PCD
Page: Transfer
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
002
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous transfer unit.
Page: Fuser
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
003
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous fusing unit.
Rotation: PCD
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
004
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous PCD
Rotation: Transfer
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
005
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous transfer unit.
Rotation: Fuser
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]
006
Rotation(%):PCD
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]
007
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous PCD
D129/D130
3-192
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]
008
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous transfer unit.
Rotation(%):Fuser
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]
009
Rotation(%):Web
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010 Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous cleaning
7950
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
web.
Replacement Date
PCD
001
Displays the replacement date of the PCD.
Transfer
002
Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit.
Fuser
003
Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit.
Web
004
Displays the replacement date of the web unit.
SM Appendix
3-193
D129/D130
System SP Tables-7
7951
Remaining Counter
PCD(Page)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
001
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the PCD.
Transfer(Page)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
002
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Page)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
003
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the fusing unit.
PCD(Rotation)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
005
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the PCD.
Transfer(Rotation)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
006
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Rotation)
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
007
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the fusing unit.
PCD (%)
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
009
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the PCD.
Transfer (%)
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
010
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the transfer unit.
Fuser (%)
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
011
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the fusing unit.
Web (%)
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
013
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the cleaning web.
D129/D130
3-194
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-7
PM Yield Setting
7952
Sets the each yield of the following.
PCD(Page)
[0 to 99999999/ 160000 / 1 sheet]
001
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Pages).
Transfer(Page)
[0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]
002
Fuser(Page)
[0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]
003
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Pages).
PCD(Rotation)
005
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 71990000 / 1 mm]

C2c: [0 to 999999999 / 75500000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Rotations).
Transfer(Rotation)
006
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 62770000 / 1 mm]

C2c: [0 to 999999999 / 65420000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Rotations).
Fuser(Rotation)
007
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 54880000 / 1 mm]

C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 55800000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Rotations).

Web (%)
[0 to 255 / 92 / 1 %]
009
Sets the PM yield (%) of the web unit.
Day Threshold: PCD
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 days]
021
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end for the PCD.
Day Threshold: Transfer Unit
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 days]
022
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end for the transfer unit.
Day Threshold: Fusing Unit
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 days]
023
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end for the fusing unit.
SM Appendix
3-195
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Pages).
System SP Tables-7
7953
Operation Env Log

T<10
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
001
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: T<10C
10<=T<=17
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
002
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 10C<=T<=17C
17<T<23
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
003
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 17<=T<=23
23<=T<=27
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
004
27<=T<=32
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
005
32<T
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
006
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 32<T
Env Log Clear

7954
Resets the environment logs (SP7953).
D129/D130
3-196
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8

3.8.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG 2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as
sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8codes that when used in
combination with others, can provide useful information.
What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216
The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406
The number of pages printed from the document server.
SP8691 to SP8696
The number of pages sent from the document server.
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
SP Numbers
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an 'application'). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes
What It Means
T:
Total: (Grand Total).
C:
Copy application.
F:
Fax application.
P:
Print application.
S:
Scan application.
Grand total of the items counted for all applications

(C, F, P, etc.).
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the
SM Appendix
document server.
3-197
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.

The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
L:
Local storage
mode (from the document server window), or from
(document server)
another mode, such as from a printer driver or by

pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by case.
O:
Other applications
Refers to network applications such as Web Image
(external network
Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
applications, for
Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example)
group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them
on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of
abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not
understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation
What It Means
"By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
>
More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook
Address Book
Apl
Application
B/W
Black & White
Bk
Black
Cyan
ColCr
Color Create
ColMode
Color Mode
D129/D130
3-198
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
Abbreviation
What It Means
Comb
Combine
Comp
Compression
Deliv
Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print)
used to store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul
Emulation
FC
Full Color
FIN
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed
No Margins
GenCopy
Generation Copy Mode
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
DesApl
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
GPC
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax
ImgEdt
Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
LS
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize
Large (paper) Size
Mag
Magnification
MC
One color (monochrome)
SM Appendix
3-199
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
Abbreviation
What It Means
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor
NRS
machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in

Japan.
Org
Original for scanning
OrgJam
Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows
Palm 2
print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the

network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC
Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
PGS
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two

pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob
Print Jobs
Ppr
Paper
PrtJam
Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS
Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2
only. This machine is under development and currently not

available.
Rez
Resolution
SC
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn
Scan
Sim, Simplex
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email
Scan-to-E-mail
D129/D130
3-200
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
Abbreviation
What It Means
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8counters are
SMC
Svr
Server
TonEnd
Toner End
TonSave
Toner Save
TXJob
Send, Transmission
YMC
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
recorded in the SMC report.
All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801-1 Memory All Clear.
8001
8002
T:Total Jobs
These SPs count the number of times each
C:Total Jobs
application is used to do a job.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8003
F:Total Jobs
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8004
P:Total Jobs
other applications are used to send a job to the
8005
S:Total Jobs
8006
L:Total Jobs
document server, plus the number of times a file
already on the document server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
SM Appendix
3-201
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does
not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast
are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If
one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the
transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter
increments.
8011
T:Jobs/LS
8012
C:Jobs/LS
8013
F:Jobs/LS
8014
P:Jobs/LS
8015
S:Jobs/LS
8016
L:Jobs/LS
8017
O:Jobs/LS
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the

document server by each application, to reveal how local
storage is being used for input.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
panel.
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you
enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
D129/D130
3-202
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8021
T:Pjob/LS
8022
C:Pjob/LS
These SPs reveal how files printed from the document
8023
F:Pjob/LS
8024
P:Pjob/LS
8025
S:Pjob/LS
8026
L:Pjob/LS
8027
O:Pjob/LS
server were stored on the document server originally.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
panel.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the
document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P:
counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L:
counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the
S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then
the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2),
are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
SM Appendix
3-203
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
8031
T:Pjob/DesApl
8032
C:Pjob/DesApl
These SPs reveal what applications were used to
8033
F:Pjob/DesApl
8034
P:Pjob/DesApl
8035
S:Pjob/DesApl
8036
L:Pjob/DesApl
8037
O:Pjob/DesApl
output documents from the document server.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from
operation panel.
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image
Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8041
T:TX Jobs/LS
These SPs count the applications that stored files on
8042
C:TX Jobs/LS
8043
F:TX Jobs/LS
8044
P:TX Jobs/LS
8045
S:TX Jobs/LS
8046
L:TX Jobs/LS
8047
O:TX Jobs/LS
the document server that were later accessed for

transmission over the telephone line or over a network
(attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax).
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned from
operation panel.
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as
an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
D129/D130
3-204
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
8051
T:TX Jobs/DesApl
These SPs count the applications used to send
C:TX Jobs/DesApl
8053
F:TX Jobs/DesApl
8054
P:TX Jobs/DesApl
8055
S:TX Jobs/DesApl
8056
L:TX Jobs/DesApl
8057
O:TX Jobs/DesApl
files from the document server over the telephone

line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as
a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending
are counted separately.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs
8061
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
C:FIN Jobs
8062
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method
F:FIN Jobs
8063
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs
8064
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
S:FIN Jobs
8065
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
SM Appendix
3-205
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
8052
System SP Tables-8
L:FIN Jobs
8066
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is
specified from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs
8067
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external

application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored
806x 1 Sort
copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the

document server, the L: counter increments. (See
SP8066 1)
806x 2 Stack
Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple
Number of jobs started in Staple mode.

Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the
806x 4 Booklet
machine is in staple mode, the Staple counter also

increments.
806x 5 Z-Fold

Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch
806x 6 Punch
is set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See

SP8064 6.)
806x 7 Other
806x 8 Inside-Fold
806x 9 Three-IN-Fold
Reserved. Not used

Booklet mode and set for folding (Inside-fold).
Letter Fold-in Not Used
806x 10 Three-OUT-Fold
Letter Fold-out Not Used
806x 11 Four-Fold
Double Parallel Fold Not Used
806x 12 KANNON-Fold
Gate Fold Not Used
D129/D130
3-206
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
806x 13 Perfect-Bind
Perfect Binder Not Used
806x 14 Ring-Bind
Ring Binder Not Used
T:Jobs/PGS
8071
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
8072
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
F:Jobs/PGS
8073
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
8074
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
S:Jobs/PGS
8075
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
L:Jobs/PGS
8076
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
8077
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
807x 1 1 Page
807x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages
807x 9 51 to 100 Pages
SM Appendix
3-207
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
C:Jobs/PGS
System SP Tables-8
807x 3 3 Pages
807x 10 101 to 300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages
807x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x 5 5 Pages
807x 12 501 to 700 Pages
807x 6 6 to 10 Pages
807x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x 7 11 to 20 Pages
807x 14 1001 to Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
8111
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a

telephone line.
001 B/W
Black TX
F:FAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
8113
fax directly on a telephone line.

001 B/W
D129/D130
Black TX
3-208
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including
documents stored on the document server.
If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job
started.
If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where
both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (812x) also
increments.
T:IFAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
8121
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
001 B/W
Black TX
F:IFAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
8123
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.

001 B/W
Black TX
The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at
this time.
SM Appendix
3-209
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
System SP Tables-8
T:S-to-Email Jobs
8131
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an
e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
001 B/W
Black TX
002 Color
Color TX
003 ACS
Color TX
S:S-to-Email Jobs
8135
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail,
without storing the original on the document server.
001 B/W
Black TX
002 Color
Color TX
003 ACS
Color TX
If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color
or black-and-white then counted.
waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC,
or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For
example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is
counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
D129/D130
3-210
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8141
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8145
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router
server.
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router
server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a
"Color" job.
waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
SM Appendix
3-211
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Router server.
System SP Tables-8
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a
8151
PC (Scan-to-PC).
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
8155
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with
Scan-to-PC.
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
8161
T:PCFAX TX Jobs
These SPs count the number of PC Fax

transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it is
registered for sending, not when it is sent.
8163
F:PCFAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
identical counts.
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out
to the destination from the PC through the copier.
D129/D130
3-212
SM Appendix
8171
T:Deliv Jobs/WSD
These SPs count the pages scanned by WSD.
8175
S:Deliv Jobs/WSD
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
8181
T:Scan to Media Jobs
These SPs count the pages scanned to media by

the scanner application.
8185
S:Scan to Media Jobs

001 B/W
Black Deliv
002 Color
Color Deliv
003 ACS
Color Deliv
8191
T:Total Scan PGS
8192
C:Total Scan PGS
8193
F:Total Scan PGS
8195
S:Total Scan PGS
8196
L:Total Scan PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan images.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust
color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S:
count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store
SM Appendix
3-213
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
System SP Tables-8
System SP Tables-8
File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
8201
T:LSize Scan PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8203
F Lsize Scan PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
S:LSize Scan PGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SP codes count the total number of large pages input with the
8205
scanner for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax
transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display..
8211
T:Scan PGS/LS
8212
C:Scan PGS/LS
8213
F:Scan PGS/LS
8215
S:Scan PGS/LS
8216
L:Scan PGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages scanned into

the document server .
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Reading user stamp data is not counted.
If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6
and the L: count is 6.
D129/D130
3-214
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
ADF Org Feeds

8221
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for
duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which
side the user loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
002 Back
scanning.
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
rear-side scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
SM Appendix
3-215
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
001 Front
System SP Tables-8
Scan PGS/Mode
8231
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
001 Large Volume
002 SADF
003 Mixed Size
004 Custom Size
005 Platen
006 Mixed 1side/2side
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in

the ADF at one time.
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation
panel.
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original
directly on the platen.
Selectable. Select "Simplex/Duplex" on the operation
panel.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the
original's page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
D129/D130
3-216
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
T:Scan PGS/Org
8241
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
C:Scan PGS/Org
8242
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8243
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
F:Scan PGS/Org
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax
jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org
8245
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org
8246
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen
8241
8242
8243
8245
8246
824x 1: Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
824x 2: Text/Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
824x 3: Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
824x 4: GenCopy, Pale
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
824x 5: Map
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
824x 6: Normal/Detail
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
824x 7: Fine/Super Fine
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
824x 8: Binary
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
824x 9: Grayscale
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
SM Appendix
3-217
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
824x 10: Color
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
824x 11: Other
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8251
T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8252
C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8255
S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8256
L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
These SPs show how many times Image Edit

features have been selected at the operation panel
for each application. Some examples of these
editing features are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
8257
O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit
features have been used. A detailed breakdown of
exactly which features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
D129/D130
3-218
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
8281
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how
the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
8285
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
identical counts.
T:Scan PGS/Stamp
8293
F:Scan PGS/Stamp
These SPs count the number of pages stamped

with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8295
S:Scan PGS/Stamp

T:Scan PGS/Size
8301
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
C:Scan PGS/Size
8302
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
F:Scan PGS/Size
8303
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
S:Scan PGS/Size
8305
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
SM Appendix
3-219
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
8291
System SP Tables-8
L:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored
8306
from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-446].
830x 1
A3
830x 2
A4
830x 3
A5
830x 4
B4
830x 5
B5
830x 6
DLT
830x 7
LG
830x 8
LT
830x 9
HLT
830x 10
Full Bleed
830x 254
Other (Standard)
830x 255
Other (Custom)
D129/D130
3-220
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
T:Scan PGS/Rez
8311
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Rez
8315
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
831x 1
1200dpi to
831x 2
600dpito1199dpi
831x 3
400dpito599dpi
831x 4
200dpito399dpi
831x 5
to199dpi
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.
The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done
for the Fax application.
8381
T:Total PrtPGS
These SPs count the number of pages printed by
8382
C:Total PrtPGS
8383
F:Total PrtPGS
8384
P:Total PrtPGS
8385
S:Total PrtPGS
8386
L:Total PrtPGS
8387
O:Total PrtPGS
the customer. The counter for the application used

for storing the pages increments.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go to
the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.
SM Appendix
3-221
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS
8391
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8401
T:PrtPGS/LS
8402
C:PrtPGS/LS
8403
F:PrtPGS/LS
8404
P:PrtPGS/LS
8405
S:PrtPGS/LS
operation panel.
These SPs count the number of pages printed from the

document server. The counter for the application used
to print the pages is incremented.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8406
L:PrtPGS/LS
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
D129/D130
3-222
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

8411
Prints/Duplex
counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last pages

printed only on one side are not counted.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8421
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8422
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8423
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8424
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8425
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8426
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8427
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
SM Appendix
3-223
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
System SP Tables-8
842x 1
Simplex> Duplex
842x 2
Duplex> Duplex
842x 3
Book> Duplex
842x 4
Simplex Combine
842x 5
Duplex Combine
842x 6
2in1
842x 7
4in1
842x 8
6in1
842x 9
8in1
8pages on 1 side (8-Up)
842x 10
9in1
842x 11
16in1
842x 12
Booklet
842x 13
Magazine
842x 14
2in1 + Booklet
842x 15
4in1 + Booklet
842x 16
6in1 + Booklet
842x 17
8in1 + Booklet
842x 18
9in1 + Booklet
842x 19
2in1 + Magazine
842x 20
4in1 + Magazine
842x 21
6in1 + Magazine
842x 22
8in1 + Magazine
842x 23
9in1 + Magazine
842x 24
16in1 + Magazine
D129/D130
3-224
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need to
improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Magazine
Original Pages
Count
Original Pages
Count
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8431
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Booklet
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8432
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8434
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8436
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
SM Appendix
3-225
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8437
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
843x 1
Cover/Slip Sheet
843x 2
Series/Book
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The

count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were
843x 3
User Stamp
applied, including page numbering and date

stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8441
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8442
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8443
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8444
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8445
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8446
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from
D129/D130
3-226
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8447
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
844x 1
A3
844x 2
A4
844x 3
A5
844x 4
B4
844x 5
B5
844x 6
DLT
844x 7
LG
844x 8
LT
844x 9
HLT
844x 10
Full Bleed
844x 254
Other (Standard)
844x 255
Other (Custom)
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
applications.
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
SM Appendix
3-227
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass Tray
Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1
Copier
003 Tray 2
Copier
004 Tray 3
005 Tray 4
006 Tray 5
LCT (Option)
007 Tray 6
Currently not used.
008 Tray 7
Currently not used.
009 Tray 8
Currently not used.
010 Tray 9
Currently not used.
011 Tray 10
Currently not used.
012 Tray 11
Currently not used.
013 Tray 12
Currently not used.
014 Tray 13
Currently not used.
015 Tray 14
Currently not used.
016 Tray 15
Currently not used.
D129/D130
3-228
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
8461
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8462
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
printed on one side counts as 1.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8463
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8464
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8466
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
846x 1
Normal
846x 2
Recycled
846x 3
Special
846x 4
Thick
846x 5
Normal (Back)
846x 6
Thick (Back)
846x 7
OHP
SM Appendix
3-229
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
846x 8
Other
PrtPGS/Mag
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 to 49%
002 50% to 99%
003 100%
004 101% to 200%
005 201% to
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing
magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the
document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying

are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned
a rate of 100%.
8481
T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8484
P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
D129/D130
3-230
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Emul
8511
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul
8514
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
printed.
002 RPDL
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
001 RPCS
Japan Only
003 PS3
004 R98
005 R16
006 GL/GL2
Japan Only
007 R55
008 RTIFF
009 PDF
010 PCL5e/5c
011 PCL XL
012 IPDL-C
013 BM-Links
Japan Only
014 Other
015 IPDS
SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
SM Appendix
3-231
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/FIN
8521
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
8522
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8523
Fax application.
Note:
Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
8524
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
8525
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
8526
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
852x 1
Sort
852x 2
Stack
852x 3
Staple
852x 4
Booklet
852x 5
Z-Fold
852x 6
Punch
852x 7
Other
D129/D130
3-232
SM Appendix
852x 8
Inside-Fold
852x 9
Three-IN-Fold
852x 10
Three-OUT-Fold
852x 11
Four-Fold
852x 12
KANNON-Fold
852x 13
Perfect-Bind
852x 14
Ring-Bind
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the

8531
Staples
machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8551
T:PrtBooks/FIN
8552
C:PrtBooks/FIN
8554
P:PrtBooks/FIN
8556
L:PrtBooks/FIN
001 Perfect-Bind
Not Used
002 Ring-Bind
Not Used
SM Appendix
3-233
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
System SP Tables-8
System SP Tables-8
8561
T:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8562
C:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8563
F:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8564
P:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8566
L:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
O:A Sheet Of Paper
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8567
These SPs count the totals number of duplex pages printed.
001 Total: Over A3/DLT
002 Total: Under A3/DLT
003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT
004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT
T: Counter
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
8581
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
O: Counter
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
8591
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
001 A3/DLT
002 Duplex
D129/D130
3-234
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
T:Coverage Counter
8601
These SPs count the total coverage for each color and printout pages.
001 B/W
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
011 B/W Printing Pages
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
C:Coverage Counter
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
8602
F:Coverage Counter
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables

[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
8603
P:Coverage Counter
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
8604
L:Coverage Counter
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
8606
SDK Apli Counter
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
SM Appendix
3-235
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
8621
Func Use Counter
001 to 064 Function-001 to Function-064
T:FAX TX PGS
8631
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
telephone number.
001 B/W
Black TX
F:FAX TX PGS
8633
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]
telephone number.
001 B/W
Black TX
destination.
D129/D130
3-236
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
T:FAX TX PGS
8641
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
001 B/W
Black TX
F:FAX TX PGS
8643
[0 o 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
001 B/W
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
images using I-Fax.

Black TX
destination.
SM Appendix
3-237
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
T:S-to-Email PGS
8651
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
001 B/W
002 Color
S:S-to-Email PGS
8655
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
e-mail for the Scan application only.
001 B/W
002 Color
The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If
the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10

(the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the

document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page

document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted
separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is
10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100
destinations, for a total of 20).
D129/D130
3-238
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
8661
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
001 B/W
002 Color
8665
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Router server by the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the
Scan Router server.
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are
not done.
The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan
Router server.
SM Appendix
3-239
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
System SP Tables-8
T: Deliv PGS/PC
8671
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
001 B/W
002 Color
S: Deliv PGS/PC
8675
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
8681
T:PCFAX TXPGS
These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC

Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax application
only, so the counts for SP8681 and SP8683 are the
8683
F:PCFAX TXPGS
same.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the
copier to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages
are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B.
The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
D129/D130
3-240
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
8691
T:TX PGS/LS
8692
C:TX PGS/LS
8693
F:TX PGS/LS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8694
P:TX PGS/LS
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
These SPs count the number of pages sent from the

document server. The counter for the application that
was used to store the pages is incremented.

S:TX PGS/LS
8696
L:TX PGS/LS
operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File button

from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the
number of pages sent to each destination.
TX PGS/Port
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
8701
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via

ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
SM Appendix
3-241
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
8695
System SP Tables-8
T:Scan PGS/Comp
8711
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
document server, counted by the formats listed below.
001 JPEG/JPEG2000
003 PDF
004 Other
005 PDF/Comp
006 PDF/A
S:Scan PGS/Comp
8715
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan
application, counted by the formats listed below.
001 JPEG/JPEG2000
003 PDF
004 Other
005 PDF/Comp
006 PDF/A
D129/D130
3-242
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
8721
T:Deliv PGS/WSD
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
S:Deliv PGS/WSD
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8725
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
001 B/W
8731
8735
T:Scan PGS/Media
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Media
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
002 Color
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by
each scanner mode.
001 B/W
002 Color
RX PGS/Port
8741
[0to9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
SM Appendix
3-243
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
Dev Counter
[0to9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the

8771
development rollers) for black and other color toners.

Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the
same as the Total count.
Toner_Botol_Info.
8781
This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based
on the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle.
This SP displays the percent of space

8791
LS Memory Remain
available on the document server for storing

documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Toner Remain
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note:
8801
This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is

better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
D129/D130
3-244
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
8811
Eco Counter
Eco Total
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Displays the number of pages reduced by using the duplex and the combine
function.
Duplex
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
004
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the duplex function.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Combine
005
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the combine function.

Duplex(%)
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
008
Combine(%)
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
009
Paper Cut(%)
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
010
Displays the paper reduction ratio.
Eco Totalr:Last
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Duplex:Last
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Combine:Last
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Duplex(%):Last
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
101
104
105
108
SM Appendix
3-245
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
Combine(%):Last
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Paper Cut(%):Last
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
109
110
Cvr Cnt:0-10%
8851
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
toners.
011 0 to 2%: BK
021 3 to 4%: BK
031 5 to 7%: BK
041 8 to 10%: BK
Cvr Cnt:11-20%
8861
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
toners.
001 BK
Black toner
Cvr Cnt:21-30%
8871
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
toners.
001 BK
D129/D130
Black toner
3-246
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
Cvr Cnt:31%8881
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
toners.
001 BK
Black toner
Page/Toner Bottle
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8891
001 BK
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner.

Black toner
Page/Toner_Prev1
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner.
001 BK
Black toner
Page/Toner_Prev2
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8911
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner.
001 BK
Black toner
Cvr Cnt/Total
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage (%) BK
011 Coverage/P:BK
SM Appendix
3-247
D129/D130
System SP Tables-8
Machine Status
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
8941
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate
machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
001 Operation Time
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not

operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
002 Standby Time
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in

Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
003 Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing

Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
004 Low Power Time

005 Off Mode Time
background printing. Does not include time

machine remains powered off with the power
switches.
006 SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
007 PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
008 OrgJam
009 Supply PM Unit End
D129/D130
Total down time due to original jams during

scanning.
Total down time due to supply unit end.
3-248
SM Appendix
System SP Tables-8
AddBook Register
8951
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code /User
ID
User code registrations.
002 Mail Address
Mail address registrations.
003 Fax Destination
Fax destination registrations.
004 Group
005 Transfer Request
006 F-Code
Group destination
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
registrations.
Fax relay destination
registrations for relay TX.
F-Code box registrations.
Copy application
007 Copy Program

feature.
Fax application registrations
008 Fax Program
with the Program (job

settings) feature.
Printer application
009 Printer Program
[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]

feature.
Scanner application
010 Scanner Program

feature.
SM Appendix
3-249
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
001
System SP Tables-8
Adomin. Counter List
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8999
Display the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Total
003 Copy: BW
007 Printer: BW
010 Fax Print: BW
012 A3/DLT
013 Duplex
023 Copy: BW (%)
027 Printer: BW (%)
030 Fax Print: BW (%)
101 Transmission Total: Color
102 Transmission Total: BW
103 Fax Transmission
104 Scanner Transmission: Color
105 Scanner Transmission: BW
D129/D130
3-250
SM Appendix
Input Check
3.9 INPUT CHECK

3.9.1 COPIER
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Result
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Bit No.
Input Check
5803
Reading
Description
0
Set
Not set
Not upper limit
Upper limit
No paper
Paper remaining
005
Tray 1:
006
Tray 1:
Set
Not set
Not upper limit
Upper limit
No paper
Paper remaining
011
Tray 2:
SM Appendix
3-251
D129/D130
Input Check
012
Tray 2:
Paper detected
No paper detected
Paper detected
No paper detected
Paper detected
No paper detected
Paper detected
No paper detected
No paper detected
Paper detected
018 Relay Sensor 1
Paper detected
No paper detected
019 Relay Sensor 2
Paper detected
No paper detected
020 Relay Sensor 3
No paper detected
Paper detected
021 Relay Sensor 4
No paper detected
Paper detected
022 Relay Sensor: LCT
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not end
Paper end
017 LCT: Paper Feed Sensor
023 By-pass: Paper End Sensor

024 By-pass: Paper Size Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
026 Fusing Exit Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
027 Fusing Entrance Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
028 Junction Gate Relay Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
029 Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
030 Paper Overflow Sensor
Not full
Full
031 Right Cover Open/Close
Close
Open
032 Duplex Unit Open/Close
Open
Close
033 Duplex Entrance Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
D129/D130
3-252
SM Appendix
Input Check
Paper detected
No paper detected
035 Bank Right Cover Open/Close
Close
Open
036 Tray Cover Open/Close
Close
Open
Set
Not set
038 Bridge/Exit Tray: Exit Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
039 Bridge/Exit Tray: Relay Sensor
Paper detected
No paper detected
040 Bridge/Exit/Shift: Set Detection
Set
Not set
Close
Open
Close
Open
Not HP
HP
Set (Bit1)
Not set (Bit1)
Not full
Full
037 LCT Set
041
042
Bridge/Exit Tray: Left Guide

Open/Close
Bridge/Exit Tray: Right Guide
Open/Close
043 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor

046 Fusing Unit Set
047 Toner Overflow Sensor
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
034 Duplex Exit Sensor

open.
close.

open.
close.
050 Key Card Set
Set
Not set
051 Key Counter Set
Set
Not set
Not set
set
Set
Not set
Paper detected
No paper detected
Not end
End
No paper detected
Paper detected
Stay at rear
Stay at front
052 Mechanical Counter Set

053 1-Bin Unit Set
054 1-Bin Unit: Paper Set
057 Cleaning Web End
060 Shift Sensor
064 Shift Tray Sensor
SM Appendix
3-253
D129/D130
Input Check
Bypass Tray Paper Length
065
Paper detected
No paper detected
200 Scanner HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
201 Platen Cover Sensor
Open
Close
Detection
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper
Full
Nearly full
Near end
Almost empty
D129/D130
3-254
SM Appendix
Input Check
Table 2: Paper Size Switch

Switch 1 is used for the tray set detection.
North America
Switch Location
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF*1
A3 SEF*1
(A3 SEF)
(11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2
B4 SEF *2
(B4 SEF)
(8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF
A4 SEF
8.5" x 11" SEF
8.5" x 11" SEF
B5 SEF
B5 SEF
11" x 81/2" LEF*3
A4 LEF*3
(A4 LEF)
(11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4
B5 LEF*4
(B5 LEF)
(10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF
A5 LEF
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002 (Tray 1) or -006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-003 (Tray 1) or -007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-001 (Tray 1) or -005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-181-004 (Tray 1) or -008 (Tray 2)..
SM Appendix
3-255
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Models
Input Check
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

Models
Bit No.
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF*1
A3 SEF*1
(11" x 8.5" LEF)
(A4 LEF)
11" x 17" SEF*1
A3 SEF*1
(11" x 8.5" LEF)
(A4 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1
A4 SEF*1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2)
(A5 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1
A4 SEF*1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2)
(B5 LEF)
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 SEF
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 SEF
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A6 SEF
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A6 SEF
*1: When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is "LEF", it considers
that the paper size is bracketed size.
D129/D130
3-256
SM Appendix
Input Check
APS Original Size Detection
Original Size
Length Sensor
Width
Sensor
SP4-301
Metric version
Inch version
L3
L2
L1
W1
W2
A3
11" x 17"
00011111
B4
10" x 14"
00011110
8.5" x 14"
00011100
A4 LEF
8.5" x 11"
00000011
B5 LEF
00000010
A4 SEF
11" x 8.5"
00001100
B5 SEF
00000100
00000000
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x
13", or 8" x 13"
SP 5126 controls the
size that is detected
A5 LEF/ SEF
SM Appendix
5.5" x 8.5",
8.5" x 5.5"
3-257
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
display
Input Check
3.9.2 OPTIONS
3000/2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)
Reading
6140
Bit Description
0
001 Entrance Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
002 Proof Exit Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not Full
Full
No paper
Paper
detected*1
detected*1
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not HP
HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not HP
HP
009 Lower Tray Height Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
010 Upper Tray Height Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
011 Upper Tray Full Sensor
Not Full
Full
012 Stack Roller HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
013 Jogger HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
HP
Not HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
016 Corner Stapler HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
017 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
Not Limit
Limit
Closed
Open
003 Proof Full Detection Sensor
004 Upper Tray Exit Sensor
005 Staple Exit Sensor

006 Shift Roller HP Sensor
007 Shift Exit Sensor
008 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
014 Feed Out Belt HP Sensor

015 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor
018 Upper Tray Limit SW

019 Door Switch
D129/D130
3-258
SM Appendix
Input Check
Reading
Bit Description
0
Not HP
HP
021 Staple Detection
No staple detected
Staple detected
022 Staple Dip Detection
No staple detected
Staple detected
023 Punch Movement HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
024 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
026 Punch Full Sensor
Not Full
Full
027 Punch HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
020 Corner Stapler Operation
025 Paper Position Sensor
028 Punch DIP SW 1
See *1
029 Punch DIP SW 2
See *1
030 Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not HP
HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
034 Bottom Fence HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
035 Fold Cam HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
036 Fold Plate HP Sensor
Not HP
HP
037 Fold Unit Exit Sensor
No paper detected
Paper detected
No paper
Paper
detected*2
detected*2
No paper
Paper
detected*2
detected*2
Not HP
HP
No staple detected
Staple detected
031 Stack Present Sensor

032 Clamp Roller HP Sensor
033 Fold Entrance Sensor
038 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Front
039 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Rear
040 Booklet Stapler 1: Operation

041 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Front)
SM Appendix
3-259
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
6140
Input Check
Reading
6140
Bit Description
042
043

(Leading Edge)
(Rotation/Rear)
044 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Rear)
045

(Leading Edge/Rear)
046 Upper Tray Full Sensor: 3000
No staple detected
Staple detected
Not HP
HP
No staple detected
Staple detected
No staple detected
Staple detected
Not Full
Full
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1
DIP SW 2
Punch Type
Japan
Europe
North America
North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (D637 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "3000/2000 (Booklet)
Finisher".
D129/D130
3-260
SM Appendix
Input Check
Reading
Bit
Description
0
001 Entrance Sensor
002
003
004
005
Paper detected
Shift Exit Sensor
No paper detected
(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)

Staple Entrance Sensor
Paper detected
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor)

Staple Moving HP Sensor
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
006 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor

007 Staple Tray Paper Sensor
008
Staple Rotation Sensor

(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
SM Appendix
3-261
No paper
detected
HP
HP
Not HP
No paper detected
Paper detected
Not HP
HP
Staple detected
012 Shift HP Sensor
Paper detected
Not HP
010 Staple READY Detection
(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
detected
HP
Staple detected
Exit Guide Plate HP
No paper
Not HP
009 Staple Sensor
011
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
6139
No staple
detected
No staple
detected
Not HP
HP
Not HP
HP
D129/D130
Input Check
013
014
015
D129/D130
Paper Sensor
(Stack Height Sensor)
Tray Lower Sensor
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
Proof Full Sensor
(Paper Limit Sensor)
3-262
No output tray
Output tray
detected
detected
Lower limit
Not lower limit
Not full
Full
SM Appendix
Output Check
3.10 OUTPUT CHECK

3.10.1 COPIER
5804
Output Check
001 Exit Motor: 350
002 Exit Motor: 175
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
003 Exit Motor: 230

Paper exit motor (Mainframe)
004 Exit Motor: 180
005 Exit Motor: 154
006 Exit Motor: 90
007 Feed Motor: 300
008 Feed Motor: 255
009 Feed Motor: 230
Paper feed motor (Mainframe)
010 Feed Motor: 215

011 Feed Motor: 180
012 Feed Motor: 154
013 Feed Motor: 90
Paper feed motor (Optional paper
feed unit)

SM Appendix
3-263
D129/D130
Output Check
5804
Output Check
Paper feed motor (Optional LCT)

Paper feed clutch 1/2 (Mainframe)

Paper feed clutch 3/4 (Optional
paper feed unit)
032 LCT: Paper Feed Clutch
Paper feed clutch (Optional LCT)

Pick-up Solenoid 1/2 (Mainframe)
Pick-up Solenoid 3/4 (Optional
paper feed unit)
037 LCT: Pick-up Solenoid
Pick-up Solenoid (LCT)

D129/D130
3-264
SM Appendix
Output Check
5804
Output Check
042 Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
Not used
043 Bank: Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
Tray lock solenoid (Optional paper

feed unit)

Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables

048 Exit: Junction Gate Solenoid
Junction gate 1 solenoid
049 Duplex: Inverter Gate Solenoid
Not used

SM Appendix
3-265
D129/D130
Output Check
5804
Output Check
066 By-pass Feed Clutch
067 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid

Drive motor (Bridge unit)
072
Bridge/Exit Tray: Junction Gate
Junction Gate Solenoid (Bridge
Solenoid
unit)
073 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: Reset
074 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: Enable
075 Bridge: Cooling Fan Motor
Not used
076 Transfer Belt Contact Motor
077 OPC Motor: 230

078 OPC Motor: 180
Drum motor
079 OPC Motor: 154
080 OPC Motor: 90
D129/D130
3-266
SM Appendix
Output Check
5804
Output Check
089 Development Puddle Motor
090 PTL Control
091 Fusing Fan Motor: High

Fusing exhaust fan motor
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
092 Fusing Fan Motor: Low

093 Exhaust Fan Motor: High
Exhaust fan motor
094 Exhaust Fan Motor: Low
095 Duct Fan Motor
Cooling fan motor
096 Exit Fan Motor: High

Paper exit cooling fan motor
097 Exit Fan Motor: Low
098 PSU Fan Motor
Junction gate 2 solenoid (1-bin
099 1-Bin Junction Gate Solenoid
unit)

104 LD 1
105 LD 2
106 Toner Bottle Motor: Fwd
Toner supply motor
107 Quenching Lamp
108 Charge Bias
109 Development Bias
SM Appendix
3-267
D129/D130
Output Check
5804
Output Check
110 Transfer Belt Voltage
111 ID Sensor LED
115 Cleaning Web Motor
Web motor
116 Shift Tray Motor
Not used
117 CTL Cooling FAN
Controller fan
202 Scanner Lamp
Output Check
6144
Display
Description
001 Upper Relay Motor
002 Lower Relay Motor
003 Exit Motor
004 Proof Junction Gate SOL
Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
005 Lower Tray Lift Motor
007 Stapler Motor
008 Stapler Hammer
009 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
011 Stack Feed-out Motor
012 Shift Motor
D129/D130
3-268
SM Appendix
Output Check
3.10.3 3000 /2000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637)
Output
6145
Description
001 Entrance Motor
002 Upper Transport Motor
003 Lower Transport Motor
004 Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor
005 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
006 Shift Roller Motor
008 Upper Tray Lift Motor
009 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor
011 Feed Out Belt Motor
012 Corner Stapler Movement Motor
013 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor
014 Corner Stapler
015 Proof Junction Gate Solenoid
016 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
017
Stapling Edge Pressure Plate
Solenoid
019 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid
020 Stack Junction Gate Motor
021 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor
SM Appendix
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Display
3-269
D129/D130
Output Check
022 Booklet Stapler: Front
023 Booklet Stapler: Rear
024 Fold Plate Motor
025 Fold Roller Motor
026 Positioning Roller Motor
027 Punch Drive Motor
028 Punch Movement Motor
029 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
D129/D130
3-270
SM Appendix
Printer Service Tables
3.11 PRINTER SERVICE TABLES

3.11.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE)
Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
No I/O Timeout
0: Disable
1: Enable
never occur.
bit 4
SD Card Save Mode
0: Disable
1: Enable

bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
0: Disable
1: Enable
SM Appendix
3-271
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
1001
1001
Bit Switch
002 Bit Switch 2
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
Shift
Normal
Collate
Collate
bit 3
0: Enable
1: Disable

bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
D129/D130
3-272
SM Appendix
1001
Bit Switch
003 Bit Switch 3
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
0: Disable
1: Enable
HP4000/HP8000.
bit 3
DFU
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
SM Appendix
3-273
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
1001
Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
IPDS support tools
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable: Enables the port for IPDS support tools.
D129/D130
3-274
SM Appendix
1001
Bit Switch
005 Bit Switch 5
Disable
Enable

panel.
bit 0
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables

bit 1

mismatch occurs
0: Disable
(Single
copy)
1: Enable
(Multiple copy)

occurs.
bit 2
Prevent SDK applications from altering

the contents of a job
0: Disable
1: Enable
If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print
data. This is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a
module called the "GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of
SDK applications on data.
bit 3
[PS] PS Criteria
Pattern3
Pattern1

bit 4

to 1000 jobs.
SM Appendix
Disable
Enable (1000)
(100)
3-275
D129/D130
bit 5
DFU
bit 6

0: Disable
1: Enable

jobs.
bit 7
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Duplex)

1001
Bit Switch
D129/D130
3-276
SM Appendix
1001
Bit Switch
007 Bit Switch 7

Print path
0: Disable
1: Enable

bit 0
bit 1
to 7
1001
DFU
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Standard)
(BMS)
Bit Switch

bit 0
to 3
DFU
PCL edge to edge printing setting

bit 4
Switch the edge to edge printing setting for the custom-made machine
(BMS).
bit 5
to 7
SM Appendix
DFU
3-277
D129/D130
1001
Bit Switch
009 Bit Switch 9

1284).
"Disabled
"Enabled
(Immediately)"
(10 seconds)"
bit 0
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
Job Cancel
Disabled
(Not
cancelled)
Enabled
(Cancelled)
result in problems:
bit 3

(SEF/LEF)
0: Disable
1: Enable

"Driver/Command".
D129/D130
3-278
SM Appendix
bit 4

0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 5
DFU
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
to 7
SM Appendix
3-279
D129/D130
1001
Bit Switch
010 Bit Switch 10

bit 0
to 4
bit 5
DFU
0: Disable
1: Enable
on.
Bit 6
0: Disable
1: Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable

Job Function is on.
Bit 7
1001
DFU
Bit Switch
011 Bit Switch 11

bit 0
bit 1
Interrupt printing
0: Job
1: Page
Selects the interrupting units for the interrupt printing function.

When you select "0," you can interrupt printing of a job while being
processed.
When you select "1," you can interrupt printing of a page while being
processed.
Bit 2
DFU
to 7
D129/D130
3-280
SM Appendix
1001
Bit Switch
012 Bit Switch 12

bit 0
to 7
1003
DFU
[Clear Setting]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
1003 001
1004
[Print Summary]
1004 001
1006
*CTL
0: Link with Doc. Svr, 1: Enable
1006 001

1110
[Media Print Device Setting]
1110 002 0: Disable 1: Enable
1111
1111 001
SM Appendix
Selects the setting for the media print device.
[All Job Delete Mode]

Select whether to include an image
0: excluding New Job
processing job in jobs subject to full
1: including New Job
cancellation from the SCS job list.
3-281
D129/D130
Scanner Service Table
3.12 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE

3.12.1 SP TABLES
SP
Number/Name
Function/[Setting]
1001
Scan NV Version
Displays the version of the scanner NV.

Selects the compression type for binary
1004
Compression Type
picture processing.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the
scanned image.
1005
Erase Margin
If the machine has scanned the edge of the

original, create a margin.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Enables or disables the TWAIN function.
1009
Remote scan disable
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Displays or does not display the clear light
1010
Non Display Clear Light PDF
PDF function.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Display, 1: Not display
Displays or does not display the original
1011
Org Count Disp
counter.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Clears or does not clear a user information
1012
User Info Release
after a job.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not clear, 1: Clear
D129/D130
3-282
SM Appendix
Scanner Service Table
SP
Number/Name
Function/[Setting]
Compression level (grayscale)

These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale processing mode
2021
that can be selected with the notch settings on the operation panel.
1 Comp 1: 5 - 95
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step]
2 Comp 2: 5 - 95
[5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step]
3 Comp 3: 5 - 95
[5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step]
4 Comp 4: 5 - 95
[5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step]
5 Comp 5: 5 - 95
[5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step]
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
Range: 5 (lowest ratio) <-> 95 (highest ratio)

2024*
Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
1 Compression Ratio (Normal image)
[5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
2 Compression Ratio (High comp image)
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
SM Appendix
3-283
D129/D130
Detailed Description of SP5-749
Rev. 11/15/2012
3.13 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF SP5-749

5749
Import/Export
001
Import
101
Export
251
Export Result Print (SP)
252
Import Result Print (SP)
If part of the panel display for SP5-749 appears garbled, please apply the following
modification firmware to the machine.
Target model
Module
Program No
Version
Effective date
D130
System/Copy
D1295751K
2.04
July 2012 Production
3.13.1 DATA THAT CAN BE IMPORTED AND EXPORTED
Copier / Document Server Features
Printer Features
Scanner Features
Facsimile Features
Extended Feature Settings
Program (Document Server)
Program (Copier)
Program (Scanner)
Web Image Monitor Setting
Web Service Settings
System Settings
D129/D130
3-284
SM Appendix
Rev. 11/15/2012
Address book
Programs (fax function)
Programs (printer function)
Scanner function programs that include password settings
User stamp in the copy default settings
Settings for configuring from telnet
@Remote-related data
Counters
Settings that can be specified using Web Image Monitor or Web Service only (such as
Bonjour or SSDP settings)
Some System Settings*1 *2
*1 The setting for the date, those settings that require the device certificate, and those settings
that need to be adjusted for each device (for example, image adjustment settings) cannot be
imported or exported.
*2 Settings only for executing functions and settings only for viewing cannot be imported or
exported.
3.13.3 IMPORT/EXPORT CONDITION

Import/export is possible between devices only if their models, region of use, and the following
device configuration match.
Input Tray
Output Tray
Whether or not equipped with the duplex function
Whether or not equipped with a finisher and the type of finisher
ADF
Whether or not equipped with a hard disk
Whether or not equipped with the Remote Machine function
3.13.4 LOCATION OF STORED DATA (LOG)

The log is stored in the same location as the exported device setting information file. To use this
function, it is necessary to create the device setting information file with special software and
store it on the web server. For details, contact your sales representative.
SM Appendix
3-285
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
3.13.2 DATA THAT CANNOT BE IMPORTED OR EXPORTED
Rev. 11/15/2012
3.13.5 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS

If an error occurs, check the log's result code first. Values other than 0 indicate that an error
occurred. The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note
down the error log entry, and then contact your service representative.
Result Code
Cause
Solutions
2 (INVALID REQUEST)
A file import was attempted between
Import files exported from the same model
different models or machines with
with the same
different device configurations.
device configurations.
Failed to write the device
Check whether the destination device is
information to the destination
operating normally.
4 (INVALID OUTPUT
DIR)
device.
7( MODULE ERROR)
An unexpected error occurred
Switch the power off and then back on, and
during import or export.
then try the operation again. If the error

persists, contact your service representative.
8 (DISK FULL)
9 (DEVICE ERROR)
The available storage space on the
Execute the operation again after making
external medium is insufficient.
sure there is enough storage space.
Failed to write or read the log file.
Check whether the path to the folder for

storing the file or the folder in which the file
is stored is missing.
10 (LOG ERROR)
D129/D130
The hard disk is faulty.
Contact your service representative.
3-286
SM Appendix
Rev. 11/15/2012
Result Code
Cause
Solutions
20 (PART FAILED)
Failed to import some settings.
The reason for the failure is logged in

"NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the allowable
range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is missing.
The setting does not exist in the system.

5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because of
the system status or interlocking with other
specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some
other reason.
21 (INVALID FILE)
Failed to import the file because it is
Check whether the file format is correct. The
in the wrong format in the external
log is in the form of a CSV file
medium.
22 (INVALID KEY)
The encryption key is not valid.
Use the correct encryption key.
When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only
on an SD card.
The file format for exports is CSV.
3.13.6 EXPORTING DEVICE INFORMATION

When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1.
Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2.
Enter SP mode.
3.
Press SP5-749-001
4.
Select target SP settings to be exported.
SM Appendix
3-287
D129/D130
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
4. NOT EXIST
5.
Rev. 11/15/2012
Select the Option Settings.
Item
Specification
Unique
Unique information of the Unique information that can be updated

machine is included in
Note
#1. Items that are to be use to identify the machine itself among some
exported file if you select devices.

"Unique" setting.
Example: IP address / Host name / Information related to FAX number /Mail

address assigned the machine
#2. Items for specifying the options equipped the machine.
Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be updated
#3. Items that the problem may occur by importing
Example: Serial number / Information related to @remote
#4. Items for managing the history of the machine
Example: time and date / counter information / Installation date
#5. Setting value for Engine
Secret
Secret information is
Secret information
exported if you select
#1. Data that absolutely cannot be exported.
"Secret" setting.
(Exported data becomes turned letter)

Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN code
#2. Confidential information for the customer
Example: User name / User ID / Department code / Mail address / Phone
number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: IP address / MAC address / Network parameter
D129/D130
3-288
SM Appendix
Rev. 11/15/2012
6.
Select an Encryption Setting.
Item
Specification
Encryption Select whether perform
Note
If the encryption function is used, setting of encryption key is required by
the encryption function or direct input.

not when exporting.
- Type the arbitrary password using soft keyboard
If you push "Encryption"
- Can enter up to 32 characters
key, you can export secret
7.
Press Execute key.
8.
Press [OK].
Appendix:
Service
Program
Mode Tables
information.
If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
3.13.7 IMPORTING DEVICE INFORMATION

Import device information saved on an SD card.
1.
Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2.
Enter SP mode.
3.
Press SP5-749-101
4.
Select a unique setting.
SM Appendix
3-289
D129/D130
5.
Rev. 11/15/2012
Press Encryption key, if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
Item
Specification
Note
Unique
If you want to apply the unique
Refer to the above information
information to the target machine,

select the "Unique" key.
Encryption If the encrypted fail is selected as
import file, this setting is required.
6.
Press Execute key.
7.
Press [OK].
If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
D129/D130
3-290
SM Appendix
SR790(B408)/SR3090(D588)
1000-SHEET FINISHER
REVISION HISTORY
Page
Date
Added/Updated/New
None
1000-SHEET FINISHER B408/D588

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................1
1.1 MAIN PCB .................................................................................................... 1
1.2 STAPLER UNIT ............................................................................................ 2
1.3 MOTORS ...................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................................... 3
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .............................................................................. 3
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ........................... 4
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................................... 4
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS ........................................................................... 5
1.4.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................... 5
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR .................................................................. 6
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR..................................................... 6
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR .............................................................. 7
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ............................................................... 7
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8
2.1 JAM DETECTION......................................................................................... 8
3. SERVICE TABLES..........................................................................9
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................................. 9
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .........................................................10

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 10

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 11
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................................ 13
DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
Upper Tray Mode ................................................................................... 16
Sort/Stack Mode .................................................................................... 16
Staple Mode ........................................................................................... 16
4.6 UPPER TRAY............................................................................................. 17
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ................................................ 18
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ..................................................................... 19
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 20
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE ................................................................................. 21
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM .......................................................................... 22
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ........................................... 23
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ........................................................... 24
SM
B408/D588
MAIN PCB

CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning
any of the procedures in this section.
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: E-ring
: Clip ring
1.1 MAIN PCB
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
[A]
[B]
B408R109.WMF
B408R110.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Main PCB [B] ( x 4, All )
SM
B408/D588
STAPLER UNIT
1.2 STAPLER UNIT

[B]
1. Side cover [A] ( x 2)

[C]
2. Open exit guide plate [B]

3. Upper side cover [C] ( x 2)
[A]
B408R102.WMF
[D]
4. Front cover support plate [D] ( x 1)
[E]
5. Front cover [E]
[F]
6. Front inner cover [F] ( x 2)
B408R113.WMF
7. Harness [G]
8. Unhook the spring [H]
9. Turn the stapler unit [I] and take it
out.
[J]
10. Bracket [J] ( x 2)

[H]
[G]
[I]
B408R114.WMF
B408/D588
SM
MOTORS
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
B408R123.WMF
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR

1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R124.WMF
SM
B408/D588
MOTORS
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR

1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4, x 2)
3. Upper transport motor [B] ( x 4)
[A]
4. Exit motor [C] ( x 4)
[B]
[C]
B408R112.WMF
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Main PCB (1.1)
2. Lower transport motor [A] ( x 2, x
1)
[A]
B408R111.WMF
B408/D588
SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS

[A]
1.4.1 PREPARATION
1. Front cover and inner cover (1.2)
[B]
2. Upper side cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1)
[C]
B408R116.WMF
[E]
5. Loosen the 2 screws [D].
[D]
6. Lower the lower tray guide plate [E].
B408R117.WMF
7. Guide plate [F] ( x 4)
[F]
B408R118.WMF
SM
B408/D588
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2)
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR

1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] ( x
1)
[A]
2. Stack height sensor [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B408R121.WMF
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR

1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
B408R120.WMF
[A]
B408/D588
SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1. Lower tray lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
B408R119.WMF
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR

1. Stack feed-out motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R122.WMF
SM
B408/D588
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Shift
Staple
Content
Entrance sensor:
On check
Entrance sensor:
Off check
Lower tray exit sensor:
On check
Tray exit sensor:

Off check
Stapler tray entrance sensor:
On check
Stapler tray entrance sensor:

Off check

On check

Off check
B408/D588
Jam
The entrance sensor does not turn on

within the normal time after the main
machine exit sensor turns on
The entrance sensor does not turn off
within the normal time after it turns on.
The lower tray exit sensor does not turn
on within the normal time after the
entrance sensor turns off.
The tray exit sensor does not turn off
within the normal time after it turns on.
The stapler tray entrance sensor does
not switch on within the normal time
after the entrance sensor switched on.
The staple tray entrance sensor does
not turn off within the normal time after it
turns on.
The lower exit sensor does not turn on
after the feed-out pawl feeds out the
outputs.
The lower exit sensor turns on when the
feed-out pawl returns to its home
position after feeding out the outputs.
SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in
the table below.
SW100
1
0
1
2
0
0
Description
Normal operation mode (Default)
Packing mode.
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to
zero. The lower tray moves to the lowest position. Then turn off the main switch.
After unpacking the machine, do the following: After turning the main switch back
on, the lower tray returns to home position automatically.
SM
B408/D588
GENERAL LAYOUT
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
2
1
13
4
5
6
12
11
10
8
9
B408D101.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Upper Tray
Upper Tray Exit Roller
Entrance Roller
Tray Junction Gate
Upper Transport Roller
Stapler Junction Gate
Lower Transport Rollers
B408/D588
8. Stapler
9. Stack Feed-out Belt
10. Positioning Roller
11. Shift Roller
12. Lower Tray
13. Lower Tray Exit Roller
10
SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
11
4
5
10
12
B408D102.WMF
19
13
18
14
20
21
15
16
17
B408D103.WMF
1. Upper Cover Switch

2. Paper Limit Sensor
3. Entrance Sensor
4. Exit Guide Plate Motor
5. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
6. Front Door Safety Switch
7. Stack Height Sensor
8. Lower Tray Exit Sensor
9. Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch
10. Shift HP Sensor
11. Shift Motor
SM
11
12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor

13. Positioning Roller Solenoid
14. Stapler HP Sensor
15. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
16. Stapler Tray Paper Sensor
17. Stapler Hammer Motor
18. Staple Sheet Sensor
19. Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor
20. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
21. Staple Sensor
B408/D588
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
22
32
31
30
29
28
27
23
26
25
24
B408D104.WMF
22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid

23. Lower Tray Lift Motor
24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
25. Stapler Motor
26. Jogger Fence Motor
27. Stack Feed-out Motor
28. Main Board
29. Lower Transport Motor
30. Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
31. Exit Motor
32. Upper Transport Motor
B408/D588
12
SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol
Motors
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
Name
Function
Upper
Transport
Lower
Transport
Jogger Fence
Staple Hammer
Stack Feed-out
Exit Guide Plate
Exit
Lower Tray Lift
Shift
Stapler
Drives the entrance roller and upper transport

rollers.
Drives the lower transport rollers and the
positioning roller.
Drives the jogger fences.
Drives the staple hammer.
Drives the stack feed-out belt.
Opens and closes the exit guide plate.
Drives the exit roller.
Moves the lower tray up or down.
Moves the shift roller from side to side.
Moves the stapler unit from side to side.
Entrance
Detects copy paper entering the finisher and

checks for misfeeds.
Detects when the paper stack height in the
upper tray is at its limit.
Detects when the jogger fence is at home
position.
Detects when the shift roller is at home position.
Detects when the stack feed-out belt is at home
position.
Detects when the stapler is at home position.
Detects when the exit guide plate is at home
position.
Detects copy paper entering the stapler tray and
checks for misfeeds.
Checks for misfeeds.
Detects the top of the copy paper stack.
Detects when the lower tray is at its lower limit
position.
Detects when there is copy paper in the stapler
tray.
Detects the leading edge of the staple sheet.
Detects when the staple hammer is at home
position.
Detects whether there are staples in the staple
cartridge.
Index No.
32
29
26
17
27
4
31
23
11
25
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
Paper Limit
Jogger Fence
HP
Shift HP
Stack Feed-out
Belt HP
Stapler HP
Exit Guide Plate
HP
Stapler Tray
Entrance
Lower Tray Exit
Stack Height
Lower Tray
Lower Limit
Stapler Tray
Paper
Staple Sheet
Stapler Rotation
HP
Staple
3
2
12
10
19
14
5
15
8
7
24
16
18
20
21
Solenoids
SOL1
SOL2
SM
Tray Junction
Gate
Stapler Junction
Gate
Drives the tray junction gate.

Drives the stapler junction gate.
13
22
30
B408/D588
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
Sensors
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol
SOL3
Name
Positioning
Roller
Function
Moves the positioning roller.
Lower Tray
Upper Limit
Front Door
Safety
Upper Cover
Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit

position.
Cuts the dc power when the front door is
opened.
Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is
opened.
Main
Controls the finisher and communicates with the

copier/printer.
Index No.
13
Switches
SW1
SW2
SW3
9
6
1
PCBs
PCB1
B408/D588
14
28
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT

1
B408D106.WMF
B408D105.WMF
7
8
9
B408D107.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SM
Exit Motor
Shift Motor
Exit Guide Plate Motor
6.
7.
8.
9.
15
Lower Tray Lift Motor

Stack Feed-out Motor
Jogger Motor
Stapler Motor
B408/D588
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
JUNCTION GATES
4.5 JUNCTION GATES
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B408D108.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B].
These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler
junction gate solenoid [D].
Upper Tray Mode

The tray junction gate solenoid remains off. The copies go up to the upper tray.
Sort/Stack Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid
remains off. The copies are sent to the lower tray directly.
Staple Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on.
The copies go down to the jogger unit.
B408/D588
16
SM
UPPER TRAY
4.6 UPPER TRAY
[A]
When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three
consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected.
SM
17
B408/D588
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
B408D109.WMF
LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

[G]
[B]
[F]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B408D112.WMF
The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper
stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the
stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.
When the lower tray reaches its lowest possible position, the actuator [D] turns on
the lower tray lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops.
Tray Up
When the copy paper on the tray is removed, the stack height sensor [F] turns off
and the tray lifts up. Then, the tray stops when the sensor turns on again (the tray
pushes up the feeler).
If the stack height sensor fails, the lower tray upper limit switch [G] detects the tray
and stops the motor. This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure.
Sort/Stack Mode (Tray Down)
Every five sheets of paper, the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again.
Then, it goes up until the sensor is on again.
Staple Mode (Tray Down)
After a stapled copy is fed out, the tray goes up for 220 ms and stops for 300 ms.
Then, it goes down for 1 second, waits for 500 ms, then goes up until the sensor
turns on.
B408/D588
18
SM
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM

[F]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
B408D110.WMF
In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the
sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the
shift gear disk [C]. After the trailing edge of the copy passes the upper transport
roller, the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D].
After the paper is delivered to the lower tray [E], the shift roller moves to its home
position, which is detected by the shift HP sensor [F]. Then, when the trailing edge
of the next copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts again. This
operation is done every sheet.
When the trailing edge of each page in the next set of copies passes the upper
transport roller, the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
SM
19
B408/D588
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
[E]
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B408D113.WMF
[B]
[F]
[E]
[A]
[C]
B408D114.WMF
[D]
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the jogger unit.
For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly
after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C]
pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].
For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger front fence [E] and the rear fence [F]
move to the waiting position, which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper.
When aligning the paper vertically, the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the
waiting position. After the vertical position has been aligned, the jogger fence
pushes the paper 4 mm against the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then
the jogger fence moves back to the previous position.
B408/D588
20
SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE

[B] [C]
[A]
B408D111.WMF
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the
leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from
running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A]
is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers. This operation is done for all
paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes.
The exit guide plate motor [B] and exit roller release cam [C] control the exit guide
plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit
guide plate moves up. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on
again to close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [D] turns
on, the motor stops.
SM
21
B408/D588
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
[D]
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM

[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
B408D116.WMF
The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer.

The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the
stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at
the stapling position.
If there is no staple cartridge in the stapler unit or no staples in the staple cartridge,
staple end is indicated on the operation panel. The stapler sensor [C] detects this.
The stapler rotation HP sensor [D] checks whether the staple hammer mechanism
returns to home position after each stack has been stapled.
When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor, the copier detects a
staple jam. When a staple jam has occurred, the jammed staple is inside the staple
cartridge [E]. Therefore, the jammed staple can be removed easily after pulling out
the staple cartridge.
B408/D588
22
SM
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling
position first, then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next copy
set, it staples in the reverse order (at the rear side first, then at the front side).
After the job is completed, the stapler moves back to its home position. The stapler
HP sensor [B] detects this.
SM
23
B408/D588
1000-Sheet
Finisher
SR790/SR3090
B408/D588
B408D117.WMF
PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B408D118.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge
reaches this roller.
Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor, the stackfeed-out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to
the lower tray. Then, the stack-feed-out motor turns on again until the pawl [B]
actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [D].
B408/D588
24
SM
B802/D630
ARDF DF3010/DF3070
P ag e
Dat e
Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New

None
ARDF DF3010/DF3070 (B802/D630)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................... 1
1.1 COVERS AND TRAY .....................................................................................1
1.1.1 FRONT AND REAR COVER ................................................................1
1.1.2 ORIGINAL TRAY ..................................................................................2
1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS .............................................................3
1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER ................................................................................3
1.2.2 FEED BELT ..........................................................................................4
1.2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER .......................................................................6
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................................7
1.3.1 DF DRIVE BOARD ...............................................................................7
1.3.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR......8
1.3.3 ORIGINAL SET, SEPARATION, SKEW CORRECTION AND
SCANNING ENTRANCE SENSOR ...............................................................9
1.3.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS ...........................................................10
1.3.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR .................................................................10
1.3.6 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR..................................................................11
1.3.7 DF POSITION SENSOR .....................................................................12
1.3.8 COVER SENSOR ...............................................................................12
1.3.9 PICK-UP ROLLER HP AND ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR .....13
1.3.10
STAMP SOLENOID .....................................................................14
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE .............................................................................16
1.4.1 ADF FEED MOTOR ............................................................................16
1.4.2 ADF INVERTER MOTOR ...................................................................17
1.4.3 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR ...............................................................17
1.4.4 ADF PICK-UP MOTOR .......................................................................18
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................ 19

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................................................19
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................19
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................20
Sensors and Drive Components ............................................................20
Electrical Component Descriptions ........................................................21
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................23
SM
B802/D630
ADF Feed Motor.....................................................................................24

ADF Transport Motor and ADF Inverter Motor .......................................24
2.2 BASIC OPERATION ....................................................................................25
2.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ............................................................25
2.2.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ..........................................................27
Document length detection.....................................................................27
Feed-in cycle ..........................................................................................27
Normal feed-in........................................................................................28
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION .............................................................28
2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION ........................................................................29
2.2.5 SLIP DETECTION ..............................................................................30
2.2.6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT ..................................................31
Single-Sided Originals ............................................................................31
Double-Sided Originals ..........................................................................31
Original Sensor ......................................................................................32
2.2.7 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION ...............................................33
3. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 34

3.1 DIP SWITCHES ...........................................................................................34
B802/D630
ii
SM
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols
Replacement Procedure Safety
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
replacement procedures in this manual.
Symbols Used in this Manual

This manual uses the following symbols.
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
: Clamp
Covers and Tray
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)

1.1 COVERS AND TRAY
1.1.1 FRONT AND REAR COVER
1.
Open the left cover [A].
2.
Front cover [B] ( x 1, hook x 2)
3.
Rear cover [C] (x 2, hook x 2)
SM
B802/D630
Covers and Tray
1.1.2 ORIGINAL TRAY

1.
Open the left cover.
2.
Rear cover ( "Front and Rear Cover")
3.
Front cover ( "Front and Rear Cover")
4.
Pivot cover [A] ( x 1)
5.
Original tray [B] (x 1, x 1, x 2)
B802/D630
SM
Document Feed Components
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS

1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER
1.
2.
Bushings [A] ( x 1 each)
3.
Pick-up roller [B] (gear x 1, one-way gear x 1)
SM
B802/D630
1.2.2 FEED BELT

1.
2.
Front feed unit cover [A]
3.
Rear feed unit cover [B] (hook x 2)
4.
Feed belt unit [C]
B802/D630
SM
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
5.
Slide the tension plate [D] (hook)
6.
Belt unit cover [E] ( x 1)
7.
Belt tension unit [F]
8.
Feed belt [G]
SM
B802/D630
1.2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER

1.
2.
Separation roller cover [A]
3.
Remove the bushing [B] ( x 1).
4.
Slide the separation roller shaft to the front side, and then remove it.
5.
Separation roller [C] ( x 1)
B802/D630
SM
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)

1.3.1 DF DRIVE BOARD
1.
Rear cover ("Front and Rear Cover")
2.
DF drive board [A] ( x 4, all s)
SM
B802/D630
1.3.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE

SENSOR
1.
2.
Remove the tray stopper [A], while pushing the hook with a screw driver.
3.
Open the original tray [B].
4.
Original tray cover [C] ( x 3)
5.
Original trailing edge sensor [D] (
6.
Original length sensors [E] (
B802/D630
x 1, hook)
x 1 each, hook)
SM
1.3.3 ORIGINAL SET, SEPARATION, SKEW CORRECTION AND

SCANNING ENTRANCE SENSOR
1.
2.
Open the inner upper cover [A] (stepped screw x 3).
3.
Original set sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)
4.
Separation sensor [C] ( x 1, hook)
5.
Skew correction sensor [D] ( x 1, hook)
6.
Scanning entrance sensor [E] ( x 1, hook)
SM
B802/D630
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
1.3.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS

1.
2.
Open the inner upper cover ( " Original Set, Separation, Skew Correction and
Registration Sensor").
3.
Original width sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, ground cable x 1).
4.
Original width sensors [B] (
x 1 each, hook)
1.3.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1.
Open the ARDF.
2.
White plate [A] (stud screw x 1)
3.
Registration sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
4.
Registration sensor [C] ( x 1)
B802/D630
10
SM
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
1.3.6 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

1.
2.
Open the feed-in guide plate [A].
3.
Guide plate [B] ( x 2, stepped screw x 1; front side)
4.
Original exit sensor [C] ( x 1, hook)
SM
11
B802/D630
1.3.7 DF POSITION SENSOR

1.
2.
ARDF drive board ( "ARDF Drive Board")
3.
DF position sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
4.
DF position sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)
1.3.8 COVER SENSOR

1.
2.
3.
Cover sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
B802/D630
12
SM
1.
2.
3.
Release the clamp [A] ( x 1), and then slide the harnesses away.
4.
Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 2)
5.
Pick-up roller HP sensor [C] (hook)
6.
Original stopper HP sensor [D] (hook)
SM
13
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
1.3.9 PICK-UP ROLLER HP AND ORIGINAL STOPPER HP

SENSOR
B802/D630
1.3.10 STAMP SOLENOID

1.
2.
Remove the platen plate [A].
3.
Stamp solenoid cover [B] ( x 1)
4.
Remove the screw [C] ( x 1).
You cannot remove the stamp solenoid at this time.
5.
6.
Disconnect the stamp solenoid harness [D].
7.
ADF feed motor ( "ADF Feed Motor")
B802/D630
14
SM
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
8.
Put the stamp solenoid harness into the cutout [E].
9.
Pull out the stamp solenoid [F]
SM
15
B802/D630
Original Feed Drive
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE

1.4.1 ADF FEED MOTOR
1.
2.
Harness guide [A] ( x 2, all s, all s)
3.
Remove the spring [B].
4.
Stay bracket [C] (stepped screw x 1)
5.
Slide the feed motor gear [D] to the left side (seen from the front of the machine), and
then remove the timing belt [E].
6.
ADF feed motor bracket [F] ( x 3)
7.
ADF feed motor [G] ( x 1)
B802/D630
16
SM
Original Feed Drive
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
1.4.2 ADF INVERTER MOTOR

1.
ADF feed motor ( " ADF Feed Motor")
2.
ADF inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt)
3.
ADF inverter motor [B] ( x 4)
1.4.3 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR

1.
2.
Ground cable [A] ( x 1)
3.
ADF transport motor bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
4.
ADF transport motor [C] ( x 2)
SM
17
B802/D630
Original Feed Drive
1.4.4 ADF PICK-UP MOTOR

1.
2.
Harness guide [A] ( x 2, all s, all s)
3.
Stay bracket [B] (stepped screw x 1)
4.
Release 6 clamps on the ADF pick-up motor bracket [C] ( x 6).
5.
ADF pick-up motor bracket [D] ( x 3,
6.
ADF pick-up motor [E] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt)
B802/D630
x 1)
18
SM
Component Layout
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Original Width Sensor

2. Skew Correction Roller
3. Skew Correction Sensor
4. Separation Sensor
5. Feed Belt
6. Separation Roller
7. Original Set Sensor
8. Pick-up Roller
9. Original Length Sensor 1
SM

12. Inverter Roller
13. Junction Gate
14. Exit Roller
15. Original Exit Sensor
16. Transport Roller
17. Registration Sensor
18. Registration Roller
19. Scanning Entrance Sensor
19
B802/D630
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

Sensors and Drive Components
1. Original Width Sensors

2. Scanning Entrance Sensor
3. Skew Correction Sensor
4. ADF Transport Motor
5. Left Cover Sensor
6. Pick-up Motor
7. Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
8. Original Stopper HP Sensor
9. ADF Inverter Motor
10. ADF Feed Motor
B802/D630

14. DF Drive Board
15. Original Trailing Edge Sensor
16. Original Set Sensor
17. Stamp Solenoid
18. Separation Sensor
19. Original Exit Sensor
20. Junction Gate Solenoid
21. Registration Sensor
20
SM
Electrical Component Descriptions
Symbol
Name
Function
Index No.
Motors
Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and
ADF Feed
ADF Transport
Drives the transport and exit rollers
ADF Inverter
Drives the Inverter rollers
Pick-up Motor
Moves the pick-up roller up and down.
DF Position
Detects whether the DF is lifted or not.
Skew Correction
Registration
Cover Sensor
reverse table rollers.
10
Sensors
SM
Original Width
Sensor - S
Original Width
Sensor - M
Original Width
Sensor - L
Original Width
Sensor - LL
Original Length S
Detects the leading edge of the original to turn

off the DF feed and transport motors.
Detects the original exposure timing, and
checks for original misfeeds.
Detects whether the feed-in cover is opened
or not.
21
Detects the original width - S.
Detects the original width - M.
Detects the original width - L.
Detects the original width - LL.
Detects the original length - S.
11
21
B802/D630
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
Component Layout
Component Layout
Original Length -
Detects the original length - M.
12
Original Length - L Detects the original length - L.
13
Original Set
16
Detects if an original is on the feed table.

Detects the leading edge of the original to turn
on the junction gate solenoid and checks for
original misfeeds.
Original Exit
Detects the trailing edge of the original to turn

off the transport and feed motor and junction
19
gate solenoid.
In single-sided mode, used to detect original
misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the last original to
-
Original Trailing
stop copy paper feed and to turn off the
Edge Sensor
transport motor, and checks for original
15
misfeeds.
The machine uses this sensor to check if the
-
Separation
original has slipped during feed-in, to make
Sensor
sure that original feed starts at the correct
18
time.
Solenoids
-
Stamp
Energizes the stamper to mark the original.
17
Junction Gate
Opens and closes the junction gate.
20
PCBs
Interfaces the sensor signals with the copier,
-
DF Drive
and transfers the magnetic clutch, solenoid
14
and motor drive signals from the copier.
B802/D630
22
SM
Component Layout
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Registration Roller
2. Transport Roller
3. Skew Correction Roller
5. Feed Belt
6. ADF Transport Motor
7. Pick-up Roller
8. Exit Roller
9. ADF Inverter Motor
10. ADF Feed Motor
11. Inverter Roller
SM
23
B802/D630
Component Layout
ADF Feed Motor
ADF Feed Motor [A] drives the pick-up [B], feed belt [C], separation [D] and skew correction
rollers [E].
ADF Transport Motor and ADF Inverter Motor
ADF Transport Motor [A] drives the registration roller [B], transport roller [C] and exit roller [D].
ADF Inverter Motor [E] drives the Inverter Roller [F].
B802/D630
24
SM
Basic Operation
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
2.2 BASIC OPERATION

2.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
The original size detection mechanism consists of the five original width sensors ([A]: Width
Sensor SS, [B]: Width Sensor S, [C] Width Sensor M, [D]: Width Sensor L, [E]: Width Sensor LL)
and three original length sensors ([F]: Length Sensor S, [G]: Length Sensor M, [H]: Length Sensor
L). Based on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensors, the machine can
detect the size of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table below.
Width Sensor
Length Sensor
Area
Size
SS
LL
LT
A/B
A3/SEF (297 x 420)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
B4/SEF (257 x 364)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
A4/SEF (210 x 297)
ON
ON
ON
ON
A4/LEF (297 x 210)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
B5/SEF (182 x 257)
ON
ON
B5/LEF (257 x 182)
ON
ON
ON
A5/SEF (148 x 210)
ON
SM
25
B802/D630
Basic Operation
A5/LEF (210 x 148)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
O1
O5
11" x 15"/SEF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
10" x 14"/SEF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8.5" x 14"/SEF (LG)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
O2
8.5" x 13"/SEF (F4)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8.25" x 13"/SEF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8" x 13"/SEF (F)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8.5" x 11"/SEF (LT)
ON
ON
ON
O3
O6
8.5" x 11"/LEF (LT)
ON
ON
ON
On
O4
O7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
267 mm x 390 mm
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
195 mm x 267 mm
ON
ON
ON
267 mm x 195 mm
ON
ON
ON
ON
11" x 17"/SEF
(DLT)
7.25" x 10.5"/SEF
(US EXE)
10.5" x 7.25"/SEF
(US EXE)
10" x 8"/SEF
5.5" x 8.5"/SEF
(HLT)
5.5" x 8.5"/LEF
(HLT)
Symbols
O: Yes (Default),
: Yes (Can select this with SP mode), ON: Paper present, LT: North America,
A/B: Europe, Asia
B802/D630
26
SM
For "O/ " mark, which has superscripted number, it is possible to change the original
detection size with SP6-016. For example, instead of LT (O3), the machine can be set up
to detect 10 x 8 (
).
The F size can be selected with SP5-126. The default is 8.5" x 13"
The machine cannot detect more than one size of original in the same job.
2.2.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size mode.
Because this ARDF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original document width
detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but the document length detection
method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed is slightly slower.
Document length detection

From when the skew correction sensor switches on until it switches off, the CPU counts the
transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines the length of the original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the image cannot
be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the originals length has been
accurately detected. The length must be determined before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
The originals follow this path:

Scanning glass
Inverter table
1.
Length detection
2.
Inverter table
Scanning glass
3.
Inverter table
Scanning glass (image scanned)
SM
Inverter table (restores the original order)
27
Exit tray
B802/D630
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
Basic Operation
Basic Operation
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the reduction/enlargement ratio has been
determined, the originals are scanned normally. In order to store the scanned images, a large
area of memory (the detected original width x 432 mm length) is prepared. Next, only the portion
of the image up to the detected original length is read from memory and printed.
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator and the original set
sensor is activated.
After pressing the start button, the pick-up motor is activated and the original feed unit [A] moves
down. At the same time, the ADF feed motor is activated and the pick-up roller [B] feeds original to
the feed belt [C].
After being fed from feed belt [C], the topmost sheet is separated from the stack by the separation
roller [D] and sent to the skew correction roller.
The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [C] and separation roller
[D].
B802/D630
28
SM
Basic Operation
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION
When an original is fed into the feeder, the feed motor [A] rotates forwards. At this time, the feed
belt turns but the skew correction roller [B] does not, because these rollers have a one-way gear.
(If the ADF feed motor rotates forward, the feed belt is moved. If the ADF feed motor rotates in
reverse, the skew correction roller is moved.) As a result, when the leading edge of the paper
gets to the skew correction roller, skew in the original is removed.
A short time after the leading edge of the original turns on the skew correction sensor [C], the feed
motor [A] turns off and rotates in reverse. At this time, the skew correction roller [B] and the feed
belt [D] both turn, and original feed continues.
The registration roller also has the same skew correction mechanism, but only for small size
originals (6, A5 or HLT). This function can be effective for all size paper with SP6-020-001.
SM
29
B802/D630
Basic Operation
2.2.5 SLIP DETECTION
[A]: Separation sensor

[B]: Skew correction sensor
These two sensors are used to measure the amount of slippage and to correct for this.
The machine measures the time it takes for the original to get to the separation sensor [A] after
the [Start] key is pressed.
If the original arrives at the correct time, it feeds normally.
If the original arrives late, the machine enters the slip mode.
In the slip mode, the machine measures the time for the leading edge of the original to move from
the separation sensor to the skew correction sensor [B].
The machine uses this time to adjust the length of time that the entrance roller stays off to correct
skew. This stops feed for enough time for the original to be in the correct position for feeding.
B802/D630
30
SM
Basic Operation
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
2.2.6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

Single-Sided Originals
The feed motor feeds the separated original to the skew correction roller [A] at maximum speed.
After skew correction, the feed and transport motors feed the original through the scanning area at
a lower speed (the scanning area contains the original exposure guide [B] and DF exposure glass
[C]). After scanning, the original is fed out by the transport roller [D] and exit roller [E].
Double-Sided Originals
After skew correction, the ADF feed and transport motors drive the skew correction roller [A],
registration roller [B], transport roller [C] and the exit roller [D]. The front side of the original is then
scanned.
When the original exit sensor [E] detects the leading edge of the original, the junction gate
solenoid is activated and the junction gate [F] opens. The original is then transported towards the
inverter table.
Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor, the junction gate solenoid
switches off and the junction gate [F] is closed. When the original has been fed onto the inverter
table, the ADF inverter motor switches on. The original is then fed by the inverter roller [G], and
then by the skew correction roller [A] and registration roller [B] to the scanning area (where the
reverse side will be scanned).
SM
31
B802/D630
Basic Operation
The original is then sent to the inverter table [H] again to be turned over. This is done so that the
duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in the exit tray [I] in the correct order.
Original Sensor
During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the skew correction roller in advance (while the
original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The original set sensor monitors the
stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in.
The main CPU then stops the copier from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.
B802/D630
32
SM
Basic Operation
Jam Mode
ARDF
DF3010/
DF3070
(B802/D630)
2.2.7 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION
Detection Timing
When turning on the machine, the skew correction sensor, separation
sensor, registration sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
Initial
When the cover is closed or DF is down, the skew correction sensor,

separation sensor, registration sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
When the cover is opened or DF is lifted up, the skew correction sensor,
separation sensor, registration sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
The skew correction sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed
by the maximum length of the original + 150 mm after the skew
correction sensor turned on.
Sensor stays
on too long
The registration sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by
its length x 1.5 after the registration sensor turned on.
The exit sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by its
length x 1.5 after the exit sensor turned on.
The separation sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by
transport path length x 1.5.
The skew correction sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed
Sensor does
by transport path length x 1.5.
not come on
The registration sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by
transport path length x 1.5 after the skew correction sensor turned on.
The exit sensor does not turn on even the original was fed by transport
path length x 1.5 after the skew correction sensor turned on.
SM
33
B802/D630
Dip Switches
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
DIP-SW
Function
1
Normal operating mode (Default)
Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 100% speed
Free run: With original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed
Free run: No original: One-sided mode: 100% speed
Free run: No original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed
Transport Motor On
Feed Motor On
Transport Motor On with random mode
Feed Motor On with random mode
B802/D630
34
SM
D386/D634
BRIDGE UNIT BU3030/BU3060
P ag e
Dat e

None
BRIDGE UNIT BU3030/BU3060

(D386/D634)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD................................................................1
1.2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR......................................................................2
1.3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR ....................................................................................3
1.4 RELAY SENSOR ...........................................................................................4
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................ 5
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................................5
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT.............................................................................................6
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .........................................................7
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ...............................................8
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM ...................................................................9
SM
D386/D634
READ THIS FIRST

Safety and Symbols
When taking apart the bridge unit, first take the unit out of the copier.
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
Bridge Unit Control Board

1.1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD
Bridge unit ( "Installation Procedure" in the base copier manual)
2.
Rear cover [A] ( x 2)
3.
Bridge unit control board [B] ( x 3, x 4)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
(D386/D634)
1.
SM
D386/D634
Bridge Unit Drive Motor
1.2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR
1.
2.
Rear cover ( "Bridge Unit Control Board")
3.
Bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2)
4.
Bridge unit drive motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
D386/D634
SM
Tray Exit Sensor
1.3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR
2.
Rear cover ( "Bridge Unit Control Board")
3.
Paper tray [A]
4.
Exit guide [B] ( x 1)
5.
Tray exit sensor [C] ( x 1)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
(D386/D634)
1.
SM
D386/D634
Relay Sensor
1.4 RELAY SENSOR
1.
2.
Paper tray [A]
3.
Relay sensor [B] ( x 1)
D386/D634
SM
Mechanical Component Layout
2. DETAILS
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
5. Relay Sensor
2. Tray Exit Sensor
6. 2nd Transport Roller
3. Junction Gate
7. Left Exit Roller
4. 1st Transport Roller
8. Paper Tray
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
(D386/D634)
1. Upper Exit Roller
SM
D386/D634
Drive Layout
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
1.
Left Exit Roller
2.
2nd Transport Roller
3.
1st Transport Roller
4.
Upper Exit Roller
5.
D386/D634
SM
Electrical Component Layout
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
Left Guide Switch
2.
Right Guide Switch
3.
Junction Gate Solenoid
4.
Tray Exit Sensor
5.
Bridge Unit Control Board
6.
7.
Relay Sensor
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
(D386/D634)
1.
SM
D386/D634
Electrical Component Description
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Symbol
Name
Function
Index No.
Motors
M1
Drive Motor
Drives the bridge unit.
S1
Tray Exit
S2
Relay
SW2
Right Guide
Detects when the right guide is opened.
SW3
Left Guide
Detects when the left guide is opened.
Sensors
Switches
Solenoids
Moves the junction gate to direct the paper
SOL1
Junction Gate
to the upper tray (on top of the bridge unit) or
to the finisher.
PCBs
PCB1
D386/D634
Bridge Unit
Control Board
Controls the bridge unit.
SM
Junction Gate Mechanism
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
The junction gate [A] directs any paper reaching the bridge unit to either the upper tray (on top of
the bridge unit) or to the finisher, depending on which has been selected.
If the junction gate solenoid has been activated, the junction gate [A] points downward and directs
the paper to the upper tray [B] (dotted line path in illustration). When the solenoid is off, the
junction gate points upward and the paper is fed out to the finisher [C] by the transport and left exit
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
(D386/D634)
rollers (solid line).
SM
D386/D634
PB3110(D537)/PB3130(D580)
PAPER FEED UNIT
P ag e
Dat e

None
PAPER FEED UNIT (D537/D580)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER ....................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 REAR COVER ...................................................................................... 1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 2
1.2.1 LIFT MOTORS...................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 UPPER AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES ............................... 3
1.2.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR ......................................................................... 4
1.2.4 MAIN BOARD ....................................................................................... 4
1.3 FEED ............................................................................................................. 5
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT.............................................................................. 5
1.3.2 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS .................... 6
1.3.3 LIFT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS ....................................... 7
SM
D537/D580
Exterior Cover

1.1 EXTERIOR COVER
1.
Securing brackets [A] (
2.
Rear cover [B] (
SM
Paper Feed
Unit PB3110/
PB3130
D537/D580
1.1.1 REAR COVER
x 1 each)
x 2)
D537/D580

1.2.1 LIFT MOTORS
1.
Rear cover (
2.
Lift motors [A][B] (
D537/D580
"Rear Cover")
x 2,
x 1 each)
SM
Paper Feed
Unit PB3110/
PB3130
D537/D580
1.2.2 UPPER AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES
1.
Rear cover (
2.
Upper paper feed gear unit [A] (
3.
Upper paper feed clutch bracket [B] (
4.
Upper paper feed clutch [C]
5.
Lower paper feed clutch bracket [D] (
6.
Lower paper feed clutch [E] (
SM
"Rear Cover")
x 3,
x 1)
x 1,
x 2, bushing x 1)
x 1, bushing x 1,
x 2)
x 1)
D537/D580
"Rear Cover")
1.
Rear cover (
2.
Paper feed motor [A] (
x 1,
x 2)
When installing the paper feed motor, make sure that the gear of the paper feed
motor holds the timing belt [B].
1.2.4 MAIN BOARD
1.
Rear cover (
2.
Main board [A] (All
D537/D580
"Rear Cover")
s,
x 2, snap pin x 2)
SM
Feed
1.3 FEED
Paper Feed
Unit PB3110/
PB3130
D537/D580
1.
Right cover [A] (
x 2)
2.
Vertical transport guide [B] of the paper feed unit
3.
Pull the tray 3 (or 4).
4.
Paper guide [C]
5.
Paper feed unit [D] (
x 2,
x 1,
x 2)
When replacing the paper feed unit of tray 4, do the same.
SM
D537/D580
Feed
1.3.2 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1.
Paper feed unit (
"Paper Feed Unit)
2.
Roller holder [A] (
x 1)
3.
Pick-up roller [B]
4.
Paper feed roller [C]
5.
Separation roller [D] (
D537/D580
x 1)
SM
Feed
Paper Feed
Unit PB3110/
PB3130
D537/D580
1.3.3 LIFT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS
1.
Paper feed unit (
2.
Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] (
3.
Vertical transport sensor [B] (
4.
Paper feed sensor bracket [C] (
5.
Paper feed sensor [D] (
6.
Paper end sensor filler [E]
7.
Paper end sensor [F] (
8.
Lift sensor [G] (
SM
"Paper Feed Unit")

x 1)
x 1)
x 1)
x 1)
x 1)
x 1)
D537/D580
PB3110(D538)/PB3140(D581)
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
P ag e
Dat e

None
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (D538/D581)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER ....................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAY ...................................................................... 1
1.1.2 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE ............................................................... 2
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 3
1.2.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ON PAPER STORAGE SIDE ................. 3
1.2.2 END FENCE HP SENSOR/PAPER END SENSOR 2 .......................... 3
1.2.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ............................................................................. 4
1.2.4 TRAY MOTOR ...................................................................................... 5
1.2.5 MAIN BOARD ....................................................................................... 5
1.2.6 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH ........................................................... 6
1.3 FEED ............................................................................................................. 7
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT.............................................................................. 7
1.3.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ................................. 8
1.3.3 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS ............... 9
SM
D538/D581
Exterior Cover

1.1 EXTERIOR COVER
1.
Large
Capacity Tray
PB3110/
PB3140
D538/D581
1.1.1 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAY
Pull the LCT drawer.
If the right tray comes up with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
x 2)
2.
Left tray [A] (
3.
Remove the right tray [B] pressing down the stopper [C].
When reinstalling the tray, set the tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray
in, making sure to keep the tray level.
SM
D538/D581
Exterior Cover
1.1.2 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE
x 5).
1.
Remove the fence screws (
2.
Change the position of the fences.
Before fastening the screws, set paper in the tray.
D538/D581
SM
Large
Capacity Tray
PB3110/
PB3140
D538/D581
1.2.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ON PAPER STORAGE SIDE
"Left and Right Tray")
1.
Tray (
2.
Rear fence [A] (
3.
Rear fence bracket [B] (
4.
Paper height sensors [C] (
x 1)
x 2)
x 1 each)
1.2.2 END FENCE HP SENSOR/PAPER END SENSOR 2
1.
Bottom cover [D] (
2.
End fence HP sensor [E] (
3.
Paper end sensor 2 (paper storage side) [F] (
SM
x 1)
x 1)
x 1)
D538/D581
1.
Securing brackets [A] (
2.
Rear cover [B] (
3.
Tray lift motor [C] (
D538/D581
x 1 each)
x 2)
x 1,
x 3)
SM
1.
Rear cover (
2.
Tray motor [A] (
Large
Capacity Tray
PB3110/
PB3140
D538/D581
1.2.4 TRAY MOTOR
"Tray Lift Motor")

x 1,
x 2)
When installing the tray motor, make sure that the gear of the tray motor holds the
timing belt [B].
1.2.5 MAIN BOARD
1.
Rear cover (
2.
Main board [A] (All
SM
"Tray Lift Motor" )

s,
x 2, snap x 2)
D538/D581
1.2.6 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
1.
Rear cover (
2.
Stack transport clutch [A] (
D538/D581
"Tray Lift Motor")

x 1,
x 1)
SM
Feed
1.3 FEED
Large
Capacity Tray
PB3110/
PB3140
D538/D581
1.
Right cover [A]
2.
Open the vertical guide plate [B]
3.
Guide plate [C]
4.
Pull the LCT drawer [D].
5.
Paper feed unit [E] (
SM
x2
x 1)
D538/D581
Feed
1.3.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1.
Paper feed unit (
2.
Separation roller [A] (
3.
Roller holder [B] (
4.
Feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D]
D538/D581
"Paper Feed Unit")

x 1)
x 1)
SM
Feed
Large
Capacity Tray
PB3110/
PB3140
D538/D581
1.3.3 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS
"Paper Feed Unit")
1.
Paper feed unit (
2.
Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] (
3.
Relay sensor [B]
4.
Paper feed sensor bracket [C]
5.
Paper feed sensor [D]
6.
Paper end feeler [E]
7.
Paper end sensor holder [F] (hook x 3)
8.
Paper end sensor [G] (
9.
Lift sensor (
SM
x 1,
x 1)
x 1, hook x 3)
x 1, hook x 3)
D538/D581
D542/D635
SIDE TRAY TYPE C5501/C5502
P ag e
Dat e

None
SIDE TRAY TYPE C5501/C5502

(D542/D635)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 TRAYS AND COVERS ..................................................................................1
1.1.1 SUB AND MAIN OUTPUT TRAYS .......................................................1
1.1.2 TRAY LEFT FRONT AND REAR COVERS..........................................2
1.2.1 SIDE TRAY CONTROL BOARD ...........................................................3
1.2.2 SIDE TRAY DRIVE MOTOR.................................................................4
1.2.3 SIDE TRAY RELAY SENSOR ..............................................................5
1.2.4 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR ..................................................................6
SM
D542/D635
Trays and Covers

1.1 TRAYS AND COVERS
1.1.1 SUB AND MAIN OUTPUT TRAYS
1.
Sub output tray [A]
2.
Release the rear tab of the sub output tray.
Main output tray [B]

Release the rear tab of the sub output tray.
Side Tray
Type
C5501/C5502
(D542/D635)
SM
D542/D635
Trays and Covers
1.1.2 TRAY LEFT FRONT AND REAR COVERS

1.
Sub and main output trays (
2.
Tray left front cover [A]
3.
Sub and Main Output Trays)
Release the hooks of the tray left front cover.
Tray left rear cover [B]
Release the hooks of the tray left rear cover.
D542/D635
SM

1.2.1 SIDE TRAY CONTROL BOARD
1.
2.
Tray left front and rear covers (
3.
Side tray (
4.
Rear cover [A] (
5.
Side tray control board [A] (

Tray Left Front and Rear Covers)
Installation Procedure in the base copier manual)
x 2)
x 3)
Side Tray
Type
C5501/C5502
(D542/D635)
x 3,
SM
D542/D635
1.2.2 SIDE TRAY DRIVE MOTOR

1.
2.
3.
Side tray (
4.
Rear cover (
Side Tray Control Board)
5.
Bracket [A] (
x 3,
6.
Side tray drive motor [A] (
D542/D635

x 3,
x 1, timing belt x 1)
x 4,
x 1)
SM
1.2.3 SIDE TRAY RELAY SENSOR

1.
2.
3.
Side tray (
4.
Open the paper tray [A].
5.
Remove the ground cable [B] (
6.
Remove the paper tray [A].
7.
Turn over the side tray.
8.
Side tray relay sensor [A] (
9.
Turn over the side tray, and then remove the side tray relay sensor.
x 1).
Side Tray
Type
C5501/C5502
(D542/D635)
x 1, hooks)
SM
D542/D635
1.2.4 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR

1.
2.
3.
Side tray (
4.
Paper tray (
5.
Exit guide [A] (
6.
Side tray exit sensor [A] (
D542/D635


Side Tray Relay Sensor)
x 1)
x 1,
x 1, hooks)
SM
D629
FAX OPTION TYPE 5002
P a ge
Date
34
11/15/2012
Added step 6 to Installation for Fax Option (D629)
FAX OPTION TYPE 5002 (D629)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 1
1.1 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION .......................................................................1
1.1.1 COMPONENT CHECK .........................................................................1
1.1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................2
1.2 G3 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION .....................................................5
1.2.1 COMPONENT CHECK .........................................................................5
1.2.2 INSTALLATION: ONE G3 BOARD .......................................................6
1.2.3 INSTALLATION: TWO G3 BOARDS ....................................................8
1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS ...................................................................................10
1.3.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578) ......................................................................10
1.3.2 HANDSET (D645) ...............................................................................11
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 13

2.1 FCU .............................................................................................................13
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE ...........................................13
3. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 19
3.1 ERROR CODES ..........................................................................................19
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................41
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................44
3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION ....................................................................44
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name .................................................44
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway .............................................................46
Cannot send by Alias Fax number. ........................................................47
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION ..........................................................................49
Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name. ...........................................49
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway. .........................................................50
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number. ....................................................51
4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 53

4.1 CAUTIONS ..................................................................................................53
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ...................................................................54
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES) ................................................................54
SM
D629
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA) .......................................................................55

4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS) .......................................................57
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS) .............................................................59
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR) ....................................................................60
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ........................................................................61
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS) ..............................................................................64
4.3 BIT SWITCHES - 1 ......................................................................................66
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES .........................................................................66
4.4 BIT SWITCHES - 2 ......................................................................................83
4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES ...............................................................................83
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES ........................................................................91
4.5 BIT SWITCHES - 3 ......................................................................................99
4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES .........................................................99
4.6 BIT SWITCHES - 4 ....................................................................................110
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................110
4.7 BIT SWITCHES - 5 ....................................................................................121
4.7.1 G3-2 AND G3-3 SWITCHES ............................................................121
4.7.2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ..............................................................130
4.7.3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES ..........................................................130
4.8 BIT SWITCHES - 6 ....................................................................................131
4.8.1 IP FAX SWITCHES...........................................................................131
4.9 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................140
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ...................................155
4.10.1
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ...............................................155
4.10.2
PARAMETERS ..........................................................................156
Fax Parameters ....................................................................................156
E-mail Parameters ...............................................................................160
4.11 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES .............................................................164
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ..................................... 175

5.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................175
5.2 BOARDS ....................................................................................................176
5.2.1 FCU ..................................................................................................176
5.2.2 SG3 BOARD .....................................................................................178
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH...................................................................................180
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION...............................................................................180
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission ..................180
Immediate Transmission ......................................................................181
JBIG Transmission ...............................................................................181
D629
ii
SM
Adjustments .........................................................................................181
5.3.2 RECEPTION .....................................................................................182
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ........................................................183
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT ....................................................................................183
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .....................................................................184
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION...............................................185
Mail Transmission ................................................................................185
Mail Reception .....................................................................................187
Handling Mail Reception Errors............................................................189
Secure Internet Reception....................................................................190
Transfer Request: Request By Mail .....................................................190
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ............................................................191
5.5 IP-FAX .......................................................................................................195
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX? ............................................................................195
5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT ...................................................................195
UDP Related Switches .........................................................................195
5.5.3 SETTINGS ........................................................................................196
6. SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... 197

6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................197
6.1.1 FCU ..................................................................................................197
6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS .........................................199
6.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................201
6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................203
6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION....................................................................204
SM
iii
D629
READ THIS FIRST

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There
may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main switch, and disconnect the power cord.
The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this
type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
Note for Australia:
Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line cord which meets
the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.
Symbols and Abbreviations

Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol
What it means
Refer to section number
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Clamp

Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds, damage to
originals, loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine. bold is added for
emphasis.
This document provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
Fax Option Installation
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION
No.
SM
Description
Q'ty
FCU
Screw: M3x6
Telephone Cable (NA only)
Data Display Decal Sheet (21 languages) (EU only)
FCC Decal (NA only)
Serial Number Decal
G3 Decal
EMC Address (EU only)
Fax Decal for Operation Panel
D629
1.1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Before installation:
If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer.
Push the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is off, turn the main switch off, and then disconnect the power cord and the network
cable.
The copier must be connected to a properly grounded socket outlet.
1.
Attach the serial number decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe.
2.
For NA models, attach the FCC decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe.
3.
D629
x 2).
SM
4.
Remove the FCU cover [A] ( x 3).
5.
Remove the jumper [A] (set to OFF) and set it to
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Rev. 11/15/2012
ON.
The machine may issue SC819, SC820

if the jumper is not set to "ON" correctly.
(Sometimes these SC codes are not
issued.)
6.
The following step is for units installed in Brazil only!
For installation in Brazil, move the jumper switch (CN613) on the FAX board so that the edge
is anchored at 1. (So that the middle pin and the 1 pin are covered.)
7.
In its default position, the switch covers the middle and 3 pin.
Install the FCU [A] ( x 4; use the three screws

which were removed in step 3).
SM
D629
Rev. 11/15/2012
8.
Reattach the controller cover [A] ( x2).
9.
Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE 1" jack.
10. Attach the Super G3 decal [A].

11. Attach the Fax decal under the function key on the operation panel.
12. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch.
After you turn the machine on, if you see a message that tells you the SRAM has
been formatted due to a problem with SRAM, turn the machine off and on again to
clear the message.
13. Enter the "User Tools" mode and set date and time.
14. Do SP3102 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit.
15. Enter the correct country code with SP1101-016 (NCU Country/Area Code Setting).
D629
SM
G3 Interface Board Installation
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
1.2 G3 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION

No.
SM
Description
Q'ty
SG3 Interface Unit
Flat Cable
Screw: M3x6
Telephone Cable (NA only)
FCC Decal (NA only)
D629
1.2.2 INSTALLATION: ONE G3 BOARD
x 2).
1.
2.
If the fax unit is already installed in the machine, remove the FCU ( x 4). If not, remove the
FCU cover ( x 3).
3.
Attach one end (short length) of the flat cable to the connector [A] of the FCU board.
4.
Attach the other end (long length) of the flat cable to the connector [B] of the CCUIF.
5.
Attach the SG3 interface unit [A] (
D629
x 3).
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
6.
Remove the knockout for LINE 2 from the controller cover.
7.
Install the FCU in the machine (for details, refer to Fax Option Installation).
8.
Reattach the controller cover (
9.
Connect the telephone cord to the LINE 2 jack.
x2).
10. Enter the service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to "1" (SP1-104-023) for
PSTN-2.
11. Turn the main switch off and on.
12. Print out the system parameter list. Then check that "G3" shows as an option.
13. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.
14. Attach the FCC decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe.
SM
D629
1.2.3 INSTALLATION: TWO G3 BOARDS
1.
Remove the SG3 board [A] from the second SG3 interface unit [B] for the two-SG3 board
installation (
x 2).
x 2).
2.
Attach the SG3 board [A] to the interface board [C] of the first SG3 interface unit (
3.
4.
If the fax unit is already installed in the machine, remove the FCU ( x 4). If not, remove the
x 2).
FCU cover ( x 3).
5.
Attach one end (short length) of the flat cable to the connector [A] of the FCU board.
6.
Attach the other end (long length) of the flat cable to the connector [B] of the CCUIF.
D629
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
x 3).
7.
Attach the SG3 interface unit [A] (
8.
Remove the knockouts for LINE 2 and LINE 3 from the controller cover.
9.
Install the FCU in the machine (for details, refer to Fax Option Installation).
10. Reattach the controller cover (
x2).
11. Connect the telephone cord to the LINE 3 jack.

12. Enter the service mode. Set bit 3 of communication switch 16 to "1" (SP1-104-023) for
PSTN-3.
13. Turn the main switch off and on.
14. Print out the system parameter list. Then check that "G3" shows as an option.
15. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-3 communications.
16. Attach the FCC decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe.
SM
D629
Fax Unit Options
1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS

1.3.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578)
1.
FCU (
2.
Install the memory option in the memory slot [A].
3.
Reaasemble the machine.
D629
p.1 "Fax Option Installation")
10
SM
Fax Unit Options
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
x 3).
1.
Remove the scanner left cover [A] (
2.
Make two holes [B] in the scanner left cover.
3.
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
1.3.2 HANDSET (D645)
Drill a hole from the outside of the cover with a screwdriver.
Attach the handset support bracket [C] inside the scanner left cover.
11
D629
Fax Unit Options
4.
Hold the handset bracket [D] and handset support bracket (set inside the scanner left cover).
5.
Secure the handset bracket [D] (
6.
Install the scanner left cover on the machine.
7.
Attach the clamp to the location [E].
8.
Set the handset on the handset bracket.
9.
Clamp the hand set cord.
x 2).
10. Connect the handset cable to the "TEL" jack at the rear of the machine.
D629
12
SM
FCU
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)

2.1 FCU
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE
When you replace the FCU board, transfer the SRAM data from the old FCU board to the new
FCU board. Do the following procedure to back up the SRAM data.
The following data can be transfered: TTI, RTI, CSI, Fax bit switch settings, RAM address
settings, NCU parameter settings
1.
Remove the controller cover [A] ( x 2).
2.
Remove the fax unit [A] ( x 4).
3.
Replace the FCU board.
SM
13
D629
FCU
4.
Move the jumper switch [A] of the new FCU board from "OFF" to "ON".
5.
Remove the speaker [A] from the fax unit ( x 2,
6.
Attach the speaker [A] to the fax unit as shown above.
D629
14
x 2,
x 1).
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
FCU
7.
Connect the speaker harness to the new FCU board [A] through the hole [B].
8.
Connect a flat flexible cable [A] to the new FCU board. This cable is shipped with the new
FCU board.
SM
The blue side [A] of the flat flexible cable must face outward as shown below.
15
D629
FCU
9.
Install the fax unit [A] in the main machine ( x 3).
10. Move the Dip Switch [A] of the old FCU board from OFF to ON.
11. Connect the flat flexible cable to the old FCU board [A].
12. Turn on the main power switch.
13. SRAM data transmission starts. When the transmission is completed, you will hear a beeper
sound.
D629
16
SM
The beeper sound is the same volume as the speaker sound.
The beeper sounds even if the sperker sound is turned off.
If the beeper does not sound, turn the main power switch on and off repeatedly and
do the transmission procedure 2 or 3 times.
If the beeper does not sound after turning the main switch on and off 3 times, you
need to input the settings stored in SRAM memory manually.
14. When Ready appears on the copy display, turn off the main power switch, and then
disconnect the flat flexible cable from the old FCU board.
15. Remove the fax unit from the main machine ( x 3).
16. Disconnect the flat flexible cable from the new FCU board.
17. Remove the speaker [A] from the fax unit (
x 1).
18. Install the speaker [A] in the fax unit as shown above ( x 2,
SM
17
x 2,
x 1).
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
FCU
FCU
19. Slide the fax unit [A] into the main machine ( x 4).
20. Reattach the controller cover ( x 2).

21. Turn on the main power switch, then do SP6-101 to print the system parameter list.
22. Check the system parameter list to make sure that the data was transferred correctly.
23. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools > System Settings > Timer
Setting > Set Date/Time.
D629
If any of the SRAM data was not transferred, input those settings manually.
18
SM
Error Codes
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the
problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display
and on the service report.
Code
0-00
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action
DIS/NSF not detected within
Check the line connection.
40 s of Start being pressed
The machine at the other end may be

incompatible.
Replace the FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad

line.
0-01
DCN received unexpectedly
The other party is out of paper or has a

jammed printer.
The other party pressed Stop during

communication.
0-03
Incompatible modem at the
The other terminal is incompatible.
other end
SM
19
D629
Error Codes
Code
0-04
Meaning
CFR or FTT not received after

modem training

Try changing the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try

sending to another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there

may be a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program
Mode
0-05
Modem training fails even G3
shifts down to 2400 bps.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable

equalizer.
Replace the FCU.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
0-06
The other terminal did not
reply to DCS

equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
The other end may be defective or

incompatible; try sending to another
machine.
Cross reference
D629
20
SM
Error Codes
0-07
Meaning
No post-message response
from the other end after a
Replace the FCU.
page was sent
The other end may have jammed or run
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
out of paper.
The other end user may have

disconnected the call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try

sending to another machine.
0-08
The other end sent RTN or
PIN after receiving a page,
Replace the FCU.
because there were too many
The other end may have jammed, or run
errors
out of paper or memory space.

equalizer settings.
The other end may have a defective

modem/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service

Program Mode
0-14
Non-standard post message
response code received
Incompatible or defective remote terminal;

try sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.

equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
Cross reference
SM
21
D629
Error Codes
Code
0-15
Meaning
The other terminal is not
The other terminal is not capable of accepting
capable of specific functions.
the following functions, or the other terminals

memory is full.
0-16
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
CFR or FTT not detected after
modem training in confidential
Replace the FCU.
or transfer mode

equalizer settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or

it may be defective; try calling another
machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may

be a line problem.
Cross reference
0-17
0-20
Communication was
If the Stop key was not pressed and this error
interrupted by pressing the
keeps occurring, replace the operation panel or
Stop key
the operation panel drive board.
Facsimile data not received
within 6 s of retraining
Replace the FCU.
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for

the first line and/or rx cable equalizer
setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
D629
22
SM
Error Codes
Meaning
0-21
EOL signal (end-of-line) from
Check the connections between the FCU
the other end not received
and line.
within 5 s of the previous EOL
Check for line noise or other line problems.
signal
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
Replace the FCU.
The remote machine may be defective or

may have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22
The signal from the other end
was interrupted for more than
Replace the FCU.
the acceptable modem carrier

drop time (default: 200 ms)
Defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem

carrier drop time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3
Switch 0A, bits 0 and 1
0-23
Too many errors during
reception
Replace the FCU.
Defective remote terminal
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx

level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting

and/or rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02,
bits 0 and 1
0-29
SM
Data block format failure in
ECM reception
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
23
D629
Error Codes
Code
0-30
Meaning
The other terminal did not
reply to NSS(A) in AI short
protocol mode
equalizer settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32
The other terminal sent a
Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained
Ask the other party to contact the
functions that the receiving
manufacturer.
machine cannot handle.

0-33
The data reception (not ECM)
is not completed within 10
The other terminal may have a defective
minutes.
0-52
0-55
0-56
Polarity changed during
modem/FCU.
communication
Retry communication.
FCU does not detect the SG3.
FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3 firmware or board defective.
The stored message data
SG3 firmware or board defective.
exceeds the capacity of the

mailbox in the SG3.
0-70
The communication mode
The other terminal did not have a
specified in CM/JM was not
compatible communication mode (e.g., the
available
other terminal was a V.34 data modem and
(V.8 calling and called
not a fax modem.)
terminal)
A polling tx file was not ready at the other

terminal when polling rx was initiated from
the calling terminal.
0-74
The calling terminal fell back
to T.30 mode, because it
D629
The calling terminal could not detect

ANSam due to noise, etc.
could not detect ANSam after
ANSam was too short to detect.
sending CI.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
24
SM
Error Codes
0-75
Meaning
The called terminal fell back to
0-76
The terminal could not detect ANSam.
T.30 mode, because it could
not detect a CM in response
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34
to ANSam (ANSam timeout).

The calling terminal fell back
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
fax.
to T.30 mode, because it
The called terminal could not detect a CM

due to noise, etc.
could not detect a JM in
response to CM
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
0-77
The called terminal fell back to
The calling terminal could not detect a JM
T.30 mode, because it could
due to noise, etc.
not detect a CJ in response to
A network that has narrow bandwidth
JM
cannot pass JM to the other end.
(JM timeout).
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34

fax.
0-79
The called terminal detected
CI while waiting for a V.21
If this error occurs, the called terminal falls
signal.
0-80
0-81
The line was disconnected
these phases. Serious noise, narrow
2 line probing.
bandwidth, or low signal level can cause

3 equalizer training.
these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting
terminal:
Try making a call at a later time.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem using

dedicated tx parameters.
due to a timeout in the V.34
SM
The guard timer expired while starting
due to a timeout in V.34 phase
due to a timeout in V.34 phase
0-82
back to T.30 mode.
phase 4 control channel
Try increasing the tx level.
start-up.
Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
25
D629
Error Codes
Code
0-83
Meaning
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
due to a timeout in the V.34
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
control channel restart
Try increasing the tx level.
sequence.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the

same error is frequent when receiving from
multiple senders.
0-84
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in
Turn off the main power switch, then turn it

back on.
V.34 phase 4 control

channel start-up.
If the same error is frequent, replace the

FCU.
0-85
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in
Turn off the main power switch, then turn it

back on.
V.34 control channel restart.
If the same error is frequent, replace the

FCU.
0-86
The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal
Ask the other party to contact the
requested a data rate using
manufacturer.
MPh that was not available in

the currently selected symbol
rate.
0-87
The control channel started
The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful primary
channel because data reception in the
channel.
primary channel was not successful.
This does not result in an error

communication.
0-88
Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was
Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
D629
26
SM
Error Codes
2-11
Meaning
Only one V.21 connection flag
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
Replace the FCU.
was received
2-12
Modem clock irregularity
Replace the FCU.
2-13
Modem initialization error
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.
2-22
2-23
Counter overflow error of
If error occurs frequently, change the settings
JBIG chip
for resolution, paper size, compression type.
JBIG compression or
reconstruction error
2-24
JBIG ASIC error
2-25
JBIG data reconstruction error

(BIH error)
2-26

JBIG data error
Check the senders JBIG function.
Update the FCU ROM.
(Float marker error)

2-27

(End marker error)
2-28

(Timeout)
2-29
JBIG trailing edge maker error
2-50
2-51
FCU defective
Check the destination device.
The machine resets itself for a
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or
fatal FCU system error
replace the FCU.
The machine resets itself

because of a fatal
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or

replace the FCU.
communication error
SM
27
D629
Error Codes
Code
Meaning
2-53
Snd msg() in the manual task
The user did the same operation many
is an error because the
times, and this gave too much load to the
mailbox for the operation task
machine.
is full.
4-01
4-10
Line current was cut
Communication failed
Check the line connector.
Replace the FCU.
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the
because of an ID Code
CSIs programmed correctly, then resend.
mismatch (Closed Network) or
The machine at the other end may be
Tel. No./CSI mismatch
defective.
(Protection against Wrong

Connections)
5-00
Data reconstruction not
Replace the FCU.
possible
5-10
DCR timer expired
Replace the FCU.
5-20
Storage impossible because
Temporary memory shortage.
of a lack of memory
Test the SAF memory.
5-21
Memory overflow
5-23
Print data error when printing
Test the SAF memory.
a substitute rx or confidential
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace an SD card or HDD.
Replace the FCU.
G3 ECM - T1 time out during
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
reception of facsimile data
Replace the FCU.
rx message
5-25
6-00
6-01
SAF file access error
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was

received
6-02
D629
G3 ECM - EOR was received
28
SM
Error Codes
6-04
Meaning
G3 ECM - RTC not detected
Check for a bad line or defective remote
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
terminal.
6-05
G3 ECM - facsimile data
Replace the FCU.
frame not received within 18 s
Check for a bad line or defective remote
of CFR, but there was no line
terminal.
fail
Replace the FCU.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
6-06
6-08
6-09
G3 ECM - coding/decoding
Defective FCU.
error
The other terminal may be defective.
G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in
The other end pressed Stop during
reply to PPS.NULL
communication.
G3 ECM - ERR received
The other terminal may be defective.
Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating

machines.
6-10
6-21
6-22
G3 ECM - error frames still
See code 6-05.
Check for line noise.
received at the other end after
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01
all communication attempts at
or the dedicated tx parameter for that
2400 bps
address).
V.21 flag detected during high
The other terminal may be defective or
speed modem communication
incompatible.
The machine resets the
Check for line noise.
sequence because of an
If the same error occurs frequently, replace

the FCU.
abnormal handshake in the

V.34 control channel
SM
29
D629
Error Codes
Code
6-99
Meaning
V.21 signal not stopped within Replace the FCU.

6s
13-17
SIP user name registration
Double registration of the SIP user name.
error
Capacity for user-name registration in the

SIP server is not sufficient.
13-18
13-24
SIP server access error
SIP authentication error
Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
Defective SIP server.
Registered password in the device does

not match the password in the SIP server.
13-25
Network I/F setting error
IPV4 is not active in the active protocol

setting.
13-26
Network I/F setting error at
IP address of the device is not registered.
Active protocol setting does not match the
power on
I/F setting for SIP server.
13-27
IP address setting error
14-00
SMTP Send Error
Error occurred during sending to the SMTP

server. Occurs for any error other than
14-01 to 16. For example, the mail address
of the system administrator is not
registered.
14-01
SMTP Connection Failed
Failed to connect to the SMTP server

(timeout) because the server could not be
found.
D629
The PC is not ready to transfer files.
SMTP server not functioning correctly.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
Destination folder selection not correct.
30
SM
Error Codes
Meaning
14-02
No Service by SMTP Service
(421)
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the

destination for direct SMTP sending is not
correct.
Contact the system administrator and

check that the SMTP server has the
correct settings and operates correctly.
Contact the system administrator for direct

SMTP sending and check the sending
destination.
14-03
Access to SMTP Server
Failed to access the SMTP server because

the access is denied.
Denied (450)
SMTP server operating incorrectly.

Contact the system administrator to
determine if there is a problem with the
SMTP server and to check that the SMTP
server settings are correct.
Folder send destination is incorrect.

Contact the system administrator to
determine that the SMTP server settings
and path to the server are correct.
Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the

user name and password settings are
correct.
Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact

the system administrator to determine if
there is a problem at the destination at that
the settings at the destination are correct.
14-04
Access to SMTP Server
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Denied (550)
Direct SMTP sending not operating

correctly
SM
31
D629
Error Codes
Code
Meaning
14-05
SMTP Server HDD Full (452)

the HDD on the server is full.
Insufficient free space on the HDD of the

SMTP server. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of
space remaining on the SMTP server
HDD.
Insufficient free space on the HDD where

the destination folder is located. Contact
the system administrator and check the
amount of space remaining on the HDD
where the target folder is located.
Insufficient free space on the HDD at the

target destination for SMTP direct sending.
Contact the system administrator and
check the amount of space remaining on
the target HDD.
14-06
User Not Found on SMTP
The designated user does not exist.
Server (551)
The designated user does not exist on the

SMTP server.
The designated address is not for use with

direct SMTP sending.
14-07
Data Send to SMTP Server

the transmission failed.
Failed (4XX)
PC not operating correctly.
Destination folder setting incorrect.

correctly.
D629
32
SM
Error Codes
14-08
Meaning
Data Send to SMTP Server
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code

the transmission failed.
Failed (5XX)
Destination folder setting incorrect.

correctly.
14-09
Authorization Failed for
Software application error.
POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization
Sending to SMTP Server
14-10
Addresses Exceeded
failed.
Incorrect setting for file transfer
Number of broadcast addresses exceeded

the limit for the SMTP server.
14-11
Buffer Full
The send buffer is full so the transmission

could not be completed. Buffer is full due
to using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is
being used send mail at the same time.
14-12
Data Size Too Large
Transmission was cancelled because the

detected size of the file was too large.
14-13
Send Cancelled
Processing is interrupted because the user

pressed Stop.
14-14
Security Locked File Error
Update the software because of the

defective software.
14-15
Mail Data Error
The transmitting a mail is interrupted via

DCS due to the incorrect data.

defective software.
14-16
Maximum Division Number
Error
When a mail is divided for the mail

transmission and the division number of a
mail are more than the specified number,
the mail transmission is interrupted.

defective software.
SM
33
D629
Error Codes
Code
14-17
Meaning
Incorrect Ticket

defective software.
14-18
Access to MCS File Error
The access to MCS file is denied due to

the no permission of access.

defective software.
14-20
SMTP Authentication error
Make sure the administrator's e-mail address is

same as the SMTP authentication address or
POP before SMTP address.
14-21
Transmission error of S/MIME Register the correct user certificate and device
certificate.
14-30
MCS File Creation Failed
Failed to create the MCS file because:
The number of files created with other

applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
14-31
UFS File Creation Failed
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
UFS file could not be created:
Not enough space in UFS area to handle

both Scan-to-Email and IFAX
transmission.
14-32
Cancelled the Mail Due to
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
Error detected with NFAX and send was
Error Detected by NFAX

14-33
No Mail Address For the

Machine
cancelled due to a software error.
Neither the mail address of the machine

nor the mail address of the network
administrator is registered.
D629
34
SM
Error Codes
14-34
Meaning
Address designated in the
Operational error in normal mail sending or

direct SMTP sending.
domain for SMTP sending

does not exist
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
Check the address selected in the address

book for SMTP sending.
14-50
Mail Job Task Error
Check the domain selection.
Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send

was cancelled:
Address book was being edited during

creation of the notification mail.
14-51
Software error.
UCS Destination Download
Not even one return notification can be
Error
downloaded:
The address book was being edited.
The number for the specified destination

does not exist (it was deleted or edited
after the job was created).
14-60
Send Cancel Failed
The cancel operation by the user failed to

cancel the send operation.
14-61
Notification Mail Send Failed
for All Destinations

14-62
Transmission Error due to the
All addresses for return notification mail

failed.
existence of zero line page
When the 0 line page exists in received

pages with G3 communication, the
transmission is interrupted.
15-01
POP3/IMAP4 Server Not
Registered
At startup, the system detected that the IP

address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has
not been registered in the machine.
15-02
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account
Information Not Registered
The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not

been registered.
15-03
Mail Address Not Registered
The mail address has not been registered.
15-10
DCS Mail Receive Error
Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
SM
35
D629
Error Codes
Code
15-11
Meaning
Connection Error
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4

server is not stored in the machine.
15-12
Authorization Error
The DNS IP address is not registered.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
Access was attempted by another device,

such as the PC.
15-13
Receive Buffer Full
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
Occurs only during manual reception.

Transmission cannot be received due to
insufficient buffer space. The buffer is
being used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.
15-14
Mail Header Format Error
The mail header is not standard format.

For example, the Date line description is
incorrect.
15-15
Mail Divide Error
The e-mail is not in standard format. There

is no boundary between parts of the
e-mail, including the header.
15-16
Mail Size Receive Error
The mail cannot be received because it is

too large.
15-17
Receive Timeout
May occur during manual receiving only

because the network is not operating
correctly.
15-18
Incomplete Mail Received
Only one portion of the mail was received.
15-31
Final Destination for Transfer
The format of the final destination for the
Request Reception Format
transfer request was incorrect.
Error
D629
36
SM
Error Codes
15-39
Meaning
Send/Delivery Destination
The transmission cannot be delivered to the
Error
final destination:
Destination file format is incorrect.
Could not create the destination for the file
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
transmission.
15-41
SMTP Receive Error
Reception rejected because the

transaction exceeded the limit for the
Auth. E-mail RX setting.
15-42
Off Ramp Gateway Error
The delivery destination address was

specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15-43
Address Format Error
Format error in the address of the Off

Ramp Gateway.
15-44
Addresses Over
The number of addresses for the Off Ramp

Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61
Attachment File Format Error
15-62
TIFF File Compatibility Error
Could not receive transmission due to:
The attached file is not TIFF format.
Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi

without extended memory.
Resolution is not supported.
Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH,

MR, or MMR.
15-63
TIFF Parameter Error
The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not

be received because the TIFF header is
incorrect:
The TIFF file attachment is a type not

supported.
SM
The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
37
D629
Error Codes
Code
15-64
Meaning
TIFF Decompression Error
The file received as an attachment caused the
TIFF decompression error:
The TIFF format of the attachment is

corrupted.
15-71
Not Binary Image Data
Software error.
The file could not be received because the

attachment was not binary image data.
15-73
MDN Status Error
Could not find the Disposition line in the

header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.
15-74
MDN Message ID Error
Could not find the Original Message ID line

in the header of the Return Receipt, or
there is a problem with the firmware.
15-80
Mail Job Task Read Error
Could not receive the transmission

because the destination buffer is full and
the destination could not be created (this
error may occur when receiving a transfer
request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-81
Repeated Destination
Registration Error
Could not repeat receive the transmission

because the destination buffer is full and
the destination could not be created (this
error may occur when receiving a transfer
request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-91
Send Registration Error
Could not receive the file for transfer to the final

destination:
The format of the final destination or the

transfer destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and

transfer destinations could not be created.
D629
38
SM
Error Codes
15-92
Meaning
Memory Overflow
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Code
Transmission could not be received

because memory overflowed during the
transaction.
15-93
Memory Access Error
Transaction could not complete due to a

malfunction of SAF memory.
15-94
Incorrect ID Code
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail

for transfer request, because the ID code
in the incoming e-mail did not match the ID
code registered in the machine.
15-95
Transfer Station Function
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail

for transfer because the transfer function
was unavailable.
22-00
Original length exceeded the
maximum scan length
Divide the original into more than one

page.
Check the resolution used for scanning.

Lower the scan resolution if possible.
22-01
Add optional page memory.
Memory overflow while
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving
Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an

another fax machine, if the machines
printer is busy or out of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard

disk.
22-02
Tx or rx job stalled due to line
disconnection at the other end
The job started normally but did not finish

normally; data may or may not have been
received fully.
22-04
22-05
Restart the machine.
The machine cannot store
Update the ROM
received data in the SAF
Replace the FCU.
No G3 parameter confirmation
Defective FCU board or firmware.
answer
SM
39
D629
Error Codes
Code
23-00
25-00
Meaning
Data read timeout during
Restart the machine.
construction
Replace the FCU.
The machine software resets
Update the ROM
itself after a fatal transmission
Replace the FCU.
error occurred
F0-xx
V.34 modem error
Replace the FCU.
F6-xx
SG3 modem error
Update the SG3 modem ROM.
Replace the SG3 board.
Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
D629
40
SM
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is
causing the problem.
Communication
Item
Route
General LAN
1. Connection with
Action [Remarks]
to the machine.
the LAN
2. LAN activity
Check that the LAN cable is connected

Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
Check that other devices connected to the

LAN can communicate through the LAN.
Between IFAX and
1. Network settings
PC
on the PC
[Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP
Check the network settings on the PC.
properties in the network setup correct?

Check the IP address with the
administrator of the network.]
2. Check that PC
can connect with the

machine
Use the ping command on the PC to

contact the machine.
[At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the

IP address of the machine, then press
Enter.]
3. LAN settings in
Check the LAN parameters
the machine
Check if there is an IP address conflict

with other PCs.
[Use the Network function in the User

Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
SM
41
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
IFAX Troubleshooting
Communication
Route
Item
Action [Remarks]
Between machine
1. LAN settings in
Check the LAN parameters
and e-mail server
the machine
Check if there is an IP address conflict

with other PCs.
[Use the Network function in the User

Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
2. E-mail account on
Make sure that the machine can log
the server
into the e-mail server.
Check that the account and password

stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]

3. E-mail server
Make sure that the client devices

which have an account in the server
can send/receive e-mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.

Send a test e-mail with the machines own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.]
Between e-mail
1. E-mail account on
Make sure that the PC can log into the
server and internet
the Server
e-mail server.
Check that the account and password

stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
D629
42
SM
Item
Route
2. E-mail server
Action [Remarks]
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Communication
Make sure that the client devices

which have an account in the server
can send/receive e-mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.

Send a test e-mail with the machines own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.]
3. Destination e-mail
Make sure that the e-mail address is
address
actually used.
Check that the e-mail address contains

no incorrect characters such as
spaces.
4. Router settings
Use the ping command to contact the

router.
Check that other devices connected to

the router can sent data over the
router.
[Ask the administrator of the server to

check.]
5. Error message by
Check whether e-mail can be sent to
e-mail from the
another address on the same network,
network of the
using the application e-mail software.
destination.
Check the error e-mail message.
[Inform the administrator of the LAN.]
SM
43
D629
IP-Fax Troubleshooting
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING

3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point
Action
LAN cable connected?
Check the LAN cable connection.
Specified IP address/host name correct?
Check the IP address/host name.

Cannot breach the firewall. Send by
Firewall/NAT is installed?
using another method (Fax, Internet

Fax)
Transmission sent manually?
Manual sending not supported.
IP address of local machine registered?
Register the IP address.
Remote terminal port number setting other

6
than 1720 (when using H.323) or 5060
Send by specifying the port number.
(when using SIP)?
Confirm the port number of the remote
Specified port number correct?
fax.
DNS server registered when host name
Contact the network administrator.
specified?
Check whether the remote fax is a T38
Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.
Check that the remote fax is switched
10 Remote fax switched off or busy?
on.
Request the network administrator to
increase the bandwidth.
11 Network bandwidth too narrow?

Raise the delay level.
IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
D629
44
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.
Check whether the remote fax
12 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
SM
cancelled the transmission.
45
D629
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway
Check Point
Action
VoIP Gateway T.38 standard?
VoIP Gateway installed correctly?
VoIP Gateway power switched on?
Is the IP address/host name of the
specified Gateway correct?

Number of the specified fax correct?
Check the remote fax number.


Fax)
IP address of local fax registered?
10
DNS registered when host name
specified?
11 Remote fax a G3 fax?
Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.
12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway?
Check that G3 fax is connected.
13 Remote G3 fax turned on?
Check that G3 fax is switched on.

Raise the network delay level.
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the
DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.
D629
46
SM
Check Point
1
Number of specified Alias fax correct?
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Cannot send by Alias Fax number.
Action
Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.
Error Code: 13-14
Firewall/NAT installed?

Fax)
Gatekeeper/SIP server installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
Gatekeeper/SIP server power switched
on?
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper/SIP
server correct?
DNS server registered when

8
Gatekeeper/SIP server host name
specified?
Check the settings.
9
Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW is set to on? See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW
34 Bit 1
10 IP address of local fax registered?
Register the IP address of the local fax.

Register the Alias number of the local
11 Alias number of local fax registered?
fax.
12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper?

Check whether the remote fax is a T38
13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.
14 Remote fax switched off or busy?
SM
47
D629
Request the system administrator to

Raise the delay level.
Lower the modem transmission baud
rate.
IPFAX SW 05
Check whether the remote fax
D629
cancelled the transmission.
48
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION

Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name.
Check Point
1
IP address of local fax registered?
Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using
another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port
fax (if required)?
number.
Specified port number correct (if
Request the sender to check the port
required)?
number.
specified on sender side?
The sender machine displays this

error code if the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.

7
Network bandwidth too narrow?
Lower the start modem reception baud

rate on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
SM
Remote fax cancelled transmission?
Check whether the remote fax cancelled

the transmission.
49
D629
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.
Check Point
1
Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Request the
remote fax to send by using another

method (Fax, Internet Fax)
VoIP Gateway installed correctly?
VoIP Gateway power switched on?
IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP
Gateway correct on senders side?
specified on sender side?
address/host name.
Network bandwidth too narrow?
G3 fax connected?
Check that G3 fax is connected.
G3 fax power switched on?
Check that G3 fax is switched on.
D629
50
SM
Check Point
1
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.
Action
Cannot the breach firewall. Request the
remote fax to send by using another

method (Fax, Internet Fax)
Gatekeeper/SIP server installed
correctly?

error code when the sender fax is
a Ricoh model.

4
Power to Gatekeeper/SIP server
switched on?

a Ricoh model.
Request the sender to check the IP

IP address/host name of
5
address/host name.
Gatekeeper/SIP server correct on the
senders side?

a Ricoh model.

DNS server registered when
6
Gatekeeper/SIP server host name

specified on senders side?

a Ricoh model.
Request the sender to check the settings.

7
Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW is set to
User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW 34 Bit 1
on?
Only if the remote sender fax is a

Ricoh fax.
SM
51
D629
Local fax IP address registered?
Local fax Alias number registered?
Register the Alias number.

Lower the start modem reception baud rate

on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
Check whether the remote fax cancelled

the transmission.
12
Local fax registered in Gatekeeper/SIP
server?

a Ricoh model.
D629
52
SM
Cautions
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 CAUTIONS
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power
off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the
main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the
SM
53
D629
Service Program Tables
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)
Bit Switches
Mode No.
Function
System Switch
Change the bit switches for system settings for the
101
001 032
00 1F
fax option
"System Switches" in "Bit Switches - 1"
Ifax Switch
Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for
102
001 016
00 0F
the fax option

"I-Fax Switches" in "Bit Switches - 2"
Printer Switch
Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax
103
001 016
00 0F
option
"Printer Switches" in "Bit Switches - 2"
Communication Switch
Change the bit switches for communication settings
104
001 032
00 1F
for the fax option

"Communication Switches" in "Bit Switches - 3"
G3-1 Switch
Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of
105
001 016
00 0F
the standard G3 board

"G3 Switches" in "Bit Switches - 4"
G3-2 Switch
106
001 016
00 0F
the optional G3 board

"G3-2 and G3-3 Switches" in "Bit Switches - 5"
D629
54
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
G3-3 Switch
107
001 016
00 0F
the optional G3 board

"G3-2 and G3-3 Switches" in "Bit Switches - 5"
G4 Internal Switch
108
001 032
00 1F
Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
G4 Parameter Switch
109
001 016
00 0F
Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
IP fax Switch
Change the bit switches for optional IP fax
111
001 016
00 0F
parameters
"IP Fax Switches" in "Bit Switches - 6"
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA)
Mode No.
Function
RAM Read/Write
101
Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
001
p.164 "Service RAM Addresses"
Memory Dump
001
102
002
003
004
103
SM
G3-1 Memory
Dump
Print out RAM data for the fax board.

p.164 "Service RAM Addresses"
G3-2 Memory
Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
Dump
board.
G3-3 Memory
Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
Dump
board.
G4 Memory Dump
Not used
G3-1 NCU Parameters
55
D629
001 023
CC, 01 22
NCU parameter settings for the standard G3

board.
p.140 "NCU Parameters"
G3-2 NCU Parameters

104
001 023
CC, 01 22
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3

board.
G3-3 NCU Parameters

105
001 023
D629
CC, 01 22
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3

board.
56
SM
Mode No.
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS)
Function
Service Station
101
001
Fax Number
Enter the fax number of the service station.
002
Select Line
Select the line type.
Serial Number
102
000
Enter the fax units serial number.
PSTN-1 Port Settings

Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If
001
Select Line
the machine is installed on a PABX line, select

PABX, PABX(GND) or PABX(FLASH).
103
002
003
PSTN Access
Enter the PSTN access number for the
Number
G3-1 line.
Memory Lock
Disabled
Not used

Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If the
001
Select Line
machine is installed on a PABX line, select

104
002
003
004
SM
PSTN Access
Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2
Number
line.
Memory Lock
Disabled
Not used
Transmission
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled
send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
57
D629

Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If the
001
Select Line
machine is installed on a PABX line, select

105
002
003
004
PSTN Access
Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-3
Number
line.
Memory Lock
Disabled
Not used
Transmission
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled
send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
ISDN Port Settings

001
106
002
003
106
004
Select Line
PSTN Access
Number
Memory Lock
Not used (Do not change the settings.)
Disabled
Transmission
Disabled
IPFAX Port Settings
107
001
H323 Port
Sets the H323 port number.
002
SIP Port
Sets the SIP port number.
003
RAS Port
Sets the RAS port number.
004
Gatekeeper port
Sets the Gatekeeper port number.
005
T.38 Port
Sets the T.38 port number.
006
SIP Server Port
Sets the SIP port number.
007
D629
IPFAX Protocol
Priority
Select "H323" or "SIP".
58
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
FAX SW
201
001 032
00 1F
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)
Mode No.
Function
101
001
FCU ROM Version
Displays the FCU ROM version.
102
001
Error Codes
Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103
001
G3-1 ROM Version
Displays the G3-1 modem version.
104
001
G3-2 ROM Version
105
001
G3-3 ROM Version
106
001
G4 ROM Version
SM
59
D629
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR)
Mode No.
Function
Initialize SRAM (Except Secure)

101
000
Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in

the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.
Erase All Files

102
000
Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
Reset Bit Switches (Except Secure)

103
000
Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
Factory Setting
104
000
Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the
SRAM and files in the SAF memory.
Reset All Bit Switches

105
000
Resets all the current bit switch settings.
Reset Security Bit Switches

Resets only the security bit switches. If you select automatic
106
000
output/display for the user parameter switches, the security

settings are initialized.
D629
60
SM
Mode No.
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS)
Function
System Parameter List

101
000
Touch the ON button to print the system

parameter list.
Service Monitor Report

102
000
Touch the ON button to print the service

monitor report.
G3 Protocol Dump List
001
002
003
103
004
005
006
007
SM
G3 All
Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications
communications for all G3 lines.
G3-1 (All
Communications)
communications for the G3-1 line.
G3-1
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication)
communication for the G3-1 line.
G3-2
(All Communications)
G3-2
(1 Communication)
G3-3
(All Communications)
G3-3
(1 Communication)
61
D629
G4 Protocol Dump List
104
001
Dch + Bch 1
002
Dch
003
Bch 1 Link Layer
004
Dch Link Layer
005
Dch +Bch 2
006
Bch 2 Link Layer
All Files print out

Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory,
including confidential messages.
105
000
Do not use this function, unless the

customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
Journal Print out
106
D629
001
All Journals
002
Specified Date
The machine prints all the communication

records on the report.
The machine prints all communication records
after the specified date.
62
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Log List Print out

001
All log files
002
Printer
003
SC/TRAP Stored
004
Decompression
005
Scanner
006
JOB/SAF
007
Reconstruction
008
JBIG
009
Fax Driver
010
G3CCU
011
Fax Job
012
CCU
013
Scanner Condition
107
These log print out functions are for designer

use only.
IP Protocol Dump List
108
SM
001
All Communications
002
1 Communication

communications for the IP fax line.
communication for the IP fax line.
63
D629
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.
Function
101
G3-1 Modem Tests
102
G3-1 DTMF Tests
103
Ringer Test
104
G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105
G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106
G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107
G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108
G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109
Recorded Message Test
110
G3-2 Modem Tests
111
G3-2 DTMF Tests
112
G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
113
G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
114
G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
115
G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
116
G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
117
G3-3 Modem Tests
118
G3-3 DTMF Tests
119
G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
120
G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
121
G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
D629
64
SM
122
G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
123
G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
124
IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used
125
IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used
126
IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
127
128
129
130
131
IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used
132
IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used
133
134
135
136
137
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
65
D629
Bit Switches - 1
4.3 BIT SWITCHES - 1
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES
System Switch 00 (SP No. 1-101-001)

No
Function
Dedicated transmission
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
parameter programming
transmission parameters.
0: Disabled
This setting is automatically reset to "0" after
1: Enabled
turning off and on.
Not used
Do not change
Technical data printout on the

2
Journal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
D629
Comments
1: Instead of the personal name, the following

data are listed on the Journal for each G3
communication.
66
SM
Bit Switches - 1
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Example:
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (see below for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
EQM and rx level are fixed at "FFFF" in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at "00" for transmission
records and ECM reception records.
Rx level calculation
Example:
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after "L" indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of
N by -16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3
Not used
Do not change this setting.

When "1" is selected, a line error mark is
Line error mark print
printed on the printout if a line error occurs
0: OFF, 1: ON (print)
during reception. This shows error locations

when ECM is turned off.
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the
G3/G4 communication
key parameters (see "G3 Communication
parameter display
Parameters" below this table). This is normally
0: Disabled
disabled because it cancels the CSI display for
1: Enabled
the user.
Be sure to reset this bit to "0" after testing.
SM
67
D629
Bit Switches - 1
This is only used for communication

Protocol dump list output after
6
each communication
0: Off
troubleshooting. It shows the content of the

transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at "1", the list is only
1: On
printed if there was an error during the

communication.
Not used
Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate
336: 33600 bps
168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps
144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps
120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps
96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps
72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps
48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps
24: 2400 bps
S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)

D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
Resolution
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)

21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
Compression mode MH: MH compression

JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication
ECM: With ECM
mode
NML: With no ECM
D629
68
SM
Bit Switches - 1
reduction
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Width and
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction

A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
0: 0 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
I/O rate
25: 2.5 ms/line

40: 40 ms/line
"40" is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI

short protocol.
SM
69
D629
Bit Switches - 1
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

No
0
Function
Not used
Do not change these settings.
Forced reset after transmission

2
stalls
complete the job.
Not used
File retention time

4
0: Depends on User Parameter

24 [18(H)]
1: A file that had a communication error will not

be erased unless the communication is
successful.
1: No limit
5
With this setting on, the machine resets itself

automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to
0: Off
1: On
Comments
Not used
Memory read/write by RDS
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Setting
Always disabled
User selectable
User selectable
Always enabled
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked

out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS
on to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS
will automatically be locked out again after a
6-7
certain time, which is stored in System Switch

03. Note that if an RDS operation takes place,
RDS will not switch off until this time limit has
expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access
the machine.
D629
70
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 1

No
0
to
7
Function
Comments
Length of time that RDS is
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
temporarily switched on when
This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
System Switch 02 are set to "User selectable".
02 are set to "User selectable"
The default setting is 24 hours.

No
0-2
Function
Not used
Comments
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
Printing dedicated tx
printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10
parameters on Quick/Speed
bytes each).
Dial Lists
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
0: Disabled
dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
1: Enabled
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for

service technicians).
4-7
Not used
SM
71
D629
Bit Switches - 1

No
Function
Addition of image data from
confidential transmissions on
the transmission result report
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Comments
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first

page of confidential messages will be printed
on transmission result reports.
Print timing of communication

reports on the Journal when no
1
image data was exchanged.

0: After DCS/NSS
communication (default),
0: The Journal is printed only when image data

is sent.
1: The Journal is printed when any data is sent.
1: After polling
Automatic error report printout

0: Error reports will not be printed.

1: Error reports will be printed automatically
after failed communications.
Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
3
error report
This can be used for detecting an error which
0: No 1: Yes
occurs rarely.
Not used

1: A power failure report will be automatically
printed after the power is switched on if a fax
Power failure report
message disappeared from the memory when
0: Disabled
the power was turned off last.
1: Enabled (default)
NOTE: If "0" is selected, no reports are printed

and no one may recognize that fax data is gone
due to a power failure.
D629
72
SM
Bit Switches - 1
Conditions for printing the

protocol dump list
6
0: Print for all communications

1: Print only when there is a
communication error
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
This switch becomes effective only when

system switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a
protocol dump list only for communications with
errors.
NOTE: The memory size is limited. Use this bit
switch only when some log reports are
necessary.
Priority given to various types of
remote terminal ID when
This bit determines which set of priorities the
printing reports
machine uses when listing remote terminal
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
names on reports.
number
Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for
1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI the Quick/Speed Dial number.
> CSI
System Switch 0A (SP No. 1-101-011)

No
Function
Comments
When "1" is selected, a suitable port is
automatically selected if the selected port is not
Automatic port selection
used.
NOTE: This bit is useful if all communication

lines at a customer site are not the same
quality
1-3
Not used

0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while
Dialing on the ten-key pad when

4
the external telephone is

off-hook
the external telephone is off-hook. Use this

setting when the external telephone is not by
the machine, or if a wireless telephone is
connected as an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key
pad when the handset is off-hook.
SM
On hook dial
0: On hook dial is disabled.
73
D629
Bit Switches - 1
6-7
Not used
Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E (SP No. 1-101-015)

No
0-1
Function
Not used
Comments
Do not change the settings.
Direct sending cannot operate when the
capture function is on during sending. Setting
Enable/disable for direct
this switch to "1" enables direct sending without
sending selection
capture.
0: Direct sending off
Setting this switch to "0" masks the direct
1: Direct sending on
sending function on the operation panel so

direct sending with ScanRouter cannot be
selected.
0: Manual tx is possible while the external
handset is off-hook. However, manual tx during
Action when the external
handset off-hook may not be sent to a correct
handset goes off-hook
direction. Manual tx is not possible.
0: Manual tx and rx operation
1: The display stays in standby mode even
1: Memory tx and rx operation
when the external handset is used, so that
(the display remains the same)
other people can use the machine for memory

tx operation. Note that manual tx and rx are not
possible with this setting.
4-7
D629
Not used
74
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 1
System Switch 0F (SP No. 1-101-016)

No
Function
Comments
Country/area code for functional

settings (Hex)
00: France
12: Asia
01: Germany
13: Japan
02: UK
14: Hong Kong
03: Italy
15: South Africa

This country/area code determines the
04: Austria
16: Australia
05: Belgium
17: New Zealand
factory settings of bit switches and RAM

addresses. However, it has no effect on
the NCU parameter settings and
0
to
7
06: Denmark
18: Singapore
07: Finland
19: Malaysia
08: Ireland
1A: China
09: Norway
1B: Taiwan
0A: Sweden
1C: Korea
0B: Switz.
1D: Brazil
0C: Portugal
20: Turkey
0D: Holland
21: Greece
0E: Spain
22: Hungary
0F: Israel
23: Czech
10: ---
24: Poland
communication parameter RAM

addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code:
SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
11: USA
SM
75
D629
Bit Switches - 1

No
0-7
Function
Threshold memory level for

parallel memory transmission
Comments
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB

No
1-2
Function
Comments
TTI printing position
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints
0: Superimposed on the page
information that the customer considers to be
data
important (G3 transmissions).
1: Printed before the data
NOTE: If "1" is selected, it is possible that sent
leading edge
data is printed on two sheets of paper.
Not used
Do not change the factory settings.
TTI used for broadcasting

0: The TTIs selected for each
3
Quick/Speed dial are used

1: The same TTI is used for all
1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected

for all destinations during broadcasting.
destinations
4-7
D629
Not used
76
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 1

No
Function
Comments
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position
0-7
TTI printing position in the main

scan direction
for the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the
TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
overwrite the file number which is on the top
right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is
moved over by more than 50 mm, it may
overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)


No
0
Function
Not used
Comments
1: The machine will restart from the Energy
Saver mode quickly, because the +5V power
Going into the Energy Saver

1
mode automatically
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
supply is active even in the Energy Saver

mode. The LED of the operation switch is
flashing instead of entering Energy Saver
mode.
Use this setting if an external telephone has to
be used when the machine is in the Energy
Saver mode.
2-3
SM
Not used
77
D629
Bit Switches - 1
Interval for preventing the

machine from entering Energy
Saver mode if there is a pending
If there is a file waiting for transmission, the
transmission file.
machine does not go to Energy Saver mode

Bit 5
Bit 4
Setting
1 min
30 min
1 hour
24 hours
4-5
during the selected period.

After transmitting the file, if there is no file
waiting for transmission, the machine goes to
6-7
Not used
the Energy Saver mode.
Do not change

No
Function
Comments
1: The machine sends messages
Parallel Broadcasting
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
simultaneously using all available ports during

broadcasting.
NOTE: If a customer wants to keep a line
available for fax reception or other reasons,
select "0" (Disable).
2-7
Priority setting for the G3 line.
This function allows the user to select the
0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3
default G3 line type. The optional SG3 units are
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1
required to use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.
Not used

D629
78
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 1

No
0-5
Function
Not used
Comments
0: After installing the memory expansion option,
Extended scanner page
the scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB
memory after memory option is
from 2 MB.
installed
1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the
0: Disabled
memory expansion option, the scanner page
1: Enabled
memory is extended to 12 MB. But the SAF

memory decreases to 18 MB.
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit
Special Original mode

7
0: Disabled
a form or letterhead which has a colored or

printed background, change this bit to "1".
"Original 1" and "Original 2" can be selected in
1: Enabled
addition to the "Text", "Text/Photo" and "Photo"

modes.
System Switch 1A (SP No. 1-101-027)

No
Function
Comments
Sets the value to x4KB. When the amount of
LS RX memory capacity
to
threshold setting
00-FF (0-1020 Kbyte: Hex)
available memory drops below this setting, RX

documents are printed to conserve memory.
Initial setting 0x80 (512 KB)
NOTE: If a customer wants available memory
size to be larger, decrease this threshold
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
SM
79
D629
Bit Switches - 1
System Switch 1D (SP No. 1-101-030)

No
Function
RTI/CSI/CPS code display

0
0: Enable
0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the

top line of the LCD panel during
communication.
1: Disable
1-7
Comments
1: Codes are switched off (no display)
Not used
System Switch 1E (SP No. 1-101-031)

No
Function
Comments
0: When this switch is on and the journal
history becomes full, the next report prints. If
the journal history is not deleted, the next
transmission cannot be received. This prevents
overwriting communication records before the
Communication after the

Journal data storage area has
0
become full
0: Impossible
1: Possible
machine can print them.

1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax
communications are still possible. But the
machine will overwrite the oldest
communication records.
This setting is effective only when

Automatic Journal printout is enabled
but the machine cannot print the report
(e.g., no paper).
D629
80
SM
Bit Switches - 1
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during

scanning for a memory transmission, the
successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
Action when the SAF memory
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during
has become full during
scanning for a memory transmission, the file is
scanning
erased and no pages are transmitted.
0: The current page is erased.

1: The entire file is erased.
This setting is effective only when

Automatic Journal printout is enabled
but the machine cannot print the report
(e.g., no paper).
RTI/CSI display priority

0: RTI 1: CSI
File No. printing

3
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI,

is displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
NOTE: The file numbers may not be printed in
the sequential order. If a customer does not like
this numbering, select "0".
0: If the user has stored no acceptable sender
RTIs or CSIs, the user can select ON in the
Action when authorized
authorized reception setting but the setting
reception is enabled but
becomes invalid (OFF). The machine will not
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not
be able to receive any fax messages.
yet programmed
If the customer wishes to receive messages
0: Faxes can be received if the
from any sender that includes an RTI or CSI,
sender has an RTI or CSI
and to block messages from senders that do
1: All fax reception is disabled
not include an RTI or CSI, change this bit to

"0", then enable Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at "1 (default setting)".
5-7
SM
Not used
Do not change the settings
81
D629
Bit Switches - 1
System Switch 1F (SP No. 1-101-032)

No
0
Function
Not used
Comments
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
Report printout after an original
overflows during scanning, a report will be
jam during SAF storage or if the printed.

1
SAF memory fills up
Change this bit to "1" if the customer does not
0: Enabled
want to have a report in these cases.
1: Disabled
Memory tx Memory storage report

Parallel memory tx Transmission result report
Not used
Received fax print start timing

3
(G3 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
4-6
Not used

0: The machine prints each page immediately
after the machine receives it.
1: The machine prints the complete message
after the machine receives all the pages in the
memory.
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code
Action when a fax SC has

7
occurred
0: Automatic reset
1: Fax unit stops
other than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit

automatically resets itself.
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code,
the fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See "Troubleshooting"
D629
82
SM
4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-102-001)

No
Function
Comments
This setting sets the maximum size of the
Original Width of TX Attachment File
original that the destination can receive. (Bits

3~7 are reserved for future use or not used.)
A4
B4
A3
3-6
Reserved
Not used
0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)

If more than one of these three bits is set to "1", the larger size has priority. For
example, if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to "1" then the maximum size is "A3" (Bit
2).
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the
destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original width
selected with this switch is used as the RX machine's original width setting, and
the original is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can
accept, the machine detects this and this causes an error.
SM
83
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 2
Bit Switches - 2

No
Function
Comments
Original Line Resolution of TX
These settings set the maximum resolution of
Attachment File
the original that the destination can receive.
200x100 Standard
200x200 Detail
0: Not selected
200x400 Fine
300 x 300 Reserve
400 x 400 Super Fine
600 x 600 Reserve
Reserve
mm/inch
1: Selected
If more than one of these three bits is set to "1",
the higher resolution has priority. For example,
if both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to "1" Then The
Resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to "1"), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to
determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch
selection is determined by the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
D629
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
84
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 2

No
Function
Comments
RX Text Mail Header Processing

This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
0
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.

When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the "From" address and
"Subject" address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs.
This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their
intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
Text String for Return Receipt
2-3
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms
the transmission was received normally at the destination.
SM
85
D629
Bit Switches - 2
00: "Dispatched"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "dispatched" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The "dispatched" string is included in the Subject string.
01: "Displayed"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "displayed" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The "displayed" string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to "00"
(for "dispatched") received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any
setting other than "displayed" (01) causes a problem, change the setting to "01" to
enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
4
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
5-6
Not Used
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
The "1" setting requires installation of the Memory Unit in order to have enough
SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
D629
86
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 2
I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change these settings)

No
Function
Comments
Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer

This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the
RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the
0
RTI or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in
the Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to
determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
Subject corresponding to mail post database
0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the
following three cases:
1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
2) When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP

server
3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).
This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up
for memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and
when operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving
transmissions).
2-7
SM
Not Used
87
D629
Bit Switches - 2

No
Function
Comments
Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients

Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a

broadcast to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1-7
Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

No
Function
Comments
Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception

This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF
stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and
also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of
0-7
SAF memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received;
received mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount
of memory.
D629
88
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 2

No
0-3
Function
Comments
Not used

This setting determines the number of retries
4-7
when connection and transmission fails due to
Restrict TX Retries
errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0D (SP No. 1-102-014)

No
0-1
Function
Comments
Not used
Set to select the signature when

sending mail notification of the send
results
2-3
SM
Bit 2
Bit 3
Setting
No sign
No setting
Individual setting
Always sign
In response to IEEE2600.1.
89
D629
Bit Switches - 2
4-5
6-7
Set to select the signature when

sending mail.
Bit 5
Bit 4
Setting
No sign
No setting
Individual setting
Always sign
In response to IEEE2600.1.
Not used
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0F (SP No. 1-102-016)

No
Function
Comments
Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files

This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered
0
or output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7
D629
Not used
90
SM
Bit Switches - 2
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES
Printer Switch 00 (SP No. 1-103-001)

No
Function
Comments
0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is
printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page
and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner
of the 2nd page.
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two
Select page separation marks

0
0: Off
1: On
pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom

right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is
printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
This helps the user to identify pages that

have been split because the size of the
paper is smaller than the size of the
document received. (When A5 is used to
print an A4 size document, for example.)
Repetition of data when the
1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the
received page is longer than
previous page are repeated at the top of the next
the printer paper
page.
0: Off
0: The next page continues from where the
1: On
previous page stopped without any repeated text.

This switch is only effective when user parameter
Prints the date and time on
02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages
received fax messages) is enabled.
0: Disabled
1: The machine prints the received and printed
1: Enabled
date and time at the bottom of each received

page.
3-7
SM
Not used
91
D629
Bit Switches - 2

No
0-2
Function
Comments
Not used
Maximum print width used in the

setup protocol
3-4
5-6
Bit 4
Bit 3
Setting
Not used
A3
B4
A4
These bits are only effective when bit 7 of

printer switch 01 is "1".
Not used

0: The machine informs the transmitting
machine of the print width depending on the
paper size available from the paper feed
Received message width

restriction in the protocol signal
7
to the sender
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
stations.
Refer to the table on the next page for how the
machine chooses the paper width used in the
setup protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting
machine of the fixed paper width which is
specified by bits 3 and 4 above.
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the setup protocol
Available Paper Size
Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11"
297 mm width
B5
256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5"
216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end)
216 mm width
D629
92
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 2

No
Function
Comments
1st paper feed station usage for

0
fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2nd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: The paper feed station can be used to print
0: Enabled
fax messages and reports.
1: Disabled
1: The specified paper feed station will not be
3rd paper feed station usage for

2
fax printing
0: Enabled
used for printing fax messages and reports.
station which has been specified by
1: Disabled
Do not disable usage for a paper feed

User Parameter Switch 0F (15), or
4th paper feed station usage for
which is used for the Specified
fax printing
Cassette Selection feature.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7
SM
Not used
93
D629
Bit Switches - 2

No
Function
Comments
0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
Length reduction of received
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03,
data
bits 4 to 7)
0: Disabled
1: Incoming page length is reduced when
1: Enabled
printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches
04, bits 0 to 4)
1-3
Not used

Page separation threshold (with reduction
disabled with switch 03-0 above).
Page separation setting when
For example, if this setting is set to "10", and
sub scan compression is
A4 is the selected paper size:
to
forbidden
If the received document is 10 mm or less
00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex)
longer than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and
Default: 6 mm
only 1 page prints.

If the received document is 10 mm longer than
A4, then the document is split into 2 pages.
D629
94
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 2

No
Function
Comments
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0
above.
[Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + (N x 5mm)
"N" is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
0
to
4
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting
0 mm
5 mm
20 mm
155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

[Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has
taken place.
Bit 6
Bit 5
Setting
4 mm
10 mm
15 mm
Not used
SM
Not used.
95
D629
Bit Switches - 2
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

No
Function
Comments
Printing while a paper cassette

is pulled out, when the Just Size
Printing feature is enabled.
0
0: Printing will not start
Cross reference
1: Printing will start if another
Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5
cassette has a suitable size of

paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7
Not used.

No
0-3
Function
Not used.
Comments
List of destinations in the

Communication Failure Report
4
for broadcasting
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
1: Only destinations where communication

failure occurred are printed on the
Communication Failure Report.
communication failure occurred

5-7
Not used.

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
D629
96
SM
Bit Switches - 2
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E (SP No. 1-103-015)

No
Function
Comments
0: A paper size that has the same width
Paper size selection priority
as the received data is selected first.
0: Width
1: A paper size which has enough length
1: Length
to print all the received lines without

reduction is selected first.
Paper size selected for printing A4
This switch determines which paper size
width fax data
is selected for printing A4 width fax data,
0: 8.5" x 11" size
when the machine has both A4 and 8.5" x
1: A4 size
11" size paper.

1: If all paper sizes in the machine require
page separation to print a received fax
Page separation
message, the machine does not print the
0: Enabled
message (Substitute Reception is used).
1: Disabled
After a larger size of paper is set in a

cassette, the machine automatically
prints the fax message.
Printing the sample image on reports

Bit 4
Bit 3
Setting
The upper half only
"Same size" means the sample image is

printed at 100%, even if page separation
3-4
occurs.
50% reduction
User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4
(sub-scan only)
must be set to "0" to enable this switch.

Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for
5-6
SM
Same size
Not used
Not used
more on this feature.
97
D629
Bit Switches - 2
0: When page separation has taken
Equalizing the reduction ratio among
place, all the pages are reduced with the
separated pages
same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation)
1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the
0: Enabled
selected paper size when page
1: Disabled
separation has taken place. Other pages

are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F (SP No. 1-103-016)

No
Function
Comments
Smoothing feature
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting
Disabled
machine receives halftone images from
Disabled
other manufacturers fax machines
(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the

0-1
frequently.
1
Enabled
Not used
Duplex printing
2
1: The machine always prints received
0: Disabled
fax messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
0: Sets the binding for the left edge of
Binding direction for Duplex printing

3
the stack.
0: Left binding
1: Sets the binding for the top of the
1: Top binding
4-7
D629
stack.
Not used
98
SM
4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES
Communication Switch 00 (SP No. 1-104-001)

No
Function
Comments
Compression modes available in receive

mode
0-1
Bit 1
Bit 0
Modes
These bits determine the

compression capabilities to be
MH only
declared in phase B (handshaking)

0
MH/MR
MH/MR/MMR
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
of the T.30 protocol.
Compression modes available in transmit

mode
Bit 3
Bit 2
These bits determine the
Modes
compression capabilities to be used

2-3
MH only
in the transmission and to be
MH/MR
declared in phase B (handshaking)

of the T.30 protocol.
SM
MH/MR/MMR
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Not used
99
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 3
Bit Switches - 3
JBIG compression method: Reception
Change the setting when
0: Only basic supported
communication problems occur
1: Basic and optional both supported
using JBIG compression.
JBIG compression method: Transmission
Change the setting when
0: Basic mode priority
communication problems occur
1: Optional mode priority
using JBIG compression.

1: Reception will not go ahead if the
polling ID code of the remote
Closed network (reception)

7
terminal does not match the polling
0: Disabled
ID code of the local terminal. This
1: Enabled
function is only available in

NSF/NSS mode.

No
Function
Comments
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
ECM
communications.
0: Off 1: On
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression

are switched off automatically.
Not used
Wrong connection prevention

method
(0,1): The machine will disconnect the line

without sending a fax message, if the last 8
digits of the received CSI do not match the last
Bit 3
Bit 2
Setting
None
does not work when manually dialed.
8 digit CSI
(1,0): The same as above, except that only the
8 digits of the dialed telephone number. This

2-3
last 4 digits are compared.
D629
4 digit CSI
CSI/RTI
(1,1): The machine will disconnect the line

without sending a fax message, if the other end
100
SM
Bit Switches - 3
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.

(0,0): Nothing is checked; transmission will
always go ahead.
This function does not work when

dialing is done from the external
telephone.
4-5
Not used
Maximum printable page length

available
6-7
Bit 7
Bit 6
Setting
No limit
The setting determined by these bits is

informed to the transmitting terminal in the
pre-message protocol exchange (in the
B4 (364 mm)
A4 (297 mm)
Not used
DIS/NSF frames).

No
Function
Comments
If there are more consecutive error lines in
the received page than the threshold, the
machine will send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values
depend on the sub-scan resolution, and
SM
G3 Burst error threshold

0: Low 1: High
are as follows.
100 dpi
6(L)
200 dpi
12(L)
24(H)
300 dpi
18(L)
36(H)
400 dpi
24(L)
48(H)
101
12(H)
D629
Bit Switches - 3
If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
Acceptable total error line ratio
acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the
0: 5% 1: 10%
other end.
Treatment of pages received with

errors during G3 reception
2
0: Pages received with errors are not
0: Deleted from memory without
printed.
printing
1: Printed
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN
Hang-up decision when a negative
or PIN is received.
code (RTN or PIN) is received
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up
during G3 immediate transmission
if it receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
This bit is ignored for memory

transmissions or if ECM is being used.
4-7
Not used

No
0-7
Function
Comments
Maximum number of page
00 - FF (Hex) times.
retransmissions in a G3
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
memory transmission
Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

D629
102
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 3
Communication Switch 0A (SP No. 1-104-011)

No
1-7
Function
Comments
Point of resumption of memory
0: The transmission begins from the page
transmission upon redialing
where transmission failed the previous time.
0: From the error page
1: Transmission begins from the first page,
1: From page 1
using normal memory transmission.
Not used
Communication Switch 0B (SP No. 1-104-012)

No
0-3
Function
Not used
Printout of the message when

4
acting as a Transfer Station

5-7
Not used
Comments
When the machine is acting as a Transfer
Station, this bit determines whether the
machine prints the fax message coming in
from the Requesting Terminal.
Communication Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
103
D629
Bit Switches - 3
Communication Switch 0D (SP No. 1-104-014)

No
Function
Comments
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
0-7
The available memory
The machine refers to this setting before each fax
threshold, below which ringing
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
detection (and therefore
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
reception into memory) is
any fax messages.
disabled
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect

ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E (SP No. 1-104-015)

No
Function
Comments
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
0-7
Minimum interval between
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
automatic dialing attempts
This value is the minimum time that the machine

waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
Function
Comments
Memory transmission:
0-7
Maximum number of dialing

attempts to the same
01 FE (Hex) times
destination
D629
104
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 3
Communication Switch 11 Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
Function
Comments
Memory transmission: Interval

0-7
between dialing attempts to the 01 FF (Hex) minutes

same destination
Communication Switch 13 Not used (do not change the settings.)
SM
105
D629
Bit Switches - 3

No
Function
Comments
0: In immediate transmission, data
scanned in inch format are transmitted
without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in
the SAF memory in mm format are
Inch-to-mm conversion during

0
transmission
transmitted without conversion.

Note: When storing the scanned data
into SAF memory, the fax unit always
converts the data into mm format.

1: The machine converts the scanned
data or stored data in the SAF memory
to the format which was specified in the
set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
1-5
Not used
Available unit of resolution in which fax

messages are received
For the best performance, do not change
6-7
Bit 7
Bit 6
Unit
mm
the factory settings.

The setting determined by these bits is
informed to the transmitting terminal in
inch
the pre-message protocol exchange (in
mm and inch
the DIS/NSF frames).
Not used
Communication Switch 15 Not used (do not change the settings)
D629
106
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 3

No
0
Function
Not used
Optional G3 unit (G3-2)

1
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Comments
Change this bit to 1 when installing the first

optional G3 unit.
Not used
This switch enables the G3-2.
Select PSTN connection
0: Off, no connection
0: Off
1: Recognizes and enables G3-2.
1: On
This switch can be used only after G3-2 has been

installed.
4-7
Not used

No
Function
SEP reception
0: Polling transmission to another maker's
0: Disabled
machine using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal
1: Enabled
is disabled.
SUB reception
0: Confidential reception to another maker's
0: Disabled
machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled
disabled.
PWD reception
2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-4
SM
Comments
Not used
0: Disables features that require PWD

(Password) signal reception.
107
D629
Bit Switches - 3
PSTN dial-in routing setting

5
0: OFF
numbers in the PSTN dial-in line and transfers

received data from each PSTN dial-in number to
1: ON
1: The machine sets multiple PSTN dial-in
each address.
Not used
Action when there is no box

with an F-code that matches
7
the received SUB code

0: Disconnect the line
Change this setting when the customer requires.
1: Receive the message

(using normal reception mode)

No
0-4
Function
Not used
IP-Fax dial-in routing selection
1: Transfers received data to each IP-Fax dial-in
0: Off
number.
1: On
IP-Fax dial-in number is a 4-digit number.
PSTN 2 dial-in routing

6
0: Off
1: On
PSTN 3 dial-in routing
0: Off
1: On
D629
Comments
Enables or disables dial-in routing for the PSTN 2

connection.
Enables or disables dial-in routing for the PSTN 3

connection.
108
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 3

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B (SP No. 1-104-028)

No
Function
Comments
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
Extension access code (0 to 7)

0-7
to turn V.8 protocol On/Off

0: On
procedure, set this bit to "1" to disable V.8.

Example: If "0" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects "0" as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
1: Off
protocol. (Alternatively, if "3" is the PSTN access

code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C (SP No. 1-104-029)

No
Function
Comments
Refer to communication switch 1B.
0-1
Extension access code (8 and
Example: If "8" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
to 1. When the machine detects "8" as the first
0: On
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
1: Off
protocol. (If "9" is the PSTN access code, use bit

1.)
2-7
Not used
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
109
D629
Bit Switches - 4
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 (SP No. 1-105-001)

No
Function
Comments
Monitor speaker during

communication (tx and rx)
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all
0
1
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting
Disabled
Up to Phase B
All the time
Not used
Monitor speaker during memory

2
transmission
3-7
D629
Not used
through the communication.

(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to
phase B in the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor
speaker is on all through the
communication. Make sure that you reset
these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during

memory transmission.
110
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 4
G3 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-105-002)

No
0-3
Function
Comments
Not used

1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte
DIS frame length
will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
communication problems with PC-based faxes

which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Not used
Forbid CED/AMsam output
Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off),
0: Off
unless communication problem is caused by a
1: On (Forbid output)
CED or ANSam transmission.
Not used
G3 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-105-003)

No
Function
Comments
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
G3 protocol mode used
only communicate with machines that send
0: Standard and non-standard
T.30-standard frames only.
1: Standard only
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in

non-standard mode communication)
1-6
SM
Not used
Short preamble
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
111
D629
Bit Switches - 4
G3 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-105-004)

No
Function
DIS detection number

0
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
Not Used
Comments
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the
same DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
line.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
V.8 protocol
2
0: Disabled
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition
1: Enabled
is always bad enough to slow down the

data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower.
ECM frame size

3
0: 256 bytes
Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.
1: 64 bytes
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
CTC transmission conditions
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
0: After one PPR signal

4
received
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
D629
112
SM
Bit Switches - 4
page after receiving a negative

code (RTN or PIN)
Not used

This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in
Select detection of reverse

7
before sending the next page if a negative code is

received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6
1: The machine's tx modem rate will fall back
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Modem rate used for the next
ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3
polarity in ringing
ringing). Do not change this setting
0: Off
0: No detection
1: On
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)
G3 Switch 04 (SP No. 1-105-005)

No
Function
Comments
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
0-3
Training error detection
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
threshold
below this threshold, the machine informs the

sender that training has succeeded.
4-7
Not used
G3 Switch 05 (SP No. 1-105-006)

No
Function
Comments
Initial Tx modem rate (kbps)

Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
These bits set the initial starting modem

kbps
rate for transmission.

Use the dedicated transmission
0-3
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
12.0
parameters if you need to change this for

specific receivers.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled
manually.
SM
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
113
D629
Bit Switches - 4
14.4
16.8
19.2
21.6
24.0
26.4
28.8
31.2
33.6
Other settings - Not used

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps.
Bit 5
Bit 4
Setting
V.29
V.17
V.34
Not used
4-5
6-7
D629
These bits set the initial modem type for

9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate
Not used
is set at these speeds.
114
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 4
G3 Switch 06 (SP No. 1-105-007)

No
Function
Comments
Initial Rx modem rate(kbps)

Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
kbps
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
12.0
14.4
16.8
selected, V.8 protocol should be
19.2
disabled manually.

rate for reception.
0-3
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose

problems during reception.
Cross reference
1
21.6
24.0
26.4
28.8
31.2
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
SM
115
D629
Bit Switches - 4
Modem types available for reception

The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available
modem type for the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually.
Cross reference
4-7
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Types
V.27ter
V.27ter, V.29
V.27ter, V.29, V.33
V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33
V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V33, V.34
G3 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-105-008)

No
Function
Comments
PSTN cable equalizer
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss
(tx mode: Internal)
at higher frequencies because of the
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting
None
Low
Medium
High
length of wire between the modem and

the telephone exchange.
parameters for specific receivers.
0-1
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one

or more of the following symptoms
occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
This setting is not effective in

V.34 communications.
D629
116
SM
(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3
Bit 2
Setting
None
Low
Medium
High
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 4

2-3
occurs.
Communication error with error codes
such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.


4
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)

0: Disabled
Keep this bit at "1".
1: Enabled
5
Not used

0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM
Parameter selection for dial tone

6
detection
0: Normal parameter
1: Specific parameter
for dial tone detection.

1: This uses the specific parameter
adjusted with SRAM (69ECBEH 69ECDEH). Select this if the dial tone
cannot be detected when the "Normal
parameter: 0" is selected.
SM
Not used
117
D629
Bit Switches - 4
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0A (SP No. 1-105-011)

No
Function
Comments
Maximum allowable carrier drop

during image data reception
0-1
Bit 1
Bit 0
Value (ms)
200
These bits set the acceptable modem

carrier drop time.
Try a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
400
800
Not used
frequent.
Select cancellation of high-speed RX
This switch setting determines if
if carrier signal lost while receiving
high-speed receiving ends if the carrier
0: Off
signal is lost when receiving during
1: On
non-ECM mode
Not used

This bit set the maximum interval
Maximum allowable frame interval

4
during image data reception.

0: 5 s 1: 13 s
between EOL (end-of-line) signals and

the maximum interval between ECM
frames from the other end.
Try using a longer setting if error code
0-21 is frequent.
D629
Not used
118
SM
Bit Switches - 4
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
When the sending terminal is controlled

by a computer, there may be a delay in
receiving page data after the local
machine accepts set-up data and sends
Reconstruction time for the first line in CFR. This is outside the T.30
6
receive mode
recommendation. But, if this delay
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the

sending machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line
should come within 5 s of CFR.
Not used
G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E (SP No. 1-105-015)

No
Function
Comments
Set CNG send time interval

Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the
3-second CNG interval.
3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms
0-7
High order bit
3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= FF (2250

ms)
00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
Low order bit
3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= 0F (3700

ms)
SM
119
D629
Bit Switches - 4
G3 Switch 0F (SP No. 1-105-016)

No
Function
Comments
Alarm when an error occurred

0
in Phase C or later
If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
0: Disabled
error communication, change this bit to "1".
1: Enabled
Alarm when the handset is
1
off-hook at the end of
If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
communication
handset is off-hook at the end of fax
0: Disabled
communication, change this bit to "1".
1: Enabled
2-3
Not used
Sidaa manual calibration
setting
0: Off
1: On
5-7
D629
Not used
1: manually calibrates for communication with a

line whose current change occurs such as an
optical fiber line.
120
SM
4.7.1 G3-2 AND G3-3 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.
G3-2 Switch 00 (SP No. 1-106-001)

No
Function
Comments
Monitor speaker during

communication (tx and rx)
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all
0
1
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting
Disable
Up to Phase B
All the time
Not used
Monitor speaker during memory

2
transmission
3-7
SM
Not used
through the communication.

(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to
phase B in the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor
speaker is on all through the
communication. Make sure that you reset
these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during

memory transmission.
121
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 5
Bit Switches - 5
G3-2 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-106-002)

No
0-3
Function
Not used
Comments
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte
DIS frame length
will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
communication problems with PC-based faxes

which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Not used
Forbid CED/AMsam output
Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off),
0: Off
unless communication problem is caused by a
1: On (Forbid output)
CED or ANSam transmission.
Not used
G3-2 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-106-003)

No
Function
Comments
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
G3 protocol mode used
only communicate with machines that send
0: Standard and non-standard
T.30-standard frames only.
1: Standard only
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in

non-standard mode communication)
1-6
D629
Not used
Short preamble
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
122
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 5
G3-2 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-106-004)

No
Function
DIS detection number

0
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
Not Used
Comments
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the
same DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
line.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
V.8 protocol
2
0: Disabled
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition
1: Enabled
is always bad enough to slow down the

data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower.
ECM frame size

3
0: 256 bytes
Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.
1: 64 bytes
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
CTC transmission conditions
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
0: After one PPR signal

4
received
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)
Ntransmit = Number of transmitted frames

Nresend = Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
SM
123
D629
Bit Switches - 5
Modem rate used for the next

5
page after receiving a negative

code (RTN or PIN)
Not used

This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in
Select detection of reverse

7
before sending the next page if a negative code is

received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6
1: The machine's tx modem rate will fall back
ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3
polarity in ringing
ringing). Do not change this setting
0: Off
0: No detection
1: On
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)
G3-2 Switch 04 (SP No. 1-106-005)

No
Function
Comments
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
0-3
Training error detection
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
threshold
below this threshold, the machine informs the

sender that training has succeeded.
4-7
Not used
G3-2 Switch 05 (SP No. 1-106-006)

No
Function
Comments
Initial Tx modem rate (kbps)

Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

kbps
rate for transmission.

0-3
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
12.0
parameters if you need to change this for

specific receivers.
selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled
manually.
D629
Cross reference
124
SM
14.4
16.8
19.2
21.6
24.0
26.4
28.8
31.2
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps.
Bit 5
Bit 4
Setting
V.29
V.17
V.34
Not used
4-5
6-7
SM
These bits set the initial modem type for

9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate
Not used
is set at these speeds.
125
D629
Bit Switches - 5
G3-2 Switch 06 (SP No. 1-106-007)

No
Function
Comments
Initial Rx modem rate(kbps)

Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
kbps
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
12.0
14.4
16.8
selected, V.8 protocol should be
19.2
disabled manually.

rate for reception.
0-3
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose

problems during reception.
Cross reference
1
21.6
24.0
26.4
28.8
31.2
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2

Modem types available for reception
The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available
modem type for the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually.
4-7
Cross reference
D629
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Types
V.27ter
126
SM
V.27ter
V.27ter
V.27ter
V.27ter
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 5
SM
127
D629
Bit Switches - 5
G3-2 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-106-008)

No
Function
Comments
(tx mode: Internal)
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting
None
Low
Medium
High

parameters for specific receivers.
0-1

occurs.
Communication error

(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3
Bit 2
Setting
None
Low
Medium
High

2-3
occurs.
Communication error with error codes
such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.


4
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)

0: Disabled
Keep this bit at "1".
1: Enabled
D629
128
SM
Bit Switches - 5
Not used

Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
5-7
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0A (SP No. 1-106-011)

No
Function
Comments
Maximum allowable carrier drop

during image data reception
0-1
Bit 1
Bit 0
Value (ms)
200
400
800
Not used
These bits set the acceptable modem

carrier drop time.
Try a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.
Select cancellation of high-speed RX
This switch setting determines if
if carrier signal lost while receiving
high-speed receiving ends if the carrier
0: Off
signal is lost when receiving during
1: On
non-ECM mode
Not used

This bit set the maximum interval
Maximum allowable frame interval

4
during image data reception.

0: 5 s 1: 13 s
between EOL (end-of-line) signals and

the maximum interval between ECM
frames from the other end.
Try using a longer setting if error code
0-21 is frequent.
SM
Not used
129
D629
Bit Switches - 5
When the sending terminal is controlled

by a computer, there may be a delay in
receiving page data after the local
machine accepts set-up data and sends
Reconstruction time for the first line in CFR. This is outside the T.30
6
receive mode
recommendation. But, if this delay
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the

sending machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line
should come within 5 s of CFR.
Not used
G3-2 Switch 0B- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0C- Not used (do not change the settings)
4.7.2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES

The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these settings.
4.7.3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these settings.
D629
130
SM
4.8.1 IP FAX SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-111-001)

No.
0
Function
Not used
IP Fax Transport
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
Comments
Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
Selects single data port.
IP Fax double ports (single data

3
port) selection
Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
IP Fax Gatekeeper
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
Enables/disables the gatekeeper for IP-Fax.
Reverses the T30 bit signal.
When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does

6
IP Fax max bit rate setting
not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
0: Not affected, 1: Affected
When "1" is selected, the max bit rate

affects the value of the DIS/DCS.
SM
131
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 6
Bit Switches - 6
When "0" is selected, fax data is received

without checking the telephone number.
IP Fax received telephone number
7
confirmation
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation
When "1" is selected, fax data is received

only when confirming that the telephone
number from the sender matches the
registered telephone number in this
machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is
disconnected.

No.
Function
Comments
IP Fax delay level setting

Selects the acceptable delay level.
Level 0 is the highest quality
Default is "0000" (level 0).
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
0-3
Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary
4-7
IP Fax preamble wait time setting
switch combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).
D629
132
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 6

No.
Function
Comments
When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting

0
0: Maker code setting

1: Internal bit switch setting
method is decided by the maker code.

When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
IP Fax transmission speed setting

1
0: Modem speed
1: No limitation
SIP transport setting

2
0: TCP
1: UDP
Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax

communication.
This bit switch sets the transport that has

priority for receiving IP Fax data.
This function is activated only when the
sender has both TCP and UDP.
CCM connection
When "1" is selected, only the connection
0: No CCM connection
call message with H.323 or no tunneled
1: CCM connection
H.245 is transmitted via CCM.

0: This answers the INVITE message from
Message reception selection from

4
non-registered SIP server

0: Answer
1: Not answer
the SIP server not registered for the

machine.
1: This does not receive the INVITE
message from the SIP server not registered
for the machine and send a refusal
message.
0: This does not limit the type of the image
ECM communication setting

5
0: No limit for image compression

1: Limit for image compression
compression with ECM communication.

1: When the other end machine is Ciscco,
this permits the image compression other
than JBIG or MMR with ECM
communication.
6-7
SM
Not used
133
D629
Bit Switches - 6

No.
Function
Effective field limitation for G3
standard function information

0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
Comments
Limits the effective field for standard G3

function information.
Switching between G3 standard

1
and G3 non standard
Enables/disables switching between G3
0: Enable switching
standard and G3 non-standard.
1: G3 standard only
2
Not used
ECM frame size selection at

3
transmitting
Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
DIS detection times for echo
4
prevention
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
Sets the number of times for DIS to detect

echoes.
When "0" is selected, the transmission

5
CTC transmission selection
condition is decided by error frame
0: PPRx1
numbers.
1: PPRx4
When "1" is selected, the transmission

condition is based on the ITU-T method.
Shift down setting at receiving

6
negative code
0: OFF, 1: ON
D629
Not used
Selects whether to shift down when

negative codes are received.
134
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 6

No.
Function
Comments
0-3
TCF error threshold
4-7
Not used
Sets the TCF error threshold level. [00 to 0f]

The default is "1111" (0fH).

No.
Function
Comments
Modem bit rate setting for transmission

(kbps)
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
kbps
2.4
4.8
transmission. The default is "0110"
7.2
(14.4K bps).
9.6
12.0
14.4
Sets the modem bit rate for

0-3
Modem setting for transmission

Bit 5
Bit 4
Types
V29
V17
Not used
Not used
Sets the modem type for
4-5
6-7
SM
transmission.
The default is "00" (V29).
Not used
135
D629
Bit Switches - 6

No.
0-3
Function
Comments
Modem bit rate setting for reception

Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Modem setting for reception
Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
4-7
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Types
V.27ter
V.27ter, V.29
V.27ter, V.29, V.33
V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33

No.
Function
Comments
TSI information
Adds or does not add TSI information to
0: Not added, 1: Added
NSS(S).
DCN transmission setting at T1

1
timeout
Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
0: Not transmitted
timeout.
1: Transmitted
2
Not used
Hang up setting at DIS reception

3
disabled
Sets whether the machine disconnects after
0: No hang up
DIS reception.
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
D629
Number of times for training
Selects the number of times training is done
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
at the same bit rate.
136
SM
Bit Switches - 6
no CSI registration
When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted
all spaces.
1: Transmitted
6-7
When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Space CSI transmission setting at
Not used

No.
Function
Comments
T1 timer adjustment
Bit 1
Bit 0
35 s
Adjusts the T1 timer.
40 s
The default is "00" (35 seconds).
50 s
60 s
0-1
T4 timer adjustment
Bit 3
Bit 2
3s
3.5 s
4s
5s
2-3
Adjust the T4 timer.

T0 timer adjustment
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets
Bit 5
Bit 4
the interval between "setup" data

75 s
4-5
transmission and T.38 phase decision. If

your destination return is late on the
120 s
network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
180 s
longer interval timer.

SM
240 s
137
D629
Bit Switches - 6
6-7
Not used

No.
Function
Comments
Network I/F setting for SIP

0
connection
Selects the connection type (IPV4 or IPV6)
0: IPv4
to connect to the SIP server.
1: IPv6.
0: The I/F setting for fax communication
Network I/F setting for Fax
follows the setting for SIP server
communication
connection.
0: Same setting as SIP server
1: The negotiation between the SIP server
connection
and the device decides whether IPv4 or
1: Automatic setting
IPv6 is used for the I/F setting for fax

communication.
0: Disables the record-route function of the
Record-route setting
2
SIP server.
0: Disable
1: Enables the record-route function of the
1: Enable
SIP server.
re-INVITE transmission delay timer

setting
Bit 4
Bit 3
No delay
1 sec
2 sec
3 sec
This changes the interval for transmit

3-4
5-7
D629
Not used.
re-INVITE after receiving the ACK message

transmitted by T.38 device.
138
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit Switches - 6
IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
139
D629
NCU Parameters
4.9 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the
machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each
country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some
can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104
and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in
hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from "5" to "6" (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the settings for the first
optional G3 interface unit and from "5" to "7" (e.g. 680700) for the settings for the second
optional G3 interface unit.
Address
Function
Country/Area code for NCU parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this
address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country
Decimal
Hex
France
00
00
Germany
01
UK
Decimal
Hex
Asia
18
12
01
Japan
19
13
02
02
Hong Kong
20
14
Italy
03
03
South Africa
21
15
Austria
04
04
Australia
22
16
Belgium
05
05
New Zealand
26
17
Denmark
06
06
Singapore
24
18
Finland
07
07
Malaysia
25
19
Ireland
08
08
China
26
1A
Norway
09
09
Taiwan
27
1B
/Area
680500
D629
Country
140
/Area
SM
NCU Parameters
Function
Sweden
10
0A
Korea
28
1C
Switzerland
11
0B
Brazil
29
1D
Portugal
12
0C
Turkey
32
20
Holland
13
0D
Greece
33
21
Spain
14
0E
Hungary
34
22
Israel
15
0F
Czech
35
23
USA
17
11
Poland
36
24
Address
Function
680501
Line current detection time
680502
Line current wait time
680503
Line current drop detect time
680504
Unit
680506
disabled.
20 ms
Line current is not

detected if 680501
contains FF.
PSTN dial tone frequency upper

If both addresses
limit (high byte)

PSTN dial tone frequency upper
contain FF(H), tone

detection is disabled.
limit (low byte)

PSTN dial tone frequency lower
If both addresses
limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
680507
Remarks
Line current detection is
Hz (BCD)
680505
PSTN dial tone frequency lower
contain FF(H), tone

limit (low byte)
680508
PSTN dial tone detection time
If 680508 contains
680509
PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
FF(H), the machine
68050A
68050B
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Address
PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
20 ms
pauses for the pause

time (address 68050D /
PSTN dial tone continuous tone
68050E).
time
Italy: See Note 2.
141
D629
NCU Parameters
Address
68050C
Function
Unit
Remarks
PSTN dial tone permissible drop

time
68050D
PSTN wait interval (LOW)
68050E
PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
68050F
680510
PSTN ring-back tone detection
20 ms
time
PSTN ring-back tone off detection
time
Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
PSTN detection time for silent

680511
period after ring-back tone

detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent
680512
period after ring-back tone

detected (HIGH)
680513
PSTN busy tone frequency upper

If both addresses
limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
680514
680515
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)

PSTN busy tone frequency lower
If both addresses
limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
680516
680517
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
680519
D629
contain FF(H), tone

limit (low byte)

PABX dial tone frequency upper
If both addresses
limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
680518
contain FF(H), tone
PABX dial tone frequency upper
contain FF(H), tone

limit (low byte)

PABX dial tone frequency lower
Hz (BCD)
limit (high byte)
142
If both addresses
contain FF(H), tone
SM
NCU Parameters
68051A
Function
Unit
PABX dial tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
68051B
PABX dial tone detection time
68051C
PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)
68051D
PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
68051E
68051F
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Address
If 68051B contains FF,

the machine pauses for
the pause time (680520 /
PABX dial tone continuous tone

20 ms
time
680521).
PABX dial tone permissible drop

time
680520
PABX wait interval (LOW)
680521
PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522
PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms
If both addresses
PABX ringback tone off detection
contain FF(H), tone
680523
time
20 ms
PABX detection time for silent

680524
period after ringback tone
20 ms
If both addresses
detected (LOW)
contain FF(H), tone

PABX detection time for silent
680525
period after ringback tone
20 ms
detected (HIGH)
680526
PABX busy tone frequency upper

If both addresses
limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
680527
680528
PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)

PABX busy tone frequency lower
If both addresses
limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
680529
SM
contain FF(H), tone
PABX busy tone frequency lower
contain FF(H), tone

limit (low byte)
143
D629
NCU Parameters
Address
Function
68052A
Busy tone ON time: range 1
68052B
Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C
68052D
68052E
68052F
680530
680531
680532
Unit
Remarks
20 ms
20 ms
Busy tone continuous tone

detection time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or
OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance ()
680533
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
680534
International dial tone frequency

If both addresses
upper limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
680535
680536
upper limit (low byte)

If both addresses
lower limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
680537
680538
D629
contain FF(H), tone
contain FF(H), tone

lower limit (low byte)

International dial tone detection
20 ms
time
144
If 680538 contains FF,

SM
NCU Parameters
680539
68053A
68053B
68053C
68053D
Function
Unit
Remarks
International dial tone reset time
the pause time (68053D
(LOW)
/ 68053E).
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Address
Belgium: See Note 2.
International dial tone reset time

(HIGH)
International dial tone continuous
tone time
International dial tone permissible
drop time
International dial wait interval
(LOW)
68053E
68053F
International dial wait interval

(HIGH)
Country dial tone upper frequency
If both addresses
limit (HIGH)
contain FF(H), tone

680540
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (LOW)
Hz (BCD)
680541
Country dial tone lower frequency

If both addresses
limit (HIGH)
contain FF(H), tone

680542
680543
680544
680545
680546
680547
SM
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone detection time
If 680543 contains FF,
Country dial tone reset time

20 ms
(LOW)

the pause time (680548 /
680549).
Country dial tone reset time

(HIGH)
Country dial tone continuous tone
time
Country dial tone permissible drop
time
145
20 ms
D629
NCU Parameters
Address
Function
680548
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680549
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Unit
Time between opening or closing

68054A
the DO relay and opening the
Remarks
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

1 ms
OHDI relay
SP2-103-012
(parameter 11).
See Note 3.
68054B
Break time for pulse dialing
1 ms
SP2-103-013
(parameter 12).
See Note 3.
68054C
Make time for pulse dialing
1 ms
SP2-103-014
(parameter 13).
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
Time between final OHDI relay

68054D
SP2-103-015
closure and DO relay opening or
1 ms
closing
(parameter 14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
68054E
See Note 3 and 8.
Minimum pause between dialed
SP2-103-016
digits (pulse dial mode)
(parameter 15).
20 ms
68054F
680550
SP2-103-017
Time waited when a pause is
(parameter 16). See
entered at the operation panel
Note 3.
SP2-103-018
DTMF tone on time
(parameter 17).
1 ms
680551
680552
D629
SP2-103-019
DTMF tone off time
(parameter 18).
Tone attenuation level of DTMF
-N x 0.5
signals while dialing
3.5 dBm
146
SP2-103-020
(parameter 19).
See Note 5.
SM
NCU Parameters
Function
Unit
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Address
SP2-103-021
(parameter 20).
Tone attenuation value difference

680553
between high frequency tone and

low frequency tone in DTMF
The setting must be less

-dBm x 0.5
than 5dBm, and should

not exceed the setting at
signals
680552h above.
See Note 5.
680554
680555
680556
680557
680558
680559
68055A
68055B
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation
-N x 0.5
level after dialling
3.5 dBm
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation
-dBm x 0.5
level after dialling
Not used
SM
(parameter 21). See

Note 5.
See Note 5
Do not change the

settings.
Time between 68054Dh (NCU
This parameter takes
parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU 1 ms
effect when the country
parameter 15)
code is set to France.
Not used
Grounding time (ground start
20 ms
mode)
Break time (flash start mode)
1 ms
Do not change the

setting.
The Gs relay is closed
for this interval.
The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
International dial access code

For a code of 100:
(High)
BCD
68055C
SP2-103-022
International dial access code
68055B - F1
68055C - 00
(Low)
147
D629
NCU Parameters
Address
Function
Unit
Remarks
This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code.
If this address contains
68055D
PSTN access pause time
20 ms
FF[H], the pause time

stored in address
68054F is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm
68055E
Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm
cadence detection enable flags
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.
68055F
To
Not used
Long distance call prefix (HIGH)
BCD
680564
680565
Do not change the

settings.
For a code of 0:
680565 FF
680566
Long distance call prefix (LOW)
BCD
Not used
680567
to
680571
680572
680573
680574
680575
D629
680566 - FF
Do not change the

settings.
Acceptable ringing signal
SP2-103-003
frequency: range 1, upper limit
(parameter 02).
SP2-103-004
frequency: range 1, lower limit
1000/ N
(parameter 03).
(Hz).
SP2-103-005
frequency: range 2, upper limit
(parameter 04).
SP2-103-006
frequency: range 2, lower limit
(parameter 05).
148
SM
NCU Parameters
Function
Unit
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Address
SP2-103-007
680576
Number of rings until a call is
detected
(parameter 06).
The setting must not be
zero.
680577
680578
680579
See Note 4.
Minimum required length of the
20 ms
first ring
SP2-103-008
(parameter 07).
Minimum required length of the
20 ms
second and subsequent rings

Ringing signal detection reset time
SP2-103-009
(parameter 08).
SP2-103-010
(LOW)
(parameter 09).
20 ms
68057A
Ringing signal detection reset time
SP2-103-011 (parameter
(HIGH)
10).
68057B
to
Not used
680580
Do not change the

settings.
Interval between dialing the last

digit and switching the Oh relay
680581
over to the external telephone
20 ms
Factory setting: 500 ms
when dialing from the operation

panel in handset mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
680582
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used
SM
149
D629
NCU Parameters
Address
Function
Unit
680583
To
Not used
6805A0
6805A1
6805A3
6805A5
6805A6
Acceptable CED detection
6805A8
frequency upper limit (low byte)

If both addresses
frequency lower limit (high byte)

contain FF(H), tone

frequency lower limit (low byte)

20 ms 20
CED detection time
ms
Acceptable CNG detection

If both addresses
frequency upper limit (high byte)

contain FF(H), tone

frequency upper limit (low byte)

If both addresses
frequency lower limit (high byte)

BCD (Hz)
6805A9
contain FF(H), tone

BCD (Hz)
6805A7
settings.
If both addresses
frequency upper limit (high byte)
BCD (Hz)
6805A4
Do not change the

BCD (Hz)
6805A2
Remarks
contain FF(H), tone

frequency lower limit (low byte)

Do not change the
6805AA
Not used
6805AB
CNG on time
20 ms
6805AC
CNG off time
20 ms
6805AD
D629
setting.
The data is coded in the
Number of CNG cycles required
for detection
same way as address

680533.
150
SM
NCU Parameters
6805AE
Function
Unit
Do not change the
Not used
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Address
settings.
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805AF
(800Hz) detection frequency

If both addresses
upper limit (high byte)

Hz (BCD)
6805B0
contain FF(H), tone

(800Hz) detection frequency

upper limit (low byte)
6805B1
(800Hz) detection frequency lower

If both addresses
limit (high byte)

Hz(BCD)
6805B2
contain FF(H), tone

(800Hz) detection frequency lower

limit (low byte)
6805B3
6805B4
6805B5
6805B6
6805B7
6805B8
6805B9
6805BD
SM
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short

protocol tone
20 ms
SP2-103-002
PSTN: Tx level from the modem
-N 3 dBm
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB)
level
See Note 7.
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB)
level
See Note 7.
PABX: Tx level from the modem
- dBm
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission

level
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
Modem turn-on level (incoming
(parameter 01).
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
-37-0.5N
signal detection level)
(dBm)
151
D629
NCU Parameters
Address
6805BE to
6805C6
Function
Unit
Not used
Remarks
Do not change the
settings.
Bits 0 to 3 Not used

6805C7
Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump
0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 Not used.

6805C8 to
6805D9
6805DA
Not used
T.30 T1 timer
1s
Do not change the

settings.
1: Maximum wait time

for post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can
6805E0 bit Maximum wait time for post
0: 12 s
be changed to 30 s.
1: 30 s
Change this bit to 1 if
message
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
Bits 0 and 1 DCV (TIP/RING) Voltage
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 3.1 V
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 3.2 V
Bit 1:1, Bit 0: 0 = 3.35 V
Bit 1:1, Bit 0: 1 = 3.5 V
Bits 2 and 3 MINI (minimum loop electric current)
6805E3
Bit 2:0, Bit 3: 0 = 10 mA

Bit 2:0, Bit 2: 1 = 12 mA
Bit 2:1, Bit 3: 0 = 14 mA
Bit 2:1, Bit 3: 1 = 16 mA
Bits 6 and 7 ACIM (AC impedance)
Bit 7:0, Bit 6: 0 Bit 5:0, Bit 4: 0= 600
Bit 7:0, Bit 6: 0 Bit 5:1, Bit 4: 0= TBR21
D629
152
SM
NCU Parameters
Function
Unit
Remarks
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Address
Bit 0 OHS (on hook speed)

0: OHS=0
1: OHS=1
Bit 1 SQ (spark quench)
0: SQ=00
1: SQ=11
Bit 2 RZ (call signal Impedance)
0: RZ=0 (high)
1: RZ=1 (low)
Bit 3 RT (call signal detection level)
0: RT=0 (low)
6805E4
1: RT=1 (high)
Bit 4 ILIM (DC limitation)
0: ILIM=0 (CTR 21)
1: ILIM=1 (other than CTR 21)
Bit 5 FILTER
0: FILTER=0 (around 5Hz)
1: FILTER=1 (around 200Hz)
Bits 6 to 7 Calibration in off hook state
Bit 6:0, Bit 7: 0 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms, off hook to MCAL: 1000 ms
Bit 6:1, Bit 7: 0 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms, off hook to MCAL: 500 ms
Bit 6:0, Bit 7: 1 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms (no MCAL)
Bit 6:1, Bit 7: 1 = off hook to ACAL:8 ms (no MCAL)
Bits 0 to 6 Not used
6805E5
Bits 7 Energy saving for DSP, COMBLK, SiDAA

0: Does not save energy
1: Saves energy
SM
153
D629
NCU Parameters
NOTES
1.
If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2.
Italy and Belgium only

RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3.
Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is
used, the machine automatically compensates.
4.
The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this
parameter.
5.
The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.

The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone:
0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone:
0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
6.
N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and Di
opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di
closing
7.
Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol)
refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the
setting at 6805B6h.
8.
68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the
period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.
D629
154
SM
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated
to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminals fax
number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
4.10.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1.
Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2.
Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key Operator>
Address Book Management).
3.
Select the address book that you want to program.
4.
For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail", then press
"Start". Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green.
5.
The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to
change.
6.
To scroll through the parameter switches, either:
7.
Select the next switch: press "Next" or Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct
switch is displayed. Then go back to step 6.
8.
After the setting is changed, press "OK".
9.
After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
SM
155
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Dedicated Transmission Parameters
4.10.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Tx level
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
If communication with a particular

remote terminal often contains
errors, the signal level may be
0-4
inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for

communications with that terminal
until the results are better.
If the setting is "Disabled", the NCU
parameter 01 setting is used.
D629
15
Disabled
156
Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Use a higher setting if there is signal

loss at higher frequencies because
of the length of wire between the
modem and the telephone exchange
when calling the number stored in
this Quick/Speed Dial.
5-7
Cable equalizer
Also, try using the cable equalizer if
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None
one or more of the following
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low
symptoms occurs.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium
Communication error with error
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High
codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled
Modem rate fallback occurs

frequently.
Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit

switch setting is used.
Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Initial Tx modem rate

Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
bps
Not used
2400
4800
7200
9600
If training with a particular remote terminal

always takes too long, the initial modem rate
may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx
0-3
modem rate using these bits.

For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch
04 bit 4 must be changed to 0.
Do not use settings other than listed

on the left. If the setting is
SM
12000
14400
16800
"Disabled", the bit switch setting is

used.
157
D629
19200
21600
24000
26400
28800
31200
33600
Disabled
Other settings: Not used

4-7 Not used
Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
If "inch only" is selected on the machine uses
Inch-mm conversion before tx
inch-based resolutions for scanning, the printed
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0
copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if
= Inch-mm conversion
that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
0-1 available
If the setting is "Inch-mm conversion available ",
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only
Inch-mm conversion become effective to the
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Not used
special senders.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Disabled
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is

used.
DIS/NSF detection method

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0
= First DIS or NSF
2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1
= Second DIS or NSF
D629
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are

interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
used.
158
SM
V.8 protocol
4
0: Off
1: Disabled
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
If transmissions to a specific destination always

end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
used.
Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are
5
in transmit mode
informed to the other terminal during transmission.
0: MH only
1: Disabled
used.
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
ECM during transmission
the (0, 0) setting.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off

6-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On
V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
are automatically disabled if ECM is
disabled.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch

setting is used.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM
159
D629
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
MH Compression mode
0
for e-mail attachments
Switches MH compression on and off for files
0: Off
attached to e-mails for sending.
1: On
MR Compression mode
1
Switches MR compression on and off for files
0: Off
1: On
MMR Compression mode
2
Switches MMR compression on and off for files
0: Off
1: On
3-6
Not used
Designates the bits to

reference for
7
compression method of
e-mail attachments
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
The "0" selection (default) references the settings for

Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.
D629
160
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Original width of e-mail

0
attachment: A4
Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
0: Off
A4.
1: On
1
attachment: B4
0: Off
B4.
1: On
2
attachment: A3
0: Off
A3.
1: On
3-6
Not used

reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
7
of e-mail attachments
Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.
SM
161
D629
Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Line resolution of e-mail

0
attachment: 200 x 100
Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
0: Off
200 x100.
1: On
1
0: Off
200 x 200.
1: On
2
0: Off
200 x 400.
1: On
3
Not used

4
0: Off
400 x 400.
1: On
5-6
Not used

reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
7
of e-mail attachments
Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores
the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.
D629
162
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
If the other ends have the addresses, which have
Full mode address
the full mode function flag ("0"), this machine
selection
determines them as full mode standard machines.
0: Full mode address
1: No full mode (simple
confirmation" to a message when transmitting.
mode)
This machine attaches the "demand of reception

This machine updates the reception capability to
the address book when receiving.
1-7
Not used
Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Directr transmission
0
selection to SMTP server
Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to
0: ON
SMTP server.
1: OFF
1-7
Not used

SM
163
D629
Service RAM Addresses
4.11 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only.
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
D629
164
SM
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)

Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include senders name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end,
toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06): Not used
SM
165
D629

Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1:
On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)
Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not receive)
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
D629
166
SM
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log)
up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is
pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Not used
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not
available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for
broadcasting 0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone,
0: displays Cannot detect original size. 1: Receives fax messages.
SM
167
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)

Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number
0: Off, 1: On

Bit 7: Japan only
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user parameter
list.) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E
bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off,
1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Setting
0 min.
1 min.
14 min.
15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
D629
168
SM
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when error
occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800E7(H) User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used
6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)
Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first
Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)
Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable, 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
SM
169
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not
used
6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C): Not used
6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D): Not used
6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not
used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type
0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4.
Folder
1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax
number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Redial interval when sending a backup file
Maximum number of redials when sending a backup file
6800F5-6800F8(H) - User parameter switch 37 (SWUSR_25)
Bit 0: Stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the machine is
sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2 and 3: Backup file is printed along with the TX communication failure report when a backup
file transmission failure occurs. 00: Do not print, 01: Print first page only, 10: Print whole file
Bit 4: Display the sender's information in the file name of documents that are forwarded to folder
destinations. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Limit the file names of documents that are forwarded to folder destinations to plain
characters only. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6 to 7: Not used
Bit 0: When memory space is insufficient, the machine prints and then deletes the oldest faxes,
creating memory space for storage of new faxes. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1 to 7: Not used
D629
170
SM
Rev. 11/15/2012
Bit 0 and 1: File format for files transmitted to e-mail addresses and folders registered as
forwarding, destinations of backup file transmission, receivers for Personal Box, or end receivers
for Transfer Box. 0: PDF 1: PDF/A
Bit 3: 0- Follow settings of received document (default), 1- Do not print

Bit 2, 4 to 7: Not used
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches Not used
680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number Not used
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) Not used
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
SM
171
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
6800FF(H) - User parameter switch 45 (SWUSR_2D)
If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a stop
code (00[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)

680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) Hour
680385(H) Minute
680386(H) Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used

680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
680406 to 68040A Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
D629
172
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)

680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume
680497(H) - Beeper volume
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)
6804A8(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)

68AFDA(H) - IP-Fax backup data 00 - 600 (H) - Not used
69A614(H) - Own e-mail address for internet fax (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A794(H) - User code for fax e-mail account (Max. 192 characters - ASCII)
69A854(H) Password for fax e-mail account (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A914(H) - Transmission mail size restriction for internet fax (Max. 4 bit)
69A918(H) - E-mail address for SMTP reception (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A998(H) Destination number for reception report e-mail (Max. 4 byte)
69FB40(H) to 69FDC0(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69FB40(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FBC0(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FC40(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FCC0(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FD40(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FDC0(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FE40(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FEC0(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FF40(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FFC0(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A0040H(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A00C0H(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)
6A1C7C(H) - Stand-by port number for H.323 connection
6A1C7E(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A1C80(H) - RAS port number
6A1C82(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A1C84(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
SM
173
D629
6A1C86(H) - Port number of SIP server

6A1C88(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A1C89(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A1C8A(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A1C8B(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6B9000 to 6B91FF(H) - Error code (Max. 512 byte)
6B9200 to 6BD61F - Reception results (Max. 17440 byte)
6BD620 to 6BDFA7 - Transmission error (Max. 2440 byte)
6BEBFE(H) - 6BEC1E (H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)
This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64, 0x04, 0xc8, 0x00]
6BEBFE(H) Dial tone detection frequency Upper limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06
6BEBFF(H) Dial tone detection frequency Upper Limit (Low)
6BEC00(H) Dial tone detection frequency Lower Limit (High)
6BEC01(H) Dial tone detection frequency Lower Limit (Low)
6BEC02(H) Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64
6BEC03 to 6BEC04 Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)
Defaults
Area
6BEC03
6BEC04
NA
F4
01
EU
F4
01
ASIA
F4
01
6BEC05(H) Dial tone detect judge time (20 ms)

Defaults: NA: 64, EU: 1B, ASIA: 32
6BEC06(H) Dial tone disconnect permission time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 11, EU: 0F, ASIA: 11
D629
174
SM
Overview
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

5.1 OVERVIEW
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the controller
board. Also, the FCU contains the ROM, SRAM and NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This allows full dual
access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory (used for image
rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400
dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM
175
D629
Boards
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base
copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3.5 (Fax Application Control Engine)
CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
DMA control
Clock generation
DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME2)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory: 4MB
Working memory: 4MB
Page memory: 8MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
D629
176
SM
Boards
4MB flash ROMs for system software storage
SRAM
The 512 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery.
Memory Back-up
A rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 12 hours.
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM, in
case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item
SW1
SM
Description
Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
177
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
ROM
Boards
5.2.2 SG3 BOARD
The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in combination with
the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board as the common SG-3 board.
This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the specifications of the SG3 board do not
change.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)
Controls the SG3 board.
CPU (RU30)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
DMA controller
JBIG
DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function
DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
D629
178
SM
Boards
FROM
1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
SDRAM
4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
SM
Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
179
D629
Video Data Path
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH

5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The IPU
processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
D629
180
SM
When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to
store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in page memory
before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses and/or
reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving terminal.
The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission. The
NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the DCR to the
QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is
installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the
PSTN-2 line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the page
memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit
(SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only
for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
SM
Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System switch 16 bit 1
181
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Video Data Path
Video Data Path
5.3.2 RECEPTION
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The data
goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will be
done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the IPU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends on the
telephone number dialled by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a different telephone
number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory, and
transferred to the IPU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
D629
182
SM
Fax Communication Features
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take place at the same
time through the two or three lines at once.
Option
Standard only
PSTN
(double)
SM
Combinations
G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) PSTN + PSTN

Extra G3 Interface Unit
Available protocol
Available Line Type
PSTN + PSTN +PSTN
183
G3 + G3
G3 + G3 +G3
D629
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPU video processes
the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and compresses
the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation will be done, the image is
rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU decompresses the
image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax application. The stored
documents in the document sever can be used for the fax transmission in many times. More than
one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be
transmitted.
When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
Up to 9,000 pages can be stored (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax application.
Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as "FAX001". But it is possible to
change the file name, user name and password.
Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
D629
184
SM
The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy application. The
storing time is longer than the copier storing.
When selecting "Print 1st page", the stored document will be reduced to A4 size.
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission
T.37 simple and full modes
This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532). The difference
between T.37 simple mode and full mode is as follows.
Function
T.37 Simple Mode
T.37 Full Mode

200 x100
Resolution
200 x 100
200 x 200
200 x 200
200 x 400
400 x 400 (if available)
RX Paper Width
A4
A4, B4, A3
RX Data Compression Method MH
MH (default), MR, MMR,

Image data transmission,
exchange of capability
Signals
Image data
information between the two
transmission only
terminals, and
acknowledgement of receipt of
fax messages
SM
185
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file.
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
Content
From
Mail address of the sender
Reply To
Destination requested for reply
To
Mail address of the destination
Bcc
Backup mail address
Subject
From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content Type
Content Transfer Encoding
Message Body
Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how
files are attached to e-mail messages)
Direct SMTP Transmission

Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP
server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.)
For example:
e-mail address:
[email protected]
SMTP server address:
gts.abcd.com
In this case, this feature destination e-mail address ([email protected]) is read as the SMTP server
address "gts.abcd.com", and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server.
D629
186
SM
These options are available for selection:
With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm
conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if Super
Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01.
The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are the
same as for G3 fax memory TX.
The default compression is TIFF-F format.
IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission

SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
Mail Reception
Three Types
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC

Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Reception
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is adjustable in the
range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
1.
The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server, and the
address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
2.
To enable SMTP reception: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be received with
SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX
record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
SM
187
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Selectable Options
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

1.
The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
2.
User Tools> Facsimile Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings
If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver mail from
designated senders, the machine's "Auth. E-mail RX" feature must be set (User Tools>
Facsimile Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings).
3.
If the "SMTP RX File Delivery Setting" is set to Off to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there is
mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with an error. (User Tools> Facsimile
Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings)
4.
If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail transmission is lost, and
the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report.
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited using
the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1.
Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
[email protected]
Matches and is delivered.
[email protected]
Does not match and is not delivered.
[email protected]
Does not match and is not delivered.
1.
Conditions
The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not match,
the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server responds with an
error. However, in this case an error report is not output.
If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail specifies a
delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.
D629
188
SM
Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the server to erase
the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about the error by
e-mail to the sender address (specified in the "From" or "Reply-to" field of the message). If there is
an incomplete received message in the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error notification after a
certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the following are detected:
1.
Unsupported MIME headers.

Supported types of MIME header
Header
Content-Type
Charset
Content-TransferEncoding
Supported Types
Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be
handled, and some garbage may appear in the data.
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2.
MIME decoding errors
3.
File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4.
Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF capacity is less
than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received when the
SAF capacity increases (for example, after substitute reception files have been printed). The error
handling method for this type of error is the same as for "Abnormal files".
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine operates in the
same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to "Abnormal files" above).
SM
189
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security: User Tools> System Settings> File
Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption (set to "On")
Transfer Request: Request By Mail

For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN
Fax Boards Transfer Request
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
Content
From
E-mail address of the requesting terminal
To
Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Bcc
Backup mail address
Subject
From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content-Type
Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Mail body (text part)
Message body
D629
RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)

RELAY: #01#*X#**01.
MIME-converted TIFF-F.
190
SM
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject, designating
the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
Subject and Level of Importance
You can enter a subject message with: TX Mode> Subject
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 128 characters. The subject can also be
prefixed with an "Confidential", "Urgent", "Please phone" or "Copy to corres. Section" notation.
- How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type -
Mail Type
Subject
Entry
Item 1
---
Item 2
Entry Condition
1. "CSI" ("RTI")
Fax Message No.
2. "RTI"
CSI not registered
3. "CSI"
RTI not registered
No Subject
Entry
Item 3
4. None
+
File No.
CSI, RTI not

registered
1. "CSI" ("RTI")
Normal:
Return Receipt
(dispatched).
Confirmation
of Reception
2. "RTI"
CSI not registered
You can select

"displayed" with IFAX
From
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.

3. "CSI"
RTI not registered
Error:
Return Receipt
4. None
Mail delivery,
RTI or CSI of
memory
the station
transfer,
designated
SMTP
From
CSI, RTI not registered (processed/error)
Mail delivery
Fax Message No. +
for delivery
File Number
receiving
RTI or CSI of
Mail sending from G3
and delivery
sender
memory
SM
191
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Mail Type
Item 1
Item 2
Mail address
of sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail error
notification
---
Item 3
Memory sending
SMTP receiving and

delivery (Off Ramp
Gateway)
Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
Items 1, 2, and 3 in the table above are in the Subject.

- Subjects Displayed on the PC -
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with: TX Mode> Text
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings> File
Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message
- Limitations on Entries -
Item
Maximum
Number of Lines
5 lines
Line Length
80 characters
Name Length
20 characters
D629
192
SM
Fax Boards E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or
not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1.
Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request (known as
MDN): TX Mode> Reception Notice
2.
Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3.
Send confirmation of mail reception
4.
Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party's machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below are met:
The other party's machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
The other party's machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1.
The "Disposition Notification To" field is in the received mail header (automatically inserted in
the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and
2.
Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15 [H])
Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows:
SM
Normal reception:
"Return Receipt (dispatched)" in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3)
"Return Receipt (displayed)" in the Subject line
Error:
"Return Receipt (processed/error)" in the Subject line
193
D629
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)
Handling Reports
- Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender's journal is
annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a "Q" in the Mode column.
- Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail receiver's
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an "A" in the Mode column.
- Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail sender's journal
about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with "OK" in the Result
column.
When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an "E" in the Result
column.
The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate communication. Its
arrival is only reported by the presence of "OK" or "E" in the Result column.
If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group destination; the
machine sends the mail to more than one location. See "How to set up Mail Delivery"), the
Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received. For example,
if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the
communication with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E, even if
subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination for the first
error only.
- Report Sample -
D629
194
SM
IP-Fax
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
5.5 IP-FAX
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX?
Fax Boards IP-FAX
5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT

TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with IPFAX SW 00 Bit
1.
UDP Related Switches
IP-Fax Switch 01
No.
Function
Comments
Select IP FAX Delay Level

Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Raise the level by selecting a higher
Bit 0
Level
setting if too many transmission errors

are occurring on the network.
If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network,
raise this setting on the T.30 machine.
0-3
Increasing the delay time allows the

recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the
number of redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets

Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
SM
195
D629
IP-Fax
5.5.3 SETTINGS
User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage, 0: No, 1: Yes
IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
D629
196
SM
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
6. SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1.1 FCU
Type:
Circuit:
Connection:
Desktop type transceiver

PSTN (max. 3ch.)
PABX
Direct couple
Book (Face down)
Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
Original Size:
(Single-sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method:
Flat bed, with CCD

G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) See Note1
Resolution:
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1

200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1
SM
Optional Expansion Memory required
197
D629
G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for

Transmission Time:
an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard

resolution
Data Compression:
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Protocol:
Group 3 with ECM
Modulation:
V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FSK)
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
Data Rate:
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate:
With ECM: 0 ms/line

Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Memory Capacity:
Page Memory
Standard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 16 MB (8 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 8 MB)
D629
198
SM
Capabilities of Programmable Items
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows the capabilities of each programmable items.
Item
Standard
Quick Dial
2000
Groups
100
Destination per Group
500
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall
500
Programs
100
Auto Document
Communication records for Journal stored in the memory
200
Specific Senders
30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the
Expansion Memory are installed.
SM
199
D629
Capabilities of Programmable Items
Memory Transmission
file
Without the
With the Expansion
Expansion Memory
Memory
400
400
1000
1000
320
2240
Maximum number of
page for memory
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission
(Note1)
Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard resolution,
the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
D629
200
SM
IFAX Specifications
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
6.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Local area network

Connectivity:
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base-T
IEEE802.11a/g, g (wireless LAN),
200 100 dpi (Standard resolution), 200 200 dpi (Detail
resolution), 200 400 dpi (Fine resolution)*1, 400 400 dpi (Super
Resolution:
Fine resolution)*1
To use 200 400 dpi and 400 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 2
and/or Bit 4 must be set to 1.
1 s (through a LAN to the server)

Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
Transmission
TTI: None
Time:
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi

Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Maximum Original Size: A3/DLT.
Document Size:
To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2

(A3) must be set to 1.
E-mail File
Format:
Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
Transmission:
Protocol:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
SM
201
D629
IFAX Specifications
1000 Mbps (1000 Base-T)

Data Rate:
100 Mbps (100base-Tx)

10 Mbps (10base-T)
Authentication
Method:
Remark:
SMTP-AUTH
POP before SMTP
A-POP
The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation.
Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also
be e-mail clients, or some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).
D629
202
SM
IP-FAX Specifications
Fax Option
Type 5002
(D629)
6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Local Area Network

Network:
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX
Gigabit Ethernet/1000 Base-T
IEEE802.11a/g, g (wireless LAN)
8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200x100dpi (standard character),
8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200x200dpi (detail character),
Scan line density:
8 x 15.4lines/mm (fine character: optional expansion memory

required),
16 x 15.4lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine character: optional
expansion memory required)
Maximum Original
A3 or 11" x 17" (DLT)
size:
Custom: 297mm x 1200mm (11.7 x 47.3)
Maximum scanning
size:
297mm x 1200mm (11.7 x 47.3)
Transmission
Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP
protocol:
communication, SIP (RFC 3261 compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible
machines:
IP-Fax compatible machines
Specify IP address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax

IP-Fax transmission
through a network.
function:
Also capable of sending faxes from a G3 fax connected to a

telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a
IP-Fax reception
network.
function:
Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a

telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
SM
203
D629
Fax Unit Configuration
6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
Component
Code
No.
FCU
3
D629
Included with fax unit
Speaker
Expansion Memory
Remarks
1
G578
CCU I/F Board
Optional
Included with optional G3 unit
Included with optional G3 unit
D629
SG3 Board
SG3 Board
D629
Optional
Handset Type C5502
D645
Optional (NA only)
D629
204
SM
D631
RT3020 - 1200-SHEET LCT
P ag e
Dat e

None
RT3020 - 1200-SHEET LCT (D631)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 COVERS ........................................................................................................1
1.1.1 REAR COVER ......................................................................................1
1.1.2 RIGHT DOOR .......................................................................................1
1.1.3 FRONT AND TOP COVERS ................................................................2
1.2 PAPER FEED ................................................................................................3
1.2.1 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ....................3
1.3 DRIVE ............................................................................................................4
1.3.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH........................................................................4
1.3.2 PAPER FEED MOTOR .........................................................................4
1.3.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR..............................................................................5
1.4.1 MAIN BOARD .......................................................................................6
1.4.2 LCT SET SWITCHES ...........................................................................6
Rear .........................................................................................................6
Front .........................................................................................................7
1.4.3 DOWN SWITCH ...................................................................................7
1.4.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS .....8
1.4.5 STACK SENSOR ..................................................................................9
1.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE .............................................................10
2. DETAILS ...................................................................................... 11
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .....................................................................11
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................12
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ..................................13
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................15
2.2 PAPER FEED ..............................................................................................16
2.2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM ..............................................................16
2.2.2 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM ...................................................................17
Tray lifting conditions..............................................................................17
Tray lowering conditions (Paper supply position) ...................................17
Tray lowering conditions (Full-down position) ........................................17
SM
D631
2.2.3 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION ..........................................18

Paper Height ..........................................................................................18
Paper End ..............................................................................................18
D631
ii
SM
Read This First

Safety and Symbols

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
: Clamp
Covers

1.1 COVERS
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
1.1.1 REAR COVER
1.
Cover [A] ( x 1)
2.
Rear cover [B] ( x 3)
1.1.2 RIGHT DOOR
1.
Right lower cover [A] ( x 2)
2.
Right door [B] ( x 1)
SM
D631
Covers
1.1.3 FRONT AND TOP COVERS

1.
Right door ( p.1 "Rear Cover")
2.
Switch cover [A] ( x 2)
3.
Front cover [B] ( x 4)
4.
Top cover [C] ( x 2)
D631
SM
Paper Feed
1.2 PAPER FEED

1.2.1 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
2.
Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2)
3.
Rollers [B], [C], [D] ( x 1 each)
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
1.
[B]: Paper feed roller

[C]: Pick-up roller
[D]: Separation roller
SM
D631
Drive
1.3 DRIVE
1.3.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH
1.
Rear cover ( p.1 "Rear Cover")
2.
Bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, bushing x 1)
3.
Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1)

1.
1.
Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2)
D631
SM
Drive

2.
Tray lift motor unit [A] ( x 4, x 1)
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
1.
SM
D631

1.4.1 MAIN BOARD
1.
2.
Main board ( x 2, all 's)
1.4.2 LCT SET SWITCHES

Rear
1.
2.
Switch bracket [A] ( x 3)
3.
Rear LCT set switch [B]
D631
SM
Front
Front cover ( p.2 "Front and Top Covers")
2.
Front LCT set switch [A] ( x 1)
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
1.
1.4.3 DOWN SWITCH

1.
2.
Switch base [A] ( x 2, x 1)
3.
Down button [B] (spring x 1)
4.
Down switch [C] (hook)
SM
D631
1.4.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT AND RELAY

SENSORS
1.
2.
Top Cover ( Front and Top Covers)
3.
Rear ground plate [A] ( x 1)
4.
Front ground plate [B] ( x 1)
5.
Paper feed unit [C] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
6.
Paper feed unit cover [D] ( x 5, x 1)
Before you re-install the paper feed unit cover, make sure that the pick-up solenoid
holds the pick-up roller lever ([a]: correct, [b]: incorrect) and the pick-up roller works
properly.
D631
SM
7.
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
Sensors [E], [F], [G], [H] ( x 1, hooks each)

[E]: Tray lift sensor
[F]: Relay sensor
[G]: Paper feed sensor
[H]: Paper end sensor
1.4.5 STACK SENSOR

1.
Open the right door
2.
Paper feed unit ( p.8 "Paper Feed, Paper End, Tray Lift and Relay Sensors")
3.
Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2)
4.
Stack sensor [B] ( x 1)
SM
D631
Side Fence Position Change
1.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE

1.
Open the right door of the LCT.
2.
Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position.
3.
Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).
4.
Install the side fences in the correct position (A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF).
5.
Pull the end fence [C] for B5 size paper as shown ( x 1) if the the side fences are adjusted
for B5 size paper.
6.
Close the right door.
7.
Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode.
8.
Input the correct paper size for the1200-sheet LCT with SP5181-017.
D631
10
SM
Component Layout
2. DETAILS
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Rear LCT Set Switch

2. Pick-up Roller Solenoid
3. Tray Lift Sensor
4. Paper Feed Roller
5. Paper Feed Sensor
6. Paper End Sensor
7. Pick-up Roller
8. Tray Lift Motor
9. Paper Height Sensor 1
10. Interlock Switches
SM
12. Sub Paper Height Sensor

13. Tray Down Switch
15. Paper Tray
16. Lower Limit Sensor
17. Stack Sensor
19. Front LCT Set Switch
20. Relay Sensor 5
21. Relay Roller
11
D631
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Front LCT Set Switch

2. Rear LCT Set Switch
3. Paper Feed Clutch
4. Paper Feed Motor
5. Tray Lift Motor
6. Interlock Switches
7. Main Board
8. Tray Down Switch
9. Relay Sensor
10. Tray Lift Sensor
D631
11. Pick-up Roller Solenoid

12. Paper Feed Sensor
13. Paper End Sensor
16. Sub Paper Height Sensor
18. Lower Limit Sensor
19. Stack Sensor
12
SM
Component Layout
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Symbol
Name
Function
Index No.
Motors
M1
Paper Feed
Drives all rollers.
M2
Tray Lift
Drives the paper tray up or down.
S1
Paper Feed
S2
Relay
Detects whether the paper is jammed at

the LCT.
Detects the copy paper coming to the
relay roller and checks for misfeeds.
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
Sensors
12
Informs the mainframe when the paper in

S3
Paper End
the tray has been used up and indicates
13
paper end.
Detects when the paper is at the correct
S4
Tray Lift
S5
Paper Height 1
14
S6
Paper Height 2
15
paper feed height.
10
Detects the amount of paper remaining in

S7
SM
Sub Paper
the tray.
16
Height
S8
Paper Height 3
S9
Lower Limit
17
Detects when the tray is completely
lowered, to stop the tray lift motor.
13
18
D631
Component Layout
Symbol
Name
Function
Index No.
Detects a) when the tray has moved

down to the paper supply position after
paper end, to stop the tray lift motor or b)
S10
Stack
when the top of the paper stack has
19
moved down to the paper supply position,

to stop the tray lift motor after the down
switch has been pressed.
Switches
Detects whether the right door is open
SW1
Right Door
SW2
Front LCT Set
Detects whether the LCT is correctly set.
SW3
Rear LCT Set
Detects whether the LCT is correctly set.
SW4
Down
and starts to drive the tray lift motor.
Lowers the tray to the paper supply

position if pressed.
Magnetic Clutches
MC1
Paper Feed
Drives the paper feed unit.
Pick-up
Pushes the pick-up roller up or down.
11
Solenoids
SOL1
PCBs
PCB1
D631
Main
Controls the LCT and communicates with

the copier/printer.
14
SM
Component Layout
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Tray Lift Motor

2. Paper Feed Motor
3. Pick-up Roller
4. Paper Feed Clutch
SM
5. Relay Roller
7. Tray Drive Belt
15
D631
Paper Feed
2.2 PAPER FEED

2.2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM
This machine uses the FRR paper feed system (paper feed roller [E], separation roller [H], pick-up
roller [G]).
When the right door is closed, the tray lift motor raises the tray to the position where the top of the
paper stack in the tray interrupts the tray lift sensor [D]. The paper feed motor switches on, then
the pick-up solenoid [C] switches off and the pick-up roller drops onto the top of the stack of paper.
The paper feed clutch transfers drive to the paper feed roller [E], pick-up roller [G] and separation
roller [H].
The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack.
The separation roller [H], in contact with the feed roller, only allows one sheet out of the tray.
As soon as the paper feed sensor [F] detects the leading edge of the paper, it switches off the
pick-up solenoid which raises the pick-up roller. The feed roller feeds the sheet to the registration
roller in the main machine through the relay roller [B].
This process is repeated for each sheet.
The paper feed sensor [F] detects "JAM7" and the relay sensor [A] detects "JAM58".
D631
16
SM
Paper Feed
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
2.2.2 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM
The lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the tray through the timing belts [B].
Tray lifting conditions

When the tray lift sensor [C] turns off in the following conditions, the tray lift motor raises the tray
bottom plate until the tray lift sensor [C] turns on again.
Just after the main switch is turned on
During copying
Just after the tray cover is closed
Just after leaving the energy saving mode
Tray lowering conditions (Paper supply position)

In the following conditions, the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the stack sensor [D] turns on
(this is the correct tray position for supplying paper).
Just after the paper end sensor turns on
Just after the down switch is pressed by the user
Tray lowering conditions (Full-down position)

In the following condition, the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the lower limit sensor [E] turns on
(this is the correct tray position for adding 500 sheets of paper after installing the first stack of
paper in the LCT tray).
Just after the down switch [F] is pressed for 3 seconds or more when the tray is at the paper
supply position.
SM
17
D631
Paper Feed
2.2.3 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION

Paper Height
The amount of the paper in the tray is detected by combination of high (1)/low (0) outputs from
three sensors (paper height sensor 1 [A], 2 [B], 3 [D] and sub paper height sensor [C]).
Amount of paper
100%
PH S-1
PH S-2
PH S-3
Sub PH S
Indicator on the
operation panel
30%
Two lines
10%
One line
End
No line
70%
Four lines
Three lines
0: No interruption (low), 1: Interruption (high), -: No checking

PH S: Paper Height Sensor
Paper End
The paper end sensor [E] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the
stack.
When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [F] is exposed, and the paper end sensor receives no
reflected light from below because there is no paper. As a result, this signals paper end.
D631
18
SM
RT3020 1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
Paper Feed
SM
19
D631
D632
1 BIN TRAY BN3100
P ag e
Dat e

None
1 BIN TRAY BN3100 (D632)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1.1 PAPER SENSOR..................................................................................1
1.1.2 1-BIN CONTROL BOARD ....................................................................3
SM
D632
Read This First

Safety and Symbols

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring

1 Bin Tray
BN3100
(D632)
1.1.1 PAPER SENSOR
1.
Open the right door of the machine [A].
2.
Remove the front right cover [A] (
3.
Harness cover [A] (
SM
x 1).
x 1)
D632
4.
Disconnect the connector of the 1-bin tray [A] (
5.
1-bin tray [A] (
6.
1-bin sorter unit [A] (
D632
x 1).
x 2)
x 1)
SM
1 Bin Tray
BN3100
(D632)
7.
Paper sensor cover [A] (
8.
Paper sensor [A] (
x 2)
x 1, hook)
1.1.2 1-BIN CONTROL BOARD

1.
1-bin tray (
2.
1-bin sorter unit (
3.
1-bin control board [A] (
SM
p.1 "Paper Sensor")

p.1 "Paper Sensor")
x 1,
x 3)
D632
D388/D633
INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY
SH3040/SH3060
P ag e
Dat e

None
INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040/SH3060

(D388/D633)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 TRAY COVER................................................................................................1
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD....................................2
SM
D388/D633
Read This First

Safety and Symbols

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: Clamp
: E-ring
Tray Cover

1.1 TRAY COVER
1.
Remove the tray cover [A] by pressing on the two pawls [B] on the left side of the cover.
When Attaching the Tray Cover
The right side of the tray cover should be attached first.
1.
Fit the pawls [C] on the shift tray.
2.
Align the square [D] so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray cover and does
not interfere with the attachment of the cover.
Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls [B] into place.
Internal Shift
Tray SH3040/
SH3060
(D388/D633)
3.
SM
D388/D633
Tray Motor and Half Turn Sensor Board
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD
1.
Top cover ( p.1 "Tray Cover")
2.
Slip disc [A]
3.
Tray motor [B] ( x 1)
4.
Half turn sensor board [C] ( x 1).
D388/D633
SM
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020 (B803)/

SR3110 (D637)/SR4020 (D373)
FINISHER SR3030 (B805)/
SR3120 (D636)/SR4010 (D374)
P ag e
Dat e

None
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020 (B803)/

SR3110 (D637)/SR4020 (D373)
FINISHER SR3030 (B805)/
SR3120 (D636)/SR4010 (D374)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 COVERS ........................................................................................................1
1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ...........................................................................1
1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE ................................................................2
1.2 MAIN UNIT.....................................................................................................3
1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH ..................................3
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER .......................................................................4
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR .............................................................5
1.2.4 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 ...............................................5
1.2.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR ...........................6
1.2.6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR .............................................................7
1.2.7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR ........................................................7
1.2.8 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR ......................................................8
1.3 STAPLER UNIT .............................................................................................9
1.3.1 CORNER STAPLER .............................................................................9
1.3.2 POSITIONING ROLLER .....................................................................10
1.4 FOLD UNIT ..................................................................................................11
1.4.1 FOLD UNIT .........................................................................................11
1.4.2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR ....................................................13
1.4.3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR ................................................................14
1.4.4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR ..............................................................15
1.4.5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) 16
1.4.6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) ............19
1.5 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT .........................................................................21
1.5.1 BOOKLET STAPLER..........................................................................21
1.5.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR ...........................................................22
To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor ..................................................23
SM
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 24

2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ...........................................................................24
Paper direction .......................................................................................24
Proof tray................................................................................................25
Upper tray ..............................................................................................25
Pre-stack tray .........................................................................................25
Lower tray ..............................................................................................25
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...........................................................26
Upper Area B804/B805 ..........................................................................26
Lower Area B804/B805 ..........................................................................27
Punch Unit B702 ....................................................................................28
Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805 ..................................................................29
B804 Fold unit ........................................................................................30
2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ..................................31
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................41
2.2 JUNCTION GATES ......................................................................................42
2.2.1 PROOF MODE ...................................................................................42
2.2.2 SHIFT MODE ......................................................................................42
2.2.3 STAPLE MODE ..................................................................................43
2.3 PRE-STACKING ..........................................................................................44
2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM ...............................................................46
2.4.1 UPPER TRAY .....................................................................................46
2.4.2 LOWER TRAY (B804 ONLY) ..............................................................48
2.5 CORNER STAPLING ...................................................................................51
2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING ...............................................................51
2.5.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT ......................................................................52
2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING..........................................................................53
2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY) ...........................................................54
2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM ...............................................54
2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING ...............................................55
Overview ................................................................................................55
2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS......................61
2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT ..............................................................................64
2.7.1 FEED OUT..........................................................................................64
2.7.2 FEED OUT STACKING ......................................................................65
2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805) ........................................................66
2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION ............................................................66
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
ii
SM
Skew Correction before Punching ..........................................................66

Punch Unit Position Correction ..............................................................67
2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS ......................................................................69
Paper Position Detection ........................................................................69
Punch Unit Movement ............................................................................70
Punch Selection and Firing ....................................................................71
2.8.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM ........................................................72
2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION ......................................................................73
SM
iii
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Read This First

Safety and Symbols

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
Covers

1.1 COVERS
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS
1.
Open the front door [D].
2.
Small upper cover [A] ( x1)
3.
Upper cover [B] ( x2)
4.
Front door bracket [C] ( x1)
5.
Front door [D]
6.
Front left side cover [E] ( x2)
7.
Cover [F]
8.
Paper exit cover [G] ( x2)
9.
Rear cover [H] ( x2)
SM
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Covers
1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE

1.
Remove the rear cover. ( "Exterior Covers")
1.
Support the tray [A] with your right hand.
2.
Pull gear [B] toward you to release.
3.
Slowly lower the tray until it stops.
4.
Front side cover [C] ( x1)
5.
Rear side cover [D] ( x1)
6.
Upper tray [E] ( x1)
7.
Tray bracket [F] ( x4, x1 shoulder screw )
8.
End Fence [G]( x3)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
SM
Main Unit
1.2 MAIN UNIT
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH
1.
Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")
2.
End fence ( "Upper Tray, End Fence")
3.
Upper tray exit mechanism [A] ( x4, x3)
4.
Upper tray limit sensor [B] ( x1, x1)
5.
Upper tray limit switch [C] ( x2)
SM
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER
1.
2.
Pull out the stapling unit [B].
3.
Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
SM
Main Unit
1.
Small upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")
2.
Proof tray exit sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3.
Proof tray exit sensor [B] ( x1)
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1.2.4 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2
1.
Small upper cover, upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")
2.
Upper tray paper height sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3.
Upper tray paper height sensor [B] staple mode (S08) ( x1)
4.
Upper tray paper height sensor [C] non-staple mode (S09) ( x1)
SM
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1.
Rear cover, Upper covers, Front door, Cover, Paper exit cover ( "Exterior Cover")
2.
Inner cover [A] ( x2)
3.
Exit guide plate [B] ( x1, Link and spring, x1, x1)
4.
Upper tray exit sensor [C] (S6) ( x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
SM
Main Unit
1.2.6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR
Exit guide plate. ( "Exit Guide Plate, Upper Tray Exit Sensor")
2.
Guide plate [A] (hook x 2)
3.
Sensor bracket [B] ( x1)
4.
Proof tray full sensor [C] (S11) ( x1)
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.
1.2.7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR
1.
Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.
2.
Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3.
Finisher entrance sensor [B] (S1) ( x1)
SM
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.8 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1.
Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.
2.
Sensor bracket [A]
3.
Pre-stack tray exit sensor [B] (S2)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
SM
Stapler Unit
1.3 STAPLER UNIT
1.
2.
Pull out the stapler unit.
3.
Inner cover [A] ( x3)
4.
Stapler unit holder [B] ( x1)
5.
Corner stapler [C] (M20) ( x1)
SM
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.3.1 CORNER STAPLER
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Stapler Unit
1.3.2 POSITIONING ROLLER
1.
2.
Pull out the stapling unit [B].
3.
Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
10
SM
Fold Unit
1.4 FOLD UNIT
1.
Remove the back cover ( "Exterior Covers").
2.
The stapler unit is heavy.
3.
Ground cable [A] ( x1)
4.
Harness [B] ( x6, x6)
5.
Stapler unit [C] ( x4)
SM
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.4.1 FOLD UNIT
11
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
6.
Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling.
The fold unit is heavy.
Folding unit [D] ( x4, x2, x6)
If you have replaced the folding unit:
1.
Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [A] attached to the back of the new folding unit.
2.
Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [B] of the finisher.
3.
If these settings are different, change these settings to match the settings printed on the decal
attached to the folding unit.
Set DIP switches 1 to 4 (the switch set on the right). Do not touch the other DIP
switches.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
12
SM
Fold Unit
1.
Pull out the stapler unit ( "Positioning Roller").
2.
Fold unit entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x2)
3.
Fold unit entrance sensor [B] (S26) ( x1, x1)
SM
13
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.4.2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
1.4.3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Fold unit vertical guide plate [A]
4.
Fold unit inner cover [B] ( x2, Spring pin x1)
5.
Fold unit upper cover [C] ( x1)
6.
Paper clamp mechanism [D] ( x4)
7.
Fold unit exit sensor bracket [E] ( x1)
8.
Fold unit exit sensor [F] (S31) ( x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
14
SM
Fold Unit
If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time,
do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor. ( "Folding Horizontal Skew
Adjustment" or "Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment")
1.
Remove the stapler unit ( "Fold Unit")
2.
Guide plate [A].
3.
Stay [B] ( x4)
4.
Left plate [C] ( x4)
5.
Sensor bracket [D] ( x1)
6.
Stack present sensor [E] (S32) ( x1)
SM
15
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.4.4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR
Fold Unit
1.4.5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804

ONLY)
The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the
factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1.
Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode.
2.
Europe, Asia: Use SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Use SP6-134-005 (this
is for DLT paper).
If the original setting of SP6-134-001 or -005 is not "0", then you must do the vertical
skew adjustment ( "Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment") after you finish this horizontal
skew procedure.
3.
Use the 10-key pad to input "-2" (mm) for the SP value. (Press to enter the minus sign.)
4.
Press [#] then exit the SP mode.
5.
Open the front door and pull the stapler unit [A] out of the finisher.
6.
Open the guide plate [B].
7.
Loosen the adjustment screw [C] and then tighten until it stops. (Do not over tighten.)
8.
Remove the lock screw [D].
9.
Raise the tip [E] of the adjustment screw very slightly and allow it to descend under its own
weight.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
16
SM
Fold Unit
10. Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door.
Switch the copier on.
Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
12. Remove the sheet from the lower tray.

13. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the same way that it
came out of the finisher).
14. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is + [F] or - [G].
15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [H] out.
16. Open the guide plate [I].
17. Turn the adjustment screw [J] to correct the amount of skew you measured from the test
sheet.
SM
For + skew [F], turn the adjustment screw (clockwise).
17
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
11. Do a folding test.
Fold Unit
For skew [G], turn the adjustment screw to the left (counter-clockwise).
Every click in the +/ direction adjusts the fold position by 0.1 mm by moving the bottom
fence [K].
18. Raise the tip of the adjustment screw [J] and allow it to lower under its own weight.
19. Attach and tighten the lock screw [L].
20. Push the stapler unit into the machine, close the front door, then turn the copier on.
21. Europe, Asia: Do SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Do SP6-134-005 (this is
for DLT paper).
22. Reset it to "0".
23. Do the test again.
24. If the result is satisfactory, this completes the adjustment. -or- If some skew remains, repeat
this adjustment.
After doing this adjustment, adjust for vertical skew, if necessary. ( "Fold Vertical
Skew Adjustment")
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
18
SM
Fold Unit
1.4.6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY)
The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the
factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1.
2.
Do a folding test.
3.
Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down, and face-up (the same way that it
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
came out of the finisher).
4.
Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is positive [A] or negative [B].
5.
Measure the amount of skew.
6.
Enter the SP mode
7.
Europe, Asia: Use SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Use SP6-134-005 (this is for DLT paper).
Enter one-half the measured amount of skew. Example: If the measure amount of skew is
-1.2 mm, enter -0.6 mm
SM
19
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
The range for measurement is 3.0 mm to +3.0 mm in 0.2 mm steps for every notch
adjustment.
8.
Exit the SP mode and do the test again (steps 2 to 5).
9.
Repeat this procedure until the skew is corrected.

The illustration below shows the effects of +/- adjustment with SP6113. (The vertical arrows
show the direction of paper feed.)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
20
SM
Booklet Stapler Unit
1.5 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT
1.
2.
3.
Harness cover [A] ( x2)
4.
Booklet stapler support stay [B] ( x4, x2, x4)
5.
Stapler [C] ( x4)
SM
21
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.5.1 BOOKLET STAPLER
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
1.5.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR

1.
2.
Remove the stapler unit. ( "Fold Unit")
3.
Stay [A] ( x4).
4.
Left plate [B] ( x4)
5.
Harness cover [C] ( x2)
6.
Booklet stapler support stay [D] ( x4, x2, x4)
7.
Booklet stapler [E] ( x4)
8.
Booklet stapler motor [F] ( x2, x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
22
SM
To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor

Reattach the booklet stapler motor.
2.
Do not tighten the screws.
Attach the special tool [A] and reattach the booklet stapler stay.
This tool is included with the stapler spare part.
3.
Turn the gear [B] with your finger until it stops.
4.
Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor.
5.
Remove the stay again and remove the special tool.
6.
Reattach the booklet stapler stay.
7.
Push the stapler unit into the machine.
SM
23
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
1.
Component Layout
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1. Proof Tray Junction Gate
7. Lower Tray (Booklet)*1
2. Punch Unit
8. Folder Rollers*1
3. Stapler Junction Gate
9. Folder Plate*1
4. Pre-Stack Junction Gate
10. Booklet Stapler*1
5. Pre-Stack Tray
11. Upper Tray (Shift)
6. Corner Stapler (M20)
12. Proof Tray
*1: B804 Only
Paper direction
The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the paper once it enters
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
24
SM
Component Layout
the finisher:
Proof Junction Gate
Stapler Junction Gate
Paper Feeds
Closed
Closed
Paper feeds straight through
Open
Closed
Paper feeds to the proof tray
Closed
Open
Paper feds to the staple tray
Proof tray
Copies are sent to the proof tray (12) when neither sorting nor stapling are selected for the job.
The upper tray (11) receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives copies that have
been corner stapled. Corner stapling is provided on both the B804 and the B805.
Pre-stack tray
The pre-stack tray has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of stapling. (
"Pre-Stacking) Pre-stacking is done for corner stapling in the B804/B805 and for booklet stapling
in the B804.
Lower tray
The lower tray (7) receives copies that have been center folded and stapled (booklet stapling).
Booklet stapling is not provided on the B805.
SM
25
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
Upper tray
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Upper Area B804/B805
1. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)

2. Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
(SOL2)
3. Upper Transport Motor (M2)
4. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S7)
5. Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10)
6. Proof Tray Full Sensor (S11)
7. Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
8. Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S9)
(Non-Staple Mode)
9. Upper Tray Limit Sensor (S12)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
10. Upper Tray Limit Switch (SW2)

11. Stacking Roller HP Sensor (S13)
12. Stacking Sponge Roller Motor (M10)
13. Upper Tray Exit Sensor (S6)
14. Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S8)
(Staple Mode)
15. Shift Roller HP Sensor (S5)
16. Shift Roller Motor (M18)
17. Exit Guide Plate Motor (M19)
18. Proof Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1)
26
SM
Component Layout
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
Lower Area B804/B805
1. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)

2. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
3. Entrance Motor (M1)
4. Front Door Safety Switch (SW1)
5. Pre-Stack Tray Exit Sensor (S2)
6. Stapling Edge Pressure Plate
Solenoid (SOL4)
7. Positioning Roller Solenoid (SOL3)
8. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)

9. Lower Tray Full Sensor Front (S34)*1
10. Lower Tray Full Sensor Rear (S33)*1
11. Main Board (PCB1)
12. Upper Tray Full Sensor (S20) *2
13. Upper Tray Full Sensor (S19)
14. Booklet Stapler Board (PCB2)*1
15. Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5)
*1
*1: B804 Only, *2: B805 Only
SM
27
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Punch Unit B702
1. Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
6. Paper Position Slide HP Sensor (S22)
2. Punch Drive Motor (M24)
7. Paper Position Sensor (S3)
3. Punch HP Sensor (S24)
8. Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)
4. Punch Unit Board (PCB3)
9. Punch Movement Motor (M9)
5. Paper position sensor slide motor (M7) 10. Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
28
SM
Component Layout
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805
7. Jogger Fence Motor (M15)

1
1. Stack Present Sensor (S32)*
8. Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)

1
2. Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)*
9. Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6)
3. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16)
10. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
4. Feed Out Belt Motor (M5)
11. Corner Stapler EH530 (M20)

1
5. Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear (M23)*
12. Corner Stapler Rotation Motor (M13)
6. Booklet Stapler EH185R Front
13. Corner Stapler HP Sensor (S17)
(M22)*
14. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (S18)

15. Stack Junction Gate Motor (M17) *1
*1: B804 Only
SM
29
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
B804 Fold unit
1. Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25)
6. Fold Cam HP Sensor (S30)
2. Fold Roller Motor (M12)
7. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
3. Fold Plate Motor (M11)
8. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
4. Fold Plate HP Sensor (S29)
9. Clamp Roller Retraction Motor (M8)
5. Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor (M16)
10. Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
30
SM
Component Layout
2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B804/B805 finishers.
In the table below a number that appears in bold text (M8, etc.) denotes a component that
is on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B804 only.
No.
Component
Function
PCB1 Main Board
The main board that controls the finisher
PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board
A separate board that controls booklet finishing.
PCB3 Punch Unit Board
The board that controls the punch unit.
Motors
M1
Finisher Entrance
Drives 1) the finisher entrance rollers, 2) and the punch
Motor
waste transport belt of the punch unit.

Drives the paper feed rollers that feed paper 1) to the
M2
Upper Transport Motor proof tray, 2) straight-through to the upper tray, 3) the
pre-stack tray entrance roller.
Drives paper feed rollers forward and reverse in the
M3
Lower Transport Motor pre-stack tray for the switchback, and drives the other
rollers in the lower transport area.
M4
M5
Upper/Proof Tray Exit

Motor
Feed Out Belt Motor
Drives 1) proof tray exit rollers, 2) extension and

retraction of the stacking sponge roller, 3) upper tray
exit rollers.
Drives the feed out belt that moves the stapled stacks
out of the stapling tray after stapling.
Moves the corner stapler horizontally on a steel rod to
M6
Corner Stapler
position the stapler at the stapling position at 1) the
Movement Motor
front, 2) the rear (straight stapling), 3) the rear (diagonal

stapling), or 4) the front and rear for double stapling.
SM
31
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
Boards (PCB)
Component Layout
No.
M7
Component
Paper Position Sensor

Slide Motor
Function
Drives the movement of the paper position slide that
holds the paper position sensor (S3) that detects the
position of the paper.
Drives a large cam that alternately clamps and
unclamps the clamp retraction roller, the idle roller of the
clamp roller pair. When these rollers are clamped, they
are part of the paper feed path and feed the stack
M8
Clamp Roller
toward the bottom fence of the fold unit. When the idle
Retraction Motor
roller is retracted, the stacks falls a very short distance

(3 mm) onto the fold unit bottom fence below. These
rollers remain unclamped while the bottom fence
positions the stack for folding and while the stack is
folded by the fold rollers.
M9
M10
M11
Punch Movement
Drives the front/back movement of the punch unit to
Motor
position it correctly for stapling the paper below.
Stacking Sponge
Roller Motor
Fold Plate Motor
Rotates the stacking roller that drags each sheet back

against the end fence to jog the bottom of each sheet
after feed out to the upper tray.
Drives the fold plate that pushes the center of the stack
into the nip of the fold rollers to start the fold.
Rotates forward and drives the fold rollers that fold the
M12
Fold Roller Motor
stack and feed it out of the fold unit, reverses to feed the
fold once more into the fold unit, and then rotates
forward again to feed the fold out of the fold unit.
M13
M14
M15
Corner Stapler
Rotation Motor
Positioning Roller
Motor
Jogger Fence Motor
Swivels the corner stapler and positions it so the staple

fires at an oblique angle at the rear corner of the paper
stack.
Drives the positioning roller in the stapling tray.
Drives the jogger fences in the stapling tray to jog both

sides of the stack before stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
32
SM
Component Layout
No.
Component
Function
Raises the bottom fence and stops when the center of
the vertical stack is opposite the edge of the horizontal
M16
Fold Unit Bottom

Fence Lift Motor
fold blade. The distance for raising the blade is

prescribed as one-half the size of the paper selected for
the job. For large paper, (A3, B4) the bottom fence first
lowers the stack 10 mm below the fold position, and
then raises it to the fold position.
Drives the large cam that operates the stack junction
gate at the top of the stapling tray. When this gate is
M17
Stack Junction Gate
open, it directs the ascending stack to the upper tray if it
Motor
has been corner stapled, or if it is closed the gate turns

bottom fence of the folding unit.
Drives the shift roller that operates in shift mode to
M18
Shift Roller Motor
stagger document sets as they feed out to the upper

tray (making them easier to separate).
M19
Exit Guide Plate Motor
Drives the mechanism that raises and lowers the exit

guide plate.
This is the roving corner stapler, mounted on a steel rail
M20
Corner Stapler EH530
that staples 1) at the front, 2) at the rear (straight

staple), 3) at the rear (diagonal staple), and 4) font and
rear (two staples).
M21
M22
M23
M24
SM
Upper Tray Lift Motor
Raises and lowers the upper tray during feed out to

keep the tray at the optimum height until it is full.
Booklet Stapler
Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center
EH185R: Front
before they are folded.
Booklet Stapler
Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center
EH185R: Rear
before they are folded.
Punch Drive Motor
Fires the punches that punch the holes in the paper.
33
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
the booklet stapled stack down so it falls onto the
Component Layout
No.
Component
Function
Sensors
Provides two functions: (1) Detects paper entering the
S1
Finisher Entrance
finisher from the copier, and (2) Signals a jam if it
Sensor
detects paper at the entrance when the copier is

switched on.
Detects 1) paper fed from the pre-stack tray to the
stapling tray, and detects 2) paper in the pre-stack when
S2
Pre-stack Tray Exit
the copier is switched on. (This sensor performs no
Sensor
timing function. The entire flow of paper through the

pre-stacking mechanism is controlled by motor pulse
counts.)
The photosensor that detects the edge of the paper and
S3
Paper Position Sensor
sends this information to the punch unit board where it

is used to position the punch for punching the holes in
the paper.
1) A photosensor that detects and signals that the punch
S4
Punch Hopper Full

Sensor
hopper is filled with punch waste and needs emptying,

and 2) confirms the presence of the punch hopper and
signals an error if it is missing or not installed
completely.
Located near the shift roller motor, controls the
S5
Shift Roller HP Sensor front-to-back movement of the shift roller as shifts paper
during straight-through feed.
A flat, photo sensor located inside the guide plate,
detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper
as it feeds out to the upper tray during straight-through
S6
Upper Tray Exit

Sensor
jobs (with and without stapling). When paper is fed to

the upper tray, at the paper output slot this sensor
signals an error when it detects (1) paper has failed to
leave the paper exit (lag error), (2) detects paper has
failed to arrive at the paper exit (late error), (3) detects
paper is in the exit slot when the machine is turned on.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
34
SM
Component Layout
No.
Component
Function
Controls the vertical movement of the control exit
S7
Exit Guide Plate HP
guide . The guide plate is in the home position when the
Sensor
guide plate is down and the actuator interrupts the

sensor gap.
Upper Tray Paper

S8
Height Sensor (Staple

Mode)
This is the upper sensor of the upper/lower paper height

sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. This
sensor detects the paper height of the stack in the upper
tray when the copier is operating in the staple mode.
S9
Upper Tray Paper
sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. When
Height Sensor
the machine is switched on, the upper tray rises until the
(Non-Staple Mode)
actuator on the tray triggers this sensor to switch off the

upper tray lift motor.
This sensor detects and times the feeding of paper to
S10
Proof Tray Exit Sensor the proof tray. It also detects whether paper is present at
the proof tray exit when the copier is switched on.
The top of the stack in the proof tray increases until it
S11
Proof Tray Full Sensor
nudges the feeler of this sensor. The sensor then

signals that the proof tray is full and the job halts until
some paper is removed from the proof tray.
This sensor controls the position of the upper tray 1)
during straight-through feed out, 2) during shift feed out,
3) when the machine is turned on. The machine obeys
the signal of whichever sensor is actuated first.
An actuator attached to an arm triggers this sensor. The
S12
Upper Tray Limit
tip of the same arm depresses the upper tray limit
Sensor
switch If the sensor fails, the tip of the arm will activate
the upper tray limit microswitch (SW2) and stop the lift
of the upper tray.
Note: When the machine is turned on, the upper tray
position is controlled by either this sensor or the upper
tray paper height sensor (S9).
SM
35
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
This is the lower sensor of the upper/lower paper height
Component Layout
No.
Component
Function
Controls the forward and back motion of the stacking
S13
Stacking Roller HP
Sensor
roller (a sponge roller) located at the output slot of the

upper tray. The sponge roller drags each ejected sheet
back against the end fence of the upper tray to keep the
bottom of the stack aligned.
A photo sensor that detects whether paper is in the
S14
Stapling Tray Paper
stapling tray. When this sensor detects paper, the
Sensor
bottom fence motor raises or lowers the bottom fence to

position the selected paper size for booklet stapling.
Detects the home position of the jogger fences. When
S15
Jogger Fence HP
the actuator on the jogger fence interrupts this sensor,
Sensor
the jogger fence is in its home position and the jogger

fence motor (M15) stops.
Controls the position of the stack feed-out pawl on the
stack feed-out belt. Once the actuator on the feed belt
S16
Stack Feed-Out Belt
nudges the feeler of this sensor near the top of the
HP Sensor
stapling unit, the feed out belt motor (M5) remains on for
the time prescribed to position the pawl at the home
position to catch the next stack.
Located at the front the stapling tray and mounted
S17
Corner Stapler HP
Sensor
above the steel rod where the corner stapler travels, this
sensor detects the home position of the corner stapler.
The corner stapler is in its home position when the
actuator on the corner stapler unit interrupts this sensor.
S18
Stapler Rotation HP
Controls the angle of the position of the corner stapler
Sensor
during oblique stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
36
SM
Component Layout
No.
Component
Function
B804: When the actuator on the side of the upper fence
enters the gap of this sensor, the sensor signals that the
S19
Upper Tray Full

Sensor (B804/B805)
upper tray is at its lowest position (full) and stops the

job.
B805: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the
higher tray full sensor for A3 and other heavy paper.
The other upper tray full sensor (20) is for lighter paper.
B804: This sensor is not used on the booklet finisher.
Sensor (B805 only)
There is only one upper tray full sensor (S18).

B805: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the
lower tray full sensor for A4 and smaller paper. The
other upper tray full sensor (19) is for larger paper.
Switches off the punch movement motor when the
S21
Punch Unit HP Sensor
punch unit returns to its home position. Pulse counts

determine where the punch unit pauses for punching
and reversing.
S22
Paper Position Side

HP Sensor
Controls the movement of the paper position detection

unit. Switches on when the horizontal detection unit is at
the home position (HP is the reference point).
Detects the home position of the punch unit and
S23
Punch HP Sensor
controls the vertical movement of the punches when

they fire.
When the punch mode is selected for the job (2-hole,
3-hole, etc.), the machine controls the operation of the
S24
Punch Encoder
punch drive (M24) motor which drives a small encoder
Sensor
shaped like a notched wheel. This wheel is rotated

forward and reverse precisely to select which punches
are moved up and down during the punch stroke.
SM
37
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
S20
Upper Tray Full
Component Layout
No.
S25
Component
Function
Clamp Roller HP
Controls the movement of the clamp retraction roller
Sensor
(the idle roller of the clamp roller pair).

Detects 1) the leading edge of the stack during booklet
S26
Fold Unit Entrance
stapling, and 2) also used to signal an alarm if a paper is
Sensor
detected at the entrance of the fold unit when the copier

is turned on.
S27
Stack Junction Gate

HP Sensor
Controls the opening and closing of the stack junction

gate. Switches on when the stack junction gate is open
and at the home position.
Controls the movement of the bottom fence in the
S28
Fold Bottom Fence HP folding unit using pulse counts based on the size of the
Sensor
paper selected for the job to position the stack correctly

for feeding.
Along with the fold plate cam HP sensor (S30) this
S29
Fold Plate HP Sensor
sensor controls the movement of the fold plate . The fold

plate has arrived at the home position when the edge of
the plate enters the gap of this sensor.
Along with the fold plate HP sensor (S29), this sensor
controls the movement of the fold plate. The actuator
S30
Fold Plate Cam HP

Sensor
mounted on the end of the roller that drives the folder

plate forward and back makes three full rotations, i.e.
the actuator passes the sensor gap twice and stops on
the 3rd rotation and reverses. This accounts for the left
and right movement of fold plate.
1) Detects the folded edge of the stack as it feeds out
from the nip of the fold rollers, stops the rollers, and
S31
Fold Unit Exit Sensor
reverses them so the fold feeds back into the nip, 2)

when the folded booklet finally emerges from the nip of
the fold rollers, detects the leading and trailing edge of
the booklet to make sure that it feeds out correctly.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
38
SM
Component Layout
No.
Component
Function
This sensor determines whether a there is paper at the
turn junction gate when the machine is turned on. If a
S32
Stack Present Sensor
stack is present, this triggers a jam alert. (This sensor

performs no dynamic function such as pulse counting,
etc. It only detects whether paper is at the top of the
folding unit when power its turned on.)
This rear sensor is the lower sensor of the lower tray full
sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the actuator
Sensor - Rear
arm that touches the top of stapled and folded booklets

as they feed out. The on/off combinations of the two
sensors are used to detect when the tray is full and stop
the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job
halts until booklets are removed from the lower tray.)
This front sensor is the higher sensor of the lower tray
full sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the
actuator arm that touches the top of stapled and folded
S34
Lower Tray Full
booklets as they feed out. The on/off combinations of
Sensor - Front
the two sensors are used to detect when the tray is full
and stop the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray
full, the job halts until booklets are removed from the
lower tray.)
Solenoids
Opens and closes the proof tray junction gate. When
SOL1
Proof Junction Gate
the solenoid switches on, it opens the gate and paper is
Solenoid
diverted to the proof tray. When this gate is closed, the

paper goes straight to the upper tray. I
SOL2
SM
Stapling Tray Junction

Gate Solenoid
Directs paper to the stapling tray. When this solenoid is

on, paper feeds straight through. When this solenoid is
off, paper feeds to the stapler tray below.
39
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
S33
Lower Tray Full
Component Layout
No.
Component
Function
Engages the stapler transport motor and the positioning
SOL3
Positioning Roller
Solenoid
roller of the stapling tray. The positioning roller pushes

each sheet down against the bottom fence to align the
bottom the stack for stapling. (The jogger fences align
the sides.)
Stapling Edge
SOL4 Pressure Plate
Solenoid
SOL5
Booklet Pressure
Roller Solenoid
Operates the pressure plate of the stapling unit. The

pressure plate presses down the edge of stack in the
stapling tray so it is tight for stapling.
When the paper stack in the stapling tray feeds to the
folding unit, this solenoid turns on and operates the
roller that pushes on the surface of the stack to flatten it.
Switches
SW1
Front Door Safety
The safety switch that cuts the dc power when the front
Switch
door is opened.
A micro-switch that cuts the power to the upper tray lift
SW2
Upper Tray Limit SW
motor when the upper tray reaches its upper limit. This
switch duplicates the function of the upper tray limit
sensor (S12) and stops the upper tray if S12 fails.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
40
SM
Component Layout
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Upper Transport Motor (M2)

2. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)
3. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
4. Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5)
5. Fold Roller Motor*1 (M12)
6. Folder Plate Motor*1 (M11)

7. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
8. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
9. Entrance Motor (M1)
*1: B804 Only
SM
41
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Junction Gates
2.2 JUNCTION GATES

The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the direction of paper feed
after paper enters the finisher.
2.2.1 PROOF MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] opens. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed.
The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above.
2.2.2 SHIFT MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed.
With both junction gates closed, the paper goes to the upper tray.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
42
SM
Junction Gates
2.2.3 STAPLE MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] opens
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below for jogging and stapling.
SM
43
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Pre-Stacking
2.3 PRE-STACKING
This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle of sets that
contain three pages.
[A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2] feeds to the
pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
[B]: The pre-stack junction gate opens and the 1st sheet of Set 2 [4] switches back to the top
of the pre-stack tray as the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [5] starts to descend.
[C]: As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend, the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed from the
pre-stack tray. At this time the leading edges [6] of both sheets are even.
[D]: The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass the junction gate [7] as the 3rd
sheet of Set 2 [8] enters the finisher.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
44
SM
Pre-Stacking
[E]: The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 [9] switch back together into the top of the pre-stack and
[F]: The stapling of Set 1 in the staple tray [10] is completed.
[G]: Set 1 [11] exits the staple tray.
[H]: The three sheets of Set 2 [12] feed together into the stapler tray for stapling.
Pre-stacking is only done for A4, B5, and LT paper.

In one-staple mode, one sheet goes to the pre-stacking tray. Then two sheets go to the stapler
tray at the same time.
In two-staple mode and booklet mode, three sheets go to the pre-stacking tray. Then four sheets
go to the stapler tray at the same time.
SM
45
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
wait for the 3rd of Set 2 sheet to arrive.
Tray Movement Mechanism
2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM

2.4.1 UPPER TRAY
[A]: Upper Tray Lift Motor

[B]: Upper Feeler
[E]: Lower Feeler
[C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1
[F]: Upper Tray Limit Sensor
(Staple Mode)
[G]: Upper Tray Limit Switch
[D]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2
[H]: Upper Tray Full Sensors
(Non-Staple Mode)
The B804 (shown above) has only one upper tray full sensor (the higher sensor at [H]).
The B805 has two upper tray full sensors (the upper and lower sensor at [H]). On the
B805 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper (A3, DLT, B4, LG, 12 x 18), and
the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper (A4, LT, etc.).
The tray full capacity is 2,000 sheets (B804) for A4, LT and 3,000 sheets (B805) for A4,
LT.
Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A].
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
46
SM
Upper Tray Raising and Lowering

Sensors, Switch
Action
Operation Mode
[C]
[D]
[F]
[G]
Stops the lift motor is at the standby
position when the actuator of the upper
Standby
(Non-Staple
feeler deactivates sensor [C] (when it is

OFF
OFF
between sensors [C] and [D]).
Mode)
Note: Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used

as backup if sensor [C] fails or if the
upper tray is not attached.
Straight Through
ON
Non-staple mode operation: During

operation, tray lift is controlled only by
Shift
ON
sensor [F], the tray lowers until the

actuator reactivates sensor [F].
Standby: The upper tray stops and waits
for the paper output when the actuator
activates sensor [C]. [D] is not used for
staple mode
Staple Mode Operation:
Standby
(Staple Mode)
The upper tray lowers the prescribed

distance immediately after the stack
ON
exits.
The upper tray rises until the

actuator activates sensor [C] and
stops the tray lift motor (and the tray)
to wait for the next set.
Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used

as backup if sensor [C] fails.
SM
47
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
sensor [F]. When the actuator leaves
Tray Full
When the actuator on the tray activates the upper tray full sensor [H] the tray lift
B804 motor [A] switches off. Operation resumes after some copies are removed from
the tray. Upper Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4, LT)
The operation of the upper tray full sensor is the same as the B804. Capacity:
B805
1,500 sheets for A3, B4 or other large paper.

An additional upper tray full sensor (below sensor [H]) allows more sheets to
stack on the upper tray. Capacity: 3,000 sheets (A4, LT)
2.4.2 LOWER TRAY (B804 ONLY)
The lower tray sensor actuator arm [A] rests on the top of the stack of stapled booklets as they are
output to the lower tray. A flap depressor [B] keeps the open ends of the booklets down.
The front lower tray full sensor (S34) [C] and rear lower tray full sensor (S33) [D] detect when the
lower tray is full of booklets.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
48
SM
The front lower tray full sensor is mounted higher than the rear lower tray full sensor.
The lower tray is stationary. When it becomes full, the stapling and folding job stops until
booklets are removed from the tray.
If the lower tray is not installed (this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain OFF),
the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode. When booklet mode is
selected, the tray full message appears on the operation panel.
The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors as the actuator arm rises determines the
number of booklets that the lower tray can hold before the job stops.
The tray full detection depends on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in one stapled
and folded booklet.
In the table below, the conditions ( Ready Full 1, Full 2 Full 3: See the illustration on the
Condition
Front Sensor
Rear Sensor
Ready
ON
OFF
Full 1
ON
ON
Full 2
OFF
ON
Full 3 (or lower tray not installed)
OFF
OFF
In the tables below:
"Sht" denotes "sheets in a stack".
"Cnt" denotes "Count" (see below for an explanation).
After a booklet is feed out, the fold roller motor stops the exit roller. The machine then monitors the
tray full sensors every 100 ms. The machine checks for a certain condition, based on the size of
the paper and the number of sheets in the booklet.
An example is shown below. Tell the operators that the number of sheets that the lower tray can
hold will vary greatly.
SM
49
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
previous page) refer to the states of the sensors described on the previous page.
Lower Tray Full Condition Table

A3 (DLT)
1 Sht
Full 1 3 Cnt
2 Sht
3 Sht
4 Sht
5 Sht
6 Sht
7 Sth
8 Sht
9 Sht
4 Cnt
2 Cnt
2 Cnt
2 Cnt
15
Full 2
5 Cnt
Full 3
7 Cnt
1 Sht
2 Sht
3 Sht
4 Sht
5 Sht
6 Sht
7 Sth
8 Sht
9 Sht
8 Cnt
8 Cnt
Cnt
13
Cnt
A4 (LT)
Full1
16
Cnt
Full 2
Full 3
10
10
15
20
15
10
Cnt
Cnt
Cnt
Cnt
Cnt
Cnt
Examples:
After the copier makes a booklet with 1 sheet of A3/DLT paper, the machine checks every 100 ms
for the Full 1 condition. If the Full 1 condition occurs 3 times (shaded block in the table above),
the machine detects that the tray is full.
After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4/LT paper, the machine checks every 100 ms
for the Full 2 condition. If the Full 2 condition occurs 20 times (shaded block in the table above),
the machine detects that the tray is full.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
50
SM
Corner Stapling
2.5 CORNER STAPLING
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING
[A]: Jogger Fence Motor (M15)

[B]: Jogger Fences
[C]: Positioning Roller
[D]: Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
[E]: Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4)
[F]: Pressure Plate
At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and moves the jogger
fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size).
When each sheet passes the pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) and enters the stapling tray:
The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5.5 mm of the
sides of the selected paper size.
The positioning roller solenoid (SOL3) switches on for the time prescribed for the paper size.
This pushes the positioning roller [C] onto the sheet and pushes it down onto bottom fence.
This aligns the edge of the stack.
Next, the jogger fence motor:
Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2.6 mm of the sides of the stack to
align the sides of the stack.
Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position (7.5 mm away for the sides) and
waits for the next sheet.
SM
51
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Corner Stapling
The jogger fence HP sensor [D] switches off the jogger motor at the end of the job.
After the last sheet feeds:
The stapling edge pressure plate solenoid [E] (SOL4) switches on and pushes the pressure
plate [F] onto the stack to press down the edge for stapling.
The corner stapler staples the stack.
2.5.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT
[A]: Stapler Movement Motor

[B]: Stapler
[C]: Stapler Rotation Motor
The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple modes:
Front 1 staple
Rear 1 staple
Rear diagonal staple
Rear/Front 2 staples
The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and right on its
stainless steel rail.
The stapler rotation motor [C] rotates the stapler into position for diagonal stapling at the rear.
The stapler movement motor switches on and moves the stapler the standby stapling position.
(This is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the job.)
The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to fire (or swivel
and for diagonal stapling).
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
52
SM
Corner Stapling
If the stack is to be stapled at two positions:
The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples the front.
The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the stapler staples the rear.
If the stack is stapled at the rear with a diagonal staple, the staple moves to the rear. When it is
time for stapling, the rotation motor rotates the stapler to the correct angle and holds the stapler in
that position while the stapler fires.
The stapling positions can be fine adjusted with SP6-133-001.
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING
Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler hammer [B] fires
the stapler [C].
The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position.
The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition.
SM
53
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY)

2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM
[A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5)

[B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm
[C]: Booklet Pressure Roller
As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences, the stack feed
out belt moves.
In booklet mode, immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and jogger
fences, the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet pressure roller presses down
on the stack until booklet stapling is finished. This prevents the stack from shifting during stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
54
SM
2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
Overview
1. Leading Edge Pressure Roller
13. Corner Stapler (M20)
2. Stack Present Sensor (S32)
14. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
3. Feed Out Belt Pawl 1
15. Feed Out Belt
4. Booklet Staplers x2 (M22, M23)
16. Fold Unit Bottom Fence
5. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16)
17. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
6. Feed Out Belt Pawl 2
18. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
7. Positioning Roller
19. Fold Unit Exit Rollers x2
8. Booklet Pressure Roller (Rear)
20. Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)
9. Jogger Fences x2
21. Fold Rollers x2
10. Pre-Stack Exit Roller
22. Clamp Rollers x2
11. Pressure Plate
23. Stack Junction Gate
12. Stapling Tray Bottom Fence
24. Stack Transport Roller
SM
55
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
1:
The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the last sheet into
position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then retract and stop 1 mm away
from the sides of the stack.
2:
The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet. The stack feed out
belt switches on and the pawl [5] on the feed out belt catches the bottom of the stack and raises it.
The stapling tray sensor [6] detects the trailing edge of the paper stack.
3:
The feed out belt [7] raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops. The jogger
fences move to the sides of the stack and the booklet staplers [8] staple the stack.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
56
SM
4:
The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt [1] raises the
stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge pressure roller [2] and stops. The
leading edge pressure roller descends and applies pressure to the top of the stack. The stack
junction gate [3] (normally open) closes. The pressure roller [4] and pressure plate [5] retract.
5:
The feed out belt [6], transport rollers [7], [8], and clamp rollers [9] rotate and feed the stack past
the closed stack junction, over the top and down toward the bottom fence [10]. At the same time,
the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home position and stops 10 mm below the fold
position.
6:
The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of the bottom
fence [13]. The fold unit entrance sensor [11] detects the stack and opens the clamp rollers [12].
The stack drops 3 mm onto the fold unit bottom fence [13]. At this time, the first sheet [14] of the
next stack feeds to the stapling tray.
SM
57
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
7:
The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2].
8:
The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20
kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4].
9:
With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers begin to rotate
and fold the stack as it feeds out.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
58
SM
10:
When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts until it no longer
touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded edge of the stack and stops the
fold rollers.
11:
The rotation of the fold rollers [4] reverses and feeds the folded edge back until only 3 mm of the
fold [5] remains at the nip.
12:
The fold rollers [6] rotate forward once again feed out. The fold unit exit sensor [7] once again
detects the edge of the fold.
You can do SP6-136-001 to increase the sharpness of the fold. The number of forward
and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30. The machine repeats Steps 11 and
12. For more, please refer to Section "Service Tables".
SM
59
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
13:
With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP sensor (not shown)
detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position.
14:
The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out the folded
booklet to the lower tray.
15:
Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor [4], the clamp rollers [5] close
to be ready to feed the next stack. The fold unit bottom fence [6] descends. The bottom fence HP
sensor [7] stops the bottom fence when it detects the actuator on the bottom fence.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
60
SM
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS
Booklet Stapler
[A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position.
[B]: Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear
[C]: Booklet Stapler EH185R Front
Stack Junction Gate
[D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam.
[E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam. Opens and closes the stack junction gate.
[F]: Stack Junction Gate. The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate cam close the
stack junction gate. The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled stack and sends it over the top and
down to the fold unit.
[G]: Leading Edge Pressure Roller. Presses down on the leading edge of the stack after booklet
stapling.
SM
61
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Clamp Roller
[A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller as well as the fold rollers (see
next page).
[B]: Clamp Rollers.
Clamp Roller Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller feeds the stack down
with the retracting roller closed.
Clamp Roller Retracting. Opened and closed by the retraction motor [C].
[C]: Clamp Roller Retraction Motor. Operates the clamp roller cam that retracts the retracting
clamp roller. The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the bottom fence when closed and
then open to drop the stack onto the bottom fence.
[D]: Clamp Roller HP Sensor. Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction motor and cam
that open and close the retracting clamp roller.
[E]: Clamp Roller Cam. Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller.
Bottom Fence
[F]: Bottom Fence. Raises the booklet stapled stack to the fold position.
[G]: Bottom Fence HP Sensor. Detects the actuator on the bottom fence and stops it at the home
position after folding.
[H]: Bottom Fence Lift Motor. Raises the bottom fence and stapled stack to the fold position
prescribed for the paper size.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
62
SM
Fold Plate
[A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers.
[C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the nip of the fold
rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position).
[D]: Fold Plate HP Sensor. Controls operation of the fold plate motor.
[E]: Fold Plate. Moves left and pushes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and then moves
right to retract.
Fold Rollers
[F]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then reverses to feed
the fold in to sharpen the crease, and then drives forward again to feed out the folded stack. This
reverse/forward cycle is done once.
This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6114.
[G]: Fold Rollers. Driven by the fold roller motor, this roller pair feeds out the stack at its fold,
reverses to feed in the stack to, and then feeds forward again (assisted by the fold unit exit rollers
not shown) to feed out the stack to the lower tray.
SM
63
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
[B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate.
Upper Tray Output
2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT

2.7.1 FEED OUT
[A]: Feed Out Belt Motor

[B]: Stack Feed-Out Belt
[C]: Pawl
[D]: Exit Rollers
[E]: Exit Guide Plate Motor
[F]: Exit Guide Plate
[G]: Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
[H]: Upper Tray
After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the feed out belt [B].
The pawl [C] attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack toward the feed
out slot.
The exit guide plate [F] remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed distance away from
the exit roller.
Next, the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out.
The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by the rising and falling of a link
driven by a rotating cam attached to the shaft of the exit guide plate motor [E].
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
64
SM
Upper Tray Output
The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too high.
Next, the feed out belt motor switches on again, then the pawl actuates its home position sensor
and switches off the motor.
There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the feed out
operation.
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
2.7.2 FEED OUT STACKING
Upper/proof exit motor [A] drives feed roller [B] and stacking sponge roller [C].
Stacking sponge roller motor [D] moves the sponge roller forward and back with link [E].
The position of the stacking sponge roller [C] is controlled by the stacking sponge roller motor
which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor [F].
SM
65
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805)

2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION
Skew Correction before Punching
This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch holes at the
correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time.
Paper feeds out of the copier. The finisher entrance sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the
sheet.
The finisher entrance roller [B] stops rotating briefly while the copier exit rollers continue to rotate.
This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew. The finisher entrance
roller [C] starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher.
These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit:
SP6130. This SP corrects the punch hole alignment. To do this, it corrects the skew of each
sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while the exit
roller of the machine remains on. For more, see Section "Service Tables".
SP6131. This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew when
paper enters the finisher. You can use this SP to disable the skew correction. For more, see
Section "Service Tables".
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
66
SM
Punch Unit Position Correction
These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position correction) increase
:
The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A].
The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to the edge of the
paper.
The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge and sends this information to the
punch unit board. The machine uses the detected position of the paper edge to calculate the
correct position for punching.
The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers [D] the prescribed distance to
position the paper under the punch unit.
:
Using the result of the position calculation, the punch unit control board moves the punch unit [E]
to the adjusted punch position.
The paper position slide unit and its paper sensor, move back to the paper position slide home
position sensor [F], and the punch unit fires the punches to make the holes.
:
The feed rollers [G] feed the punched paper out of the punch unit and into the paper path.
SM
67
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
the accuracy of the punch alignment.
These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment:
SP6-128 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed.
SP6-129 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
For more, see Section "Service Tables".
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
68
SM
2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
Paper Position Detection
[A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)

[B]: Finisher Entrance Roller
[C]: Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
[D]: Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7)
[E]: Paper Position Sensor (S27)
[F]: Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22)
The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that feed paper from
the copier into the finisher. The finisher entrance sensor (S1) [C] detects paper when it enters the
finisher, and detects paper jams.
The paper position slide sensor motor (M7) [D] extends and retracts the paper position slide that
holds the paper position sensor (S27) [E]. The paper position sensor detects the position of the
paper edge. The detected position of the paper is used to calculate and position the punch unit for
punching.
The paper position slide HP sensor (S22) [F] detects the paper position slide when it retracts and
stops the paper position slide motor so the slide stops at its home position.
SM
69
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Punch Unit Movement
[A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9)

[B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
[C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)
The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the
correct position for punching.
The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts, switches off the
punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its home position.
The punch drive motor (M24) [C] fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
70
SM
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
Punch Selection and Firing
[A]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)

[B]: Punch Encoder Wheel
[C]: Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
[D]: Punch HP Sensor (S23)
The punch drive motor (M24) [A] turns the small, notched encoder wheel [B] through the gap in
the punch encoder sensor [C] (S24). The sensor output is used to control the punch timing.
The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is different from 3-hole punching [F].
When the punch unit is at the punching position, the punch motor turns until the encoder detects
the starting position for 2-hole or 3-hole punching.
SM
71
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
This is the 1 position in the diagrams (the top diagram is for 2-hole punching, and the bottom
diagram is for 3-hole punching).
Then, the punch drive motor turns counter-clockwise to the 2 position. This movement punches
the holes in the paper.
Then, the punch drive motor turns clockwise to the 1 position, to be ready for the next sheet of
paper.
2.8.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM
[A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)

[B]: Punch Waste Belt
[C]: Punch Waste Hopper
[D]: Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)
The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste
belt [B].
The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt. The belt moves the punchouts to the front
and dumps them in the punch waste hopper [C].
The punch hopper full sensor [D]:
Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have
collected in the hopper.
It also detects when the punch hopper is set properly.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
72
SM
Finisher Jam Detection
Booklet Finisher
& Finishers
(B803/B805/
D373/D374/
D636/D637)
2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION
Display
Mode
Proof
R1 to R3
Jam
Finisher
After main machine exit sensor goes OFF,
entrance
finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even
sensor late
after enough time to feed 450 mm.
Finisher
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, it does
entrance
not go OFF after enough time to feed a sheet
sensor lag
1.5 times its length has elapsed.
Shift
Staple
Proof exit
sensor late
R3
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, proof

exit sensor does not go ON even after enough
time to feed 450 mm.
Proof
Proof exit
sensor lag
SM
What It Means
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, proof

exit sensor does not go OFF even after enough
time to feed 450 mm.
73
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Finisher Jam Detection
Display
Mode
Jam
Upper tray exit

sensor late
R4
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, upper

tray exit sensor does not go ON even after
enough time to feed 485 mm.
Shift
Upper tray exit
sensor lag
Pre-stack tray
exit sensor lag
R5 to R7
What It Means
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, upper

tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after
enough time to feed 650 mm.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON,
pre-stack tray exit sensor does not go ON even
after enough time to feed 650 mm.
Staple
Pre-stack tray
exit sensor late
Fold unit
entrance
sensor late
Booklet
R8 to
Staple
R12
(B700
Only)
(S26)
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON,

pre-stack tray exit sensor does not go OFF
even after enough time to feed 1650 mm.
The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON
after enough time has elapsed to feed 1.5 times
the length of the stack after the leading edge of
the stack reaches the stack present sensor
(S32).
Fold unit exit
The fold unit exit sensor does not go ON after
sensor late
enough time has elapsed for the stack to feed
(S31)
1.5 times its length from the fold position.
Fold unit exit
After the fold unit exit sensor goes ON, it does
sensor lag
not go OFF after enough time has elapsed to
(S31)
feed 442.9 mm.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
74
SM
D641
PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT TYPE 5002
P ag e
Dat e

None
PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT TYPE 5002

(D641)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 1
1.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................................1
1.1.1 PRINTER/SCANNER OPTIONS ..........................................................1
1.1.2 OTHER OPTIONS ................................................................................2
1.1.3 BOARD, SD CARD SLOTS ..................................................................3
Board Slot ................................................................................................5
SD Card Slot ............................................................................................6
USB Slots .................................................................................................6
1.2 PRINTER AND P/S OPTIONS (BASIC MODELS).........................................7
1.2.1 OVERVIEW ..........................................................................................7
Three Main Units ......................................................................................7
Separate Options .....................................................................................8
Enhance Options ......................................................................................8
1.2.2 KIT CONTENTS....................................................................................8
Common Accessory Table .......................................................................8
1.2.3 PRINTER/SCANNER INSTALLATION .................................................9
1.2.4 SCANNER ENHANCE OPTION .........................................................12
Accessory Check ...................................................................................12
Installation (Application Merge) ..............................................................12
To undo an option update ......................................................................13
Important Notes about SD Cards ...........................................................13
1.2.5 APPLICATION MERGE ......................................................................14
If more than one application is required ..............................................14
1.3 INSTALLING CONTROLLER OPTIONS .....................................................15
1.3.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................15
Board Slot ..............................................................................................15
SD Card Slots ........................................................................................15
USB Slots ...............................................................................................15
1.3.2 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT (D641) .............................................................16
1.3.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (D377) .................................................17
1.3.4 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD (B679) ............................................18
SM
D641
1.3.5 IEEE 802.11A/G OR G (D377) ...........................................................19

User Tool Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g ..................................................20
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN..................................22
1.3.6 BLUETOOTH UNIT (D566).................................................................23
1.3.7 GIGABIT ETHERNET (G874) .............................................................24
1.3.8 IPDS UNIT (D641) ..............................................................................25
Accessories ............................................................................................25
Installation ..............................................................................................26
1.3.9 VM CARD TYPE U (D640) .................................................................28
Accessories ............................................................................................28
Installation ..............................................................................................29
1.4 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS......................................................................30
2. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 31

2.1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLES ......................................................................31
2.1.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) ..............................................................31
2.2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................41
2.2.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS) ..................................................41
2.2.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY) .........................................43
3. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ 44
3.1 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................44
3.2 USB SPECIFICATIONS ...............................................................................46
3.3 IEEE 802.11A/B/G SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................46
3.4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................47
3.5 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................47
3.6 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ......................................................................48
3.6.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ...........................................................................48
3.6.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS .................................................48
3.6.3 UTILITY SOFTWARE .........................................................................49
D641
ii
SM
Read This First

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There
may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main switch, and disconnect the power cord.
The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this
type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
Note for Australia:
Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line cord which meets
the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.
Safety and Symbols

Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
: Clamp

Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
Overview
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 OVERVIEW
This section describes the installation procedures for printer, scanner, and other options for
D129/D130 series machines.
1.1.1 PRINTER/SCANNER OPTIONS
Item
Merge Options
D641
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 5002
D641
Printer Unit Type 5002
Scanner Enhance Option
D641
Scanner Enhance Option Type 5002
SM
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
No.
D641
Overview
1.1.2 OTHER OPTIONS
No.
Item
D377
File Format Converter Type E
G874
Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A
D377
Slots
IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J
Board Slot. Only one of these
-or-
boards can be installed at one time.
IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type K

B679
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
D566
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D
USB slot
D641
PostScript3 Unit Type 5002
SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
D641
IPDS Unit Type 5002
D640
Browser Unit Type I
D640
VM Card Type U
SD Card Slot 2
D629
SD card for NetWare printing Type K
D594
Memory Unit Type L 512MB
Controller Board
SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot) (Install,

then remove)
If more than one SD card application is required, the applications must be moved to one
SD card with SP5873-1. For more details about merging applications from SD card Slot 2
(Lower Slot) to Slot 1 (Upper Slot), see "Scanner Enhance Option" in this chapter.
D641
SM
Overview
1.1.3 BOARD, SD CARD SLOTS

The machine controller box has one board slot and two SD card slots.
Only one interface board option can be installed.
Only two SD cards are available for applications and maintenance.
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
Board Slots
No.
1
Name
USB-A
Description
Both USB slots are used for the Bluetooth option and a
card authentication device.
USB-B
Built-in for connection of USB devices (USB 2.0)
SD Card Slot 1
For options provided on SD cards. The application SD
(Upper Slot)
card (with the exception of the VM card) can be installed

in Slot 1 (Upper Slot). If two or more applications are to be
used, move the applications to the same SD card with
SP5873.
SM
SD Card Slot 2
For options provided on SD cards and servicing. The VM
(Lower Slot)
card must be installed in Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
D641
Overview
No.
5
Name
Ethernet
Description
Standard LAN connection point. 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
LAN
Orange LED: Lights when the network is connected

and operating.
Green LED: Lights when 10BASE-TX or

100BASE-TX is operating.
ISDN
Jack for ISDN connection (Japan Only)
Line 3
Jack for a 3rd line connection to the Fax Interface Unit

(D596) (G3) when this option is installed.
Line 1
Jack for the main telephone line from the outside for
connection to Fax Option (D596).
TEL1
Jack for telephone connection
10
Line 2
Jack for a 2nd line connection to the Fax Interface Unit

(D596) (G3) when this option is installed.
11
Board Slot
Optional interface boards are installed here.
Only two SD Card slots are available for applications.
To install more applications, they must be moved onto one SD Card.
D641
SM
Overview
Board Slot
The following optional interface boards are available. There is only one board slot so only one can
be installed.
No.
Interface Board
D377
File Format Converter Type E
G874
Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A

IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J
D377
-orIEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type K
SM
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A

Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
B679
Only one of these boards can be installed at one time.
D641
Overview
SD Card Slot
The following options are provided on SD cards.
Two SD card slots are available.
The VM application SD card must be installed in Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
Other applications should be installed in Slot 1 (Upper Slot). If more than one application is
required, applications can be moved onto one SD card with SP5873-1.
No.
SD Card Applications
D641
D641
IPDS Unit Type 5002
D640
Browser Unit Type I
D629
D641
D641
D641
USB Slots
The following option is provided on a USB Device.
No.
D566
D641
USB Device
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D
SM
Printer and P/S Options (Basic Models)
1.2 PRINTER AND P/S OPTIONS (BASIC MODELS)

1.2.1 OVERVIEW
This section describes the installation of the following items:
Printer Unit
Printer/Scanner Unit
512 Memory. Optional memory is required for each unit.

(Included in the Printer Unit or P/S Unit for NA models)
Scanner Enhance Option
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
Three Main Units
Printer Unit Type 5002:

For customers who do not require the extended scanning features but need more printing
capability (PCL printer languages are provided). The 512 MB memory is required.
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 5002:

For customers who require the full range of DS features (advanced scanning and printing
features such as "scan-to" solutions, virtual mailboxes, PCL, etc.). The 512 MB memory unit
is required.
SM
D641
Separate Options
There are two separate options: 512 MB memory and PS3.
512 MB memory:
Every unit (Printer Unit, P/S unit) requires installation of the 512 MB memory.
PostScript 3 Unit:
The PS3 option can be used with the Printer Unit, or the Printer/Scanner Unit.
Enhance Options
Scanner Enhance Option Type 5002 updates the Printer Unit by adding the advanced scanning
features.
1.2.2 KIT CONTENTS

Check the accessories and their quantities against the list below and the illustration on the next
page. This is a common list for all the kits.
Common Accessory Table

This common accessory table lists all the items of the following units.
PU: Printer Unit
P/S: Printer/Scanner Unit
SEO: Scanner Enhance Unit
Kit Contents
No.
Description
Q'ty
PU
P/S
SEO
512 MB Memory*1
No
No
No
HDD Unit
Yes
Yes
No
Screw
Yes
Yes
No
SD Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
*1: The 512 Memory is a separate option and it is not provided in the kits. However, one memory
unit is required for the installation of every print unit. (Included in the Printer Unit or P/S Unit for NA
models)
D641
SM
1.2.3 PRINTER/SCANNER INSTALLATION
Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord.
x 2).
Remove the controller board [A] (
2.
Connect the two harnesses to the HDD unit [A] (
3.
Install the connecting board unit [A] on the HDD unit [B] (
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
1.
SM
x 2).
x 2).
D641
4.
Connect the two harnesses from the HDD unit to the connecting board [A] (
5.
Install the HDD unit [A] on the controller board unit (
6.
Install the 512 MB memory [A].
D641
10
x 2).
x3).
SM
Reinstall the controller board.
8.
Remove the controller cover [A].
9.
Insert the Printer/Scanner SD card in SD card Slot 1 (Upper Slot) [A].
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
7.
10. Reattach the cover.
11. Attach the supplied ferrite core [A] at the machine end of the Ethernet cable.
SM
11
D641
12. Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port [A].
13. Connect the other end of the Ethernet interface cable to a network connection device such as
a hub.
14. Connect the machines power cord and turn the main power switch on.
15. Enable the NIB and/or USB function.
To enable the NIB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-001 (On Board NIC) to
"1" (Enable).
To enable the USB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-002 (On Board USB) to
1" (Enable).
1.2.4 SCANNER ENHANCE OPTION

Accessory Check
Refer to the "Common Accessory Table" in this chapter.
Installation (Application Merge)

The installation of the scanner enhance option are done with SP5873-001 (Application Move).
If you are going to update the RPCS unit with both the printer and scanner enhance
options, the order of execution is not important.
1.
Turn off the copier.
2.
Remove the cover (
3.
Confirm that the Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot 1 (Upper Slot).
4.
Put the option SD Card (Scanner Enhance Option) in SD card Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
5.
6.
Turn the copier on.
7.
Go into the SP mode and select SP5873-001.
8.
Touch "Execute".
9.
Read the instructions on the display and touch "Execute" to start.
x1).
10. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit", then turn the copier off.
D641
12
SM
11. Remove the option SD card from Slot 2 (Lower Slot).

12. Turn the copier on.
13. Go into the User Tools mode and confirm that update was successful.
14. User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version> Next
15. Turn the copier off again, then reattach the cover.
16. Return the copied SD card to the customer for safekeeping, or tape it to the faceplate of the
controller.
To undo an option update

Turn the main switch off.
2.
Confirm that the Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot 1 (Upper Slot).
3.
Put the original option SD card (Scanner Enhance Option) in SD card Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
4.
Turn the main switch on.
5.
Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).
6.
Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
7.
Turn the main switch off.
8.
Remove the option SD card from Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
9.
Turn the main switch on.
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
1.
10. Go into the User Tools mode and confirm that undo was successful.
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version> Next
11. Turn the copier off again, then reattach the cover.
Important Notes about SD Cards

Here are some basic rules about merging applications on SD cards.
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the target
SD card.
The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application program.
The service technician may occasionally need to check the SD card and its data to solve
problems. SD cards must be stored in a safe location at the work site.
Once the merge is completed, the SD card from which the application was copied cannot be
used again, but the customer must keep the card to serve as proof of purchase.
An SD card from which an application has been moved to another SD card can be restored to
full operation with SP5873-002 (Undo).
Before storing the card from which an application has been copied, label it carefully so that
you can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure later.
SM
13
D641
1.2.5 APPLICATION MERGE

This machine has two SD card slots only. However, more than two optional applications are
supplied for this machine. Always keep SD card Slot 2 (Lower Slot) vacant for servicing (except
for the VM Card). Because of this, SD card merge is required if a customer wants to use many
applications.
Consider the following limitations when you try to merge SD cards.
The destination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards.
Refer to the following table for the memory size of each SD card.
SD Card Options
SD Card Size
512 MB
512 MB
128 MB
512 MB
IPDS Unit Type 5002
128 MB
128 MB
Browser Unit Type I
128 MB
VM Card Type U
512 MB
If more than one application is required

Merge all applications which the customer wants to use into one SD card (Destination card
inserted in Slot 1 (Upper Slot)).
D641
14
SM
Installing Controller Options
1.3 INSTALLING CONTROLLER OPTIONS

1.3.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has a board slot for optional I/F connection and two SD card slots for applications.
After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it. (
p.30 "Check All
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
Connections")
Board Slot
This slot [4] is used for one of the optional board connections (only one can be installed):
IEEE1284, IEEE802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN), Gigabit Ethernet, or File Format Converter.
SD Card Slots
PostScript3 Unit, IPDS Unit, Browser Unit, SD Card for Netware printing should be installed in
Slot 1 (Upper Slot) [1].
VM Card must be installed in Slot 2 (Lower Slot) [2]. However, it can also be merged to the
SD card in Slot 1 (Upper Slot).
USB Slots
SM
Bluetooth Interface Unit is installed in the USB slot [3].
15
D641
1.3.2 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT (D641)
x 2)
1.
2.
Turn the SD-card label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into Slot 1 (Upper
Slot) [A] until you hear a click.
x 2).
3.
Attach the controller cover (
4.
Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door.
5.
Make sure that the machine can recognize the option. (
D641
16
p.30 "Check All Connections")

SM
1.3.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (D377)

x 2).
1.
Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot (
2.
Install the file format converter into the board slot, and then fasten it with screws.
3.
4.
Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below.
SP No.
Title
Setting
SP5-836-001
"1"
SP5-836-002
Panel Setting
"0"
5.
Check the operation.
6.
SM
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
17
D641
1.3.4 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD (B679)
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11a/g, g
(Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).
x 2).
1.
2.
Install the interface board (Knob-screw x 2) into the board slot.
3.
D641
18
SM
1.3.5 IEEE 802.11A/G OR G (D377)
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
(Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).
x 2).
1.
2.
Install the wireless LAN board (Knob-screw x 2) into the board slot.
3.
4.
Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [A], and then attach them [B] at the
front left and rear right of the machine.

5.
Attach the "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) to the front left of the machine.
6.
Attach the "ANT2" (having a white ferrite core) to the rear right of the machine.
SM
19
D641
"ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do

not attach them at the wrong places.
7.
Attach the clamps as shown above.
8.
Wire the cables and clamp them (
x 8).
Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that
generates strong magnetic fields.
Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
User Tool Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g

Go into the User Tools mode and do the procedure below. These settings take effect every time
the machine is powered on.
You cannot use IEEE 802.11a/g if you use Ethernet.
1.
Press the User Tools key.
2.
On the touch panel, touch System Settings.
Select Interface Settings> Network > LAN Type. The LAN Type (default:
Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3.
Select Interface Settings> Wireless LAN. Only the wireless LAN options show.
4.
Set the Communication Mode.
5.
Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
6.
Set the Ad-hoc Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. The allowed
range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
Region A (mainly Europe and Asia)
Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
D641
20
SM
In some countries, only the following channels are available:
Range: 1-11 channels (default: 11)
Region B (mainly North America)
Range: 1-11, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)

7.
Set the Security Method to specify the encryption of the Wireless LAN.
The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data
transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock
encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
Range of Allowed Settings:

64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
Specify WPA when Communication Mode is set to Infrastructure Mode. Set the
WPA Encryption Method and WPA Authent. Method.
WPA Encryption Method:
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
Select either "TKIP" or "CCMP (AES)".

WPA Authent. Method:
Select either WPA-PSK, WPA, WPA2-PSK", or WPA2.

If you select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK, enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8 - 63
characters in ASCII code.
When WPA or WPA2 are selected, authentication settings and certificate installation
settings are required.
8.
Press Wireless LAN Signal to check the machine's radio wave status using the operation
panel.
9.
Press Restore Factory Defaults to initialize the wireless LAN settings. Press Yes to
initialize the following settings:
SM
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key
21
D641
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11
SP No.
Name
5840 006
Channel MAX
5840 007
Channel MIN
Function
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
Sets the transmission speed.
5840 008
Transmission
Auto, 54 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 18 Mbps,
Speed
12 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,

1 Mbps (default: Auto).
5840 011
UP mode
WEP Key Select
Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Name
Function
SSID
Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key
Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode
WPA Encryption
Method
D641
Used to show the maximum length of the string that can

be used for the WEP Key entry.
Used to confirm the current WPA encryption setting.
WPA Authent.
Used to confirm the current WPA authentication setting
Method
and pre-shared key.
22
SM
1.3.6 BLUETOOTH UNIT (D566)

Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord.
1.
Insert the Bluetooth unit into the USB-A slot [A].
2.
Bluetooth Unit and IEEE 802.11a/g or g Interface Unit cannot be set at the same
time.
SM
23
D641
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
1.3.7 GIGABIT ETHERNET (G874)
(Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394, Bluetooth).
x 2).
1.
2.
Insert the Gigabit Ethernet Board into the I/F slot and fasten it with the screws.
3.
Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board for
USB2.0:
User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page
D641
24
SM
1.3.8 IPDS UNIT (D641)

Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below.
No.
Description
Q'ty
IPDS Emulation SD Card
Decal
Only two slots are available for SD cards that contain applications. If you want to use
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
more than two applications, merge all applications into two SD cards (SP5873-001).
SM
25
D641
Installation
1.
Check the software version.
2.
If necessary, update the firmware to the required version.
3.
4.
5.
Insert the IPDS SD Card into Slot 1 (Upper Slot) [A].
x 2)
Pushing in the SD Card releases it for removal. Make sure the SD Card is inserted
and locked in place. If it is partially out of the slot, push it in gently until it locks in
place.
6.
Reattach the controller cover and turn ON the main switch.
D641
26
SM
7.
Do one of the following ("A" or "B") to enable the IPDS function.

A. [Enable the IPDS function via telnet]
1. Connect the machine via telnet.
2. Execute the following commands:
msh> set ipds up
***If you want to stop the function.
msh> set ipds down
B. [Enable the IPDS option via WebImageMonitor]
1. Log in to WebImageMonitor.
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
2. Change the setting to enable IPDS.
8.
Attach the decal [A] as shown in the photo above.
Line up the left side of the decal with the left edged of the main power switch. ([B]: 10 mm
or more)
SM
27
D641
1.3.9 VM CARD TYPE U (D640)

This option is only for basic models.
Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below.
Description
Q'ty
1. VM SD Card
2. Decal
D641
28
SM
Installation
1.
Switch the machine off.
2.
3.
Insert the SD card into SD Slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A].
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
x 2)
SM
This SD card must be inserted into Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
29
D641
Check All Connections
1.4 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch.
Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Features > List Test Print > Configuration Page
All installed options are shown in the System Reference column.
D641
30
SM
2. SERVICE TABLES
2.1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLES
2.1.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE)
Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
No I/O Timeout
0: Disable
1: Enable
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
1001
never occur.
bit 4
0: Disable
SD Card Save Mode
1: Enable

bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
0: Disable
1: Enable
SM
31
D641
1001
Bit Switch
002 Bit Switch 2
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
Shift
Normal
Collate
Collate
bit 3
0: Enable
1: Disable

D641
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
32
SM
1001
Bit Switch
003 Bit Switch 3
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
0: Disable
1: Enable

HP4000/HP8000.
SM
bit 3
DFU
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
33
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
D641
1001
Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
0: Disable
1: Enable
D641
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
34
SM
1001
Bit Switch
005 Bit Switch 5
Disable
Enable

panel.
bit 0
0: Disable
(Single
mismatch occurs
copy)
1: Enable
(Multiple copy)
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
bit 1

occurs.
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
[PS] PS Criteria
Pattern3
Pattern1

bit 4
Disable
Enable (1000)
(100)
to 1000 jobs.
bit 5
SM
DFU
35
D641
bit 6

0: Disable
1: Enable

jobs.
bit 7
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Duplex)

1001
Bit Switch
1001
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit Switch
007 Bit Switch 7

Print path

bit 0
bit 1
to 7
D641
DFU
36
SM
1001
Bit Switch
1001
Bit Switch
009 Bit Switch 9

1284).
"Disabled
"Enabled
(Immediately)" (10 seconds)"
bit 0
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
Job Cancel
Disabled
(Not
cancelled)
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
Enabled
(Cancelled)
result in problems:
bit 3

(SEF/LEF)
0: Disable
1: Enable

"Driver/Command".
SM
37
D641
bit 4

0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 5
DFU
to 7
1001
Bit Switch
010 Bit Switch 10

bit 0
to 4
bit 5
DFU
0: Disable
1: Enable
on.
Bit 6
0: Disable
1: Enable

Job Function is on.
Bit 7
D641
DFU
38
SM
1001
Bit Switch
011 Bit Switch 11

bit 0
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit 1
0: Job
Interrupt printing
1: Page
Selects the interrupting units for the interrupt printing function.

When you select "0," you can interrupt printing of a job while being
processed.
When you select "1," you can interrupt printing of a page while being
Bit 2
DFU
to 7
1001
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
processed.
Bit Switch
012 Bit Switch 12

bit 0
to 7
1003
DFU
[Clear Setting]
1003 001
SM
39
D641
1004
[Print Summary]
1004 001
1006
*CTL
0: Link with Doc. Svr, 1: Enable
1006 001

1110
[Media Print Device Setting]
1110 002 0: Disable 1: Enable
1111
1111 001
D641
Selects the setting for the media print device.
[All Job Delete Mode]

Select whether to include an image
0: excluding New Job
processing job in jobs subject to full
1: including New Job
cancellation from the SCS job list.
40
SM
Scanner Service Tables
2.2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLES

2.2.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS)
[Erase margin (Remote Scan)]

1005
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.

If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is
activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1009
[Remote scan disable]
*CTL
*CTL
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: enable, 1: disable
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm
1010
[Non Display Clear

Light PDF]
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Display, 1: No display
1011
[Org Count Disp]
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: No display, 1: Display
1011 1 This SP codes switches the original count display on/off.
SM
41
D641
1012
[User Info Release]
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Do not release, 1: Release
This SP code sets the machine to release or not release the following items at
job end.
1012 1
1013
Destination (E-mail/Folder/CS)
Sender name
Mail Text
Subject line
File name
[Scan Media Device

Setting]
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
This SP code enables/disables the multi-media function option (USB 2.0/SD

1013 1
Slot) mounted on the left rear corner of the machine. Operators can scan
documents to either an SD card or a USB memory device inserted into this unit.
This SP must be enabled (set to "1") in order for the device to function.
D641
42
SM
2.2.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY)
[Compression Level (Gray-scale)]

2021
Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the
three settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2021 1 Comp1: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2021 2 Comp2: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
*CTL
[5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
2021 4 Comp4: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2021 5 Comp5: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
2021 3 Comp3: 5-95

2024
2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal)
[5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
*CTL
2024 2 Compression Ratio (High)
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF JPEG2000]

2025
2025 1 Compression Ratio (Normal) JPEG2000
[5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
*CTL
2025 2 Compression Ratio (High) JEPG2000
SM
43
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
D641
Printer Specifications
3. SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
PCL 6/5e
PDF Direct
Printer Languages:
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)

IPDS (optional)
MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF (optional)
PCL 5e:
300 x 300 dpi
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
PCL 6:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
Resolution and
Gradation:
PDF Direct:
300 x 300 dpi/600 x 600 dpi
PS3:
300 x 300 dpi/600 x 600 dpi
XPS:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
IPDS:
300 x 300 dpi/ 600 x 600 dpi
Printing speed:
D129: 40 ppm
D130: 50 ppm
PCL 6/5e (Standard):
45 Compatible fonts
13 International fonts
Resident Fonts:
6 Bitmap fonts
Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional):
136 fonts
IPDS (Optional):
108 fonts
D641
44
SM
Printer Specifications
USB2.0 Type A and Type B: Standard

Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard
Host Interfaces:
Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional

IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional
IEEE802.11a/b/g (Wireless LAN): Optional
Bluetooth (USB type): Optional
TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
Network Protocols:
SM
45
D641
USB Specifications
3.2 USB SPECIFICATIONS

USB connectivity is built into the controller.
Interface
Data
rates
USB 2.0
480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed), 1.5 Mbps (low
speed)
High speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.
3.3 IEEE 802.11A/B/G SPECIFICATIONS
Standard applied
IEEE802.11a/b/g
Network protocols TCP/IP, Apple Talk, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, SMB

Frequency range
(Center
2412 - 2462 MHz (1-11 channels)
Frequency)
5180 - 5320 MHz (36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, and 64 channels)
(Center
2412 - 2472 MHz (1-13 channels)
Frequency)
5180 - 5320 MHz (36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, and 64 channels)
(US model)
Frequency range
(EU model)
D641
46
SM
Bluetooth Specifications
3.4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission
Specifications
Based on Bluetooth Ver2.0+EDR
Transmission
Asynchronous Communication : Approximately 2.1 Mbps (Max)
Speed
Synchronous Communication : Approximately 1.3 Mbps (Max)
Profile
Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP), Serial Port Profile

(SPP), Basic Imaging Profile (BIP)
Standard Scanner
Main scan/Sub scan
Resolution:
200 to 600 dpi
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
3.5 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
Twain Mode:
Available scanning
100 to 1200 dpi
Resolution Range:
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales:
Scanning
Throughput
(ARDF mode):
Interface:
1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB

BW: 61 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text/ Photo / 200dpi /Compression: On
(MH))
FC: 31 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / Compression:
Standard)
Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-TX, Gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T),
Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11a/b/g)
Compression
B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2), Gray Scale
Method:
Full Color: JPEG
SM
47
D641
Software Accessories
3.6 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES

The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows
you to select which components to install.
3.6.1 PRINTER DRIVERS
Windows XP, Server 2003, Server
MacOSX10.2
2008, Vista, 7
or later
Yes
No
PS3
Yes
Yes
RPCS
No
No
Printer Language
PCL5c
/ PCL6
The PCL5c/6 and PS3 drivers are provided on the printer/scanner CD-ROM.
The PS3 drivers are all genuine Adobe PS drivers, except for Windows XP/Server
2003/Server 2008/Vista/7. A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the
driver.
The PPD installer for Macintosh supports Mac OS X 10.2 or later versions.
3.6.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS
Printer
Windows XP, Server 2003,
MacOSX10.2
Language
Server 2008, Vista, 7
or later
Network TWAIN
Yes
No
LAN-FAX
Yes
No
The Network TWAIN and LAN Fax drivers are provided on the printer and scanner drivers
CD-ROM.
This software lets you fax documents directly from your PC. Address Book Editor and
Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)
D641
48
SM
Software Accessories
3.6.3 UTILITY SOFTWARE
Software
Font Manager
(XP/Vista)
Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the
printer
This is provided on the printer scanner CD-ROM
Smart Device Monitor for Admin
A printer management utility for network
(XP/Server 2003/Server
administrators. NIB setup utilities are also available.
2008/Vista/7)
This is provided on the web.

A printer management utility for client users.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

2008/Vista/7)
A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or

TCP/IP network.
A peer-to-peer print utility over a TCP/IP network.
Printer
Scanner Unit
Type 5002
(D641)
DeskTopBinder
This provides the parallel printing and recovery

printing features.
A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or
Printer Utility for Mac
TCP This software provides several convenient
(Mac)
functions for printing from Macintosh clients.

DeskTopBinder Lite itself can be used as personal
DeskTopBinder Lite
document management software and can manage
both image data converted from paper documents
2008/Vista/7)
and application files saved in each clients PC.

SM
49
D641
www.s-manuals.com

Ricoh d129, d130 Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh d129, d130 Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh d129, d130 Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D129/D130

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

2012 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

Ricoh Americas Corporation

2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 2-1

App 2 Me Setting (SP model only) ..................................................... 2-18

2.16 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION ....................................................... 2-64

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................... 3-1

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

Upper Inner Cover ................................................................................ 4-3

4.6 PCDU ....................................................................................................... 4-37

4.10.3 BRAKE PAD ............................................................................... 4-62

4.14.5 FUSING MOTOR ........................................................................ 4-91

4.16.3 SCANNING ............................................................................... 4-114

5. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 5-1

1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 5-193

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 6-1

6.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 6-2

Read This First

Health Safety Conditions

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.

Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

Conventions in this Manual

Short Edge Feed

Long Edge Feed

Cautions, Notes, etc.

FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS

Ad d ed / Upd ated / New

1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Platen Cover (See Note 1)

ARDF (See Note 1)

Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

Internal Shift Tray

1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 2)

-Punch Unit (See Note 3)

-Punch Unit (See Note 3)

-Punch Unit (See Note 3)

Key Counter Bracket

HDD (for basic model only)

Copy Data Security Unit

Fax Communication Unit

Scanner Scanner Upgrade Unit

2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (See

Memory Unit 512 MB

File Format Converter

The ARDF and platen cover cannot be installed together.

The punch unit requires the 2000/3000-sheet (Booklet) finisher.

1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH

Tilt Operation Panel Type

Stationary Operation Panel

Includes USB/SD slot (not all

functions can be used in Basic

Safety Shut Down

Standard (SP model only)

Standard (SP model only)

Standard (SP model only)

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products